Audio

059: How Will Mitchell Makes 6 Figures Selling Online And Teaching Others How To Import From China

Will Mitchell

I became a huge fan of Will Mitchell when I accidentally stumbled on his blog, StartupBros.com. Not only is Will an excellent writer but he always writes from experience which is quite rare when it comes to the Internet.

In this episode, Will teaches us how to find products to sell online and how he has created an incredible business importing goods from Asia and teaching others how to do the same. Enjoy the podcast!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Will got started in ecommerce
  • What Will sells in his ecommerce store
  • Will’s techniques for finding the right product to sell
  • What margins Will likes to see on his products
  • What tools Will uses to find products to sell
  • How to import goods from China
  • How to get around high MOQs
  • How to distinguish good sellers from bad sellers on Alibaba

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit her Job podcast. Today I’ve got someone really special on the show, Will Mitchell. Now let’s see, how did I come across Will? First off, I’ve never really met the guy in person, but I kind of feel like I know from his blog Startupbros.com. Now if you’ve never been Startupbros.com, I highly recommend that you check it out. Every single post is just so detailed and well written that I have been guilty of spending hours reading it when I should have been working on my businesses.

Now unlike me, Will started his entrepreneurship journey at a very young age. He actually started importing and selling online at age 16, then he dropped out of college at age 19 to help start Affluence which is a social network for affluent people, and after this company went public, he started a successful consulting firm and today Will focuses his time on Startupbros.com, and I believe he also leads people on tours to the Canton Fair. So with that, welcome to the show Will. How is it going man?

Will: Pretty good Steve. Good to be here, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah. You’re a hard man to track down.

Will: Yes. Finally here though.

Steve: So how did you get into eCommerce and what happened at age 16 that made you try to import goods from China?

Will: You know, when I was really young, you know, as young as 12 or 13, my parents had me really young and my dad was just a hardcore entrepreneur, did some amazing things. So I kind of got a back seat to watch all of what he did and through that from a really young age I decided that I probably wasn’t going to go to college. So I pretty much decided that school in general– I didn’t really see how it connected to the entrepreneurial journey, and I didn’t see how people that were really dedicated to the education system got further in the entrepreneurial world.

So I kind of decided from a young age that I was going to use entrepreneurship and trial and error as my schooling sort of thing. So the first business I got into was– and this was 13, 14 years old, I started doing counterfeits and things like that.

Steve: What does that mean?

Will: So counterfeits purses and counterfeit wallets.

Steve: Oh okay. Got it, okay.

Will: All the fake Gucci and Chanel stuff you see.

Steve: Right.

Will: So that’s actually how I started off. So it gave me a good footing and everything but obviously it was a little risky, but that’s actually how I got started off. So I started selling those on eBay, Amazon. Back then it was a little bit lucid than it is now, they are not as strict. So made some good money doing that for a good two years until I got a cease and desist from– you know, I started getting them from pretty much everyone: Nike, Burberry and Gucci. So luckily for me I respected the cease and desist, didn’t get sued or anything, but kind of took all the profits that I had from the counterfeits. That’s funny, I actually I still have like a box of a whole bunch of fake Chanel purses and Gucci purses and stuff in my garage.

I kind of took to the– what I learned from that and profits from that and I started trying to go legit with it, so tons and tons of failed products before I really figured out what I was doing. And back then– this is 2002, 2003, early 2000. So it’s still pretty almost like the Wild Wild West of the internet. There were a lot of scams out there; doing business on Alibaba, doing international business in general was really quite risky. So I did make a lot of mistakes, I got scammed quite a few times. I’ve seen pretty much every scam in the book, but eventually success did start to happen. I only had four or five failed products before I really started to figure things out.

And yeah, so from there I kind of transitioned into– I was selling everything from decorative knives and swords to eventually I really focused– like you said, by the time I was 16, 17 I had pretty much figured out that I only wanted to sell airsoft goods. So I really started focusing on that, really built relationship with the manufacturer. He helped me get– setup a distribution center in the US, and yeah, just kind of grew it from there, and it went pretty well for a while. Eventually China actually made airsoft guns illegal, so that’s actually what eventually shut my business down, and it actually happened around the same time I was supposed to go college. So at that point I kind of started to go on a direction but…

Steve: Okay. Do you sell anything today?

Will: Yeah, definitively. We sell a lot of beauty products, a lot of cosmetic products, things like that.

Steve: Are these white label or have you created your own formulations?

Will: So we have two or three brands, product lines that are white label and then four that are private formulation.

Steve: Okay. And just– since you’ve sold– it sounds like a wide variety of stuff, like what is your thought process when you try to decide what to sell online?

Will: Oh that’s a good question. Yeah, I really have sold just a whole world worth of stuff, so pretty broad categories, but yeah, it’s really all about the numbers for me. We have a few– we have this product selection check list that we give to all our clients and it basically in a nut shell it says that if I can pick up the product and toss it around with my hands comfortably, then it’s good to ship and everything. So that’s one of things I look for that’s not super complex to ship, it doesn’t have tons of regulation surrounding it, it’s not going to have crazy labeling requirements, it’s not going to be something like a computer or a car where if one little piece goes bad, the whole piece, you know, I’m down.

I try to go for things that have a high margin there and then in addition to that, really just looking for fast moving products that have great margins. I really focus on finding products that have 67% plus margin. So if I am buying a product for five bucks, I’d really like to be selling it for 15. I think at that kind of margin and that kind of mark-up, that’s where you can really grow a business quickly and have a lot of fun with it, so that’s what we encourage our clients to do.

Steve: So that pretty much excludes drop shipping or domestic wholesale for the most part, right, would you say?

Will: Yeah, we tend to encourage people to go with importing either private labeling. Most of our clients will start off private labeling and then eventually know once they really start to figure out what the customer wants, what makes the customer tick as well as obviously testing their product out and proving their product. At that point we try to transition them from that into creating a really established brand, building their own website and kind of transitioning from getting off the ground private label to real sellable company or real sellable brand.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of– so you mentioned some of the aspects of the products that you like to sell, how do you actually come up with the actual goods and what is your kind of formula so to speak on how to evaluate whether a product is going to sell or not?

Will: Okay. I use a tool that you’ve probably heard of and I’m sure a lot of your listeners have heard of called Terapeak, one of the only tools out there that I absolutely say every entrepreneur really needs to– every importing entrepreneur really needs to have, really every eCommerce entrepreneur. So I have this production selection spreadsheet that essentially just has a list of products, and then what I can buy it at, what I can sell it and just kind of figures out roughly my margin and everything. So I literally– my goal and I do product research is to fill up that spreadsheet with as many products as possible.

So I kind of just let my mind go wild. There is a lot of little tips, like for instance if you find like a good private label or a good importer on EBay, Amazon you can take that seller and put that seller into Terapeak and actually do the research on that seller’s name and figure out the other products that they are selling. So in terms of brainstorming, there is a lot of good ways to get ideas for products like that, spying on the competition, looking at hot sellers, Amazon movers and shakers, and things like that.

But you know from there I just try to get tons of ideas, get them all into this spreadsheet and my whole goal with this spreadsheet really is to just get like I said, 50, 100 products on there, get all the data on there, all the numbers and even though all of the estimates on what my profit margin is going to be, what my profit per unit is going to be, even though all that is just rough estimates, it really gives me a good comparative view of 100 different products and at that point it just becomes a game in numbers.

If you have a100 products in there that you’ve– kind of let your mind go wild and just put 100 different things in there, you are going to have at least one really good product and it’s going to be obvious just from a comparative view of the other products. So I don’t know if I explained that well, but that’s kind of my process for product research if that makes sense.

Steve: So just for the benefit of the listeners, Terapeak is a tool that essentially scraps all the eBay listings and I believe it scraps some of Amazon’s stuff as well, and gives you an idea what is selling well and what is not selling well. So if I could just summarize what you just told me Will, it sounds like you go and you kind of look at some of the hot sellers or– like, walk me through how you use Terapeak because I know how I use it. I’m just curious how you– do you look at the best sellers and then see if you can find the suppliers of the best selling items and then get your own and sell them?

Will: Yeah. That’s definitely one really good way to do it. Yes, so Terapeak like you said, eBay, data scrapper for the most part, but they actually– they have an exclusive deal with eBay and they are actually the only company that has access to eBay sales data and as you know, Amazon doesn’t give anyone their sales data.

Steve: Correct.

Will: So eBay really– Terapeak is really the only place to get this really, really in depth eCommerce data. I actually don’t know anywhere else that it really exists, I don’t know if you do.

Steve: No I don’t actually and for Etsy there used to be a tool, but it’s kind of become defunct over the years to scrape Etsy as well.

Will: Yeah. So that’s really the only reason I really recommend Terapeak. I always hate recommending any type of paid tool, but if you are getting into importing I definitely recommend it. They have seven-day free trial; I definitely recommend jumping on that trial even if it’s just for the seven days, even if it’s just for the week that you are doing product research. It’s going to expedite the process, so it’s just going to make it so much smoother. So…

Steve: So let me ask you this. How did you go from like airsoft guns to like beauty products? It just seems kind of random to me. So do you know anything about that market or was it just a number– purely the numbers?

Will: It was purely the numbers and for anyone that’s looking for a product right now, I’ve just recently seen a lot of beauty products, a lot of things like essential oils and things like that just have crazy margins right now. So for whatever reason, the margins are really good in that niche, so that’s where we’ve been. But yeah, after I got out of air soft, like I said that was right around the time I was going to college. So I actually went to college for about a year, two semesters before I dropped out, and I pretty much learnt nothing here in college but how to drink. So say I went to college for a little bit, after that didn’t do really any business in college which eventually really kind of depressed me. It was kind of amazing to see how college influenced me to become a less productive person.

Steve: Interesting.

Will: Yeah. And one thing I kind of thought too when I was in college is entrepreneurship really is just, you know, there is all these lessons that you have to learn in entrepreneurship and there is no way to learn them. You can’t learn them in school; there is no way of teaching them. You literally have to learn from going out there and making mistakes and getting stung basically. So my philosophy was I just wanted to get out of the system and start that journey and start going down those path of lessons.

So that’s what I did. I dropped back out and started the company Affluence that you were talking about. So that went pretty well. We actually took that public about a year and half after we launched it. So from there we took the money we made with that and then bought a company called organic color systems.

Steve: I see, okay.

Will: And basically again just the margins– when we were looking at– we went through tons and tons of different businesses trying to figure out which business we were going to invest and which business we wanted to spend our time growing next. And just going through it for whatever reason again, cosmetic industry the margins are just ridiculous. So that’s the business we ended up buying, kind of built out the take end of the business, the back end of the business, the automation and sales and everything.

Steve: So this company, were they manufacturing their own products or…?

Will: Yeah, they are actually– they are a distributor– they were a distributor for a manufacturer in the UK. And like I said, now we’ve grown it, now we have seven or eight different product lines and then one side of our warehouse actually just has one of my friends from high school just shipping out all of her random Amazon products and stuff like that.

Steve: So you don’t use FBA or…?

Will: Not really actually, no. We recommend that most of our clients do, but just a situation we are in; we are a distributor for seven or eight different brands. We have exclusive deals with most of the brands so we typically have to buy huge MOQs and stock our warehouse for six months a year at a time. So the FBA just– not only would it not make a ton of sense for our business, but also the business already had a warehouse when we bought it. So…

Steve: Okay. Yeah, but just in terms of sales, right, people are more likely to buy the prime products, right?

Will: Yeah definitely true. But we actually– I would say maybe five percent of our business’s revenue comes through Amazon, so actually that business specifically we actually focus a lot on the professional market, professional hair stylist and things like that. So now there is much on Amazon.

Steve: So you are kind of more like a wholesaler, right, essentially?

Will: Yeah. So we are a distributor for those seven or eight brands like I talked about. I know this is getting a little confusing for your readers.

Steve: There is a lot of stuff. Yeah, maybe we should just focus on one thing.

Will: Yeah.

Steve: Let’s focus a little bit on just the importing process. You’ve done a lot of this, right?

Will: Yeah definitely.

Steve: So let start with some of the main challenges with importing and some of the misconceptions on how difficult it is, and let’s just go from there.

Will: Okay, cool sounds good. So I guess what does your audience really have trouble with just the process aids here.

Steve: Most of them are a little bit scared of importing.

Will: Okay.

Steve: And they have problems finding products to sell which is why I kind of asked you some of those questions. So if you can just kind of walk me through your process from start to end, just at a high level, and I’ll just ask you more specific questions as you are talking.

Will: Yeah definitely. So the first thing we really talk about is– for all of our clients and stuff like, the first thing we talk about is really kind of laying the foundation and really getting a good upper level view of what you are going to trying to do. Like, I said we always recommend people start really small, find a product, find a supplier, which I’ll talk about in a second, but in terms of the top level view of the concept, you are really just trying to find a good product, a good supplier, buy a sample from that supplier, sell that sample, doing that is going to alleviate 90% of the risk of the business. And then from there, you are going to get pretty much immediately, you know, if you buy three samples and they sell, you are going to know right away if you want to buy more units of that product or not.

Steve: So when you say sell, do you sell on eBay, Amazon?

Will: We typically recommend our clients to sell on eBay just because if you make a mistake on eBay, not only is the lower quality buyers on eBay that are less likely to skew you in the reviews and everything, but also if you get a bad review on eBay, they are not going to ban your account for one bad feedback, whereas Amazon if your first feedback on Amazon is bad, I’ve seen them close accounts for that many times.

So we definitely recommend starting on eBay just because you can mistakes there, but yeah. So that’s really the top level view of it. So the first step obviously is that product research deep dive, really figuring out. And like I said, the way I do this is to just pull out a spreadsheet, get a list of products on there and just go through Terapeak and start just putting data in the spreadsheet basically. You want– the things that I really look at are the sell-through ratio, and the sell-through ratio is a number that you can only get through Terapeak, and the sell-through ratio is basically going to show you not if there’s– you know, people are always scared of, oh there is competition, there is other people selling this product, so can I sell it?

Don’t be worried about competition, you know, competition is a good thing because if there is no competition that means that there is no market there and there is no money to compete for. So definitely don’t be scared of competition. We need to be scared of market saturation. Are there still new buyers coming in, and that’s really what matters. So the sell-through ratio is basically going to measure the market saturation if there is too much competition or too little competition.

And so basically we recommend that people go for products that have at least a 30% sell-through rate which basically means that for every 10 listings that go up on EBay, three of them get sold. So we recommend at least going for a 30% sell-through ratio, obviously the higher you can get the better. The most successful clients we have get 50, 60% sell-through ratio on their products. So that’s a really important number, your sell-through ratio, obviously your average sell price– and this is a question we get all the time.

So when you are going through Terapeak and looking, you know, putting your average revenue for selling the product, your average sell price, we always combine the average sell price and the shipping price and that will give you your total revenue. So you want to get the total revenue in there and then obviously the cost of the product and that’s really the only three things that you need in the beginning. And we go through– and like I said, get a 100 different products on a spreadsheet and just get a good comparative view of 100 different products and figure out, out of those 100 which two or three are really hot sellers, where is the opportunity at, and from there move forward.

Steve: Okay. And then your next stop is usually Alibaba or…?

Will: Yeah, exactly. So once you have those two or three products then start going at Alibaba looking for suppliers. Obviously you only want to look for gold suppliers, that’s really the number one requirement. So we recommend our clients go through Alibaba, obviously look for gold suppliers only. All the other things are just kind of cherries on top; you have things like supplier assessments and things like that. Gold supplier is really the only minimum requirement, so go through– find how much good gold suppliers and just go out and message two or three of them.

And we usually just go out and one little hack that we always teach our clients to do is to act like their own secretary. So never act like the boss of your own business because when you are talking to these suppliers– there is a weird thing in Chinese culture, if you are the boss of a business, they kind of would look down on you and your business if you were the one speaking to some secretary at their company.

So we found that by acting like your own boss, not only does it kind of put it on a level playing field, make you look like a bigger company and a bigger importer, but it also buys you a lot of flexibility in that you can say, “Hey this price is pretty good but I have to go back and talk to my boss. Hey my boss said that this didn’t work out, I’m really sorry.” So it allows you to retain the relationship while being a little bit more assertive.

Steve: Okay. That’s good advice.

Will: Yeah, that’s one thing that we always recommend. So yeah, reach out to these suppliers as your own secretary and say, “Hey, my boss is looking for a new supplier for this product, you know, we are a large– we have branches all over the country that sell this product and we are looking for a new manufacturer. Can you send us a sample of five or whatever?” And what will usually happens is they’ll usually send you like an excel spreadsheet which is basically a catalogue of a bunch of different products and price specks, and shipping specks and things like that.

And pretty much you just kind of grow through and analyze the pictures, kind of have conversations with the supplier and see how you feel about them, how much you trust them. And obviously if you are really on a budget, you can really start an importing business with a 100 or 150 bucks if you needed to. So if you are really on a budget, obviously just get one or two samples from one supplier, but ideally you can get two or three samples from two or three different suppliers and then you pretty much wait for those to come in. In terms of how these get shipped and everything, it’s really quite simple, you generally just ask the supplier hey, can you ship this for me? And they pretty much just ship it through their DHL account. And ironically it’s actually much cheaper for you to do it that way too because you can actually benefit from their bulk shipping discounts, their bulk box discounts, tape and everything.

Steve: So Will, how do you deal with– so we import for our online store and what happens is sometimes we get samples but they aren’t the same as the production run that we get. So how do you kind of get around that aspect, quality control? Does that make sense?

Will: Yeah definitely, so one problem that we see a lot of our clients running into is when they get their samples, they’ll have another company’s logo on it and then they can’t sell it. So usually the way to get around that is just to ask when you are getting those samples, just make sure you asked for a blank production run with no other product logo on there or anything. A lot of times we’ll tell people that we are actually going to stamp the logo on there ourselves, so it needs to be blank.

Steve: Okay. Typically when we get samples, it’s usually off of some old production run of someone else. That’s what I was asking.

Will: Yeah. That’s really the only good way to get around that that we found is just asking for a fresh one right off the line. A lot of times if you ask for one that’s unbranded, you know, completely blank, they’ll pretty much have to give you a new one because a lot of times they are only producing and when they have a logo to put on them. So that’s really the only that we found out other than just asking.

Steve: Okay. What is your tactic of getting around high MOQs or minimum order quantities?

Will: Typically just pushing. It really– a lot of it has to do with the perception that you create about yourself and your company. So a lot of it has to do with that shipping hack that or– sorry, that secretary hack that I talked about. You really need to act as if– so, you know, don’t go way over board and start– one of the big mistakes that I see people make all the time, is they start talking about MOQs right off the first order.

They start asking what’s the lowest MOQ possible, how low can you bring this MOQ? I wouldn’t do that, definitely act as if, you know, act as if you are this huge company with 200 branches and 6000 sales people in the US and you need– you got a sample of five of these silicon baking mats, but you have 200 locations with 6000 sales people so now you need a sample of 500 silicon baking mats so you can get those to your main location and send those out to your sales people all over the country, so they can try it in their markets.

So that’s really the best we’ve seen. It’s just act as if– you know, most people are willing to bring their MOQs down. You just need to convince them. So that’s probably the best way we’ve seen is– because that kind of alleviates a lot of the risk of– if you say we have this websites that sells 20,000 units a day, they can go easily check that, but if you say we have 200 physical locations in the US and people are physically going out and selling these products and we need to get your– these samples in the hands of our sales people all over the country, and MOQ of 5000 is not going to work, we need a sample order of 500. That’s really been the best way that we’ve seen, and again using the secretary hack and that too, so you are saying, you know, “Well boss– you know, I’m really sorry, but my boss said that this is the way it has to be.”

Steve: Okay. And in terms of just kind of navigating the difference vendors on Alibaba, do you have any tips on how to distinguish the good from the bad and what you look for?

Will: You know, like we’re talking about earlier, it used to be really like the Wild Wild Western in the early 2000s. Alibaba was just this crazy place where scammers were– it was a scammer paradise. So it’s really changed a lot since then and it’s recently– Alibaba went public I think three or four months ago, and I want to say it was the biggest appeal of all time. So Alibaba I think– they are just improving so much. I think their big goal right now is really making a safer place to shop, and I think their goal is to kind of permeate the US market, the American market. So I think we are going to see Alibaba become much, much more like Amazon in the future. So in terms of staying safe on there, it’s getting safer every day, right now it’s relatively safe.

Like I said, just going through and buying from gold suppliers most of the time, you are going to be safe at this point. But in terms of alleviating the risk of importing in general, any time you are– even with your sample order and definitely anytime you are doing a large order, you need to use some sort of third party financial protection. So whether it’s PayPal, whether it’s Escrow, most of the time we recommend that people start with PayPal for their first couple of sample orders, and then move to Escrow once they are making thousands, 2000, $10,000 orders.

But you know, you really have to have that third part financial protection because then if the product isn’t up to your standard, or you are not satisfied with it or if they do scam you then you actually have some repercussion. You have some way to go back and actually get that money back. So, that alone is going to alleviate most of the risk of scammers on there.

Steve: Have you used the Alibaba Escrow services before?

Will: Yeah I have. And they actually– it seems like just in the past few weeks they’ve really built it out. I think they are kind of rebranding it as Alipay now, so I think they are trying to really become the PayPal of international payments at this point. So it’s going to be really interesting to see them grow in the future and just– things like Aliexpress too, more and more– I meet random people now that are like, “You teach about Alibaba. I just bought, you know, my Halloween costume on Alibaba or Aliexpress.”

Steve: Interesting.

Will: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So it really is kind of starting to permeate the US culture and with how much money they just got from their IPO, give it another two years and I think we are really going to see some amazing growth out of them.

Steve: So at this point, let’s say I have some product ideas, I’ve gotten some samples; I’ve placed the bulk order, where do you typically sell your products? Do you go on Amazon first; do you establish your website? Like what’s your strategy after you have everything ready to go?

Will: So for your first sample, like I said, we always recommend eBay for the first sample.

Steve: Sure.

Will: Main reason being eBay has got really low quality buyers there, just kind of impulse buying, just kind of browsing and impulse buying. They are much more likely to leave good feedback and much less likely leave bad feedback, whereas Amazon buyers, you know, they are coming there to buy something, they are coming there because they need a fan and they want a fan with a great customer rating, and they want it in two days and they want it to work perfectly right out of the box.

So it’s just really much higher quality, much higher demands on Amazon but– so we recommend starting with eBay in terms of how to create the listing and everything. A lot of what we recommend is just going out there and copying what works already. So go out and find some listings that are working well, kind of make this weird amalgamation of it that is improving.

So build your listing like that and just sell the first few on eBay, and once you sell those first few samples, that too is going to alleviate a lot of the risk because what you’ll see a lot of times in importing is and where all the horror stories come from– because there are so many people that have stories about, oh I lost $1100 on importing, I lost $1500 on importing. Your first order doesn’t have to be that high. Most people assume that they have to buy 25, 50 of a product their first time, but you know, just buy three to five samples and sell those. Not only are you going to get to experiment with that supplier, you are also going to get to sell your product to actual customers with the actual expectations of your products.

So you’ll really get the true view of how your product’s quality is, if it’s really up to the standards of your customer, and you’ll also get the true sale price. It’s really easy to come up with really good margins in a spreadsheet, but you are never going to know what the actual sale price is, you are never going to know what you are actual revenue is until you go out there and actually sell it on the real open market, and there is no way to do that without samples. So just those first three to five samples, get them up on eBay, get them in and out the door as quick as possible, and that’s really going to get the ball rolling and then from that point it’s just getting that snow ball and keeping it going.

Steve: So assuming the eBay test passes, what is usually your next step? Do you start going to Amazon at that point and selling on Amazon? Do you start creating your own site? What is the ordering?

Will: Yeah, definitely. After eBay, after you know you really verified that the sample is going to work and the product is going to work, then we typically go back to the supplier and try to put in an order of 25 to 50.

Steve: Okay.

Will: And yeah, the next lowest hanging fruit usually is going to Amazon. Obviously it’s going to be different from product to product, but yeah definitely we recommend everyone at kind of that second stage start looking at Amazon, start trying to take advantage of Amazon because Amazon just gets so much traffic right now, you know, why not?

Steve: It’s almost like you can just put up anything at this point and it will sell. It’s kind of scary actually.

Will: Yeah, especially during the holiday season. We have a holiday jump start group right now, and I always talk to them about this concept of discounted risk. Any other time during the year, it’s still pretty risky to buy samples even if it’s three samples, five samples. There is still a chance that they are not going to sell, and the only time that’s really not true is during December. So anyone that’s starting importing in the month of December, early December you can get your products in the door and out the door in 20, 30 days and really verify your first products, verify it’s going to work and everything. Again it’s not nearly as risky as it usually is during December.

Steve: Absolutely. So I’m just curious and this is just based on running my own store. For us at least prices in China have been increasing dramatically as of late. I don’t know if you guys have been seeing the same thing, but are looking into other countries at this point?

Will: Yeah definitely. So for specifically for our cosmetics company and beauty company we’ve one supplier, one manufacturer in Taiwan which is basically China, and their prices have just gone through the roof in the past two years to the point where we might have to drop them. So yeah, we have seen the same exact thing and China’s economy in general, their wages are going up, in general the economy is really doing well over there. So I think what’s really starting to happen now is a lot of the reason that china was a manufacturing power house was because it had such low wages and it didn’t really have a middle class. For better or for worse, that’s one of the reasons.

So I think now since they are starting to kind of get into middle class and starting to become a more intelligent workers rather than manual worker, I think that whole industry is starting to kind of permeate into the rest of Asia. So I have seen places like Myanmar, places like Malaysia, all these places that are kind of surrounding China, Thailand, Cambodia, things like that– a lot of the actual manufacturing is starting to go out there now from what I’ve seen. And it’s good too because you can actually still find those same suppliers on Alibaba, it’s just a little bit tougher; they are not as well listed. But you can definitely filter down and find suppliers from any country there, so that does help.

Steve: Okay. Outside of Alibaba, are there any other places that you typically look for vendors?

Will: Just Google actually. So a lot of our client want to– even though we recommend against doing heavily regulated products, things like food or anything that you ingest pretty much, a lot of our customers decide that they want to go into this anyway. So for those people specifically we usually recommend that they import– source domestically. So we have like one client that is doing supplements, so things like Maca Powder, and things like that.

So to get around the requirements or all the red tape and everything and the regulations, we basically told them like you should just go on Google and start Googling Maca Powder white label or Maca Powder private label, Maca Powder wholesale and just going through and trying to find a domestic supplier that will be able to do this for you because then that domestic supplier is going have already gone through all the regulation, all the loopholes and everything.

So for people that are doing products like that we do recommend sourcing domestically and like I said, the way we do that is to typically just Google. A lot of the US based or I should say Western based private label manufacturers will have websites up and things like that, but they won’t be on Alibaba.

Steve: Okay. And then do you– when you are working with clients, do you actually go as far as– do you just primarily help them source, or do you actually help them get their brand off the ground as well?

Will: So we help to an extent, with the branding and the selling and everything. Right now our current mastermind group is actually specifically geared towards selling during the holidays and everything.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So yeah, not as much going through branding and everything, but definitely going through driving traffic, driving– especially the initial traffic, things like that.

Steve: Okay. And then it’s probably primarily through selling on Amazon. Is it accurate or…?

Will: Yeah. Most of our clients here make most of their money through Amazon and in terms of kind of like the third step– so we talked about getting the samples and getting your products up and eBay and just really sales channels first, and then kind of that second step would be ramping up your order sizes a little bit and starting to expand on the Amazon, and other established sales channels like that, taking advantage of those existing sales channels is really important. And then after you’ve kind of exhausted those two, all the other existing sales channels, then we really recommend that third step.

People start to build their own website, people build their own brand because branding and building your website really a different animal than just getting products and putting them up and letting someone else drive the traffic and convert it. You have to do– not only do you have to do everything you’ve been doing but now you actually have to do Amazon’s job too. You have to drive their traffic and convert the traffic and send it out so– and manage their customer relationship. So it really is a different animal: building your own website and building your own brand, and it’s the type of thing that you really have to go through those first two steps of building your business through existing sales channels first before you take on all that extra burden.

Steve: Okay, cool. Let’s see well what– I’ve been trying to think I mean you started at such a young age that our experience is just completely different. Are there any business books or any entrepreneurs in particular that have influenced you over the years?

Will: Yeah definitely. In terms of the people who’ve influenced me I’m sure a lot of the same people that have influenced you and your listeners. So a lot of the people in our market, people like Tim Farris, but yeah I mean people– Mark Cuban, for me specifically like I said my father is a really proficient entrepreneur, so I have a lot of respect for him. But yeah, in terms of books too my all time favorite book by far is ‘How to win friends and influence people,’ that’s the only one that I go back and re-read all the time. There is a really good book by a guy named Felix Dennis called How to get rich, and that’s a really good one too. He just has like a really vulgar way of teaching it.

Steve: That makes it entertaining I would imagine.

Will: Yeah definitely. He has one quote in there that has always stuck with me. He says, “If it flies, floats or fornicates rent it, it’s always cheaper. So he has a really good way of writing though. That’s a really good one for people who are just starting out that kind of need that inspiration coupled with that step by step action plan. He has a really good way of doing that.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of everything that you do related to importing and selling online, what are some of the online services that you use for your business that you just can’t live without?

Will: Specifically for importing, I mean our whole business really runs off QuickBooks, so QuickBooks has obviously been huge for us. But that’s really for– if I was just starting out again, my main goal is always to just keep it as simple as possible.

Steve: Okay.

Will: So in terms of tools and software and things like that, if I was just starting out, I would try to keep as many– keep it as simple as possible. So really the only things that you really, really need to get started in importing are Terapeak…

Steve: Alibaba.

Will: Alibaba, Amazon and eBay. Those four things really are all you need. And there is a lot of little tools that will help you manage inventory, that will help you optimize your listings once you start getting sales, that will track your sales and all sorts of things. But, it’s really easy to put the cart in front of the house and start thinking like– we get so many clients that before they even start looking for their first product, they are thinking like, “Well wait. What about this form 56-56 from the RIS, and what about CIFs from customs and how do I get this through customs and what do I do when my products get to the port? Do I just drive there and pick them up?”

It’s like there is so many questions that you can ask to complicate this process for yourself, but I really encourage listeners and anyone getting started in the importing and eCommerce or business in general. Don’t put the cart in front of the horse, you really have to think big and act small. So, you know, think big, have that big vision and everything, and then think like, what’s the smallest action I can possibly take to get there? And just one small step at a time just kind of build up and all the tools and everything, those will always be out there, those will make themselves apparent when they are actually going to solve a problem for you.

Steve: Awesome. That’s a really good advice Will and I wanted also to give you the opportunity to talk about Startup Brothers, and some of the courses and that sort of thing that you provide and where can people find you.

Will: Okay, awesome. Anyone can– like Steve said we really go all out in creating really actionable detailed, step by step guides on our blog. So check out Startupbros.com, check out all of our really in depths data driven guides and everything to see how you can copy what’s working for us in our business right now. And then in terms of what we are going to be doing, like I said, we have our current mastermind group is going to be closing up here in January 8th. So we are going to be launching a new importing gem start group, and basically we bring in a whole bunch of guest experts and things like that, people that have helped in my importing business and just kind of go through step by step, hold your hand and show you– go through as a group and kind of launch these importing businesses.

So this is going to be fourth time we are doing it, so we’ve gotten pretty good at this point. So definitely if you are interested in seeing our entire process A to Z, we have a free webinar in January 8th that will kind of show everything for free. So definitely be there.

Steve: Okay. Hopefully this will be recorded, I’m not sure this episode is going to air by then, but I’m sure you’ll have other webinars as well. I’ll link them up.

Will: Yeah definitely.

Steve: Hey, awesome Will. Really appreciate you coming on the show, great material, and great advice as always.

Will: Okay, awesome Steve. Yeah, I hope your listeners got a lot of value out of it. I know I’m kind of all over the place, so I hope there is some good tidbits in there for your listeners.

Steve: No-no-no. It was man, it was good.

Will: Awesome.

Steve: Cool, take care.

Will: Awesome. You too, thanks.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. Will has been buying and selling goods from China for a very long time and he is a seasoned eCommerce store owner and not only that, he’s also an incredible writer and he does a great job articulating his experiences. For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode59, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you leave me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep my podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m also giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

058: How Steven Essa Makes 6 Figures Giving Killer Online Webinars

Steven Essa

This podcast episode with Steven Essa was one of my favorites because I learned so much about the art of giving effective online webinars. Seriously, this episode was so jam packed with actionable tips that I found myself furiously taking notes during the interview.

In fact, Steven was so engaging that I barely spoke at all and he did most of the talking. He’s got tremendous energy and I know that you’ll get as much out of it as I did. Enjoy!

BTW, you can check out Steven’s websites at StevenEssa.com and X10Effect.com

What You’ll Learn

  • How Steven stumbled upon giving webinars for profit
  • How Robert Kiyosaki influenced Steven to take control of his life
  • The fine art of giving effective online webinars
  • How you should break down your presentation to maintain interest and sell your products
  • Should you give away your best stuff in the webinar?
  • How to get people excited about your information
  • How to do a webinar even if you have no audience or email list
  • How to start creating webinars now even if you don’t have a website
  • How to price your webinars
  • How to sell a product that you haven’t yet created

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success, instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes and enter my podcast contest where I am giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini-course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach how to create a business that suits your lifestyle, so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host, Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. In this episode I’m going to be talking to Steven Essa. Now the reason why I decided to bring Stephen on the show is because I wanted to interview someone who makes a living with webinars. Now Steven is actually recognized as one of the leaders in the webinars niche, and today he speaks at major online business events, internet marketing events around the world and teaches people how to animate their webinar processes.

Now here is what I like about Steven, he is a hustler. The guy started out with no money at all when he was a heavy metal rocker, then he went through a bunch of jobs deep in the trenches like being telemarketer, a maintenance man, network marketer until he found his calling with webinars. Now personally I actually don’t have a lot of experience with webinars so it will be a real treat to learn from the guy. So with that, welcome to the show Stephen. How are you doing today man?

Essa: Yeah, great Steve. Thanks for having me on man.

Steve: Yeah, great to have you. So give us a quick background story in case people haven’t heard you before, and tell us about your business and how you got started with webinars.

Essa: Yeah, absolutely man. I think, you know, I was always been searching for a way to achieve financial freedom since I read Robert Kiyosaki’s book, “Cashflow Quadrant” in the year 2000 when I was banging my head up against the wall in a job doing telephone sales for a company in Australia here, and at the same time I was in band trying to make it in the music business. I had a dream of one day performing some big shows and all that and he worked very-very hard in the music business for 13 years which taught me a lot of business, taught me a lot of networking and the importance of marketing yourself and all of that stuff.

So we took that as far we could, we ended up in Los Angeles in 2003 to 2005, and they said, you know, it’s the worst time ever for music. So I just got really-really frustrated and said, “Well 13 years and now it’s over?” So it’s like– it wasn’t a very good plan. So I basically said to myself, “I’m going back to Australia where it’s nice and relaxed and it’s not as superficial, not as superficial as Hollywood.” And I basically just started to focus on creating a business and investing in real estate. And I tried to build a website, and I’m not a techy at all, so I think I had one meeting with a guy and that was the end of that business, and then I went into real estate and I started buying property and in 2008 pretty much got wiped out like many people who are highly leveraged.

So I thought– I went back to the Robert Kiyosaki book, I read eight years earlier and he said, “Build a business and invest in real estate.” So I was trying to invest in real estate as a business and I said, “Well I don’t want to go and buy a franchise and spend all this money or rent a store. And I have to basically pay for all that expense and I got no idea how to run a business.” So I looked online because online is cheap, it’s a cheap place to fail. And he said, “Look to fail as many– he said, ‘One in ten businesses makes it, nine out of 10 fails.” So he goes, “That just means you have to try 10 times.” And I thought, “Well I don’t mind trying 10 times if it’s online because most you’ll spend is a couple of grand.” And that’s what I did.

So initially I was working in a real estate job and I looked to help my boss’s business with his internet marketing. And it’s what I always tell people Steve is if you have don’t have a business right now, go and apply these stuff that we’re teaching and that you teach and your other experts teach. Go and apply it to someone’s business because one of my favorite mentors when I was growing up was Bruce Lee. I read in many of his books and he says in his book, “Knowledge is not enough.

We must apply what we know, otherwise it becomes lost.” And I went to internet marketing events and read books and started applying that to my boss’s business because I didn’t have a business. And I helped him make like 106 grand in sales using the presentation techniques I was learning and the copyrighting and all that sort of stuff, and it gave me confidence. I said, “Wow! I can do this for myself. If I can do it for him, I could do it for myself.” So I quit my job in 2008 and I started my own business at that point.

I basically run my first ever webinar, made $594 selling a product that I hadn’t created yet which was teaching churches how to make money, churches, and charities using internet marketing. And from there I made 4 grand, 10 grand, 20 grand, and 100 grand and it’s just sort of grown from there. I said to my mentor, “How good is this, you know, this webinar stuff?” And he said, “You should become the webinar guy.”

And I said, “No one is going to pay me to do webinar and teach him how to do webinars because they are so easy, right?” Who would pay to learn how to do– all you got to do is press record, have a PowerPoint presentation, and start talking. He said, “No, you’ll be surprised.” And eight million dollars later, it’s like– and five years down the track, he was right. It’s like it’s found a niche for me and I became the webinar guy.

Steve: So today you actually go around the world teaching people how to make money with webinars, is that right?

Essa: Yeah, that’s right exactly. We did a world tour. My wife and I– we said, “What’s the ultimate?” We really-really are passionate about helping people achieve financial freedom and achieve– get their message out there. Many, many great experts have great knowledge but they are working one on one in their business or their practice and they don’t have leverage.

So unfortunately they are going to die with their information in them when many people around the world could benefit from that information that they share. They could have a healing modality that no one knows about, that they could help people heal and there is all sorts of people that can cure cancer and do all these sorts of things that are amazing, but they are stuck in their little local town and they are very busy in their business, and they don’t have time to actually implement any of this.

And I teach people to– who is an expert how to leverage but also teaching other people to go these experts and help them set up a webinar business because they can get their information online and out there and they can pay you 50% for doing it. And that’s sort of what I do now– is I have business partners that I just control the backend, control the webinars and I own five companies now that are doing anything from 5 to 50 grand a month. And also we do is teach the expert how to present on a webinar, how to sell and leverage them.

Steve: Okay. You know, we are going to go through that in a lot more depth in today’s interview. I just thought I’d make a couple of comments. So one of the reasons– so I’ve done a couple webinars in my day and one of the reasons I don’t like to do them very often is because I got to prepare a really good presentation and a lot of times it’s one off thing, right? And so what I understand is you actually offer this software that allows replays of the webinars, right? So can you kind of comment on how that works?

Essa: Yeah absolutely. If you’re going to be doing the work you want to leverage it right. So you want to create a webinar presentation, run the webinar live, it forces you to actually do it and record it. And once you’ve recorded it– it’s not just my webinar software, there is many people who have webinar replay softwares out there that will automate your webinar. Mine is just one I created for myself, then customers started wanting it, so I made it available to my members and we sell it online, but basically it just allows to replay your webinar in one of many forms.

You can have it as a video that’s like people can watch the video and then when you say buy now, a buy now button can drop down and they can click on it and buy and that’s how you make money while you sleep. And then there is also scheduled replay webinars which allows them to watch it, but they can’t fast forward or rewind it, so it has a bit of a live field to it. Now when you’re marketing replay webinars to people, don’t say it’s a live webinar if it’s not, because deceiving and I think people these days will– you don’t want to blow your credibility in terms of saying, you know it’s a live webinar when it’s not.

I always tell people if it’s a replay, it’s still a replay but they have to watch it or at the best you just say, “Watch this webinar or watch this webinar online.” And then they know it’s scheduled at a certain time, they’ve got to come and watch it, but to be honest…

Steve: So you actually have to schedule it, even though it’s a replay you still have to schedule time to watch it?

Essa: There is one of three options, that is what I was going to say now. To be honest I just allow people– I have a play anytime option, I just let people watch it anytime. But I removed the control so they can’t fast forward and rewind because a good webinar presentation is a process that people need to go through in order to get into the buying frame. They need to see each section. And when I do, when I help people put together a webinar whether it’s at one of our events where we pick someone out of the crowd and do it from scratch or whether it’s one of my 75 grand clients– I go through the same process.

It’s the same template; our templates that we’ve created, they’ve probably done over $50 million in sales for us and our clients that have used them, so it’s a proven formula. I just have people fill those in and then we present it in 60 minutes or 90 minutes depending on how much content they’ve got and we make an offer at the end. And if they don’t have a product, even better we just create a product on paper and then we sell it and if people buy then you deliver it. It’s just more webinars, something we talked about before, just sell more webinars. Yeah.

Steve: Okay. And so you mentioned that you do these seminars across the world and you actually pick people from the audience and then just create a product from scratch. So what I was hoping to do today in this podcast is pretend that you are talking to me and I want to create some sort of product, but I have nothing. I don’t have an audience; I got nothing, so walk me through the process.

Essa: Yeah. So the first thing is who is the target market? Like what do you– what information…

Steve: Okay. Yes, so my target audience are people who want to create eCommerce stores. But let’s say I have no content, I got nothing. So what would you advise me?

Essa: Yeah. Basically what I’ll do is I want to put together a webinar with you. That’s the first the step, no matter what. Whether someone is in your position or not I’ll just sit there and go, “Okay, first we need to choose on who is the target market, who are the people that we want to target.” We want to choose people who want to create an eCommerce store or they already have an eCommerce store and they want to monetize it more. They are making a million dollars from their eCommerce store. There are people over 60 who have got eCommerce stores, or what is that target market, what can we identify is the common denominator with all of them, out of all of those things I’ve just mentioned or if you can tell me who is the target market.

Steve: Okay. So let’s– just for the sake of this example, lets beginners. Maybe people who want to start a family, so maybe they are in their early 30s; late 20s and they want to spend more time with their child so they want to start a business that they can kind of run from home.

Essa: Okay great excellent. They going to spend less time with their kids if they work from home let me tell you. No, I’m just kidding. Okay, so how to make– and what’s the best– have you actually done this? Have you made money from eCommerce sites?

Steve: Yes. So let’s say I have my own eCommerce site. Actually yeah, I have my own eCommerce site.

Essa: Great, excellent. What’s the best result you’ve got in a month in sales?

Steve: The first year that I launched it, I made six figures.

Essa: Okay, great. So if you could give me an exact figure that would be better because the more exact we are with the titles, the better. So people– instead of saying like how to make a $100,000 a year thanks to eCommerce sites, the headline I’d want is something like, discover how to generate $171,000 in 12 months thanks to eCommerce.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Okay. So that would be title of the webinar. Just grab any title for now, it will do and let’s work now. If haven’t got that result then you say, “Discover how to build a highly profitable eCommerce website in five easy steps.” So we’ve charged in the target market. We could even say something like, ‘Attention Beginners.’ So spend a bit of time on working out who is the target market and come out with that title of the presentation and then we want have– create the introduction of the webinar which is about 10 minutes of content.

Any introduction on a webinar what you want to do is Steve is, number one when people come to your webinar you got to be quick to tell them what’s in it for them. They’ve registered, they’ve come to the webinar, you’ve got a couple of minutes at the beginning to really make them decide whether they’re going to pay attention to the webinar or if it’s a going be a webinar playing in the background like a radio. Because too many people these days they think, “I got 100 people to the webinar.” But you got to get them engaged, it’s not enough to have them there. You’ve done the hard work, now you’ve got to keep them there.

So when the webinar starts, if you use GoToWebinar, there is a lady that says, “Broadcast has started. All attendees are in listen only mode.” Right? As soon as that hits, and you’re sharing your title of your presentations on the screen, you got to get– “Hi, welcome to the webinar. It’s Steven Chou here and today you are going to discover how to make $171,500 in five easy steps building an eCommerce website, okay?

And today I am very excited because I’m going to show you how to retire with this strategy. I’m going to show you if you’ve been wanting to make more money, if you have been– I am going to show why eCommerce websites are the best thing out there since sliced bread and why you should use them and most importantly what to avoid when you’re doing them. Let’s get right into the content here.

So put down any distractions, grab your pens and pad and this an interactive webinar, so make sure you’re taking lots of notes. I’ll be grabbing questions at the end, so let’s get into it.” Then I want to basically put in a slide. Who is this webinar best for? Who is this webinar for? And what I want to do there is I want to touch on all the different demographics that we have there, the different target audiences. This webinar is for you if you’re a husband or wife that you want to work from home to spend time with your kids more. You are looking to replace your income. Ecommerce website is perfect because they are easy, you can do this and na-na-na. It’s perfect for you.

This is for you if you’ve got a product, a small business offline right now, but you want to move online and you’ve got a range of products. This webinar, we’re going to show you how to build an effective eCommerce website. This is going to be perfect for you if you’ve got some products and services already. This is for you if you don’t have any products or services. We show you how to white label stuff, so that if you don’t a product or service you are not sure what to do but you like the concept of eCommerce websites, we are going to show how to be effective with this strategy as well, and also this is for you are blah-blah-blah. So you are trying to– you want everyone on the webinar to say, “Ah, that’s me at one of those or more of those.”

Steve: Okay. And in this period is– you said five to 10 minutes of this?

Essa: Yeah. They still going with the five– we’re still in the first. These are some of the concepts within the first 10 minutes.

Steve: Got it.

Essa: These are things we want to touch on them. And then you want to get into the proof. So any proof– nothing sells like proof. So if you’ve got a screenshot or a bank account statement of you making that money, now black out all your banking details and stuff, just show the figure. All right, this is my bank account guys in 12 months, or this is my financial year review bank. This is 171,000, that’s my website. That’s what I did. Here is the front of the website, this is what it did, okay?

Here is a client of mine, he did– like I’ve got– one of my clients is a vet. He made 300 grand and sold his business in 12 months thanks to webinars, created a website called thewebinarvet.com; people can go and check that out. They can hear his testimonial on YouTube if they don’t believe me, it’s there. Also he made over a million dollars, he sends me an email, I put that he sent me in there. I show people, I’ve got a pilot he made 450,000 pounds thanks to webinars. I’ve made $8,000,000 thanks to webinars. I show my PayPal account somewhere.

But here is a webinar I ran last week. I want people to know that this is current. So I always update my testimonials as often as I can. Hey here is a– like I said to you at the start of the course. I just did 57 grand two weeks ago, last week I run a webinar, made a 100 grand selling 10, $10,000 products last week, right, to a boot camp we’re doing. So the more proof that you have the better, the easier it is to sell. If people don’t have proof Steve, they just got to find the statistics.

So they say something like, look nine out of 10 ecommerce websites don’t make money according to the Bureau of Statistics website, and you quote the source and you say, “Here is why they don’t make money, because they don’t follow the five steps that I’m showing you here, or look at this guys one out of every 10 people who comes to a webinar buys, right, whereas one out of every 100 on a website.” So webinars are much better conversion and you could sell products that are 10 times more higher in price. How do we know? Because we’ve tested this over and over again. This outs our research or other people’s research, quote the source.

And I look at that first introduction Steve like a lawyer, you know, when you watch your lawyer closing a case, he goes to the jury, and he or she says, “All right, here is the case. Here is the story. Here is the precedence that have been set before, here is the proof that we have that we’ve put forward to you; the gun had the fingerprints, the DNA, the blah-blah-blah.” My wife and I watch all these crime shows. So it’s basically putting that case forward and adding that credibility in the first 10 minutes. And as well as you can tell your story in there as well, but don’t do what everyone else does and go, “Yeah, my story is I left school and then I did this and then I did a white law thing.”

Make sure your story relates back to the audience. So I always say something like, you know, I failed school and I told people I failed school because I want people to think you don’t have to be smart to do webinars, right, because it’s true. You don’t have to be rocket scientist to do a webinar. And then I say, “My dad told me to get a safe secure job and have a trade to fall back on so I became a body mechanic. So I fixed smashed cars and I tell people that. I said, “Whose parents told them to get a safe secure job?” And people type in on the webinar, “Yes mine, mine.” I say, “Yeah Bob, Linda, Berry yeah, your parents told you job security, right?”

Now it’s relating back to them, okay? Instead of me saying, yeah, my dad told me to get a job, and it’s panel beating, I’m relating it back to them. Then I say, but my dream was to play music and be in a band. Who has a dream or a goal but because of time or money, you can’t do that. All day your are day dreaming about doing what you love but you can’t because you got to be in a job because you don’t have enough money and people always say, “Yeah, yeah that’s me too, right?” So I told them I am a musician, I told them where I’ve come from, but I’ve related everything back to them.

Then I say, “Then I got into real estate. Who’s invested in real estate, didn’t have enough cash flow before?” Yeah, absolutely that’s what happened to me. I realized I needed a business, so I started a webinar business and I made 10,000, 20,000, 100,000, and there is the proof, and that’s what I do is I teach people how to make money. Here I am today teaching people how to do this. So I give them my story of the important points that were turning points in my life but turning points that are going to relate back to the audience as well because that’s really what we want.

People buy from people they know, like, and trust. If they say, “Ah! That’s like me. My parents told me that too.” Now they have an affinity with you, they have something in common with you and the more you create that– it’s like at the start while we said, “This webinar is for you if you are looking to retire or looking to spend time with your family.” We want people saying, “Yeah, that’s me. The more you get them saying, “Yeah, that’s me.” The more they feel understood.

Steve: This is really good advice. I actually have this video as part of– incidentally I gave away a free six day mini course on how to start an online store and I started with an introductory video and I think I’m making some of the mistakes that you just mentioned. I basically tell my story, but I don’t probably do a good job of relating it back to the listener. So this is really good advice.

Essa: Yeah, awesome. It works really good, it works really good. And it’s okay, because when I started out, that was my story but then I started thinking about it, “Okay, why am I telling– always ask yourself, why am I telling them this.” How does this relate to them? How can I relate this back to them? Whatever you say on a webinar, how can I relate this back to the audience? That’s what I always look to do. And that whole section what we just covered there is the first 10 minutes, okay? If you are on a 90 minute webinar, then you want to do that in 15 minutes.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Okay? And then we get into the content, and the content is the bulk of the presentation, and the content is where many people make a mistake because they fail to deliver content. If you are not making sales on your webinar, one of the primary reasons could be you are not delivering enough content, you are not demonstrating enough information, you are not demonstrating your skills enough. And a lot of people have a problem with the content they’ve got because if I give away everything Steve, what’s the point? They are not going to buy from me.

I said, “I challenge you to try and give away in the next 40 minutes as much information as you can. Everything you know about your topic, give it away in the next 40 minutes. So I challenge you to try, okay?”And there is no way you could do it, right? There is no way Steve you could give away everything you know about eCommerce websites in 40 minutes, is there?

Steve: No, there is not. But there always is this thing in the back of my mind that you might be giving away too much, right?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely. It’s a very, very common fear of a lot of people have. Let me tell you that the buyers are the buyers. On a webinar if you’ve got 10 people there, one of the people who is there is a buyer, okay, if you’ve got the right target audience there. Now the other people they are coming along this– there might be three or four people just sniffing around going, “Okay, I’ll just come along. I’ve got nothing to do and I’d rather come to an eCommerce– learn about eCommerce. Maybe I’ll pick up a couple of things, maybe I don’t know, I don’t really care.”

But there is someone there that when you say, “This is for you if you’ve got a family, and you’re looking to retire and whatever.” They going, “That’s me.” And then they are watching and they are going, “Wow! I really think I could do this,” and then you are demonstrating and you’re going, “Oh wow! That’s really easy and wow, how good is Steve at his teaching.” You know, that person who is out of those 10 is going to get excited and go, “Wow! Look what I learnt from Steve in 40 minutes. Imagine if I buy his course.”

Imagine the value, look at these templates. Imagine if he just gives me that $50 million template or that ecommerce template that he’s created $171,000 with, you know he’s just explained it, right? He’s just explained it but imagine if I get my hands on that template, that’s going to be so much faster if I work with Steve. After 40 minutes I’ve learnt so much, imagine what I’ll learn in his course eight modules and the templates and the couching calls with him and all of that stuff. That’s what happens to people, but if you don’t demonstrate enough, and it’s a fine line, you don’t want to turn it into a lecture.

So you wouldn’t want it– for example, you talking about eCommerce websites. In the five steps, you got to create three, five, or seven steps in the content, right? Three and five steps is the best, seven gets too much, right? Three or five steps to building a successful $171,000 per year eCommerce web business. What we want to do there is we don’t want to turn it into buy a domain name and here is how you buy a domain name. Go to Go Daddy then click there and then do that and then– and then what do you is go to the hosting and don’t use the $9.99 option, choose that option and then after that you’ve got that hosting.

And then go to this website here, it’s called eCommerce themes. I go here and I buy the theme and then I go into choosing the theme, then choose the theme there and then I go– add this to the WP admin, WordPress thing, now if you don’t have WordPress then here is what you click on.

You don’t want to turn it into like a — too much of a drill by a drill, step by step because you just don’t have enough time in 40 minutes and you are not completely– they aren’t convinced 100% they want to do this yet. So you want your steps, you want to give the fundamentals and a little bit of how to and some resources, but you can’t give them everything that’s in the course because you don’t have enough time to deliver it.

So at the end of 40 minutes, we wouldn’t have even gone through the first couple of sections and then you’ve left out all of the other stuff like how to get the product, where to source the products from, where to do this– you got to give an overview of every step, but don’t be afraid to sink in a little bit on each one and say, “Here is a resource that can help you do that, like you can buy themes for eCommerce websites here for like $100. We have our own themes.

Don’t be afraid to say we have our own themes, our proven templates that our students use available in our program. But hey guys, you could still go to a website likes this and buy it if you wanted to. There are some options for you or you can get them created, go to odesk.com and they’ll create, ask someone, look for a eCommerce expert. Just be careful of this and this when you do it that way and make sure– ask for the quote upfront. And you are there to help them as best as you can, you want to stir them in the right direction.

Let’s pretend in the first 40 minutes they are not going to buy from you, all right? They are going to leave there and you have to help them become successful whether they buy your product or not because that’s just the right thing to do. They are investing an hour with you, you promised to give away great information. We have to fulfill that promise, and those of us that have been to webinars where the guy just sold-sold-sold-sold-sold the whole time, we left feeling disgusting and we said, “We’re never going to another webinar with that guy again because he just sold-sold-sold- sold, delivered no content to us at all.”

The sale happens in that 40 minutes of content, that’s when the people who emerge– who say, “Wow! These awesome, I want more of this.” That’s what we want them to do. We want to whet their appetite, by the time we get to end of 40 minutes we’ve given them stories, we’ve illustrated, we’ve shared testimonials, case studies, people who’ve used that information. Here is how you do this; here is how you do that, here is what you do there, and then we recap that after 40 minutes.

Steve: Okay, all right. Yeah, that’s good stuff. So that accounts for 50 minutes. So you don’t sell anything until the very end, is that how you structure it?

Essa: That’s right, yeah. The last 10 minutes now– there is a lot of people out there that will say, “Oh you got to start selling in the middle because people leave on your webinar.” That is BS, that’s total BS.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: And if you don’t keep people interested enough in your content, right, if you’ve done your job properly on your webinar, they are going to hang around till the end and they are going watch your webinar because they’re just genuinely interested. A percentage of people are like, “Wow! I mean– I don’t even know what it is yet, but I mean I want to work with Steve.” They’ve made up their mind.

They’ll come up to you later and they’ll say to you, “You know what Steve, I really resonated with your story about what you said about your mum and how you want– how you’ve got a kid and you’re retired, you know, you tried to do this for your kid. I like you, I resonated with you, and I really see how this works. I see how you made the money, and I see how that works, and I really want to do this, and I want you to help me because you sound like a really, really good person.” They’ve already made up their mind.

If you think back to when you’ve bought something especially on a webinar you’ve made up your mind that you want to work with that person or you know that their information is going to be good in that book or the course that they are going to run. You’ve already made up your mind. It’s just about now; they have to give us an irresistible offer. Like one of my favorite movies, the God Father, “I’ll make him offer he can’t refuse.” You know what I mean?

You got to make them an offer they can’t refuse. And how do you do that? You stack the value. Now nothing– people give you money if you give them value, okay? And what I teach people in the close of your webinar, first before you close, you recap everything. You say, “Here is what we covered. Here is proof, I showed you how to do it, right? Step one was this, step two was this, step three was this, step four, step five was that.” That’s the recap.

And then you need a transition slide because Brian Tracy, one of the best salesman in the world and a sales trainer– he says, “The sales section is the bumpy part in the whole process when you are giving a sales pitch, when you are giving a sales talk or something like that, when you are asking for the order that’s when the hardest part is for most people, right?

Steve: Right.

Essa: And so to transition into that I use a slide that is something like– or you just say something like, “So there is the five steps guys, I taught you how to do that. So would you like the fast and easy way to make all these happen for you? Would you like to know an even faster way that you can make an eCommerce website making $171000 a year from? Would anyone want to know how to do that?” now you’ve just delivered 50 minutes of quality, right? They are going to be going, “Oh yes please,” right? Say, “Well if you do stick around because here is what I’m going to show. It’s called the eCommerce Mastery program, all right?” And if you don’t have a name for your program you just call it something-something mastery program. It’s just…

Steve: Okay.

Essa: It just becomes like, have they mastered building an eCommerce website, right?

Steve: Sure.

Essa: And you say, “Here is the program.” And if you don’t have a product right now Steve, it’s perfect because here is what I do. I tell my students put together eight, 10 or four, eight or 10 more webinars and also we need– is the topics that you are going to cover. So you to say people, “Okay, what’s the guaranteed formula to make all these happen the fast and easy way? Introducing our eCommerce Mastery program.

You’re going to get step by step instructions on how to implement these strategies right now and the great thing with our eCommerce Mastery program is that you’ll get– you’ll know exactly how to put a eCommerce website together the best way, the fast way, the easy way using our approven templates so you can start making money sooner, so you can retire faster, so you can make $171,000 a year. And instead of struggling to do it yourself, you’ll basically have a proven formula there for you.”

And then I say, “Webinar one, we are going to cover researching and market to look out what’s the best market and in this webinar we’ll talk about X, Y, Z, this and this and this. And the benefit of that is blah-blah-blah.” Now here is the biggest mistake people make Steve when they are doing it close on a webinar, they start talking about the features. “Let me tell everyone listening right now, no one wants to work with you one on one, no one wants to watch your DVDs, no one wants to watch your webinars, no one wants email support from you, no one wants anything from you.

They want the result of what that product or that one on one coaching call will do.” And people fail to close highly when they fail to tell the benefit of each of the features that they have. So instead of saying, “You are going to get this webinar which shows you how to research and in webinar two, you are going to get a webinar which shows you how to pick the best domain. In webinar three, you are going to learn how to get the best hosting and webinar four, you are going to learn how to get white label products and webinar five– instead of saying that you say, “Webinar one, we are going to show how to market research.

In this webinar we’ll look at the best markets to go into so that you make the most amount of money, so that you are starting off in a profitable niche. This is what gives you the best chance of making more money so you can retire sooner, so that it’s less headache to manage, so that you get to spend more time with your kids, you get to spend more time on things you want to do and that’s really what you want, isn’t it?

Steve: Okay. So instead of going over what your course offers, you just emphasize the benefits to the person who signs up for that particular webinar.

Essa: Exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: I say 30% features, 70% benefits. So if you say you get this DVD set which is a weekend workshop with me and we show you– we basically go through the whole process, it’s amazing, it’s awesome, it’s blah-blah-blah, that’s 30%. The rest is you are going to learn how to build the business faster, you are going to go– you are going to be able to do it in two hours a week, you are going to be able to retire sooner, you are going to be able to have more cash flow, spend time with your kids, you are going to be able to buy properties with one cheque, you are going to be able to run a webinar, you are going to make money, enough money from that webinar to put a deposit on a house. How good is that going to feel? That’s what we teach in that webinar.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: You know what I mean. Instead of saying we show you how to put together an introduction, a middle and close, and how to put a product together, they don’t care about all that. They want the end result, so you got to remind them and don’t be afraid. If you know your target audience wants to retire and you’ve got a whole bunch of people on your webinar and they want to retire, quit their job and spend time with their family, don’t be afraid to say that 10 times in the close.

Remember guys when you do this, when you setup a eCommerce website the right way, you are going to be able to retire, spend time with your family. When was the last time you took your family on a holiday? You are going to be able to do this when you set it out and you can manage your eCommerce website when you are on holidays if you need to in just one hour. You can have the sales coming in, you make the money while you sleep, you wake up, you check your sales, you add a couple of extra products on it, you spend the rest of the day with your kids. Paint that picture of what life is going to be like after they own your product.

Steve: So the first webinar is free and then you charge for the subsequent ones. Is that…

Essa: That’s right, yes. If you didn’t have a product right now I would create, get you to create some more webinars, right? So four, eight, 10, or 12 over one per week. So you can run them live each week and you only have to record them the first time and customers will be really happy because they get to speak to you more. They get to ask questions and the good thing about creating your course this way Steve is that basically you can fix it on the go.

If you notice that your customers are too– falling behind and they are not keeping up with you and you are going too fast, you can basically– you can change it, you can change the course midstream and add in there an extra webinar or add in there speed it up or slow it down or add some more resources in there. If people rush out and they write a book and then they go and build a course and then they try and sell it when they haven’t got any feedback from anyone, it’s the worst thing you can do. You are not going to create a good product.

How do you create a good product? You market research, but you get people to pay for the market research by selling them the webinar series on the course, on the free webinar. You sell them the series and now you have people paying for market research and you are trying to make them successful as best you can so get testimonials for next time.

So I want take those customers over the first four, eight, 10, 12 weeks whatever you’ve created. I normally create eight week webinar series, and those webinars can be anything from five minutes to 90 minutes. Just as long as you teach me how to get those steps, that’s all I need, right? Give them the content and then give them some homework and see you next week. And then you report…

Steve: How much do you charge?

Essa: Depends on the product, you know, it’s like– normally for a little of your product normally something like you are offering there. For eight webinars, $297 is a good price point to start off with.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: And what I want to do is I want to make them as successful as possible. So the first lot of customers that I have, I want to call them up. I’ll call them up. Say we get 10 or 20 people signed up, I want the business owner who we’re starting a business with to call them up and say, “Why did you buy? What made you buy our course?” And they are going tell us. Those 20 people are going to tell us why they bought and that’s good information for the next free webinar we run. And then I’m going to say, “What’s your idea, what’s your topic, blah-blah-blah,” and I’m going to help them become successful because I want testimonials. Nothing sells like proof.

If you can help people do what you are saying and you get a testimonial that helps sell more on the next time you run it, right? And it helps them talk to other people and it’s what your product should be doing, your product should be getting results. Like I think my webinar costs– gets more results for people than any other internet marketing product that I know, and it’s more real results, because putting a webinar together works. When you do it the way we teach, it works and that’s why we have so many successful students.

So to me in a business, results is everything. We want to get– whatever we’ve got to do, bend over backwards to help that first bunch of customers get the result, that’s going to help us put the price up, it’s going to help us to add more value to it, get testimonials, sell more of them later on. And if you are selling more than one in 10 at $297 put the price up to $497, then $997, 2000 and that’s how I started. I started with a $300 product and now I sell a $50,000 product but my average product on a webinar I sell it $3000. I don’t have a product cheaper than that except my webinar replace offer which is $497, but I don’t sell that on a webinar. I just got a website for that, we don’t spend too much time focusing on that. We sell our $3000 webinar training and that sells by itself on autopilot.

Steve: Through your webinar replay.

Essa: Yes, through our webinar replay, exactly, yeah.

Steve: Okay. So let’s go over something else. So let’s say you’ve got the presentation. How do you actually get people to sign up for your webinar?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely. There is many, many ways. We cover a lot of information on how to do that. It’s the biggest question we get, but I’ll give you two easy ways that you can do that, right? The first one is joint ventures. First thing you need to do is start building your own list. If you are in online marketing, then you need to start building your list, right? And if you don’t have a GetResponse or AWeber or Infusionsoft or one shopping cart, MailChimp, you know accounts to capture names and email, that’s the first thing you need to be doing. You need to be capturing names and email addresses yourself, and every opportunity you want to capture names and email addresses at every opportunity.

At my event I actually show people how each person who comes to your webinar is worth $70 when you follow our sort of model of creating products at $300, then in $2000 and $10000, but we don’t have time to do it here, but basically each person who attends your webinar is worth a dollar amount if you are selling products and stuff. So you have to realize that building your own list is number one, critical and something you have to do every day. But the number one way to fill a webinar is to find people like me who’ve got $25,000 subscribers or more and ask them to mail to their list for you, for your webinar and give them a percentage of the profit if you make a sale.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Yeah. It’s what I do every week, right? I either promote other people on my webinars and they sell, like I had a guy last night. Last night we run a webinar on Amazon. The guy made three sales so far at $500, right? We had like 80 people there. So conversion rate was a little bit lower than what we’d expect. He wasn’t a student of mine, he was just a guy I met at an event and he interviewed me and I said, “Okay, I’ll do a promotion for you for a 50-50 deal.” And I’m sure the webinar replay has already made sales.

If I check now in Infusionsoft I’m sure there is more sales coming from the replay, but basically find someone who has got a list, who will mail for you for a percentage of the sales because they can make you rich. Three or four guys like me can make you enough sales if you’ve got the right target audience, the right product, the right price; you make it irresistible, you’ll close 10%.

And if I can get 500 people registered for webinar I can get at least 200 to 300 showing up to watch it and then the rest of them on the replay. If you can close 10% of those, that’s 30, 40 sales at 300 or even $500 or a $1000, that’s 30, 40 grand. You are giving half away but– then you get other products and services for a higher price to those people who bought at the end of your eight weeks or 12 weeks course, you should offer a done for your service for 10 grand.

Steve: I see.

Essa: So once you’ve sold something for $300 or $500 then you– at the end of that, you say, “Hey, how can I help you more? We offer one on one, we offer this, we offer that. We do a done for you; we’ll build you your own eCommerce website for 10 grand.”

Steve: Got it.

Essa: All of that and that’s a 100% profit for you as well. So what I do is I spend 15 minutes or I tell people to spend 15 minutes every day looking for joint venture partners, create a spreadsheet and have your assistant email potential joint venture partners and keep chasing them up until you get them because a couple of those, we’ll make you a seven figure business quite easily.

Steve: So you mentioned the typical conversion rate for a well done webinar is on the order of 10% of the attendees, is that what you said?

Essa: That’s right. Yeah, that’s right.

Steve: Okay. And then do you use any sort of paid advertising like Facebook, adwords and that sort of thing typically?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: Absolutely. We totally do but I tell you now, if I lost everything tomorrow, if I lost everything and I had to start from scratch, I wouldn’t be starting off with Facebook ads because it’s so much harder and more expensive to do. And you can lose– what I always tell people is I’ve spent three grand on Facebook ads and made 30 grand, you know, I’ve made money with Facebook ads, but they are coming harder and harder to get them right. And if you are a beginner, it’s very-very hard.

If you hire someone to do it for you then great, but what you really– what the best use for your time is finding that JV partner because there is someone out there that needs more content for their database. When I do a JV webinar for someone like I did last night, the Amazon one, the guy delivered so much great information from me. Now, if I didn’t give that information to my 25000 people as option for them to sign up for that webinar, someone else will email them a webinar about kindle. You know what I mean? They’ll end up on someone else’s list.

Now why wouldn’t I want them to number one, make sure that the expert I’ve got– he is a good expert. He’s been doing it, he showed me proof how he is making money, 15 grand a month thanks to kindle. Why wouldn’t I want to put him through my list to my subscribers, it helps him. If he makes sales, he gets 50%, I get 50%, and my list gets great information. Even if they don’t buy they’ve gotten a resource, a great expert that they could reach out to, they could get help from if they want to buy the course later, or at least they know about it, and the webinar went for two hours and he was answering every question they had at the end.

So it’s another way– people say, “Why would someone want to promote me for that exact reason?” they are looking to promote more stuff to their list, they’ve got a list, they’ve got nothing else sell. The list– most of your list won’t buy product, so why wouldn’t you offer other people’s product to sell, right? So I could launch your webinar Steve, how to make a $171,000 a year thanks to eCommerce websites because I don’t have an eCommerce website, and most of the people in my list I think– there is only about three and half, 4000 of the people out of 25000 have bought something.

The rest are just on the list for information or their email addresses are bad or whatever it is. On your database there is only a certain number of active people and if you are not offering them something, they are buying stuff from other people. So why don’t you filter that and make a cut and bring the best experts to them?

Steve: Okay. So let’s take a step back and also talk about some of the tools that you use. So for example, webinar software, what do you use?

Essa: Webinar software, I just use GoToWebinar. I’ve got the same account that I setup in 2008. I think it’s $79 a month now for 100 people and people say, “Oh, but 100 people. That’s all you can have.” Well if you got a 100 people coming to your webinar, you can always upgrade it, but if you’ve got 100 people coming to your webinar every week then you are making way more than $79 a month unless you are doing something wrong.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of collecting the email addresses for go to, do you use anything? You use Infusionsoft I thought I had you mention.

Essa: We’ve got five businesses and across those we’ve got one shopping cart, we’ve got two one shopping cart accounts, three Infusionsofts and our students– we teach them how to setup GetResponse because it’s 15 bucks a month, it’s cheap and you don’t need something so– as heavy as Infusionsoft when you are starting out. It’s a bit overwhelming for people and you don’t have a business yet.

So spend $200, $300 is a bit of a stretch for some people, so GetResponse or AWeber will do the job for you for 15, 20 bucks a month. GoToWebinar as well, 100 bucks a month or whatever and yeah, those are two main softwares that you need to collect names and emails and run webinars. We also have another tool we use LeadPages, which integrates really nice leads through those, so when people register for GoToWebinar, when you’ve set it up in LeadPages they automatically sign up to your AWeber account or your GetResponse account and the GoToWebinar at the same time. So that’s a really cool tool, Leadpages.net. These guys in the states made that. They are really-really clever, so that’s a good software to have.

Steve: What about Google Hangouts, have you ever tried running a webinar through hangouts?

Essa: Yeah. We’ve run webinars through Hangouts before and the software– first you need other software to actually capture names and emails for it, and secondly I don’t know about in the states but the internet speeds in Australia aren’t quite at that level yet where– you know, it’s a bit more laggy, it’s a bit more not as good quality, and at the end of the day I just didn’t have as much success with it and I didn’t find it as easy to use as GoToWebinar.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: But it’s a free software, Google Hangouts it works, whatever just choose the platform and roll with it and you’ll just become professional at that. On GoToWebinar and Google Hangouts you are going always have people on your webinar that have technical problems, okay? You are going to have a percentage of people that have a technical issue on their side; there is nothing you can do about it. You just got to send them a replay later. So I get people typing in questions, “I can’t see, I can’t see anything,” I say, “Don’t worry, I’ll send you a reply later.” And then they just go away and they don’t have to stress out anymore and they can watch the replay the next day.

Steve: Okay. And in terms of support, do you provide support to all the people who watch your webinars?

Essa: When they are watching a webinar– do you mean after they bought the products?

Steve: I mean after– yeah let’s say they bought the product. Yeah, let’s say they bought the product, yeah.

Essa: Yeah if they buy the product, yeah. We– it depends on the package. I mean, if you want to you can add support. Our $3000 program has email support; it also has a weekly group webinar which one of my head trainers runs. So they can get on a call every week and ask questions and interact with my head trainer, which she also allows them to present as well so they can get a student feedback and stuff like that, but that’s for $3000.

So it’s got to make sense financially, but if you are just starting out and you don’t have any money coming in, give away the whole house, give away everything for free as part of the package and then you put your price up when you are getting people successful. Because remember, once your calendar is full then you start putting the price up. I get a lot of people when I put the webinar to give and I say, “Throw in there some Skype sessions, throw in there email support and sell it for $297.” And they resist then I say, “Would you rather be busy and making a little bit of money or would you rather be not busy and not making any money?” You know what I mean?

Steve: That’s a lot of sense.

Essa: So I say, “Get busy.” If you are busy, busy people get stuff done and then you put the prices up. And next time you run it you go, “I’m putting the price up.” And then tell people on the webinar, “Guess what guys, this price is going up, okay? It’s going up. I’m going to do double the price very soon because I’m not going to have time to do this and they charge more money, so get it now while it’s cheap.”

Steve: So when does the actual website come into play? Do you always just do the webinars, but do you ever put that stuff on a website, like a membership site or is it always just webinars?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely. We’ve got a– we just build a membership site through WishList, WordPress. Wishlistmember.com I think they have a $97 plug-in and you plug it into WordPress. There is other sites out there like Kajabi.com and OptimizePress which is WordPress again, but you can basically build your own membership site or have someone build it for you for about $1000. Then you store those replay webinars that people paid for– you put them in there and you give them access to the membership.

You can charge them a fee but I recommend you just let them access the course they paid for because they’ve already paid for it for free. You can setup multiple levels and stuff like that, yeah. But we don’t spend a cent on that until we’ve made money, so we are only reinvesting money. It doesn’t make sense to spend stuff that you haven’t made on the business yet. So you got to reinvest a percentage of the money you’ve made into a membership site so that people can watch it after.

Steve: Okay. You know what’s hilarious about all this Steven is I thought…

Essa: You are doing it.

Steve: I’m doing it this way, but I thought it was very unconventional when I did it this way. Like, I launched without any content pretty much and I just kind of had buyers with the promise of content and then once I got these buyers, I started putting out the content. The only difference is I was doing it live to just a small set of people in the beginning. I wasn’t doing a whole bunch of webinars, but it sounds like your strategy would work a lot of better to expand and convert more people so.

Essa: Oh absolutely, absolutely.

Steve: Yeah.

Essa: It definitely works some. People say, “But Steve, doesn’t some people get upset that there is nothing there yet?” I know I always ask the audience. I always say, “Don’t ask me, ask the audience.” I say, “Who in the room here, who in this seminar room if I was selling a eight week webinar course for whatever price, $497 or whatever, who would rather watch the replay videos of those modules? Who would rather– put your hand up if you would rather watch the replay modules, or if you would rather me present that live to you each week where you can ask me questions at the end of each webinar.

Who would rather the replays, the video only? And always one or two people put their hand up but when I say, “Who would rather watch it live with me each week, and then I give you a copy of the replay if you can’t make it or if you want to watch it again?” And all the audience put their hand up. The audience wants to speak to a human being. This online that you can automate everything and whatever; they still want to be able to speak to a human being. They always prefer that over a video. Now they’ll take a video second, all right, they’ll take a video second.

So if you can show me how to build a eCommerce website in a video tutorial series that you’ve created, I’ll take it, but if you give me a choice then I can talk to Steve on the call each week and he’s going to run me through that eCommerce thing and I can put my hand up and ask a question and I get the replays, they are always going to take that option. So never be afraid to sell something that you haven’t created yet, just make sure you’ve got it created and it’s easy.

You just got to be one week ahead over the course or the modules. Now if you go halfway through and you go, “Guess what, I can probably create all the rest of them.” Create all the rest of them and send it to the customers and say, “Hey, I just created it all. If you’ve got any questions, email me. I’ll jump on a Skype call with you if you need to and whatever we are going to do to make you successful.” So it’s totally okay.

Steve: That is really great advice Steven. Hey man, I want to be respectful of your time. We’ve already been talking for 50 minutes, so just in enclosing where can people find more information about your webinar training classes?

Essa: Yeah, absolutely man. Well we finished the– I think we’ve finished the web business boot camp for this year, the tour. We did a world tour, my wife and I finished with that, but usually webbusinessbreakthrough.com is where we pull random attendees out of crowds and we did it all over world, but Steveessa.com just S-T-E-V-E-E-S-S-A.com– Steveessa.com is where you can check out my webinar where I talk about– I do a demonstration actually.

I pick someone on the webinar, do a webinar with them, and quickly show you how to automate the webinar, show you how to record and I also talk about the medicals and the module nuts, setting up webinars for other people and taking 50% of the company. And that’s– I’ve got one company that’s done like over $2 million now in three years, and I own half of that and that business partner has done 120 grand on a webinar with 13 people on there, and I make half of that and I’m not even there.

Steve: Crazy.

Essa: It’s a hugely powerful model. I call it the Medical center model where you get experts working for you. So in a medical center the model, the medical center owner is a smart one because he’s got the leverage, right? The doctors sort of pay a percentage, or pay a fee to him and her and they don’t have to go to work every day. So I’ll show you how to create a medical center model that you can make sales from.

Steve: Okay. And this is where you are sending them traffic from your list or is it just– how is this structured? What is your value add?

Essa: Yeah. Check out the webinar and you’ll see.

Steve: Okay, yeah. I’ll link up to it, I’ll link up to it.

Essa: It’s another podcast for you.

Steve: Okay.

Essa: There is many ways to do that. I don’t mean to be like avoiding, but there is many ways to do that. You can basically– a lot of businesses have lists already, but if they don’t you can yes absolutely set that up for your list, anything that you’ve got or you can go out and find JV partners for them, and make a cut of that, yeah.

Steve: Okay. All right, cool. I’ll link up all those resources in the show notes, and hey thanks a lot of coming on the show Steven. I really appreciate it.

Essa: It was my pleasure Steve. I hope people get value out of it and I hope more importantly you go out there and take action and get results.

Steve: All right man, take care.

Essa: Cheers man, bye-bye.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. After talking with Steven, I actually went back and re-recorded all of my sales videos for my six day mini course, and I’m actually seeing the results and his techniques actually work. For more information about this episode go to Myquitherjob.com/episode58, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not always make me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice for my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends, because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

057: How To Use Influencer Marketing To Make 65K in 4 Months Selling Satin Lined Caps

Emmanuel Eleyae

Today’s interview is with my friend Emmanuel Eleyae, who runs SatinLinedCaps.com along with several members of his family.

What I find interesting about Emmanuel’s story is that he tried a bunch of different marketing tactics early on with his online store and they all failed. And then he tried influencer marketing using You Tube and hit the jackpot.

In this interview, you’ll learn how Emmanuel found famous You Tubers to promote his products and the services he uses to continually market his satin lined caps.

You also learn what it takes to create your own textile based product from complete scratch. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Emmanuel runs his company with members of his family who live all across the globe
  • How and where to source textile products within the US
  • Why Emmanuel decided to go with influencer marketing to promote his online store
  • How to find contract manufacturers to produce your products
  • How much Emmanuel invested to start this business
  • Where Emmanuel found the materials to produce his products
  • How to manage quality control
  • How and where to find influencers to promote your products
  • Why Emmanuel chose YouTube for marketing
  • The different types of YouTube ad formats that influencers can use to promote your products

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have Emmanuel Elea with me on the podcast today. Now Emmanuel is someone who I ran into virtually on the ecommerce fuel forums and after hearing his back story I knew I wanted to have him on the show. Now Emmanuel and his sister sell satin lined caps, which are caps worn to protect hair from harsh conditions and extreme weather, and I was just chatting with Emmanuel before the interview before I hit record and it turns out to be a family business which I find very cool.

Now here’s the thing while their product is completely unique, it’s actually hard for them to market effectively because to the uneducated buyer these caps are just another article of clothing and as a result Emmanuel had a very hard time marketing his caps early on until he struck gold with a marketing medium that I’ve actually yet to try with my store and I’m eager to try after talking to him. And with that intro welcome to the show Emmanuel, how are you doing today man?

Emmanuel: I’m doing great. Good to be here.

Steve: Yeah so give us the background story and tell us about how satinlinecaps.com came to being, how you hooked up with and decide to make this into a family business with your sister.

Emmanuel: Sure absolutely, so about a year ago a year and a half ago, we took a read of “The Lean Start Up,” and I was working at Amazon performing at the time line performance when I was there. My sister actually we read it and we actually talked– she had an idea, she was in school for fashion at the time making clothes. So she had a problem that she had and she created a product, a satin line cap to help her you know because all the stuff in the market you know satin bonnet or other silk wraps and things like that and she kind of make it look like Angel Mimer walking around the house.

She wanted to be fashionable so she came up with the idea said hey she came to me a little while ago, about a year ago and said I have this idea, what do you think? I said well Lean Start Up stuff we’ve been reading ask 30 people what they think and everyone she talked to gave great reviews and they really loved it. And so I all right looks like we’re on to something, we put on Etsy, initially got some traction, got to about selling one or two a day and I said all right I think we’re on to something here. So I actually quit my job and my fiancé quit her job, and we decided to do it full time.

Steve: So you quit your job before it started making significant money?

Emmanuel: Yes it was kind of a…

Steve: Wow, okay.

Emmanuel: Leap of faith but at the same time I was a little bit ready, I was in the [Inaudible] [00:04:01] world and I had done that three years. I was in the military before Amazon and I have always wanted to do something entrepreneurial and here we were with a product where 30 different people spoke highly of it. So we were like why don’t we test it out, we ran 1000 units repeat to kind of test it out and it started going, so it was like I think this is time.

Steve: So let’s discuss the validation process here a little bit. So you mentioned you sold on Etsy and you asked 30 friends. Is there anything else that you did to just kind of give yourself the courage to take that leap of faith?

Emmanuel: Really it was– she asked her friends and then also I went around asking. So there were folks that I knew and some other ladies that I’ve been talking to kind of make it people that don’t know her potentially. And so every time I started talking to them they were like yeah I’ll take it, and I also asked would you pay for it? You know which was the big question and they all said yes, a resounding yes.

And they would describe to me the problem because I really don’t have hair, I’m bald and I know you can’t see me, but I don’t fully understand all that goes into hair care. They started to explain to me the concept and once I knew the people I was talking to were able to speak to me about what my product does, it was like okay I think we’re on to something here and that was enough for me.

Steve: Okay and then what’s kind of cool about your business is it’s a family business and it kind of spans all across the globe. So how did you kind of get all your family members on board and how does the interaction work since everyone lives in a different place?

Emmanuel: Sure it does get challenging, there’ll get challenge in time out of miscommunication at times but we do focus heavily on you know weekly meetings just to get everybody circle back in. We do Skype calls and a lot of phone calls. I’ve got my dad in Nigeria who helps to sell, and we have some relatives there. My sister is in Chicago right now going to school for journalism. I’ve got another sister and my mom down in Southern California who do the finance and some of the marketing, and me and my fiancé here we run the warehouse and do the operations. So we’re all over the place and we just focus on regular communication.

Steve: That’s cool, so I actually run a class as you know and a lot of my students are kind of interested in creating articles of clothing. So I’m a little curious how did you get your caps designed and manufactured, and can we just kind of go through that process?

Emmanuel: Sure we can and this is where my sister did the lion share. She did it all with help from my other sister and my mom, but she kind of was going through school and taking classes on making clothes, probably through January through the spring of last year. So she studied patterns and you know came up with the idea for the cap and it became challenging at that point– how do I scale? So she started looking around and researched contract manufacturers. At one point we were thinking of going with American Apparel which I didn’t even know they offered you know time on their machines to run stuff for you.

But we were actually able to find three or four manufacturers and through just the sampling process she would send them cut sheets and different specs for them to design out. They would send her back a sample, and the one that looked the best was the factory that we worked with down in Los Angeles [inaudible 00:07:12] factory. And it looked the best and they did a good job, so that’s where we chose to do our limited running and we’ve been using them ever since.

Steve: So how did you actually find these contract manufacturers?

Emmanuel: I think she pretty much stayed online. She went through online I remember she pinned a couple of times and there were a couple of websites– I have to get it for you– that kind of…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Have a breakdown of here’s you know people who do manufacturing for this and some people who do manufacturing for that and I think Thomas Ned does some stuff like that try to aggregate a lot of different manufacturer’s state site.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of the design it was completely done by your sister?

Emmanuel: Yeah.

Steve: So you didn’t have to hire anyone to do that?

Emmanuel: Yeah, so it’s actually one of those like things in the story that always intrigue me that she went back to school to learn how to make clothes, and she took about three or four classes and she learned just enough to solve the problem that she had and she was done with school. So she was in the right class that taught her how to work with fabric, cut fabric, build sheets and specs, and different things and once she felt comfortable we went forward.

Steve: Okay and at any point did you actually consider doing any of the manufacturing overseas or were you planning on doing it in the US the whole time?

Emmanuel: And we have and that’s where I have been kind of reading your blog to figure out how really it’s all kind of happened so quickly because…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: As I said we launched the business since September 1st so we’re only about five months old or six months old or so. And it’s just a matter of time now just researching and figuring out who to go with. I’ve heard enough horror stories that it should be approached with caution.

Steve: Just for the sake of the listeners, one of the reasons why I had Emmanuel on is because he had– he actually had really explosive growth early on in the first couple of months of his business. I actually don’t remember the numbers Emmanuel, would you mind sharing what your first like two months numbers were in terms of your caps.

Emmanuel: Sure, it’s actually a funny story because I remember in September– September through October we were selling on Etsy and we were getting one to three a day, and it really wasn’t moving. So I set a goal you know let’s get to five slaps a day you know and then we hit this YouTube thing like I mentioned earlier. We took off, we were selling over 100 a day, so in about two and a half months we sold about $60,000 worth of product, completely emptied out our inventory for our MVP, and had 350 back orders before we could even get more inventory ready.

Steve: That’s awesome. Yeah so more on the manufacturing side, so you’re getting stuff I guess you mentioned in LA. How does the pricing differ between manufacturing in the US versus overseas, and is there a huge price discrepancy?

Emmanuel: Absolute– I’m still not entirely sure of that, I can tell you things I’ve heard like we were able to speak to a contact we made like a target in some other place and they gave us kind of upscale where they would make catch for about two to four dollars. That’s making 500,000 in a year– we’re making right now probably about eight to ten dollars a piece so…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: A little bit more– quite a bit more but to be able to say the word made in America and have turnaround time in four weeks is pretty beneficial to us.

Steve: Yeah and then how has quality control been?

Emmanuel: It’s challenging in terms of us not being able to go in while it’s being made and that’s mainly because we’re not actually physically in LA, none of us are there. I think they’d allow it if we wanted to. But in terms of the quality we haven’t had any issues with quality. Mainly the issues would come from our limited experience in design like Grace did go to school and she’s learned, but we’re still trying to figure out how a label should be applied you know and making sure that we communicate that well to them, you know the little minutia details. How the stitches should be applied and little things like that.

We had one design challenge that we had in our last run where they’d given us feedback that the way we made the label actually adds two weeks to the time to make a slap or for setting that cap which we didn’t know. So we tried to change it by adding a fold but that didn’t really work because then they weren’t able to sell it a certain way, so there was actually a little bit of a lip on the label, it wasn’t sewn down with the fold. So it actually as you pull off the slap it might catch on your hair a little bit sometimes. So some of those– that was more our fault and I talked to them, I was like hey what’s going on, and they said hey that’s what you guys made.

We’ve gone back replaced those units and now we’re going with a different label maker who can actually give us the folds that we need. But you know those little learnings I think, working with a manufacturer who works with small business and that was what we stated. So they work with small business, doing limited batches, giving the flexibility to make those kind of changes and correct them.

Steve: What was the minimum run that one of these manufacturers demanded?

Emmanuel: So for us it was 1000 units.

Steve: 1000 units okay. All right it’s not too much.

Emmanuel: No, not bad at all.

Steve: And in terms of just working with them in terms of fixing things, so would they just make a sample and then you would comment on it, and then they would redo another one?

Emmanuel: Absolutely.

Steve: Or, okay.

Emmanuel: We did have to…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Provide the materials though, so that’s one thing they didn’t provide.

Steve: Okay and where did you shop for materials?

Emmanuel: So we went– at first we started– this is not an interesting story. We just went to the garment district and we picked them up almost retail you know it’s– they call them [inaudible 00:12:40] and I’ve learned all this myself the hard way but these [inaudible 00:12:44] you go down there and you pick some material off the show and you just take it right down to the manufacturer and they’ll produce a sample for you. Where that became interesting is that’s how we did it the first time.

We sold all our units and didn’t really have exactly what the skew was, what the color was color was, color matching the exact materials and when we went back to produce a round of 5000 units, it was almost completely different colors for the same color we’d chosen if that makes sense. Because the way they work is you take the overruns from larger manufacturers and just whatever is there happens to be there. So there are some colors we couldn’t even find anymore in that district. So we had to go through an actually get a textile wholesaler who is also in LA, Synergy Textiles and now we’re far more standardized with our colors, our patterns, our materials.

Steve: And, how many different styles did you launch with? I was just curious.

Emmanuel: We launched with five colors.

Steve: Five? Okay.

Emmanuel: Yeah just to keep it simple. Now I think we’re up to 11and we’re getting ready to produce four or five more colors and probably three or four more sizes as well, because there was a lot of feedback we got was you know I love the cap, but it’s just too tight or it’s just too big.

Steve: Actually that’s another question I had, how do you determine how many of each size to produce?

Emmanuel: I’m learning that now. In fact I’m in schedule to go through that this weekend talk through and my sister is actually going to design now in different sizes and we’re going to try again like we did before and just talk to some folks who have different head sizes and see how comfortable it fits. So that that way we try going through and finding sizing guides– I know they’re out there somewhere. I just haven’t been able to find them like with the general public wears what sizes, the average size for head size and things like that which she did a little bit to get the initial one, because it was one size fits all. So now as we get more and more gradual it’s harder and harder to find that information, so if you’re aware of any or if anybody knows I’d love to get some help on that.

Steve: Yeah I mean it’s a good question because your product is a little more complex and it actually needs to fit very well, right? It’s not like a t-shirt or something else along those lines so…

Emmanuel: For many reasons because I mean you’re sleeping with the cap, so you’re going to be wearing it for an extended period of time, so it needs to be comfortable.

Steve: Yeah is there any way– have you looked into making it adjustable, I don’t know if that’s possible but…

Emmanuel: Yeah that’s, you’re getting fancy there sir, but absolutely that would be the ideal for us. So after we get this run done and we’re getting stocked up again, meet these challenges that’s one that’s on our road map to try and work through that would be the ideal, if we could just make it something that’s tied off or stable, we can go back to having less skews because from the operation side the last thing I want is just an explosion of skews to hold here at the warehouse and to track forecasting for it to make and different things like that.

Steve: Absolutely, so any lessons learnt that you care to share with the listeners about just about the whole manufacturing process?

Emmanuel: Yeah, so give yourself enough time, that’s the biggest thing because we kind of ran into a situation. We had plenty of time in our initial run and everything was great and was sitting in a warehouse, but once it sold out we were sitting there with no inventory and orders coming in, and it was tough to get the manufacturer to work at the pace that we needed. So in those cases I don’t know if it’s give yourself enough time or is it a matter of optimism– gauging optimism and forecasting. If we had more inventory– but again we would’ve had to have known.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: So it’s kind of a fringy thing, but for sure give yourself time. It makes it much easier if you show up– like this inventory run we’re doing now, we already have inventory, so we’re going to have to invest a little bit more, and we’re going to make another run early enough, so that we can do the sampling. Now so for our labels we’re going to actually– if we’re changing anything to any piece, we’re going to send it to the manufacturer so he can make it at his scale, at his– in his way and then send it back to us.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: We’re starting this early we wouldn’t have the ability to do that unlike our hurry up run, it was early, here is the materials and go.

Steve: Sure. Yeah no I mean I think that happens to everybody, like we actually run out of inventory this winter because– and we’ve been running for multiple years because we started selling at Amazon and we just couldn’t keep up with the demand there, so I mean it’s really hard to predict.

Emmanuel: Yeah. But at least giving yourself enough time allows you like we talked about that label issue we had.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: If we had the ability to at least maybe if we don’t have time, just make enough time for that part. So that way you can see if you made a change, make sure they make it the way you want because just looking at it we would’ve caught that issue with the label.

Steve: Right.

Emmanuel: So even if we rushed– I think that would be the advice I give is always give yourself enough time for sampling.

Steve: And in terms of just like a minimum investment to create an article of clothing, how much would you recommend?

Emmanuel: So we started– I had some money saved up. Our entire business started with $10,000.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So with that we were able to get the initial run of inventory, get a developer– not a developer, a designer to make our website which is a whole another topic, lesson learned there. And also get the Etsy store set up, get the little mix and match like a printer little warehouse signed up for several such services like stamps.com and things like that.

Steve: Sure. Okay so let’s talk about some of the other issues with your business regarding marketing your products. So what were some of the other challenges that you faced when you first launched?

Emmanuel: I will tell you they can all probably be wrapped up in one big one, it’s probably just inexperience.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: We just didn’t know what we didn’t know, but to be more specific things like ads– that’s a whole world into itself and there’s ads everywhere. There’s Google ads, there Etsy ads, Facebook, Twitter, all the different kinds of ads that can be done and we just really didn’t know. So we tried and we experimented, we run Etsy ads, and we didn’t see much alloy from that, so we ended up cutting that off about two three months in. We run Google ads and I’m not sure if we had the right strategy with that because it might have worked it might not, but the other thing was the piece of analytics and we run Google analytics. So even when we had the big run up where we were selling over 100 units a day, we weren’t even sure where our customers were coming from and so…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Analytics, the ads, the different things that we can do, social media, we were trying it all.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And we weren’t really tracking it well which we kind of rectified it a little bit now using– being very disappointed with the track of our links and Google analytics set up and some other things.

Steve: So I’m just curious since you sell caps like what keywords did you bid on with some of the clasper click tools, and was it hard to kind of differentiate your product when you were bidding on search terms?

Emmanuel: So for us it wasn’t that difficult because in terms of the satin lined cap, there aren’t many out there and in fact most of them are called satin bonnets or sleep caps, so they’re…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: Pretty niched kind of words, but the other problem with that is that there wasn’t much search traffic for it. So it was kind of a chicken or egg thing you know do we go with what we want and then not get the traffic, or do we go with one of these high level terms that get traffic but really doesn’t fit for us.

So those were a lot of the words that we used satin lining sleep cap, we’ve moved on now to trying other things that are broader as we’ve defined, because we actually did do surveys to get feedback from our customers on what they like about it. So now we’ve moved into more hair care type terms. So things that they say they liked about it is that it minimized dried hair, I don’t have to deal with it in the morning, my tangled hair, frizzy hair. It prevents a lot of these problems, so now we’re using more of those key words for our ads.

Steve: I see that’s actually a very interesting point that you just brought up. So people aren’t searching for satin lined caps per se in volume, but they are searching for ways to improve their hair which kinds of just opens up a huge market right there.

Emmanuel: Exactly.

Steve: Right. Okay.

Emmanuel: That’s probably been our biggest learning over this, it’s just the messaging and the positioning of the cap because we started out trying to set up a satin cap that is fashionable which there’s a very small segment of population that actually knows what a satin cap does for your hair and protects your hair. So we were broadening it out, so the education aspect of it. And then the words that we use and the education that we were doing kind of had to fit in with what they used it for, not necessarily the fact that they had one.

So that market– we could go out to that market, but we’re going to have a bigger market, so we needed to go after the problem that this generic satin or silk solves, which is the dry hair or the hair frizzy hair, keeping moisture in your hair, protecting you from the cotton pillow case. And so once we started going after the problem it solved versus you know the product itself, yeah it made things a lot easier to pick keywords that are much higher and terms to search from.

Steve: And you can probably end up charging more too because I know– I’m sure there’s a lot of people out there who would be willing to pay a lot of money to have healthy hair.

Emmanuel: Exactly.

Steve: As opposed to just another fashion item.

Emmanuel: And that was one of the biggest things we learnt and the feedback we got from our customers themselves. You know when we are selling to people who already bought a satin cap are competing with very low cost solutions out there, you know a durag which is not a very expensive product and our price point is much higher than a durag. However, the solution we are offering is not a durag, it’s not a satin bonnet, it’s also fashionable cap to that market.

And then to folks that don’t even know about the satin it’s kind of fashion as a given, it needs to look good, I don’t want it to look like a satin bonnet otherwise I’ve corrupted satin bonnet. And so now I get the benefits of healthy hair, wear a fashionable cap and really a lot of the messaging we’re starting to build in now is kind of things we are learning is you know when we go pay $120 to get a nice haircut or blowout or something at the salon, it may last you two or three days. But if you sleep with the satin lined cap you’ll double or triple that investment. It will last a week or more of that hair style that you put in.

So that messaging you know now all of a sudden if I spend $120 now lasts twice as long that’s 2o, 40 bucks. If you can actually do that math it’s like an investment of $30 in a slap isn’t that much. And I can do this over and over again for months, and that’s a drop in the bucket compared to the benefit of the bucks.

Steve: So let’s talk about that message. So how did you actually end up finding the medium to get the message out about your products?

Emmanuel: The medium– so for us it was YouTube.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: YouTube has been the biggest benefit for us and not even like ads on YouTube; it was pretty much getting sponsored videos. So like I said I don’t have much hair, I’m not really big into the hair care space. So it was really– the next thing was well can I find people who look like that. And then add in can I find people who have hair, who have this problem and also have their own audience who they engage with visually. YouTube was the perfect platform for that. and I wish I could say that I planned it that way, but it was one of you know 20 different things we are trying and it took off.

And we had several YouTubers reach out to– not reach out but we reached out to them and they agreed to wear it. They talked about how the slack has become a staple in their routine. You know it went beyond just a satin bonnet or durag or a cap and it became this is what I used to keep my hair from freezing and tangling, and I use it in my routine every four days. You know when I wash my hair this is what I wear afterwards. You know they made it very clear how that someone who has never even heard of this or even seen one, could engage with and use it to solve a problem that they have.

Steve: So can you kind of go into depth about the process, like how did you find the people to reach out to and then what did your initial contact look like and how did you get them to actually endorse your product?

Emmanuel: Sure and that’s– there is two different ways we did it. Now the first one I’ll go into is just the manual time consuming kind of we went door to door basically. So went on YouTube, we found personalities we thought would fit great with our brand, fit great with the product that we were looking for and would get into the healthy lifestyle. And then we just went to the about section and then just click send them a message. But before we did that we actually crafted an email. So the email itself we had had in there who we were, what we are doing, how excited we were about this opportunity for their viewers– we tried to close it on their viewers. Viewers would like this product. We think it will be a good fit.

And then we actually created our own YouTube video where was my sister basically saying you know I love your brand, thank you for even being interested or taking the time within this video. I would love to partner with you in solving this problem for you and your viewers. So we hit the send message, sent it to all of them. We did it for 32 when we initially launched on September. We didn’t hear anything back for almost two months, like it took a while. And then we only heard back from about three of them. And one of them actually was the only one who said yes he admired us and we want now to give it a shot.

And she was the one that really built our business because she had a subscriber base of about 250,000 subscribers. Put in the video and was very passionate about. She in fact I’ve just got an email from her the other day. She still uses the product. She really liked it. And that came through in the video.

Steve: So you sent out 30, 10% responded and maybe just– you had a 3% hit ratio on someone who actually create the video to endorse the product. What was in it for the YouTube person?

Emmanuel: So in that respect, in that instance there was nothing upfront.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: You know we initially later on we did provide a donation just hear please continue doing what you are doing, like you are doing a great job and the message you have resonates. So we brought her a donation later. But really there was nothing in it for her except the love of the product which…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: That is why it was so successful. There were other You Tubers. There was one other– I’m sorry I missed that that actually did reply about three months later. They got us ready for December, she would you know agreed to include us in her December favorites video. Now that one was up front, she is very upfront about it. You know I have a slot open if you want it just 500 bucks. So sure…

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And at that point we had seen the result of the first one, so $500 wasn’t much of an issue at all, so yes please do it. And sure enough we had– I think we are getting a 10X ROI on each of those videos.

Steve: Yeah actually can we comment on what happened after that first video once it went live?

Emmanuel: Sure after that first video I think we generated about– we sold about 40 or 50 a day after the very first video. She had– and when I say the first video she did two first. So the first YouTube…

Steve: Oh wow, okay.

Emmanuel: She did the second video. We actually were over 100 a day. And within in less than a week we had sold out all of our inventory. And then the December video and it gets kind of muddy, I can’t really tribute exactly how. But I know with all the YouTube page stuff that we did, we were also tried to work with FameBid and you know they’re like 1,200 bucks. One made $24,000 that month.

Steve: So how does it work? Do you give them some sort of special tracking link or a coupon code, like how do you track these sales?

Emmanuel: And that goes back to the lessons learnt about the tracking. At the time I didn’t track anything at all.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So now we are starting to do that. For every video that gets made, they get their own specific tracking link so we can see exactly which traffic came from YouTube, from that You Tuber and from that video.

Steve: And there is really no way for someone to actually click on something, right? They actually have to type in the URL on their browser. Is that right?

Emmanuel: For the YouTube video?

Steve: Yes.

Emmanuel: No they– in the comments box, they can actually have the link and so they can put now here is what this video is about, here is a transcript and then here is a link to all the products in this video.

Steve: I see.

Emmanuel: What we did see was there was a lot of direct in Google analytics. A lot came from direct during that month. So I’m thinking what happened is they watched it and then a few days later remembered the satin lined cap thing and we have a lot of our search– the highest keyword search where they would get us from the terms satin lined cap.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So my guess is they saw it, they thought about it then came back and bought.

Steve: And how do you actually reach out– I haven’t done this before so how do you actually reach out to a random YouTube person? There is a contact button you say on the…

Emmanuel: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: If you watch the video or if you go to their channel– not the actual video, the channel there is an about section. And so they’ll have– I think it has a little like send me a message button or sometimes what a lot of them will have if you get into the YouTubers who have 20, 50,000 subscribers. They’ll let you have their business inquiries email here. They will work with a multi channel network.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: I’ve run into a lot of those which were agencies, which those can be pretty hostile because you’d rather pay the YouTube fee and also the agency fee as well which can be pretty high.

Steve: So you mentioned that it took several months for one of these people to respond. So and I understand this is actually a large part of your strategy today. So how do you kind of streamline the process so that you are constantly getting mentions?

Emmanuel: Sure and that was another one we would get– we heard from a friend of ours you know that there was a site called FameBid. And so that was one thing we started doing in November kind of low key. That’s where that extra you know 6, 700 bucks came from is we just put out basically your own the website. You put out a campaign saying we are a brand looking for YouTube personalities. And so they put that out, they have a network of about 6,000 personalities they work with, and people bid on your proposal. They send you proposals. So a lot of them came in 90, $100.

They’re pretty clear that you know they’re people just kind of up and coming if you have that low bit of amount you can bid. You just send a proposal off from 100 to 250, 250 all the way up over $1,000. So I just said ours are very small just $100 to $250, and I got folks who had you know 10,000 subscribers, 5,000 subscribers. But either way their bids were low 90 bucks, 50 bucks and they would produce videos. So that’s where we had eight of them produced for us. And so at the same time that the lady who was doing the December favorites video that had charged us 500, they were coming out at the same time. So that’s kind of what made it muddy.

Well fast forward to January I kind of wanted to re-engage that and go very aggressive with it. So actually when we found out that they have what’s called a brand VIP program where they will actually assign you an account manager who does all that leg work for you.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: So now it’s incredible and I’m kind of my goal is to just set a budget of $5,000 every month, talk to other cap manager, and then they go out there and with that budget I think with this budget– just going around she was able to find 11 different YouTubers and really there was very little input from us. She was giving a track of the links and she will give us the videos when they are– she will give us the names of the YouTubers for us to approve, then they will give us the videos when they are ready for us to approve and then they go out.

Steve: So I had a question about how you kind of decide which YouTuber will actually provide an ROI for you. Like do you actually screen their videos and do you get an idea of how many people actually view their video once it actually goes live, like what’s the process?

Emmanuel: Sure and that’s– part of that whole learning that we did was trying to guess. So we had the initial getting the list of 32. And that was really just my sister who created the product and my other sister is dead. The lady is in the business actually looked at who would this work best for and who can spread it best, and so we just get feel an intuition. And then from that we actually use that same kind of gut feeling intuition for the proposals that came in, because when we put out a proposal we got like 40 something YouTubers that came back, and they all put it in there what they can do for us. And there are six different types of videos you can make.

And we just tried a whole bunch of different types, we had favorites videos going out, we had [hall] videos, we had tutorial videos. From that after having about nine or ten of them done, and of course seeing the most successful one that we had, it was a routine.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: The videos that work best for us are the ones where someone was saying not, “Hey look what I bought, this is great,” or someone sent this to me. It was someone saying, here is the problem with my head, this product solves that problem phenomenally and I’m going to show you how I use it so that you can you them the same way– a tutorial video.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: That worked extremely well for us. So now all our videos that we are having made are just that.

Steve: So when these YouTubers make these videos, is your product the only product that’s mentioned?

Emmanuel: Not always.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And if you use something like FameBid you can specify that, like so to take away the FameBid the two videos we had downloaded two personalities. One was a December favorites videos where other products were being mentioned. Actually both of them were. In fact in the original YouTuber she also had other products she basically called it her nightly hair care routine. So at first it kind of seemed like we don’t want to be mentioned with others, but we also had the competing idea that you know we don’t want to have a video just about ours because it would be obviously a sponsored video.

Steve: I see.

Emmanuel: Unless we do a good job. So we kind of wanted to work it in. So it actually worked out well. And so when they had the December favorites where it was just here is a lot of different products, it didn’t do as well as the one that said here’s the products with specific pinpoint.

Steve: Got it.

Emmanuel: So if we had three or four shampoos and different things, and then our SLAP as part of that, and so people were going to buy all of them.

Steve: So what are the six types of videos?

Emmanuel: If I remember correctly there is the [inaudible] [00:34:38] there is the…

Steve: What’s that first one?

Emmanuel: A [inaudible] [00:34:40] is just you know they went shopping and they brought a whole bunch of stuff backward then.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: You know they are opening their bag you know, there is get ready with me videos which is kind of like the routine video I’m describing. There is tutorial videos where you are showing someone how to do something. And if you give me a moment I can actually pull it up.

Steve: Okay, yeah I’m just curious. This is all new to me, so it’s very interesting.

Emmanuel: Okay. Then there is specific like sponsored videos where it’s a video where it’s just you. Just you and your product and that’s it.

Steve: Okay. And are they required to say that it’s a sponsored video?

Emmanuel: I think so, I’m not sure the rules on that, but I think if they bought it themselves they don’t have to say it’s sponsored video, I don’t know. Don’t pull me on that.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: But if it was sent to them I think most of them are pretty good about mentioning, “Hey this was sent to me.”

Steve: Okay. I think that was what four?

Emmanuel: Four, yeah I’m trying to find…

Steve: There is two more.

Emmanuel: Yeah there is two more out there that I’m working on bringing in.

Steve: Actually you can probably just get back to me later on that.

Emmanuel: Sure.

Steve: I’ll just put it in the show notes, so it’s cool. So going forward with your business is this sort of influence to a marketer? Is that you are going to be your primary channel or do you have other things in the works?

Emmanuel: I’m sorry I missed the question but I actually found them.

Steve: Oh you did okay yeah why don’t we– so what were the last two?

Emmanuel: There was the review video, a plug mention, a [whole] video, a look book and that was one I forgot, a favorites video and a tutorial.

Steve: What’s a look book?

Emmanuel: A look book they actually put it on, but we did a few of these as well. They actually put it on and style it, because we are just one cap you know it’s hard to see what will that look like with my outfit. So they’ll do three or four different outfits with the cap on.

Steve: Oh I see. And how much– what’s the cost like depending on the audience? Like how would…

Emmanuel: It depends.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: With the fame of the platform you are able to just put out a proposal, and then they come back to you.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And I can give you kind of relatively I worked with a multi channel agency for a little bit. And for one YouTuber to do one video was $4,000, one on FameBid it was a 1000 for the same YouTube.

Steve: Interesting.

Emmanuel: So just the highlight how huge a difference it is when you work with them directly versus through an agency.

Steve: Okay, so for that $1,000 how many subscribers did they have?

Emmanuel: I think that one was well over 350,000 or 500,000, they had quite a few.

Steve: Oh wow okay. So this is like an alternative to television. And it sounds like it’s just as effective or more effective.

Emmanuel: It’s the equivalent.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: I think it’s– the more I read about it and there is others starting again to us, I’m reading other blogs and things, it truly is. And it’s surprising to see how many people actually sit and watch subscriber channels; it’s almost like sitcom television. Every week they have a regularly scheduled post where they put out a video and then in there, there may be even commercials and things like that.

Steve: Yeah.

Emmanuel: People watch that more than they do TV you know who and other things, it’s incredible. We spoke to celebrities in there and what’s nice is their fan bases are very-very targeted.

Steve: Yes.

Emmanuel: So you find one that fits your brand message, I mean it’s almost a slam dunk where you know even if five– 1% of their population actually goes and buys one, that’s enough to hit your monthly quarter at least for us at this stage.

Steve: Oh yeah for sure. So the other question that I asked you while you were looking things up was what else do you have in the pipeline in terms of marketing your shop besides the influencer marketing?

Emmanuel: Perfect. So we are doing a couple of other things. We learned through that process you know building lists. So we actually– you can believe it, we didn’t even have a email sign up form on our website when we first launched. So we started that and started collecting email address, we got about 2,000. And it’s true what they say about the there is money in the email list because now every two weeks we send out a list an email. And we’re getting probably about a 6% conversion just off of our emails.

Steve: Nice.

Emmanuel: So yeah that’s working really well. So we are really being very robust with that. We are tying it to a blog, we actually putting out more blogs. Our own YouTube videos like tutorials and how to wear it and things like that. Then we then send out through email and put it on to our blog and things like that.

Steve: So what’s worked the best so far, probably email I would guess.

Emmanuel: Absolutely by far email has been the best.

Steve: Okay and oh sorry…

Emmanuel: The main focus of our marketing efforts is along with the email and the blogs we are also in the social media. We are really tracking all that, I mentioned being very disciplined with trackable links and things. And I actually was listening to one of your podcasts, heard about mixed panel. So I probably will be getting that started soon just to kind to get a funnel going. And I’ve gotten some of the little bit more experiential landing pages. So for targeted responses to like ads if we start going that round with ads, have very specific you know this is why you are clicking and here is why you are here on the landing page.

Steve: Just curious what form of social media is working the best for you guys?

Emmanuel: Oddly enough Pinterest.

Steve: It’s not odd, it’s pour best also. Yeah.

Emmanuel: It converts well. We don’t get hardly any traffic from it at all, but it converts really-really well. We get a lot of engagement on engagement front just within the platform from Instagram, a lot from Instagram.

Steve: Interesting.

Emmanuel: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Emmanuel: And then we also have Facebook which works pretty well just an all around general you know poster, you can get some clicks through. It hasn’t converted hardly at all for us, but we do get click throughs from the site. And then Twitter we just haven’t really done much on that at all.

Steve: Yeah actually Twitter is something I haven’t tried yet either, but from what I’ve heard anecdotally it’s not as effective as the other platforms.

Emmanuel: Yeah.

Steve: Well that’s cool. So you mentioned “The Lean Start Up” as one of the books that kind of influenced you. Were there any other books as well that you kind of recommend that the listeners read?

Emmanuel: Sure, well for every single one of those you know I think I’ve read them all, Lean Start Up, [Inaudible] [00:40:48] now re-brandings coming out and customer development. I have actually been– I used to do a lot of reading books you know kind of game planning and I also love blogs. A lot of blogs running information, Quick Sprout, and things like that to figure out what the social media thing is. And ecommerce field of course I’m on there, there is a lot of clear information, I’m always impressed to see because it’s really niche, right?

Steve: Yes.

Emmanuel: There is not a lot out there for a specifically independent ecommerce store owners. So they’ve got a lot of niche content there and SEO models, I take a lot and look at a lot of them, and looks at their stuff as well.

Steve: That’s awesome. Well hey Emmanuel we’ve been chatting for a while now and I want to be respectful of your time. If anyone has any questions about influencer marketing or your products, where can they find you?

Emmanuel: Sure they can just reach out to me on my email emmanuel@gracerlayer.com, and I’m always more than willing to help out.

Steve: Cool and I’ll be sure to link that up in the show notes. Emmanuel thanks a lot for coming on the show, I really appreciate your time, and I’m just really excited with what you’ve been able to do with influencer marketing.

Emmanuel: Thank you so much. And if they want to come to the website too it’s Shopslaps.com.

Steve: Awesome, I’ll link that up. Thanks a lot for coming on the show Emmanuel.

Emmanuel: You take care.

Steve: Take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode as much as I did. What I like about Emmanuel is that he tried a bunch of different things without success, he didn’t give up, and then he stumbled upon the one marketing technique that vaulted his business to the top.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode57. And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequitherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

056: How JD Roth Started GetRichSlowly And Inspired A Personal Finance Blogging Revolution

JD Roth

Today’s interview is a very special to me because this person is someone who inspired me to start my own blog back in 2009. JD Roth is the founder of GetRichSlowly.org and he was one of my blogging idols early on.

Today, he writes at JDRoth.com and his blog is still one of the very few that I read on a regular basis. He’s an amazing writer and I love how he can make even mundane topics interesting through the power of storytelling. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How JD Roth got the idea for GetRichSlowly.org
  • The key to creating a successful blog
  • Why JD ultimately decided to sell his website
  • Why you should get more personal with your content
  • The power of storytelling
  • Why SEO shouldn’t be your number one priority
  • How GetRichSlowly.org made its money

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast. Today I have a very special guest on the show J.D. Roth, now for as long as I’ve been blogging, I’ve always only followed a handful of personal finance blogs and especially getrichslowly.org created by none other than J.D. Now I actually met J.D. inside of a Super Shuttle on the way to FinCon and I have to admit when I first saw him in the back seat behind me I was kind of star struck.

Here was the father, actually not the father the grandfather of personal finance blogging in the same van as me and I was pleasantly surprised to find that J.D. was super cool and down to earth. Now J.D. later sold Get Rich Slowly for a nice seven-figure sum, stopped blogging for a while altogether, went back and then recently left to start his to start a different blog altogether. And what I really like about J.D. is that he writes from the soul and all these articles are super personal, engaging, and we can all learn a lot from him on how to create a loyal audience. And with that intro welcome to the show J.D., how are you doing today?

JD: Thanks Steve, I’m doing great.

Steve: I thought you’d enjoy that grandfather of personal finance.

JD: Well you know people kept calling me the Godfather, but I’m not the Godfather, Flexo or Luke from Consumerism Commentary. He’s the godfather of personal finance blogging,

Steve: Yeah he certainly is and what does that make Jim then?

JD: Oh that’s a great question. We’ve got to come up with the name for him.

Steve: I don’t think he has a nickname yet, I’ll have to give him one.

JD: He’s like a mastermind.

Steve: The mastermind.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So J.D. give us a quick background story about GRS and just take us way back to when GRS got started.

JD: Sure, so I would say there is a lot of different threads that combined to lead to Get Rich Slowly and in retrospect this seems pretty clear that I was destined to start something like that, but I could never have predicted it. So I went through college, I got a psychology degree and while I was getting a psychology degree, I was also getting myself deep in debt, and not like student loans like a lot of people who go to college, but I was racking up debt in the form of credit cards. I graduated from college with a credit card habit. That credit habit just got worse as I as time went on.

Also this time I like writing I’ve always been a writer ever since I was in grade school, and so all these things are coming together, I got on the web the early days of the web. I had a web journal before it was called the blog; we used to call them web journals. And all of these things just kind of gradually let up so that in 2004, my then wife and I bought a new house, and on paper we could afford the house but in reality when we purchased it I felt like I was just drowning in debt because I had over $35000 in consumer debt. All of a sudden we’re taking on this new mortgage and is all sorts of work that needs to be done to this house, because it’s 100 year old house, and I just felt like I was really-really struggling.

Around this time some friends recognized that I was in need of help and so they recommended a couple of books, including Dave Ramsey’s Total Money makeover, and Your Money or Your Life by Joe Dominguez and Vicki Robin. And I read these books, I thought oh it kind of makes sense of and then I read some more books that I borrowed from a library and eventually I realized that there seems to be some common themes in these books. In one of the book one of the themes was that although there was no reliable way to get rich quickly, there were ways that people could get rich slowly.

And that so I wrote about this idea that you can get rich slowly, I wrote about this on my personal site Folded Space. And after I wrote about this for whatever reason, a lot of people liked what I had written, and it gave me this idea, maybe I can start a blog about personal finance. I thought it would be the first blog about personal finance. It turns out there were already some out there, including Consumerism Commentary from the Godfather Flexo.

And so I started Get Rich Slowly, I started to share my progress with money. I thought I can improve my own situation and maybe help other people improve theirs. And as just kind of an afterthought I put some ads on it because I thought maybe I can make some money along the way. And little did I know that this whole project would change my life in all sorts of ways, including financially.

Steve: So just curious when you first started writing, was the intention to make money or was it just more like a journal?

JD: Well, it wasn’t strictly a journal; I mean my personal site was more like a journal. Get Rich Slowly was definitely it was a way for me to hash out what I was learning about money. And so I gave my three goals where number one, improve my own situation and number two, to improve and to help other people improve their situations. And I definitely did start out with the intent to make money, but I thought maybe I would make $100 a month or $200 a month, just a little bit of money to help me get out of debt more quickly. I had no idea that it would become a business.

Steve: Okay and then you know when you were– you’re not a technical person are you J.D.?

JD: Moderately, I mean…

Steve: Moderately, okay.

JD: At one time I thought I was going to become a computer programmer, so I actually got a couple of gigs doing programming but…

Steve: Okay, and so in terms of putting up the website that wasn’t really a big deal for you, and did you invest a lot of money into this blog early on?

JD: No-no-no-no.

Steve: Okay.

JD: No way at all.

Steve: Okay.

JD: At first everything was hand coded back in the early days back when I said I had a web journal. I was hand coding my website. I say that my…

Steve: Oh okay.

JD: My current skills with web design are very 1998 because that’s just kind of where the flow is. I was on the cutting-edge in 1998 but never developed beyond that. So when it came to Get Rich Slowly, I used a standard WordPress out of the box theme. I adjusted a little bit, I flipped the header image I remember I thought it was pretty hilarious for doing that. And it was kind of an abstract thing so nobody could tell, and then I made some modifications with– I never made like heavy modifications.

Steve: Okay, now I was just curious for my own knowledge and…

JD: Yeah.

Steve: You know one thing that kind of drew me to GRS was just the quality of the content, like if you looked at some of the other personal finance blogs it was just more generic material, but everything with yours; it had a lot of depth to it. So I just wanted to ask a little bit about your content strategy early on, is it something that was deliberate in the way you were writing or…

JD: Well, I would say it was intentional. I don’t know whether deliberate is the right word, but I think calling it a strategy really overstates it.

Steve: Okay.

JD: I was just writing the way I write, I was just writing the way I talk. I was being natural. To me as you know, I’m a strong believer in story and the power of story, and so I don’t like, I know that when I go to websites or read books or magazine articles I don’t like the old dry stuff, so why do I want to produce that? I want to produce the kind of material that I would want to read and so that means putting some personality into it, talking about my cats, talking about my ex-wife and I we had a garden.

So I had an ongoing series where every summer, I would chronicle how we were doing with our garden and whether we were making money with the garden and so on. For a long time I talked about how I wanted to buy a mini cooper, I had this thing I really wanted my mini cooper, and so little touches like that made the site more personal I think.

Steve: I just have a question about that eventually you sold GRS.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So does writing in such a personal fashion affect the sellability of a site?

JD: Well it did to a degree, and when I sold the site, the people who were talking to me about buying it– this is one of the concerns they did have. And so as part of the purchase agreement what they wanted was for me to stick around for three years, they wanted to write a contract where I would stick around for three years…

Steve: Okay.

JD: So that it would be a gradual transition, and at the time that I sold it though I wanted out, I was done I thought, and so I turned that down. So they went back to the drawing board making back and they offered me 30% less and I could walk away. Now the ironic thing about all this is, I stuck around for the three years after all, I turned out I couldn’t tear myself away, I was so devoted to the site that I stuck around and I edited it, and I wrote for it and managed it. And so I shouldn’t have turned down that first offer.

Steve: Right, yeah who would have known?

JD: Yeah you make the best decisions you can with the information you have at the time.

Steve: So I’m just curious though if you were to give advice to someone starting their own blog today, would you still advice them to be a lot more personal about it?

JD: Yeah oh…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

JD: I feel like today– when I look at not just personal finance blogs but a lot of other blogs that are started today, so many of the sites are generic and they could be written by anyone. And so where’s the incentive for anybody to come back to that site? But on the other hand, if you look at the sites that seem to be successful, the new sites I think of somebody like Mr. Money Mustache and his site is relatively new.

And when he started it, it was at a time where people were saying well, nobody can have the same kind of success that Jim and J.D. and Flexo had because they started at the beginning. And yet you look at what Mr. Money Mustache has been able to do, he absolutely has had that total success, if not more so. And it’s because he’s been personal, he has a distinct style, and I think there are other people who are able to do this kind of thing too.

Steve: Okay and the only reason why I asked is you know I look at a whole bunch of different blogs and some of them are just like these blogs with a whole bunch of different authors and different personalities, but a lot of this stuff is on the more generic side, yet it still does pretty well.

JD: Of course.

Steve: And so I was just wondering what your opinion on you know going that route is as opposed to just going completely personal, like the way you and Mr. Money Mustache has proceeded.

JD: I don’t think there is anything wrong with that. I think it’s a set of different set of challenges. In some ways you make your content more accessible to everybody, and yet at the same time I think it’s like less interesting if that makes sense.

Steve: Yeah.

JD: It is like going to read just generic Wikipedia entry on a Roth IRA instead of a story from somebody…

Steve: Right.

JD: Writing about how they’ve done a Roth IRA.

Steve: Yeah no, I completely agree with you. I was just kind of curious why some of those sites are actually successful, like I’d much rather read a story based site like what you were saying that’s very personal. And you know it is just interesting to note that, so if you were to do it all over again you would not have changed anything in the way that you proceeded with GRS.

JD: No, absolutely not.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And you know I tried to have a balance, I think it’s important to note that not every article was a story based article. My story and my life formed the backbone of the site, and I shared any time something new or interesting happened I would share that. But at the same time, I would say most articles were actually spurred by something else that I’d read online.

So maybe I’ve gone to the money magazine website and they have an article on something, maybe I agreed with it or maybe I disagreed with it. And so I would quote a little bit from that article, the one that spurred my– whatever train of thought I had and then I will offer my own feedback to the article, either expanding on what was said or contradicting what they said, and so that’s how most of the articles at Get Rich Slowly worked.

Steve: Okay.

JD: They retained a personal voice, but they were often responses to other things that were out there on the web. And then there’s like a third type of article where it was just like purely informational, like How to start a Roth IRA, or which savings account is best and so on.

Steve: Okay and you know assuming that the content is good and was good, you know what was kind of your early strategy to obtain traffic?

JD: Again strategy implies much more than what I had. So I was very fortunate to have been around on the web from the early days of the web, and in fact I had also some online connections from even before the web came to existence from news groups and so on. And as time developed I participated in communities. There were different communities online, comic book communities, or movie serial communities, just different communities that I was a member of.

And so when I started Get Rich Slowly I’d shared this not like in a spammy sort of way, but I just like oh yeah you guys shared the comic book place forum, I just started this site and I wrote about how much I’m spending on comic books ha-ha-ha-ha, and I never thought oh I’m intentionally sharing this to try to get traffic. But the result is because I had these existing connections, and because I shared the site with the people in my personal life and there is another difference, a lot of people nowadays are anonymous bloggers, where as I was not anonymous in anyway and I share with a lot of people.

Steve: Right, yes.

JD: And by sharing with as many people as possible, I picked up some readers and some influential readers who started sharing the site in other places. For example Life Hacker, one of the editors at Life Hacker was an early reader of Get Rich Slowly, and so she would share articles around.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of– let’s say you had to start all over again, how would you proceed, you know in the present day?

JD: That’s a great question, Jim and Flexo and I have talked about this quite a bit actually because obviously we know a whole lot more than we did when we started. And obviously the whole ecosystem has changed, but at the same time I don’t think I could change much because it would be untrue to who I am.

Often at conferences I downplay the role of SEO and I really think that search engine optimization– I think too many people look at that as a primary or secondary method of obtaining traffic and success, and I would argue that it ought not be a primary or secondary concern, it should be a side effect. You should do all of the other things, provide great content, tell good stories, and do things and services to the readers first and the SEO is a byproduct or something that you go to when you don’t have anything else to do, then you look at the SEO and it’s like one of the last things you think of and not the first.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of GRS, Get Rich Slowly’s traffic, was it mostly search or was it mostly direct and recurring traffic?

JD: That’s a great question. I looked at it recently and told somebody the answer and I forget what it was to be honest, it was a large percentage was recurring traffic, like direct referral type stuff.

Steve: Okay.

JD: There is still plenty that was search based, but it was less so than most sites.

Steve: The reason why I’m asking you this is because and we’re going to probably get into this little bit later, but in terms of making money. A lot of times the search customers are the best customers in terms of a monetary standpoint.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And so it’s funny when you said that SEO should not be even the primary or secondary form of traffic that you should be focusing on, but so how do you kind of balance the monetary aspects with you know your own personal style?

JD: What I would argue is that the best SEO is a well written article because what happens when you have an article that people want to read and want to share, is that they do share it on other websites and it gets linked around. And so you could spend hours optimizing your keywords in a specific article on Roth IRAs to try and get traffic for Roth IRAs, but if somebody else goes along and writes a long story about how they set up their Roth IRA– I don’t know how you would actually make that interesting– this is just but– and it gets shared around at Reddit or on Facebook or at Life Hacker two.

All of these links back totally overpower your keyword optimization because this other person has managed to get high quality links and many of them, and so– now I’ve lost the track of what your original question was, but I feel like doing– following my method you do get SEO benefits, but it’s a different type of SEO if that makes sense. And another thing I would argue is if you build a large following and a huge number of readers, you end up getting a lot more search traffic too than you might think.

Steve: Okay, so let me just kind of rephrase that question a little bit.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So instead of focusing directly on SEO, so what do you focus on? So outside the content, let’s say the content is great in terms of social media, e-mail like what would you advise people to focus on?

JD: Well, that’s a great question Steve. For me I recognize that some of the things that I don’t do there’s actually value in it. I’m not very good with social media, you and I talked before you started recording about how I’m a very poor marketer. I don’t like marketing, I hate it in fact, I hate self promotion. And as a result, I don’t do a lot with social media that I could do and I know that…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Some of my colleagues and friends are very successful with social media, and you also mentioned e-mail lists. I know from talking with some of my friends and colleagues like Ramit Sethi from “I Will Teach You to Be Rich” and Chris Guillebeau from The Arts of Non-Conformity, these people prize their e-mail lists very highly, and they nurture them, they grow them and they protect them. And it’s because– you talked about search traffic being a source of income, well these people believe that the e-mail lists are actually the greatest source of income.

Steve: I would tend to agree with them.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So…

JD: I’ve never done anything to try market to an email list, and yet I recognize that people that I respect highly praise their value.

Steve: It’s interesting because you know the way Get Rich Slowly kind of evolved was pretty much– it sounds like through just straight word of mouth and through the power of the content, is that…?

JD: Yeah that’s the impression I get, I mean I didn’t do any kind of marketing, I didn’t do any kind of search engine optimization, it was just by being shared around.

Steve: Okay and what was the business model exactly and how did how did it make money?

JD: Okay that’s a question I can answer and then we’ll have– I want to point out that there’s– before I answer it directly, I want to point out that there’s no one right way to build a blog. There’s no one right way to make money online. There all sorts of different strategies that work and you’ve got– your listeners have to find the strategies that best fit their particular– I don’t know method or personality or whatever it is. And so the same is true with advertising or making money from the website directly. In my case, I very much followed the traditional magazine type of monetization and by that I mean I have the content and around the content were ads– were display ads and…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Those were Google ads, they were banner ads that people paid me directly for, and it was only after a couple of years that I came to understand the power of affiliate ads. I didn’t– it was Jim Wang actually, he told me at the very first blogging get together that I ever went to in San Francisco. He’s like JD, how come you have not monetized your savings account page? I was like I don’t know what you mean, and so he said well you can do these affiliate programs and you’ll get paid every time somebody signs up for a savings account. I was like oh all right, I’ll try it.

It totally revolutionized my model and but nowadays I’ve also seen that there are people who like Remit initially, with I Will Teach You To Be Rich, he used the site more as an advertisement for himself. He didn’t monetize the site directly, but he was trying to promote himself to get speaking gigs, and then to sell his print books. And nowadays, he uses it to promote his courses.

And Chris Guillebeau has used his site to market e-books and other products, and I’ve had a little bit of taste of that because my latest project, which we don’t have to go into much depth but I’m happy to talk about, is a course that I did for Chris Guillebeau about personal finance. And so that was the first time I’d done any really non-traditional type income strategy I guess.

Steve: This is all really interesting because you know I had Jim Wang on the show earlier.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And his strategy for monetizing his blog was to rank for specific search terms and then go through affiliate offers, and it’s just interesting hearing both your perspectives, different perspectives on how to monetize a blog I guess, so…

JD: Well, and that’s why Jim and Flexo and I we’ve talked the three of us at some point opt to form a partnership because we each have very different skill sets. And yet we work well together, we know each other, we trust each other, and I suck at the whole search engine optimization stuff. I don’t like it, Jim is good at it, he likes it, so if we worked in a partnership that could be his focus, I could focus on creating some content. It’s an interesting thing, but we don’t have any kind of firm plant, but we’ve definitely talked about it.

Steve: Yeah I mean Jim is really good at optimizing something to death.

JD: Yes.

Steve: And extracting every last dollar out of something I think and yeah your content is awesome.

JD: Thanks.

Steve: I mean you’re just a natural writer.

JD: Thank you.

Steve: So let’s talk a little bit about some of the challenges early on in the early phases of Get Rich Slowly.

JD: Okay.

Steve: How does one get those advertising placements? How does one get those affiliate offers and get them to actually convert?

JD: Well, I don’t know if I’m going to have any useful information for you on this particular topic. For me again I started with the Google ads and anyone can get AdSense or at least I think…

Steve: Sure.

JD: Anyone can get AdSense, it’s not necessarily going to convert, but if you have enough traffic, especially on particular pages, you will make some income. Eventually, I had people approach me directly and offer display ads.

Steve: Okay.

JD: So figuring out how much to charge was a very difficult thing for me. I didn’t know I mean this is still back in earlyish days and you kind of had to feel things out. I would suspect that even today people had to fill things out. You don’t want to charge so much that you scare off advertisers, but on the other hand if you don’t charge enough you’ll leave money on the table. And so figuring out what people are willing to pay is a very important thing. With the affiliate offers I know that nowadays the market has changed somewhat. I hear about people all the time who are being dropped from programs.

Steve: Yes.

JD: Because they don’t convert enough. And so that’s actually an interesting challenge and I don’t know– I feel like if that’s happening to you and your monetization strategy is to use affiliate programs but you don’t have enough traffic, well then you’ve got to find ways to build traffic. You’ve got to change your focus for a while and maybe not focus on the affiliate program. Get rid of them altogether and instead focus on something else until your site has enough traffic that you can say, hey let me try it again.

Steve: Well let me ask you this you mentioned that Jim came to you and said, hey how come you are not monetizing your savings account article.

JD: Right.

Steve: What did you change to– did you just throw an affiliate link at the end?

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And that was it– okay.

JD: So what I had– the way the savings account article was structured in 2007, 2008 it was just– it was no more than me asking which online savings account is best. Our online [Inaudible] [00:27:32] savings account is best. And it was an honest question, I didn’t– I wasn’t thinking about SEO or anything. I was asking my readers because I didn’t have an online savings account. And I said okay I’m thinking about getting one, here are some of the ones I found and the rates they have. And back in 2007, 2008 rates were higher, and what you think of these accounts and which ones do you guys prefer?

And I had no links to start with. All I had was the information about their interest rates and links– well I had links to the sites but they weren’t affiliate links. And I got hundreds of comments; I got all sorts of traffic from that. And so about a year later was when Jim recommended that I add the affiliate links and I did, and they were just simple affiliate links for whatever programs I could find. And I didn’t do anything else other than that.

Steve: No that makes– I mean just the topic of that article just kind of lends very naturally to affiliate marketing actually.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And it sounds like it wasn’t intentional.

JD: No it wasn’t.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And even when I added the links I didn’t put up banner ads or anything like that. I just put the links on the– well for each individual account itself. Now one thing I will say Steve is even though I was never good at the advertising, I was pretty savvy about when I saw that I was getting an influx of traffic from some place I would quickly go add a line or two to my article at the bottom saying, hey if you like this you should sign up for my RSS feed or my email.

And I don’t remember exactly how I did it; I don’t know if there are still there the company that bought me recently might have taken the– these few line tags of these articles. But they were very effective in creating or capturing a lot of new readers. So whenever I saw somebody that was getting a lot of traffic for a particular article, I would add that so that I could try to recruit new regular readers.

Steve: That’s actually a really good tip; I mean I think everyone should just go through their analytics to find out which pages are gaining the most traffic. See if you can add a sign up form, or see if you can add an affiliate link that’s kind of related to that high traffic article.

JD: Yeah absolutely. I don’t do– I’ve said that I don’t do SEO and I don’t do the marketing very well, but one thing I did once I realized that oh certain pages get more traffic, is I went through and I tried to figure out how I could monetize these individual pages in order to obtain more traffic. Now you recently had Toni from the Happy Housewife on, and she stole one of my top pages. It doesn’t bother me now that I don’t have an active role in Get Rich Slowly, and I never really had a chance to monetize it and I’m not sure how I would have monetized it, but it was about do it yourself Christmas guess.

And that was one of the last articles I wrote before I sold the site. And it didn’t have a lot of traffic the first year, but the second year the year after I sold the site it was a– I got a huge traffic push from that particular article. And I suggested to the company that bought the site that they should do something to monetize that page and they never did. But Toni I think I mentioned it to Toni and she said, well fine I’ll take care of it. So sure enough she built the page, took over the ranking for that word, gets lots of traffic, and I don’t actually know what she’s done to monetize it, but I think she was very savvy in doing that.

Steve: You know it’s funny J.D. you know just based on talking to you, it sound like your overall strategy is to just put out the best more shareable content possible. Eventually you know it will get shared around and it’ll start getting traffic, it will start ranking just naturally and then go back, find out what’s performing well, and then just monetize based on your highest traffic pages, right?

JD: Yeah, I have never like actually articulated it in that way but yes, that’s exactly how I go about it, or how I would go about it if I were actively trying to run a blog as a business right now.

Steve: Yeah and I think the key from talking to you is you know focus on creating really good shareable content. And then the rest will just kind of take or care for itself over time.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: And you know what you said about SEO is totally true with my blog. I had articles that I had written in the past. It took like a year maybe a year and half to start ranking, but once it starts ranking the traffic just starts pouring in.

JD: Yeah. And another thing I would say is I feel like everything you do with your website, with your blog should be in service of the reader. Anything that is not in service of the reader is going to actively discourage people from returning to your site. And so you have to walk a fine line because ads are obviously not in service of the reader. On the other hand certain ads can be. So like when I’m adding affiliate links– okay the affiliate links don’t help anybody besides me and the bank I guess. But if the reader is going to go and follow those links– anyhow I don’t have an issue with it.

The same thing with like referring people to Amazon even at my personal site today I’m always linking to Amazon. I just did it this morning, sharing about the different equipment I’m buying so that I can learn how to do video podcasts. And so I feel like– yes create shareable content and also try to structure your site so that it’s very reader friendly. So that it’s– the things you are doing don’t frustrate people and make them want to go away.

Steve: So what’s your view on AdSense then, just then curious then?

JD: I don’t hate ads and I don’t love it. To me it’s like a necessary evil in a way. I just removed it from my own site recently but my personal site right now does not generate a lot of income, so it’s not a big deal.

Steve: Right okay. Hey I was hoping we could talk about the sale a little bit.

JD: Sure.

Steve: You mentioned that when you were ready to sell Get Rich Slowly you were just done with it. So what were your motivations?

JD: Well I had a few motivations going on. First of all the site had been creating more and more income. It had gone from being– when I first started the site it generated a few bucks a day and then bumped up to being a few hundred dollars a month. And then eventually it was a few thousand dollars a month, so that about two years into it I was able to quit my day job to focus on the blog full time.

Then I– both my lawyer and my accountant and my wife, they asked me to stop sharing my incomes stuff, so I did. But the income continued to grow and grow, until toward the end I’m not allowed to say exactly how much I was earning, but I could say that I was earning more and more in one month from the site than I used to earn in a year from my job.

Steve: Wow.

JD: And this was towards the end of 2008, beginning of 2009. And if you’ll remember that’s right around when the economy crushed. And although my revenue continued to climb and climb and climb, I felt like I could see the writing on the wall. I felt like interest rates were beginning to drop, and I figured if interest rates were going to drop then people would sign up for fewer savings accounts, they would have– I only recently began to put credit card out on the site, and I figured well if people are having problems paying their debts, there are going to be fewer people interested in credit cards.

The bottom line is financially I thought now is a good time to sell. I’m making a lot more than I ever have and I feel like the economy is crushing.

Steve: Okay.

JD: Plus at the same time there was stuff going on my personal life. I was beginning to have doubts about my marriage, and I felt like this was taking too much time away from that. My best friend committed suicide which is something that I shared on the site. And there was just a whole lot of stuff going on that was making me want to get out of there.

Steve: Okay.

JD: I was unhappy. And so I had been ignoring people who would approach me and say oh I want to buy your site, I thought they were joking. I made a resolution at the beginning of 2009 that instead of ignoring these people I would listen to what they had to say. And eventually I realized, oh they were serious and in fact they were very-very serious and are willing to offer a lot of money.

Steve: So did you actually go out to find your ultimate buyer or did they find you?

JD: How did this work? So before the sale, I had one company– let’s call them company A approach me and said, hey we want to look at your site or we want to buy it. And I was like, okay how much do you offer? And they said, well we don’t know, we need to see your financial statements. And so I asked my attorney and my accountant should I show them, and they said of course they don’t have any other way to make an offer unless they see your stuff. So company A took a look at the financial statement and while they were doing this I decided I would get some advice.

And I went out and I did some searches to find people who had sold sites before. And I contacted a couple and I asked them how things had gone. And they said, well you know you should really hire an investment banker if you are serious. And I thought, well okay. So company A came back with an offer and it was a big number. It was a little bit bigger than what I thought would be my walk away number. And I was like, all right I’ll check with an investment banker.

And the investment banker said, you know you’ve already done a great job. You’ve got more out of it than we thought you could get, but we still think you should let us take it to other companies. And I said, all right well maybe one more. So they took it to company B and company B came back and made a better offer, and I ultimately sold to company B.

Steve: Okay and how did you determine what a fair offer was? Like what were the multiples– what’s the reasonable multiple for a blog at that time?

JD: Oh let’s see, there was a banking blog that sold for like 10 times…

Steve: Yes I remember. I can’t remember what it’s called right now but yeah.

JD: No I can’t either, but I thought that was unreasonable. And from talking to other people when I was waiting for company A’s offer to come in, I talked to other people and I decided that maybe three to five times earnings will be reasonable. And that’s right in line with like a standard valuation for a brick and mortar business.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And it might be a little bit higher, I think brick and mortar business is probably three times earnings. And so I decided based on trailing 12 month revenues what I looked at. So just kind of a rolling number that wasn’t your last 12 months of revenue. I decided– I think it was about five times– no three times is what I wanted Steve.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And so when company A came back with four times, and so I thought, oh well that’s perfectly reasonable.

Steve: Wow, okay and so it sounds like it’s just kind of naturally happened, people were coming to you, you just do a little bit of due diligence, figured out what your number was essentially and…

JD: Yeah. I mean there was a lot of work behind the scenes because I was calling everybody I could to ask information. I have somebody I consider a mentor who is– he teaches business classes here in Portland. And so I called him and talked to him, and he went through all sorts of stuff with me. And things like get as much of the money upfront as you can, and all these other things. And it was very interesting.

Steve: You know I know most people don’t have lawyers and accountants on retainer, did you have one on retainer or did you just get one for this?

JD: No, I’m very fortunate in that my best friend from grade school is my attorney and one of my best friends now is my accountant. They still charge me a lot of money, don’t get me wrong. I’m able to just contact them and say, hey this is what is going on and take them out to lunch and they allow me to pick their brains.

Steve: Okay. And I didn’t want to get too much into this, but in terms of just the terms of the sale, can you just briefly highlight what some of the different options were? You said get as much money upfront?

JD: Yeah.

Steve: What would be some of the other aspects of the deal where you wouldn’t get money upfront?

JD: Okay, so when you sell a company or a large asset, you don’t get paid all at once, it’s kind of a buyout. And so different– when somebody buys asset and in this case they bought an asset rather than a company, they bought the website. So it could have been structured so that they pay me very little upfront and then there was an earn out over a period of time…

Steve: Okay.

JD: Or what I pushed for was to get as much– actually the investment bankers were the ones who did the negotiating. We tried to get as much money upfront and a smaller payout in the long term. And I think we probably got less money because of that because obviously money loses its value a little bit in time. So and plus if you are asking for a lot upfront they are going to be less willing to part with it, but that’s how we structured it.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of the investment banker, do you recommend going with one and what percentage do they take?

JD: I can’t remember exactly– our deal was a little different because I had already done so much of leg work by the time they got involved.

Steve: Okay.

JD: But my guess is right around 10%. I don’t have the numbers of the top of my head Steve.

Steve: No that’s okay, just a ball park is fine, okay.

JD: Yeah and ball park is I think 5 to 10% is what– it’s basically like selling a house.

Steve: Okay.

JD: And you want– excuse me, you want somebody there who knows the ins and outs, unless you’ve done it a number of times before. And so it was very handy to have them. I felt protected, I felt like they were looking out for my best interest.

Steve: Okay. And I’m going to make you feel a little bit uncomfortable now.

JD: Go ahead.

Steve: And I’m going to ask you about your course.

JD: Yeah, all right.

Steve: Because I know you are not a marketer.

JD: Right.

Steve: You don’t like pushing anything. So you know I thought I’d just get it out of you somehow. But you know these days you know you are not affiliated with Get Rich Slowly anymore. You have your own blog at, was it– you told me…

JD: It’s Jdroth.com is the URL.

Steve: Okay.

JD: But I call it folded space which is what I called my blog 10, 15 years ago.

Steve: Okay. And you recently started dabbling in info products, right?

JD: Yes.

Steve: So let’s talk about your latest info products.

JD: Okay so I met mentioned before I’m friends with Chris Guillebeau who runs The Art of Non-Conformity. He’s written a number of books like The Happiness of Pursuit and $100 Startup. He is the prime force behind the World Domination Summit here in Portland which I’ve worked and done him– I worked on with him. So he suggested over a year ago now that he is like J.D. you know I have this series of courses– he calls them Unconventional Guides. So it’s like the Unconventional Guide to travel, or the Unconventional Guide to publishing. He is like I want to do an Unconventional Guide to Money, and I want you to write it.

And so we collaborated and he provided the marketing arm and the design and all that, and I spent several months putting together this Get Rich Slowly course which is a year-long course. It’s basically a series of weekly emails, but to me the part I’m proudest of is the guide. It’s this 120 page book really that contains my– it basically boils down my entire personal finance philosophy into a 120 pages. And I framed it in terms of managing your personal finances like a business would manage their finances. I say I want people to be the chief financial officer of their own lives. And to be honest Steve I’m really-really proud of this guide because I feel like it’s the best work I’ve ever done.

Steve: Wow, you know what’s funny is you don’t call yourself a marketer and you know I would definitely not call you a marketer, but it’s just you naturally market your stuff through your passion if you know what I mean.

JD: Yeah.

Steve: So it’s not intentional and you don’t have any ulterior motives. It’s just the way you present things is just– it’s just kind of naturally lands to being sold.

JD: Right and you know that’s actually another thing that’s kind of hard when it comes to marketing the course, because I am proud of it and I do want to share it with people, but I don’t need the money. Through the sale of Get Rich Slowly and careful management of the money that I got from that, I don’t need any more money. And so I’m not going to argue with earning more money, but it makes– I’m not motivated to market I guess than I would be if I weren’t in this position.

Steve: Sure I’ll be sure to link up this course in the show notes, but you know outside of your course are there any books that you’ve kind of read that have really influenced your way of thinking over the years?

JD: Yeah you know the funny thing is I often say that the best personal finance books aren’t about personal finance, and I mean that. So I guess– here is what I mean, so there is a book written by a guy named George Leonard and the book is called Mastery, and to me this is the best book that anybody who is trying to get out of debt can read. It talks about– he frames it in terms of trying to master martial art. And he talks about how you have to go from beginner and you have to just put in the work. And you have to struggle with getting better and then kind of losing some progress, and then getting better and then losing some progress.

And so this book Mastery is a great book for people who are trying to get out of debt or accomplish anything difficult. There is another book that I really like; it’s called The Magic of Thinking Big by David Schwartz. And it’s a book– it’s a very– it’s from the early 1960s, and it’s kind of got a very mad men type style in a way. It’s got some old fashioned language, but it’s a great book about positive thinking, setting goals, overcoming fear, and just doing the things you want to do. And it seems hawky [ph] at first but it’s a fantastic book.

Steve: Interesting.

JD: But perhaps I think the most influential book I’ve ever read is a book called How I Found Freedom in an UnFree World, and it’s by a guy named Harry Browne. Now Harry Browne is best known for being the Libertarian candidate for president in 1996 and 2000, but I don’t think people should hold that against him. This book was written in the early 1970s and how I Found Freedom in an UnFree World, it’s all about letting go of what other people think of you, what you think other people think of you, and instead of trying to live up to other people’s expectations, just live life on your own terms. And it seems so tride and so hawky, and yet presented the way he presents it, it’s just fantastic, I love the book.

Steve: Okay, I’ll definitely have to check that one out. I haven’t actually heard of any of the three books that you mentioned. So it’s actually– yeah it’s good for me. Yeah you know usually people talk about The Lean Start Up, or The 4 Hour work Week, and it’s kind of refreshing to hear three fresh new books.

JD: Yeah, I think Mastery is probably the most obscure of those and the Magic of Thinking Big is the least obscure that was a huge best seller.

Steve: Cool.

JD: You’ll find copies in any like thrift store.

Steve: So J.D. you know we’ve been talking for quite a while. You know if anyone wants to get a hold of you, where can they find you?

JD: Well my personal site right now is Jdroth.com. The blog is called Folded Space. And I have been writing a lot about overcoming fear, finding happiness, pursuing freedom. And more and more I’m prepping for my big project in 2015, which is going to be travelling around the United States and interviewing people about their lives and talking about their personal finance stories too. And so I’m kind of in transition phase there, and The Get Rich Slowly course, the year-long Get Rich Slowly Course lives at Moneytoolbox.com.

Steve: Okay. You know travelling around the US sounds like something Chris Guillebeau would do.

JD: Yes-yes-yes, but Chris is– you and I talked before the show about how I used to be a very strong introvert, and Chris is very much that. And he does travel around and he does meet people, but I think it’s tough, I think it takes a toll on him. And for me I’m going to be intentionally an extrovert and my goal is to get out there and meet as many people as possible. And to listen to what they have to say about their life experience, what have they found about purpose and passion and happiness, and probably about personal finance too.

Steve: That sounds like a really cool project. I will have to link that up too once you get the website up for that.

JD: Yeah. It’s a few months away, but it’s definitely in the works.

Steve: Okay, anyway J.D. thanks for coming on the show, a real pleasure talking to you today.

JD: It was great Steve, thanks so much.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. I have been a huge fan of J.D. Roth for as long as I can remember. And to be honest I’m still kind of giddy that I got to interview the grandfather of personal finance blogging.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode56. And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review, because when you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support this show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

055: How Steve Scott Makes 6 Figures Selling Non Fiction Kindle Ebooks

Steve Scott

Steve Scott is a very prolific writer on the Amazon Kindle platform and he makes anywhere from 20-60K per month selling ebooks.

In this interview, he reveals the exact methods he uses to sell hundreds of books a day and the right way to sell on the Amazon Kindle platform.

Also, be sure to check out his blog at SteveScottSite.com

What You’ll Learn

  • How Steve makes 20-60K per month selling books
  • How Steve sells hundreds of books a day on the Kindle platform
  • How to gather email addresses from people who buy your ebook
  • How to find a lucrative topic to write about
  • How Steve gets his books up in the ranks of Amazon
  • How long each book should be in length
  • How to launch an ebook effectively
  • How Steve brainstorms and puts together his books

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. In this episode I’m going to be talking to Steve Scott. Now the reason why I decided to bring Steve on the show is because I wanted to interview someone who makes a living selling Kindle E-Books. Now I was just looking at one of his income reports just now and he averages several hundred book sales per day, and that’s pretty crazy.

Now Steve’s book sales allows him to live a very flexible lifestyle and travel the world. And unlike Johnny Andrews who I had on my show last time, Steve actually focuses on nonfiction Kindle books and generates a very good and reliable income from it. Anyways today I’m hoping that Steve will reveal some of his book promotion strategies with us. So without further ado welcome Steve, what’s up man?

Scott: Thanks for having me on Steve. Actually it’s funny you mentioned Johnny Andrews; I’m talking to him later today for the first time. So I’m kind of excited to hook up with him to see what he is up to.

Steve: Yeah it will be interesting to compare kind of your strategies with what he talked about a couple of weeks ago. He focuses on fiction books; I think he does off the wall fiction books.

Scott: Yeah something like that but yeah I kind of– I definitely agree because I thought I heard him say once about how he really just narrows down on one thing and just keeps on creating content for the same audience which I completely agree with him on that one.

Steve: Yeah and he was saying something about how fiction books seem to outsell the nonfiction ones. I’ll get you a commentary on that a little bit later.

Scott: Sure.

Steve: But give us the quick background story, tell us about how you kind of got started with this whole thing and all the sort of businesses that you run.

Scott: Sure. I guess I’ll give the very-very brief overview of kind of my history but I started with online marketing about 10 years ago. So 2004 I kind of run a couple of business, it’s just kind of what a lot of people do when they first get it started. I just kind of fell for all the get rich quick scams and tried my hand at a bunch of different things. So I fumbled along for about two years till around late 2005 early 2006 when I got into what I call authority affiliate marketing. The idea there is just you pick a niche, you create an email list, and you try marketing to that particular email list.

So I did that for pretty successfully from 2006 to 2012, but around 2012– actually even before that I was really kind of souring on the niche I pick. It’s mostly like the dating niche and just– it was just really not part of who I was at that point of my life. So I would say around 2010 is when I started Steve Scott site, and again that’s kind of another way I kind of fumbled along. But I spent a year or two trying to figure out the whole blogging thing. And eventually I started talking about internet business and stuff because that’s honestly what I knew best about.

I guess that was my biggest authority knowing about how to run an affiliate business and internet business in general. And in 2012 in September I just started to really focus in on kindle books. I already published a couple of them previously but I saw that they sold fairly well, like they were selling five to ten copies a day which in my opinion wasn’t too bad of an income for something that wasn’t too hard to write. So in September 2012 I decided to just focus completely on the kindle stuff and kind of the rest as they say is history. So since then guess it’s been two years now, I’ve been almost 90% of my time just focusing on writing kindle books.

Steve: Cool man, so I actually just had a quick question before…

Scott: Sure.

Steve: We delve in to the whole kindle thing. Can you kind of– you mentioned you have Steve Scott site and you were doing affiliate marketing. Can you comment on kind of– by going all in on kindle you kind of relying on Amazon as your platform and your selling platform, right?

Scott: Yes…

Steve: Versus your blog which you have your own platform and that sort of thing. So can you just kind of talk about you know putting all your eggs in the Amazon basket versus your own stuff?

Scott: Yes let me do the big caveat at the beginning, this is a very dangerous strategy and I’m fully aware of the danger of it, and for anyone out there who is messing around with Google and have built niche sites around the Google algorithm you know how painful it can be when you build your site around one platform. So that said with both my kind of what I call the Steve Scott kindle books which are about internet business and internet marketing, and the habit books which are kind of the website behind this developgoodhabits.com. I would say both of them are– my primarily strategy is to build an email list behind them.

So if anything ever happens to Amazon at least I have the email list and I can do a quick pivot and perhaps publish on other platforms. But yeah I would say definitely it’s relying on one platform for your income is definitely scary. And like I said it’s something I do but you should really think carefully about before going ahead and doing it. I guess if you have any more questions about that?

Steve: Yeah actually since we are talking about it, so how do you get the email addresses from the people that you sell books to on Amazon?

Scott: Sure the first thing I do is I actually have an email offer inside the first 10% of every book. And when people either whether they are browsing for the book or when they go download it or buy it, the first thing they will generally see is a free email offer. So it’s which I’m sure you’ve talked about on plenty of other podcast but it’s your typical free piece of content that if you sign in for your email list they get it and then they are now a subscriber.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: What I like about the Amazon platform is that these are all potentially– I’ll say the large percentage are actual buyers instead of just tire kickers or freebie seekers. And I’ll say beyond that I also try to expand on my email list by– right now let’s say I have a better blog, blog posts are two per week. And I do slide share and I do a couple of other things that kind of bolster my email list through other traffic strategies. But I’d say right now the main driver of my email subscribers is the kindle platform. So it kind of built on one another like a snowball effect.

Steve: Okay so you basically have a URL in your book?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: And they have to type it in and then they enter in something and you give them something free that kind of adds to the content of the book, is that..?

Scott: Yeah absolutely. I would say as an example for the develop good habits there is the 77 good habits to live a better life. And actually with the way Kindle is you can just tap on the link and it just– the actual email capture page is through lead pages and they just auto populate just an email subscription box right inside the kindle platform, so…

Steve: Oh okay cool.

Scott: You literally don’t even have to leave your kindle app to even sign up for my email list.

Steve: I see okay. That’s pretty cool and then after do you try to sell them on other books on the kindle platform or do you sell them on your own site as well?

Scott: I try to sell them a little bit. I have a real small kind of a warming Auto responder sequence, so it’s about three, or four emails, I forget the email. And it’s just it introduces me there as one that actually really describe a really deeply personal story, it’s called How Habits Saved My Life and that’s actually about kind of what I went through when I first got into online business, and how I kind of became a better person because I developed good habits. And then it was just– it’s a couple of other smaller kind of emails. So the idea here is just kind of introduce them to me as a person, as an author.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And I definitely recommend my kindle books inside the email list by like the first, I would say the first 10 days or so. I try to keep as pitch free as possible.

Steve: Okay-okay all right. So let’s talk a little bit more about just publishing books. So first of all I’m going to kind of ask you some questions about what it takes to become successful author. But can you first give the audience an idea of how you are doing today in terms of books sold, and how many books do you actually have out?

Scott: I have 46 books right now.

Steve: Wow okay.

Scott: And that’s further across three I would almost say 3.5 platforms, maybe I’ll explain this. There’s the internet books, I tried for a while because I’m lazy like everyone else. I tried outsourcing a whole line of children’s animal books. And they still make a couple of hundred dollars a month that really I just I learn a lot of hard lessons about what it takes to outsource content and really it was pretty brutal for me.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: The habit books which are throwing the best and I’m actually just starting to take my books and have them translated into different languages, like I just published my first German book about Habits about a week ago. So I’m trying to build up that market as well. That’s…

Steve: So let’s see, you have children’s books, you have internet money, and making money I guess online type of books?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: And then Habits books which are more personal development type of books?

Scott: Absolutely yes.

Steve: Okay and then so what’s like the breakdown? How many of each do you kind of sell on a given month as an example?

Scott: I would say maybe 0.5% would be the children’s books and I would say another 15 to 20% would be the Steve Scott books, and then the bulk of it are the habit books. And those are the ones that have really taken off pretty much what I’ve been focusing on for the last year or so.

Steve: Okay and so just curious, do these books ever have to get re-written as things go out of date?

Scott: I would say definitely the internet business books I almost feel like some of them either I want to take down because the content is outdated or just completely revamp them. The habit books not so much, but there is one book that really took off, did really well but I made a lot of very critical flaws in them just the way I wrote them, the way I presented the content and stuff I did include. So I would definitely want to rewrite that book and actually that’s what I’m planning on doing for December just do a complete revamp of the habit staging book.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of the breakdown of what you make on your own site versus kindle, what is kind of the breakdown? Are you almost all in kindle right now?

Scott: I would say yeah I’m 100% in for the Amazon platform with a bit of a sub breakdown where I generate some income from Create Space which is like 1000 or $2000 a month. And some income from ECX which is the audible platform for Amazon and that works out to be about 3 or $5000 a month.

Steve: Okay and so you are pretty much easily doing six figures doing all of your books stuff on Amazon, right?

Scott: Yeah definitely, like my highest month has been $60,000.

Steve: Wow.

Scott: But I hesitate saying that because now it’s like people are saying, oh Steve is currently making $60,000 a month. No it’s just the one month. I would say recently it’s been anywhere from the 40 to $20,000 like most recent month it was down to $20,000. So it definitely fluctuates.

Steve: Wow okay that’s a lot of books and these books are all like in the range of like 2.99 each, right?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So it’s very high value in business.

Steve: Okay, okay. Cool so let’s say I have a book I want to write. Can you just kind of walk me through the process and the overall high level strategy for making a living doing this?

Scott: I would say take a step back and not think of a book you want to write. I will almost say you start with a niche. And I really think I did listen to the interview with Johnny Andrews that you did, but I’ve heard him on other podcasts and I would definitely agree with what he says for the fact that you really want to like narrow down into one particular topic other if you are a fiction writer narrow down into a specific genre. Or if you are a nonfiction writer narrow down into a specific topic.

And I would start by really researching that topic and just making sure it’s something that sells well on Amazon. And when I first started the habits market I went through a whole like bunch of stuff for– I checked to see if there is just people blogging about it. And off the top of my head obviously habits you think of zenhabits.net.

Steve: Sure yes.

Scott: And there is [inaudible 00:12:50] I know he writes about habits. You also want to go to Amazon to see if people talk about habits, see what type of books are selling on Amazon. And at the time there really wasn’t too much written about habits. Sadly I think I’ve had to kind of create my own competition because all sorts of habits books now. But at the time there was– actually which is still really doing well. There is The Power of Habit by Charles Duhigg which has been selling– it’s just a monster seller for the last couple of years and I absolutely love that book. And I could see the potential that people really kind of want to learn about like habit development.

I poked around Amazon, I looked at it and the litmus test I like to use is when you are looking at particular type of books you just click on the book description, go down to the product description and you’ll see a number says Amazon best seller ranking. And if you see consistently on a number of books if you see books that are selling under the number 30,000, that generally means they sell at least five or so copies a day. If I see a couple of books like that that have a pretty high sales ranking like that, then that means that there is definitely people interested in that particular topic.

But I did that your basic keyword research, I went to Google the AdWords.google.com, kind of looked at the different key words to see if there is demand for it. And I’m sure you’ve talked about this with blogging, but I tried to see if I could come up with 50 topics just off the top of my head what can I write about. At that point when you know you have a lot of stuff to write about, you know there is demand and then I would say it’s time to actually narrow down on your actual book topics.

Steve: Okay so that kind of implies that you are writing a lot of little books as opposed to a gigantic monolithic book on a subject?

Scott: Yeah definitely. I would say a good example when I kind of– I guess I discovered this strategy with the third book. I want to talk like kindle publishing but obviously I didn’t really know too much about it so instead of just writing one massive book about kindle publishing I wrote How to Discover Best Selling Book Ideas. And it covered what I just talked about, how to actually vet a certain idea, make sure if it will actually do well on Amazon platform. So instead of just writing about everything kindle, I just wrote about one particular topic.

And instead of pricing a book at 4.99, 5.99, 6.99, I just took one topic, wrote about 15 to 20,000 words, and really drove down at that one particular topic. And honestly that’s been my business model ever since then. Just finding one topic and really focusing on a good solution.

Steve: Okay, but that kind of implies that you need to write a lot of books.

Scott: Yes.

Steve: Right? Okay.

Scott: Definitely and I will be very honest and say it’s not the most passive strategy in the world. You definitely have to have a lot of button shared time and really sit down and dedicate yourself to writing at least five to ten hours a week I would say at the bare minimum.

Steve: Okay so this ranking is Amazon sort of ranking of 30,000. So you are kind of shooting for around five book sales per day for a given book is that…?

Scott: That was at the very least for me like I want to know at least if the idea takes off or at least sell five copies a day. And I’ve with a lot almost all my books I’ve sold way more than that, but there have been a few that just kind of bombed and never really went anywhere and I feel the times that those ones bombed is when I didn’t pay attention to that role.

Steve: Okay and so the ones that bombed, you didn’t look at any sort of seller rank?

Scott: Yeah I just kind of– I kind of went with what I thought people would want and that’s like instead of actually what I’m starting to do now is I’m actually starting to have dialogs in my email list asking them questions about what type of content they want, almost like you would with the products. You start asking questions like what type– for instance what type of habit would you like to learn. And recently with the book I’m currently developing I’ve found that people really having trouble with exercise.

And I guess more about the motivation behind what type of exercise or getting motivation to exercise, and then answer a bunch of follow ups questions for that and really try to drill down on particular problems that they are facing.

Steve: Do you actually do pre sales with your email list as well?

Scott: Not really.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Because I guess it’s just a matter of the publishing schedule I try to maintain is pretty fast, it’s about– now it’s about every six to eight weeks. So trying to promote new books, old books, recommend blog posts, I just I find there is a lot going on. So once a while I casually mention what I’m working on. But I almost use like the questions as you know way as pre-sale deal before I actually release the book.

Steve: Okay and then if you were to just kind of look back and compare the books that bomb versus the ones that were successful, what are some other things that you did that made a book bomb or be successful?

Scott: I would say the problem is I actually do follow the same process each time. So sometimes certain books just don’t take off and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: There is no other reason maybe because I did that properly. But I will say definitely what I just talk about is not talking to people first and finding out if it’s actually something that they want. And I guess the one or two books that really stunk up the place, they were more just me lecturing about something instead of actually just offering a solution to what people actually have told me that they are going through. I would say I’m drawing a blank on what else…

Steve: So it had nothing to do with the promotion process, the book development process. You think it was like the content? The nature of the con…

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I would say that the scope of what I was talking about obviously the nature of the actual content itself. Like sometimes when I just didn’t write as well as I could have, that comes out later on after the book is sold a lot and then people just come back with their actual honest feedback. Like I mention habit stacking before that sold extremely well, but it wasn’t until a month or two later that I realized that there were some major critical flaws to it so…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: You will get those feedbacks and that feedback will be later on. But as far as like having a process– usually the process I’m actually constantly trying to improve on my launch process and trying to get a little bit better each time.

Steve: Okay and so the first step in your process is to find a niche or a pretty broad reaching topic that you feel like you can expand upon with multiple books. Is that kind of accurate?

Scott: Yeah absolutely, and just for me I just I always kind of be in the habits anyway, so it felt like kind of a natural segway for what I want to write about. And it does give me some flexibility for what I can talk about.

Steve: Okay and then let’s say you’ve started writing and you’ve gotten some feedback from people and then you are done, what are some of the next steps?

Scott: I would say its button share time and that’s really just a simple matter of taking an idea and I’m going to run this process real quick because…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: It’s actually kind of a lengthy one but I like to do a brain damp just take out a couple of pieces of paper, write down everything you know about a particular topic. If you are not really sure about a certain aspect, that’s something you might need to research, at least write down I need to research this particular section of the book. And literally it’s like a complete brain storm, and I would say spend a couple of hours doing this. And what I would like to do next is take a stack of index cards and just flash out the actual book itself.

So I’ll take the eight or ten points of the book that I find are really the strongest points that can be broken down into subsections. So I take those and those will act as my chapters. And I literally go from crossing off ideas from the brain damp on that sheet of paper and putting it on to index cards. And the reason I pick index cards and I guess as an aside people of kindle also do the same thing with the scrivener software, I just– I’ve never really been a huge personal fan of scrivener but other people absolutely love it.

But you can do the same thing or sort an idea just you doing on your computer instead of the in person or like with actual physical index cards. So with index cards then I just separate them. I kind of reorganize them, I rip up sections I just don’t think it will really work, and I cross off sections. I try as much as possible to make a really tied book with the index cards. From there I’ll just do kind of a string of a consciousness writing rough drafts. I’ll just literally write down everything I know, almost using index cards just when you see one line I’ll just write as much as I know about that topic.

And the first draft is really, it’s ugly as sin, it’s terrible looking, but it’s important to kind of get that out of the way. So your idea here is you are kind of overcoming writers block and just not staring at the cursor of death wondering what to write next. So you just– you blast through that rough draft and then the second third and forth draft you really try to clean up and polish it. And I’m at the point now where actually by the time I hit the forth draft I pass off the one editor. She comes back, I get the corrections, and I pass off to a second editor. I’m sort of relying more on teams to actually kind of refine the book and make sure it’s tight and as good as possible.

Steve: So you actually have two editors for your books?

Scott: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I would say the one almost acts as the developmental editor where she really will come back and make some suggestions, talk about stuff that should be deleted or stuff that should be added, that sort of thing, fact check, or link check, that sort of thing.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And then there is a second editor he kind does more like a proof reading kind of final run through with that just to make sure everything is good to go.

Steve: So you absolute recommend having someone else tale a look at it before you publish?

Scott: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: When I first got started actually a friend of mine he looked it over. But I would say you almost want to pay someone to do it professionally, someone that actually has experience for instance. You can hire someone from anywhere form point five cents, so half a cent to two cents a word. That’s generally the going rate at least for that hire people for.

Steve: Okay and then interesting. For your first books did you try to do it all yourself in the beginning?

Scott: Yes and that’s…

Steve: Okay

Scott: That’s why I’m so bullish about editors now. I made the rookie mistake of assuming since I knew the content that people would just see the content and not see the typos and the grammar mistakes. And it wasn’t until like the seventh or eighth book that I realized like wow this is– I’m getting frequent comments about typos. And maybe even though I proof read it, I looked over a bunch of times it’s just– there is something about when you look over your own stuff, your mind thinks it sees what’s supposed to be there and not what’s actually there. And I for instance I miss words sometimes. I sometimes say words double. It’s just stupid mistakes, but when you are too into it you just don’t see the critical errors that you are making.

Steve: Okay and then they also take care of all the formatting and everything also, right?

Scott: The formatting is something I’m still trying to find the right formatter for but that’s actually someone else you need to hire for. I tend to do everything through Microsoft word and I save as a web filtered file, and that if you are getting started that’s okay, but you might want to consider hiring someone to do formatting for you. And that’s actually…

Steve: Wow okay.

Scott: Truth be told I’m still trying to find the right way to format my books. So just I’d say that’s one of my major flaws of my business right now is not having the best formatting.

Steve: Okay but it sounds like from a priority perspective you are doing pretty well without one. So it’s definitely not necessary.

Scott: Yeah but I don’t know I like the idea of continuous improvement. So I’m always trying to get a little better at self with every feature book.

Steve: So one thing that Johnny mentioned in the last interview was the book cover was one of the most important factors. So how do you deal with the book cover in your case?

Steve: Yeah I completely 100% agree with him.

Scott: Okay.

Steve: I was very fortunate that early on I found a really good book cover designer, and again I look at book cover design as an investment not an expenditure. And I really feel that’s an important distinction because people– I feel a little off that really they don’t really want to spend money on their book cover and I feel it literally has a direct correlation between sales and what people are looking at. And the mistake I see is they’ll go to Fiverr and they’ll just hire someone for five bucks who’ll create a really simple looking cover. And I just I think they’re shooting themselves in the foot, but I have a professional cover designer. He sends back a couple of photos that he found from I stock photo.

We talk about the concept of the book and he kind of tells me what base image to buy, I go buy and he handles the rest. But it’s– I guess it’s just a matter of really trusting the guy or girl that you work with and having an ongoing conversation about what you actually need for your book cover design, but that’s something that unless you’re a really good graphic designer you shouldn’t be doing it yourself, and you should be willing to spend a little bit of money on it.

Steve: Okay how did you find your guy?

Scott: I just went through Elance and…

Steve: Elance, okay.

Scott: I just– I do what I call a human split test, well I do this a lot of new projects is I’ll hire two people to do kind of the same project and I’ll just find the one who responds the quickest, who seems more interested in the project and not just trying to cross off the list but actually is engaged, and kind of the overall quality of their work and just by putting two people together you really have a good idea of who is the best candidate.

Steve: Okay and then what about in terms of naming your book, that’s probably really important as well right?

Scott: Absolutely and I feel that is the success of the habit stacking books since I came up with a pretty clever name. One of those names just kind of came to me but what I’ve done in the past and actually what I still kind of do is I’ve gone to sites like Copy Blogger or other places that have really good titles and I’ve literally copied and pasted all their titles into a swipe file. And I have just a binder full of swipe files of all these different websites, if I find a good title of something, I’ll throw that in there as well. And every time I come with a title I’ll pull it out, I’ll look at different words and I’ll literally run through 20, 30 titles tweaking and cutting and asking people’s opinions here and there, but it takes me a couple of hours to come up with a good title.

Steve: So in terms of the strategy for your title, is it kind of along the same lines of coming up with a headline for a blog post that you want it to be very clickable?

Scott: Definitely.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Yeah I guess there’s an argument that people are kind of hating on Clickbait right now, but…

Steve: Yeah.

Scott: But yeah you definitely want to– you want to class something fairly clever. I tend to gravitate towards two or three word main title, like a book I just released a daily entrepreneur or something like that or habit stacking, something that creates a little bit of curiosity, and the sub headline actually gives a little more of an explanation about what the book is about.

Steve: Okay so that’s the strategy that you use, kind of like a shorter title and then the sub headline kind of describes what the book’s more about and that’s kind of entice– the subheading is where you actually entice the person to…

Scott: Yeah [Inaudible] [00:27:18].

Steve: Hold on one sec Steve you’re breaking up.

Scott: [Inaudible] [00:27:28] 33 success habits for small…

Steve: You still there Steve?

Scott: Yup still here.

Steve: Okay I think you’re going to have to start that section over, I lost it all.

Scott: Where did you lastly lose me?

Steve: You were– let’s see what we were just talking about, what were we just talking about?

Scott: The headlines and sub headlines I was kind of giving a for instance.

Steve: Yeah so I think I lost you when I asked you that question about so the sub headline is more about getting the person into entice a person to buy and then you started talking about, so that’s when you started breaking up.

Scott: Okay so just let me know when you want to start again.

Steve: Yeah go ahead.

Scott: Okay.

Steve: Yeah.

Scott: So basically with the sub headline again you’re right, it kind of gets people to really understand what the book is about, so for instance I just mentioned my book The Daily Entrepreneur. The sub headline is 33 success habits for small business owners, freelancers, and aspiring 9-5 escape artist. It’s definitely a mouthful and I had a couple a little bit of brush back for that but I felt it was important to kind of touch on different people who might be interested in learning about entrepreneurial habits so…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: The idea there is with the sub headline you really want to kind of drill down and almost zero in on your target audience and who’d be most interested in your book.

Steve: Okay and then all those words fit on the cover?

Scott: It’s my cover artist is pretty good, it’s definitely small fonts, but I would say you don’t have to get as wordy as I was on that particular title, like I tend to– my subtitle is a little bit short, I just for me that was personal teaching because a lot of people like say for instance if you’re a tax consultant and that you work for yourself you’re technically a freelancer or you’re an entrepreneur but you might not consider yourself an entrepreneur. And so I was trying to like hit all those touch points at different people who might be interested in the book.

Steve: Okay. No it makes sense; it’s actually a pretty enticing title. So let’s talk about the most important part, how did people find you? Like what’s your promotion strategy?

Scott: Honestly my biggest promotion strategy is the email list that we talk about, that we just talked about before.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So I really try to get as many people on my email list as possible and actually I would consider that more important than the blog and the kindle books and all that. I really just– I try to build that email list as big as possible and have them as engaged as possible.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So when I launch a book I actually do a kind of a slow roll out lately. So I’ll email my Steve Scott list people interested in internet business stuff and they– even though a lot times my books don’t really directly relate to internet business people still pick it up because they might find it interesting or it just talks about productivity, that sort of thing. So I’ll email them on a Monday, then I’ll email my “Develop Good Habits” list on a Tuesday. Wednesday I’ll do social media, so I’ll do like the Facebook, Twitter, couple of Facebook groups that I’m in, and actually that’s what I was currently doing today.

And Thursday I’ll do kind of last chance the book is going up to its normal price at 2.99, I’ll do that on Thursday and same thing on Friday. So I try to consistently promote it throughout the week and I do a lot of other little things like I’ll change the advertisement and creatives on my blog, a couple other places that people tend to click on my website that sort of thing. So I try to do it really slow and consistent that Amazon algorithm will start to see that this new book is getting consistent level of sales and they’re more inclined to give it a little more visibility on their platform.

I find that when I do that, when I price a book for 99 cents through a solid week of promoting it, about the week mark maybe after 10 days or so Amazon starts to really pick up the slack, starts to promote on their end through email campaigns and posing on the hot the top 100 list, the hot new releases list, and a couple other sections on Amazon. Eventually they’ll see that this is a book that people want and they’ll start promoting it through their end, and it’s almost like a reverse 80-20 rule. So at first I do 80% of the effort, Amazon does 20%, and after about 20, about 10 days or so it reverses where Amazon does 80% of the marketing for me.

Steve: Okay so let me just summarize what you just said. So your basic strategy is to give it that initial push until it reaches a point where Amazon recognizes that it’s a best seller or it’s going to sell well, then they take over from there.

Scott: Yeah exactly and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And then sometime honestly it’s some like mentioned before some books just don’t take off, like even during the week I’ll see that book X doesn’t compare to the sales that I see in my end compared to book Y. So sometimes you almost know within the first couple of days that a book might not sell as well as you think. And in my opinion that’s okay because it’s like even if a book makes a couple of sales a day it’s still part of a catalogue, it still helps your overall brand but yeah…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I really try to emphasize pushing everything on Amazon, that’s actually really why I’ve put all my eggs in one basket because I feel that yes there are other book platforms but all the stuff that Amazon gives you is worth the exclusivity that you have to give and be part of the KDP select program.

Steve: So what is the– how many books do you have to sell to get Amazon to recognize you and start taking over?

Scott: I would say at least a couple of hundred and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: That’s why honestly for most people– most people don’t necessarily should necessarily do what I do because I do a pretty large email list so it works for me. But if you can get at least 50-100 sales on your own, they might want to consider it. The alternative strategy is to put your book in KDP select and give it away for free for five days and that’s part of the– that’s one of the tools that Amazon gives you is you can weigh a book for a free first for a certain amount of days and when it goes back to paid it might shoot up the page charts, and actually if you look on my blog at stevescottsite.com/book–launch…

Steve: I’ll link that up don’t worry.

Scott: Yeah I’ll give the link, my friend Nick Lopper actually had a really good successful free book launch and he actually wrote a whole blog post that details the whole strategy that he followed. So there are ways and actually, I guess this is great for people that really don’t have a large e-mail list that you almost want to launch a book for free instead of launching it for– at 99 cents.

Steve: Okay can we just talk about KDP versus KDP select for a little bit.

Scott: Sure, when you join Amazon anyone can join Amazon, put the book up there and if you just put in the normal KDP, you can also sell the book on Barnes & Noble, Kobo, Apple, all the other book platforms or you could even sell on your own blog, you could sell pretty much anywhere. If you join KDP select you have to sign a 90 day exclusivity contract where no more than 10% of your content can be sold or distributed anywhere else. So for all intents and purposes the book has to be unique to just Amazon and nowhere else.

A lot people complain about that but I think Jim Crow from Author Marketing Club, he says the best that it’s really only 90 days when compared to traditionally published book that can take away four, five years of the contract and it’s really not that big of a deal. And if you put a book in there for 90 days and it doesn’t work for you then you can roll it out to other platforms. And I just like it because you get either the five free days like I talked about or you can also do what’s called a countdown deal where you drop your book down to 99 cents, and there’s for a week and there’s like a little ticking clock that kind of gives a little bit of scarcity to the book and people are more inclined to buy when they think it’s only temporarily at a low price.

And actually the part of the program that’s really– people really starting to enjoy are starting to really joy is what’s called kindle unlimited. And if you join kindle unlimited as a reader you pay 10 bucks a month and you can just read unlimited amount of books. On the author end you get a dollar fifty, most recently last March you get it about a dollar fifty Per kindle unlimited download, and I would say right now about a third of my sales are coming from Kindle Unlimited download, so…

Steve: Really?

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: Interesting.

Scott: It’s pretty substantial. You don’t make as much on a per unit sale, but you get a decent amount of income and also it helps with your ranking. So say if 50% of your sales are kindle unlimited they still count that as sales, they don’t count that as something separate, and so it helps with your ranking algorithm.

Steve: You know I’ve heard of some people giving away their books for free and not being on KDP select. So have you seen that happen, and if so what’s kind of the advantage of KDP select at that point?

Scott: Can you explain like they give it away…

Steve: They made it zero dollars by telling Amazon…

Scott: Oh yeah, that’s the perma-free technique, and that’s kind of a backdoor technique you can do with Amazon where you post a book on Amazon, you drop it to 99 cents and then you publish it elsewhere on other platforms through smashwords.com, and you price it down to zero like basically give it away for free there. And then when you see that the– once you see the smash words distributes to other platforms you find those websites, you find the link and you go back to Amazon and tell them you have it for free at these websites and a lot of times you need your buddies to do it.

That’s why you need a couple of people telling Amazon that they found this book for free on other websites, and then ultimately or eventually Amazon will price match it and drop it down the zero cents or just completely free. And the idea there is when you have a free book it kind of acts as an entry point to your funnel. So I know a lot of fiction writers, they’ll take the first part of their series and given away for free, and hopefully hook people on their content and then get readers to go on to buy their second third fourth and fifth book.

Steve: Okay and then if you get that successfully working, then what are some of the other advantages of KDP select at that point?

Scott: I would say if you have a perma-free book– I guess some people don’t really want to give away the book permanently for free. They actually generally want to sell it.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So it acts almost like the free almost acts as the sales tool, as a way to attract attention to not only that book, but potentially other books on a catalog. So the idea is they give their book away for free for a couple days to get some extra visibility, and then when the book goes back up to its pay price people will be picking it up. There’s a higher success chance of all people buying as one price.

Steve: Okay but just because it’s zero dollars you can still raise it at anytime right?

Scott: Yeah you could and with the KDP select with those five free days you can raise it at any point during the promotion, you could just immediately stop it in the middle of promotion if you don’t like the numbers or you just you aren’t getting any value from it.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: With the countdown deals where you’re pricing a book temporarily for 99 cents, you’re locked into that discount for whatever time that you select.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of getting visibility in search and getting reviews, do you have a strategy on that?

Scott: Yeah that’s, it’s– I’ll be honest it’s hard to do when you’re releasing books on a regular basis. If you have one or two books out there, it’s easy to build a bunch of people who are willing to go and leave reviews, but when you have continuous books it’s definitely a challenge. What I like to do is every time someone e-mails me or that asks or talks about something I wrote in the book or compliments me on a book or generally seems like their interested in the book, I’ll reply back. I’ll talk to them and hopefully solve whatever problem that they’re facing and then I’ll ask for a review.

I’ll give him a direct link to my book and say can you go– if you have a chance can you just leave a couple sentences review, it really helps. And if they actually go back and do that, then I just say I’m building a street team, I’m building a group of people who will receive a free book in the future, do you want to be part of it? And if they decide to join then every time I have a new book I just e-mail the select group of people and same thing I just– my new book is out, would you mind leaving a review if you find it useful. And I really– it’s a really light touch point where you don’t say go leave me a five star review, just say leave a review.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I find that I can get anywhere from five to fifteen reviews during the first week and then I have built some cache with my e-mail list that a lot of time they’ll after reading a book for a week or so they’ll go leave reviews. It definitely– I definitely build initial view on my end through just the connections and from my street team. Little overtime just the organic nature of Amazon people the reviews will roll in and I do have a review request in the back of every single book and…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: There are a couple of other things I’m currently testing as well.

Steve: So in terms of reviews are they huge in terms of getting visibility for the book?

Scott: I would say absolutely with the caveat of don’t stress out too much about it, because I’ve actually seen a couple of books of mine have two reviews on them and then they’ve actually still sold really well, so they’re not…

Steve: Interesting.

Scott: They’re not the end of the world like some people make it out to be like if you don’t get 50 reviews your books are going to tank, like I’ve successfully sold books with less than a dozen reviews on them. And I would say another thing like you’re going to get negative reviews and it’s important to pay attention to the content review of just– if it’s something that really adds no value don’t worry about it, but if you keep on seeing stuff pop-up in reviews itself or multiple reviews, then pay close attention to it and try to fix whatever error they’re pointing out. Because no matter how hard you try, you’re going to make mistakes in the book and it’s just a matter of trying to improve on it, and just engaging even negative review people and just finding out how you can better help them.

Steve: So you respond to negative reviews?

Scott: Actually a lot of times I don’t. I actually I almost caution not doing it, but if it’s something that even if it’s negative review its actually valuable I’ll actually come back and thank them and let them know that’s something I’m working on, it’s something I’m going to fix, but if it’s just…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I’ve had a couple– I’ve only done this two or three times where I got into a debate with somebody and that’s just someone who was really negative and hostile. And the one time in particular that I’m thinking of is just someone who literally attacked my character and accused me of all sorts of awful things, but I felt at that point I– anyway it was like three pages long, it was like the longest review I’ve ever read.

Steve: Wow.

Scott: So I felt I had to defend my stuff because it was– no matter what I try to prove the guy still just doesn’t believe me, so I just you know you can– you’re going to get some hate if you do well on– if anything people are just going to hate you for no reason.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: So I try not to let it affect my day, but when I feel I have to I will reply back, but most of the times I just try to ignore them.

Steve: Okay I can’t imagine that’s a good use of your time to respond to a three page rant.

Scott: No, not at all, it’s like the reminisce of a crazy person.

Steve: So a couple other questions. It is kind of more kind of more random, so you mentioned that each of your books you try to keep it 20,000 words, is that accurate?

Scott: I would say at first I definitely dipped under the 15,000 words and in the last year or so I tried hit 20,000, actually my most recent book I hit 35,000. So again it kind of goes back to continuous improvement. I feel that Amazon is getting more competitive, so I’m trying to increase the content, just really try to add a lot more value in every book, but keep it at the same 2.99 price point.

Steve: Right so you mentioned 2.99 price point, is there something magical about that price point?

Scott: I would say for me absolutely it’s– that is the lowest price point where you get the 70% commission rate from Amazon. So if you dip under 2.99 you go to 2.98 or down to 99 cents Amazon only gives you 35% of the sales commission. So you basically have to sell seven times the amount of books to make up for that difference. So say you sell seven books, at 99 cents equals the same money you make from one sale at 2.99, so…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I like the 2.99 price point because I consider each book an entry point into my overall brand, so if someone is interested in cleaning up their inbox or something like that, they can check out that book and they go on and like that, they know that there’s a bunch of other books that they can check out as well. So I like to get them in as the lowest price point as possible and hopefully hook them into reading more books.

Steve: Would you say the majority of customers buy more than one book?

Scott: I would say the people who don’t like me; they definitely don’t buy more than one book.

Steve: Oh yeah obviously yeah.

Scott: But I would say yeah my customers absolutely I get a ton of emails saying oh this is like the 9th book I’ve read by you, so it’s something you definitely you love hearing, at least I love hearing that.

Steve: So it sounds like you’re not banking on any single book. You’re just trying to get someone in your list where you can introduce them to your entire library of products essentially.

Scott: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And I also kind of with the countdown deals I definitely run a lot of deals for 99 cents on a lot of my books because even if it’s discounted and I don’t make a lot of money on that particular book, I know that they might be more inclined to check out my other books. For me it’s a long term strategy, I’m just trying to get as many customers and eyeballs as possible.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of the actual book creation process typically how long does it take you to pump out a book?

Scott: I would say when I first started; I literally was doing them every three weeks. Now it’s almost…

Steve: Wow, okay.

Scott: Double to six, sometimes six to eight weeks now. Again I’m trying to get a little bit better with each book, so it’s taking a little bit longer.

Steve: Okay, well three weeks sounds just like a really short amount of time for me actually.

Scott: Yeah.

Steve: I mean you’re writing like every day for many hours, right?

Scott: Yeah, I was definitely a lot unhappier when I did that, because that was I would say that was 20, 30 hours of writing a week, and it was just– the pace was insane and I guess I could do it if I had to now, but it wasn’t very enjoyable.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of do you ever use ghost writers?

Scott: I’ve tried, I definitely tried with the animal picture books, and I think I talked about that, that was kind of a failed experiment. Now once– usually in every book there’s one or two sections that are just more research based that just require a list of websites or a list of tools, that sort of thing. So I’ll definitely outsource a small portion of like 1000, 2000 words just go find information on this. I usually just send my VA to do that and but everything else I try to keep it either me writing, or on the most recent book I worked with a collaborator I have, like she wrote a lot of it as well.

Steve: Okay and mainly that, so it doesn’t affect your overall brand, right? Your whole library that you’re trying to create.

Scott: Yeah definitely and I feel that some people are actually– have managed to successfully build a kindle business off of ghostwriting. I just– I haven’t seen a great example of it and my own life or from my own experience, but I’m sure there’s someone out there who is doing really well, he or she is probably not talking about it.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of recommendations on how to get started. Are there any books that helped you get started, or where did you find the resources for yourself?

Scott: I’m trying to think of books that are not self-serving; like I dove a book called Writing Habit Mastery that…

Steve: It doesn’t matter, you can be self-serving; I’m going to link up a lot of your…

Scott: Okay.

Steve: I’m going to ask you for your best sellers and link them up in the show notes so…

Scott: Oddly enough, the only resources– I didn’t really read a lot of books on it. I just more check out podcasts and just kind of got into the mindset of a writer and some of my favorites are The Creative Pen and The Self Publishing Podcast. Those are– and The Sell More Books Show, those are three podcasts I regularly enjoy and the idea that it’s not really necessarily with the writing process, but kind of the mindset of an author, and what it’s like to legitimately to build a business. It is not the sexiest business in the world, but there is a mindset that if you’re willing to put forth daily effort, you can actually make a good business out of it, but you have to– it’s like a year, it’s a multi-year process, it is not an overnight success.

Steve: Sure absolutely as with any business. Are there any online services that you kind of use to help you promote your books that you care to mention?

Scott: Honestly, it’s really– my online business is really run through e-mail marketing, so it’s AWeber…

Steve: Okay.

Scott: Which I’m sure you talk about and really for me it’s been Facebook, just connecting with people, talking with other customers, or just joining groups with other authors and connecting with them. And it’s again I guess it’s more of a day-to-day strategy instead of an actual– I guess you have to put a lot of time in actually connecting with people and the payoff is when you have a book people are more inclined to go and buy it, but it’s not like I can go on Facebook and just blast 100 different pages which is go buy my book, you have to build those connections.

Steve: Do you ever buy ads or anything like that?

Scott: I have tried one, I can’t really talk about because I signed an NDA for that, but I tried it that didn’t really work out. I’ve tried Facebook ads that didn’t really pan, it’s just it’s hard because price points are so low that…

Steve: Yeah, exactly

Scott: You’re not making much money on– especially if you’re launching a book. I literally make 35 cents on every book purchased during a launch. So there’s almost no way to make the math work.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: I know there is Bookpub.com, people absolutely love it, but Book Pub does not like me. I submitted to them like six times already and they just– they keep on rejecting me. I’m going to keep trying, but I would say for everyone listening if you can get a book into Book Pub, it’s definitely worth your investment. I think it’s a couple of hundred dollars, but it it’ll definitely pay for itself, and I have a couple of friends who have done really well with book pub promo.

Steve: Okay.

Scott: And there’s a couple other sites I just I haven’t really successfully done anything with them, so I really can’t say if it’s good or not.

Steve: Okay sounds good man. Hey Steve we’ve been talking for 48 minutes and I really appreciate your time. If anyone wants to find you, where can they reach you?

Scott: I guess two places, there’s stevescottsite.com and I talk about all things like kindle publishing there. But I’m actually starting a podcast in about a month or so and that’s going to be selfpublishingquestions.com. It will probably still be built as we’re talking that’s when the podcast goes live, but I know it’s definitely going to be hopefully launched by the end of November.

Steve: Okay, you know I can wait to have this podcast out until then, then I’ll link up your podcast in the show notes.

Scott: Sure, that will be great.

Steve: Sound good? All right, hey Steve thanks for coming on the show man, really learned a lot today.

Scott: Thanks for having me on, it’s great.

Steve: All right take care.

Scott: Bye.

Steve: I hope you enjoyed that episode. Way back in episode 35 I had another successful kindle author Johnny Andrews on the show, and it’s been really interesting to hear the differences in strategy between the two authors. And the important lesson here is that it doesn’t matter what type of books you write, whether they be nonfiction or fiction, there’s definitely money to be made on the Kindle platform. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode55.

And if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

054: How Spencer Haws Created Long Tail Pro – My Favorite Tool For Keyword Research

Spencer Haws

I’ve been following Spencer’s blog, NichePursuits.com, for quite some time now and I’ve always been a huge fan.

Not only does Spencer have a ton of experience with building out niche sites and keyword research but he has also created the best keyword research tool on the market with Long Tail Pro

In this interview, you’ll learn about what’s working with SEO and how Spencer created a leading software product with no technical experience at all!

What You’ll Learn

  • How and why Spencer diversified his business
  • Why Spencer moved away from using private blog networks
  • What’s working with SEO today
  • How Spencer came up with the idea for Long Tail Pro
  • How search engine optimization has evolved
  • How to design software without being technical
  • How to market software in a competitive environment
  • How Spencer got the word out about Long Tail Pro in the very beginning
  • Why Spencer moved Long Tail Pro towards a SAAS model
  • How to do keyword research properly
  • How long it takes to rank keywords on search

Other Resources And Books

Transcript (Coming Soon!)

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast, today I’m thrilled to have Spencer Haws on the show. Now I’ve actually been following Spencer for quite some time now. He runs the popular blog nichepursuits.com, where he teaches others how to start niche online businesses. Now he’s also the creator of Long Tail Pro, which is one of the best keyword research tools on the market today.

And here’s what’s cool about Spencer you know for one, he’s a family man with four kids which I greatly admire, and two he’s build dozens of profitable niche sites and constantly is evolving his strategy as the internet landscape changes, and personally I love following his site and his podcasts for his insights into SEO and keyword research. And with that intro welcome to the show Spencer, how are you doing today man?

Spencer: Hey I’m doing great thanks so much for having me on the podcast. I love talking business. So always enjoy doing the interviews.

Steve: Yeah so you know I know a lot of people in the audience probably know who you are already, but if you wouldn’t mind giving the brief intro about how you kind of got started with this whole online thing, what your blog is all about, that’d be just awesome.

Spencer: Yeah absolutely, so I started dabbling building websites just on the side, almost as a hobby, just to see if I could build websites while I was working on my full-time job. I was actually in business banking primarily in business banking and finance for about eight years and so it was back in all roughly 2006 that I started dabbling building out websites on the side just to see what I can do, not even to try and make money at first.

And then sort of along the way I started learning more about okay how do you actually get traffic? What are these search engine things and how does all work? Oh I actually have to do keyword research and all these sorts of thing until eventually I was like, you know I can actually make some money if I put my mind to it and try to rank well in Google and other search engines.

And so if you fast forward to 2011 by that time I had built out dozens and dozens of small niche sites that targeted a different Long Tail keywords and I was making enough money from those small niche sites, it had actually exceeded my day job income in March of 2011. And so I quit my job, and I’ve been blogging kind of about that on NichePursuits.com ever since.

And of course, right around 2011 the same time I quit my job, I also went out and created the keyword research tool Long Tail Pro, which has become a big part of my business. So I’m running that software company along with creating not only niche sites now I sort of moved on to focusing on bigger sites. If you will, instead of dozens and dozens of sites I’m focusing on one or two sort of bigger sites, and of course we can dive into that. But yet I sort of I am involved in doing all those things, including buying and selling sites and shared all my blog and hopefully people reading can follow along the journey for themselves as well.

Steve: I’m just curious for my own knowledge. When did the kids kind of start coming into play?

Spencer: Yeah.

Steve: And did you do all this stuff before you started having kids or…?

Spencer: Oh man, so I got married in 2002 and we had our first child in 2004…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And so nope I did it all with the kids, with the full-time job, we now have four kids as you mentioned, and they range in ages from ten to six months.

Steve: Okay and this is just for the listeners there’s no excuse for not able to start something with kids because Spencer’s got four of them. All right like I mentioned in your intro, you’ve tried a bunch of different things when it comes to making money online and that’s actually something I really admire. Now my audience is primarily composed of people who are searching for the best way for them you know from a personality standpoint to make money online.

So I’d like to kind of start by talking about the beginning of your journey, where you used to own a lot more smaller niche sites that generated a smaller amount of income each and then kind of how that all evolved in to Long Tail Pro and your overall strategy today. So let’s start with the smaller niche sites, so you mention that you no longer own that many niche sites, so kind of what has involved overtime and why don’t you own as many today?

Spencer: Yes, so the search engines are always evolving. You know you have Google that sends– that can send an enormous amount of traffic to your website if you’re ranking at the top of Google. And so when I was first getting started, I was just understanding SEO and found out ways that were fairly simple with link building and proper keyword research to get very small websites ranked very quickly in Google. And that worked very-very well for a few years. Google’s evolved to where they are no longer ranking things based off of the links that are so easy to get I guess…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Is a good way to put, so there certain link building tactics like you know just using article directories, or other very easy to get links that you used to be able to use, those no longer works. So Google has come out with the Pad update, the Penguin updates all these algorithmic updates where they no longer are ranking these on sort of link profiles these simple you know five page niche sites.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: So it’s more important now if you want to get that free traffic from Google you have to build a proper site, you have to do proper link building and content marketing, and all these tactics that you really just need to be pursuing in order to get that traffic anymore.

Steve: Okay so can you just kind of quickly comment on some of these strategies and what is working and what is no longer working in SEO today?

Spencer: Yeah absolutely, so there’s been you know different tactics to build links and rank in Google for a long time. And so I won’t go over all of those, but sort of one of the most recent ones that even today still a lot of people use and talk about that I no longer use is a private blog networks or PBN links. Essentially people are out building several websites and then they use this network of blogs to link to other websites.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And that’s a tactic that people have used for a long time and continue to use, but I’ve decided you know what it’s just too risky, I’m no longer going to be doing that. I want to think about what does Google want to see? I mean if a Google employee was to look at your website and to look at the links, that you’re using to try and rank your website, will they see that as a shady tactic or will they see that as you know something valuable, are these real and actual links.

And so I’m out trying to pursue the more natural links you know that you get when you produce great content, you know you produce something awesome and people take notice and they want to link to it, they want to mention on their blog. Those are the types of links that you want to pursue these days.

Steve: Okay and then for the people who don’t follow your blog is there a reason why you did a 180 just recently on the PBNs?

Spencer: Yeah so– you know it’s– that’s kind of a painful question you know. But of course, you know there’s always a reason why strategies change because I had been using PBNs previously on several of my niche sites, and on a lot of those links got devalued. Basically one of the networks that I was using, whether it was that Google found out, or what exactly happened, but Google no longer found value in those links.

And because of that all of– not all but a lot of my niche sites were penalized in the rankings so they no longer ranked well, and so yeah I went from on some of my– a couple of you know the sites that I had earning you know a couple thousand dollars to now earning you know may be a couple hundred dollars.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: You know and so some of my sites were penalized. It kind of opened my eyes and said you know what if I want to do this long term, I really need to take a long term approach, and use those strategies that will be around for a long time.

Steve: Okay. And so, in terms of building links today which is probably still the primary indicator of rankings today, would you agree with that?

Spencer: Yeah it still is yep.

Steve: Okay, so given that the PBNs and the easier ways to obtain links are kind of being slowly devalued away, what are some low hanging fruit ways of building links today in your opinion, like what do you do with the niche site today when you’re first starting out?

Spencer: Yes so there’s so many different things that you can do. When it comes down to it and I don’t know if this is a low hanging fruit, but it’s something that works all the time.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And that is just creating a really great resource and this doesn’t have to be difficult, and it’s hard to sort of explain, but this could just be a huge list post. You know you combine a list of the top 100 whatever you know those are sort of some things that work well you know. So a huge resource, a huge list post or something that you produce on your blog, and then you reach out to the top you know 100 or 150 people in your niche other bloggers either via twitter or e-mail and say hey I just produced this awesome resource you know, would you mind re-tweeting this or would you mind mentioning it.

You know just reach out to people that are in your niche and you will get a certain percentage that will link to that, whether that’s 5% or 10% you know I don’t know. And it kind of depends, but that’s just a great strategy that can get links.

Steve: Interesting, so I actually get those e-mails almost every other day and I tend to ignore them, so I was just wondering if you had a strategy for reaching out.

Spencer: Yeah, so one thing that you can do I mean certainly if people are– and I get the same e-mails right. You know, so people that have never contacted me before and e-mail me out of the blue, that usually is not going to be a super effective e-mail, so long term you want to be building a relationship with people in your niche. And so you contacting them before you ask them to do something is always great, but you can still reach out, you know maybe you and I aren’t responding to a lot of those e-mails but you know 5% of the people do respond to those e-mails…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And do put links on their websites. But another strategy is to reach out via Twitter; it’s so much easier to ask somebody to, hey will you re-tweet this? Rather than, hey will you put a link on your blog for me, and so you can get shares on Twitter very easily. It’s not that difficult for somebody to hit the re-tweet button and that’s all they have to do.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And those re-tweets and re-shares can get your information, can get your content in front of other eyeballs and that will lead to sort of natural links on the back and other people that maybe you didn’t reach out to will see it and will indeed link to that.

Steve: Okay and then the way you kind of build out your relationships do you do cold e-mail? Do you go to conferences? How do you cut it build up your network?

Spencer: Yeah, I mean all of the above and it kind of depends on what type of site perhaps that you are building, is this your only site? Certainly if you have just one site and you’re focusing on that one site only attending the conferences and you know trying to go out and do guest posts and reaching out to everybody is the way to go. If you have a few sites you might need to do some other things, where it’s more cold e-mails, and contacting people in a larger manner I guess if you will.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: That can work and of course this is just one you know tactic. There’s lots of other things that you can do as well.

Steve: Okay and I’m going to ask you some leading questions to get the Long Tail Pro here. So how important is the actual keywords that your targeting in terms of ranking and search?

Spencer: You know it really is still critical, it is.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: I mean when people– people search for things using keywords. That’s just the way the search engines work, and so it doesn’t matter how authoritative, I mean let’s take a super authoritative website you know Whitehouse.gov. You know it doesn’t show up for searches that it’s not related to right, so it’s never going to show up for the search term dog training even though it’s maybe the most authoritative website out there. There’s so much more to ranking in Google than authority.

There is relativeness. Okay, so there’s how relevant is the keyword to the website? So when you do keyword research and you want to rank for a certain term, it is so critical that you look at not only you know how many people are searching for things each month and other things related to the keyword stats themselves, but how competitive is the first page of Google for this particular search term. And so you know I can’t harp on it enough that if you want to rank in Google, you have to be doing keyword research.

Steve: And it’s also important in your opinion right to create something that’s very focused on the keywords that you’re trying to target, right?

Spencer: Yes, absolutely. So you want to you know include the keyword in the title of your page and you want it to be related you know just by simply mentioning sort of off handedly in one of your blog post probably isn’t going to get you to rank for that keyword. You need to make it a focus of that blog post, a focus of that website to give it the attention it deserves to create a great resource surrounding that one particular keyword.

Steve: Okay then prior to you having Long Tail Pro, how were you doing this niche research?

Spencer: Yes, so for a long time Google has had the free keyword tool that the Google ad words keyword tools, or the Google keyword planner…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: That I used, and I also used other tools are out there like Market Samurai that help you get the search volume and other keyword stats related to those keywords. But I really I wasn’t happy with the options that were out there because it took a long time to do a lot of keyword research just for different reasons. Some of the limitations of the keyword tools wouldn’t let you search for a lot of keywords very quickly, and so that’s one of the main reasons I went on decided to create my own keyword research tool.

Steve: Okay, and then so what sets Long Tail Pro apart from let’s say Market Samurai.

Spencer: Yeah, so one of the key differences is like I mentioned just the ability to do lots of keyword research quickly, and specifically Market Samurai only allows you to input one seed keyword at once, you input that one seed keyword to get back 800 related results. And if you don’t see anything you like you have to then go back and input another seed keyword and go through the whole process.

Whereas Long Tail Pro you can input let’s say 10 seed keywords at once and you know get back 800 results for each of those or 8000 results overall. And so you can look at lots of keywords and filter them all at once to really give you sort of the best of the best keywords very quickly. So it’s a huge timesaver, it’s faster overall just the workflow, and it gets you the results in an easy to use manner. So overall it’s just faster and easier to use.

Steve: Okay and then you’re not technical, right are you? Are you a programmer?

Spencer: I am not a programmer.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: So I’ve had to hire a developer to help me build out the software itself yeah.

Steve: So let’s say you want to develop Long Tail Pro from scratch, how you find the programmers to help you?

Spencer: Yeah you know it is not an easy task I’ll tell you that. You know I, when I first created Long Tail Pro I hired somebody didn’t really know what I was doing, and you know long story short, that first version of Long Tail Pro no longer exists. I immediately had to go back and hire somebody else to do it properly if you will. So you know my advice well okay, so the way that I found my programmer is actually on Elance.com.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: I lucked out a little bit, but my advice is just communicate as much as possible before you hire anybody whether that’s through Skype, through phone calls, e-mails, make sure that both of you are on the same page and that you’re communicating well with what’s expected during the project, what’s expected after the project and everything.

Another big piece of advice that I give is to hire somebody that’s great, not somebody that is cheap, and so usually I’m willing to pay top dollar if it’s the best programmer out there. Usually you make up so much money on the back end when you get a great developer because they do it right the first time, or they understand your project better. There’s usually a good reason that they cost more.

Steve: Okay and then do top programmers hang out Elance?

Spencer: Luckily I found some and yes I will say that there are other great programmers out there, they you know I don’t know if they’re few and far between, but you certainly have to weed through a lot of applicants to find the best.

Steve: Okay and so let’s say okay you’ve already started developing Long Tail Pro at this point, and it comes time to market the tool, but then you didn’t come first right? Guys like Market Samurai came before you, and so how did you kind of market your tool and unseat some of the industry leaders like Market Samurai?

Spencer: Yeah, absolutely so one of the reasons that I felt like I could sort of make a dent in the market is because I was the primary market for keyword research tools. I was you know the person that was out buying these and doing lots and lots of keyword research. So I understood the market intimately well, and in fact I still believe that I understand the market way better than the guys in Market Samurai.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Those guys are they’re developers, they’re programmers they– I could be wrong but I don’t think they’re guys that are out doing lots of keyword research. They came up with a great initial product idea, and they developed it, but they’re marketers and developers they’re not people doing keyword research. And so for that reason there’s a few sort of quirks within Long Tail Pro that make it difficult to use and not as quick.

And so by being a little bit different, to answer your question, I was just enough, my product was just enough different from Market Samurai that people were like ah I get it, I want use Long Tail Pro because input multiple seed keywords at once. Filter your keywords and all your data before you run the data. So you don’t have to go back and do it all a second time and just a lot of the way that it flowed people got it. And were like this is so much easier, it’s so much faster, I’m saving tons of time by using Long Tail Pro.

Steve: Did you have the blog before Long Tail Pro or how did you get the initial people to buy?

Spencer: Yeah, I did have the blog for a little while before I created Long Tail Pro, and so I did have a small e-mail list. It wasn’t huge. I try to remember, but it was you know maybe a 1000 people on my e-mail list or something like that. And so of course yes I e-mailed my e-mail list to get a few of the first sales almost more of just beta testing, but then I also did a special offer on the Warrior Forum and I got some more sales that way.

And that was kind of the first version not a ton of sales if you will, but enough to kind of be out there and know that people liked it, and to give me the courage to go on and further develop, further build my audience, and further market the product.

Steve: Okay, so let’s talk about the Warrior Forum a little bit. So what are kind of the rules of listing something on there?

Spencer: So I know that they do have specific rules, it’s been a while since I’ve listed anything there, but it costs somewhere I think it was around 50 bucks to get a sort of classified listing or a special offer listing somebody had to go through and manually approve the listing, but I will say that overall it’s fairly– the rules are fairly loose…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: You know on the Warrior Forum, so there’s lots of things there. Some are good, some are bad. So you have to you know if you go to the Warrior Forum you do have to weed through a lot of things to find the good and the bad products, but it is a great marketplace. There are tons of people there, tons of people looking for products to buy in the Internet marketing niche. So it was a great place for me to start because it gave me that built-in audience that you know I really didn’t have.

Steve: So how do you actually get the word out about your tool today and obviously is more established now, but how do you get new customers?

Spencer: Yeah so now a lot of it does come through my blog over nichepursuits.com, so a lot of my consistent just blogging and content marketing of my blog, people find out about me, and then of course find out about Long Tail Pro. So that drives a lot of traffic, but I also have a lot of affiliates that promote the software for me. People that I’ve reached out to and just build relationships with over the past three or four years that I’ve been blogging. Guys like Pat Flynn, of course you know sell quite a bit for me, Chris Guthrie, the Empire Flippers and several other affiliates that I have that just know the tool know me, and like Long Tail Pro and are willing to help me sell it.

Steve: And then do they– do you buy ads as well or is it just primary affiliate network and then your blog and you podcast?

Spencer: Yeah, that’s primarily it, I have tested paid traffic, but I do not do a lot of it on a regular basis.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: But you know that could change like I said I’m kind of always testing and tweaking, but that really is never been a major source for me.

Steve: I’m just curious in terms of your niche sites versus Long Tail Pro, like what’s the breakdown in percentage of revenue.

Spencer: Yeah so Long Tail Pro has grown a ton since I launched it back in 2011 and it definitely is a majority of my business now.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: I would say that it’s– let me just try to think here. You know it’s somewhere around 65-75% of my overall business.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Spencer: It is probably Long Tail Pro, yeah so yeah it’s a great little business for sure.

Steve: So do you feel like you kind of need to continue doing the niche research stuff to keep Long Tail Pro at the forefront in that industry?

Spencer: You know I probably wouldn’t have to.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Do I feel like I need to? Yeah I enjoy it; Long Time Pro is established itself enough that you know it would do just fine without my blog I think. There is so many other things that I could be doing to promote it and it’s you know it gets mentioned on lots of blog sort of naturally without my involvement at this point.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: But having said that, my first love is building niche sites and creating those sites.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And so I have no intention of giving that up. I enjoy it too much and it certainly does have a benefit.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: To sort of keeping up the growth of Long Tail Pro. But that’s– you know I didn’t really create the blog because of Long Tail Pro. I really created it out of my love of just building online businesses in general.

Steve: Right. And then you saw a need and you essentially just scratched your own niche so to speak, right? To fix your own problems, correct?

Spencer: Yeah absolutely, for sure.

Steve: So I had a couple of questions just about the economics of the software. Now I know the base versionary tools kind of this one time lifetime feed, right? But how do the economics work because I know you are probably grabbing data from the Google keyword tool also, right using the APIs. So those are constantly changing, right? Because I know Market Samurai is always breaking down because something is changing. So when you charge a onetime fee, how does it kind of work out because you have to constantly be keeping Long Tail Pro up to date, right?

Spencer: Yap absolutely. So there are a lot of pieces to the puzzle. You know you mentioned one of them. There are other APIs that we use that change or you know things happen. What we do, we have to constantly be back updating the tool. And so every single month you know I’m paying a pretty descent chunk of money to my developer to keep the software up to date.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: So there are a lot of ongoing course. So also to give some of the background of the stories, so there has always been a onetime purchase price for the base version of Long Tail Pro. However in I believe it was January of 2013 so about a year and a half or so after I created Long Tail Pro, I added a monthly subscription option. I added the platinum version which is a $17 a month charge for people that want to have some additional features, the platinum features. And so that has added significant stability to my overall you know month to month income and improve the economics if you will over just a onetime cost.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: So that recurring piece that I’ve added was a very smart business decision.

Steve: And what percentage of the people actually go platinum?

Spencer: It’s a little bit over 50%.

Steve: Oh wow okay.

Spencer: More than half of people that buy go for the platinum option.

Steve: And what do you get for platinum?

Spencer: So there is a few additional features. There is the ability to add your own list of keywords if you want to add up to 10,000 keywords at once. You can throw that into the tool and I’ll give you all the data back for that. And you can save your favorites and do some other things with sorting and organizing favorite keywords that you want to highlight and save. And then the biggest function at least the people use the most is the keyword competitiveness calculations. So we’ve come up with an algorithm that calculates how difficult it would be to rank on the first page of Google for any given keyword.

So you are researching you know best survival knife and the platinum version of Long Tail Pro will speed up a number between zero and 100 to tell you this is how difficult it would be to rank in Google. So it gives a very simple number that makes it really almost as easy as just glancing at the keyword, you see the number and you know how hard or easy it is to rank in Google.

Steve: Okay and then does this– so I’m just trying to think of this from an ecommerce perspective. Let’s say the front page of search is full of big box stores like J.C. Penney’s, Macy’s, your algorithm kind of takes the domain authority into account in terms of ranking?

Spencer: Correct.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Yeah it takes a domain authority, the page authority, the number of links, and how relevant the results are to the specific keyword, and a couple of other you know little calculations in there and spits out an overall number.

Steve: And I’m just curious, how do you kind of test the validity of these rankings?

Spencer: Yeah so I spend a lot through my own experience you know I’ve been doing a ton of keyword research over the years. And so that specific calculation is based on a lot of my own experience that I’ve seen and tested to know whether or not you know the results are valid. So it’s one of those things that we try to stay on the forefront of sort of searching through optimization, and the most recent data that’s available and we make sure that that formula sort of matches the most up to date things that Google are doing or changing.

Steve: Good because I know Moz like has a bunch of set keywords that they use for their Moz cast. Do you have like a similar way of testing, like where you have you pick some keywords in a variety of different categories and just kind of validate whether your rankings make sense?

Spencer: Yes. So I you know I don’t have a specific set that I always do over and over again I guess if you will sort of like that, but I am in there testing across various niches and of course we get a lot of feedback from our users.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: You know they’ll let us know hey this looks like an anomaly you know why is that? You know and so we are doing a lot of testing on our own and then of course getting feedback from users. And by and large our users are very-very happy with the results and they feel like they are very-very accurate.

Steve: Okay and so let’s walk through a complete example.

Spencer: Okay.

Steve: So let’s say I wanted to start a niche ecommerce store. How does one use the LTP to find these opportunities and kind of walk me through the basic strategy and in sequence?

Spencer: Yeah, so what you would do is initially you have to start with some sort of seed keyword, right?

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Or seed keywords. And so you know if you have an idea for an ecommerce store already, of course you would input sea keywords related to whatever that is.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: You know that kind of depends on everybody. Some people might need to do some initial brainstorming to actually find out what you know are they interested in you know sort of baby products or furniture or whatever that may be. So I don’t know how deep you want to dive into all of that. But at some point you need…

Steve: Let’s do survival knives because you might know a little bit about that.

Spencer: Okay sure yeah. Yap I do, for people listening I built out a niche site based on survival knives. So what you would want to do is input you know some seed keywords…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Related to survival knives, so of course yeah you are going to input survival knives. And then if you go over to if you want to just I like to use things like Amazon and eBay that might list a bunch of survival knives. So if I go over to Amazon or eBay it might you know list something like tactical knives or pocket knives or you know hunting knives. So you know you can get five or six or ten sort of related phrases and then you just input all of those into Long Tail Pro. And what that will do is then generate 800 related keywords for each of those seed keywords.

So you know if you input survival knife it will give you 800 keywords. If you input tactical knife it will give you 800 keywords. And then you’ve got this huge list of keywords that you can then start to narrow down. And using Long Tail Pro you can filter based on– if you only want to see keywords that get over a 1,000 searches a month and less than 25,000 searches a month you can input those filters. And there is other filtering options such as how many words are in the phrase? Or how much advertisers are paying for that keyword?

So you would want to filter that down. I would usually say keywords you want over a 1,000 searches a month. Usually the keywords that are paying the most have a cost per click of over 50 cents or sometimes a dollar.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And that’s going to narrow down your options significantly, right?

Steve: So how do you determine the thousand searches? Like how much traffic do you assume that you can be able to get with a 1,000 searches for example?

Spencer: Yeah so that’s really just a base you know. And every niche is going to be different for how many searches you get. But if you only got traffic from that one keyword that got a thousand searches a month, you know if you are ranked to the top of Google they usually say you can get about 42% of that traffic. So that’s you know that’s only 420 visitors a month for that one particular keyword. But we know that you’ll get a lot related Long Tail keywords. And then of course once you build out other pages within the niche you’ll get more traffic just depending on what you are targeting.

But it’s good to make that distinction somewhere. You want to whether that’s a 1,000 or you decide that’s 2,000 you want to have some sort of minimum so that you know you have a big enough niche that you are in.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And I’ve sort of drawn that line at a 1,000 for the sites that I build.

Steve: Okay and so if you’ve chosen a primary keyword how do you kind of estimate the overall traffic including the long tail that you are going to get. Do you just kind of add up all the Long Tail keyword phrases that you can get or do you kind of make some estimate off of like a base keyword like survival knife for example?

Spencer: Right and so you can do both. And there is no magic formula, I mean at the end of the day a lot of this is not a perfect science.

Steve: Sure.

Spencer: Because you’re going to get searches from Long Tail keywords that you didn’t expect or you know vice versa. So you want to look at yes the overall market. You know how many people are searching for a more general term like survival knife. And then but probably the better way is to kind of look at all the keywords that you are going to be targeting on your site and do some sort of calculation based on that.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Yeah.

Steve: And okay so let’s say we have like some keywords that we want to target. Like you chose to target best survival knife, right?

Spencer: Yap.

Steve: Do you mention the tool that it also speed out 800 related Long Tail keyword phrases, how do you use that data?

Spencer: Yeah so once you’ve kind of filtered that data down let’s say maybe you are left with 100 keywords that kind of meet your search find criteria. And then at that point– a lot of these is a little bit of learning. Some people may go through every single one of those keywords, but just with my own experience I might be able to only look at 20 or 30 of those just from knowing hey this probably isn’t a good keyword phrase, and that comes through experience. But then you start once you’ve narrowed down at least you then start looking at how difficult would that be to rank in Google.

And so this where that keyword competitiveness calculation comes into play. You in Long Tail Pro you could just click the calculate casey [ph] button next to each of those keywords, and it’s going to give you a number between zero and 100 to let you know how easy or difficult those keywords are.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And so you know that’s probably what you would want to do is go through there and then sort of sort them by easiest to rank for in Google. And then you probably want to actually look at the actual results in Google and kind of make it the final determination based on what you see in Google. And you know just what the keyword is if you feel confident writing about it, does it make sense that sort of thing.

Steve: Okay and so once you have these keywords I guess what’s natural then is a blog or some sort of content based medium to actually try and rank for those words with content, is that…?

Spencer: Yeah that’s what I do is…

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: All of my sites are content based and so you know if we pick best survival knife like I did I created you know a nice informational article about what might be the best survival knife. I created a chart with the top 50 knives that you know users could then sort by reading and reviews and price and all sorts of other things. So you want to create a great resource that people can come to and actually use. And then you’ll do that across basically every keyword that you target on your sight, you want to create a new article, a new piece of content that can rank in Google, and people can read and find information from.

Steve: Okay and in terms of commercial intent do you have any guidelines? Do you look at the search results to determine commercial intent or is it based on the AdWords cost per click that people are paying?

Spencer: Right. So I usually I’m looking at the AdWords cost per click.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And well and two things, so the AdWords cost per click and the amount of advertisers that you know are bidding on that keyword. So if you have a high cost per click and there is lots of advertisers you will know that that’s commercial keyword, right?

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: Because there is a lot of advertisers there, whereas even if you have a high cost per click and there is only one or two advertisers that probably is not a super commercial keyword, just because there is not lots of advertisers. So you kind of want to have both if you can. That’s what I look at and again most of my sites are informational. I’m not creating ecommerce sites like you usually are or maybe your readers are. So there maybe some things you do slightly differently you know just depending on what of type of site you are creating.

Steve: Yeah I was just more curious on how you would tailor your strategies for ecommerce, like if you were actually trying to sell a physical good to somebody. But I know you haven’t really done it, but I was just curious what your take and using Long Tail Pro for that purpose basically.

Spencer: Yeah so I mean I think you know using those metrics that I mentioned you know, so the amount of advertisers and the cost per click that’s going to give you a really good idea of how commercial that keyword is.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: But then certainly I mean it’s just natural that if you are building an ecommerce site you are going to want to focus on keywords that are more product based instead of informational based most likely.

Steve: Okay and then I know your strategy has evolved recently or relatively recently to more targeting authority type of sites. So if you were to start all over today from complete scratch what would be some of you advice to readers out there who are trying to create a profitable niche site.

Spencer: Right, the big difference I guess between then and now looking at my own timeline is just that I pursued a lot of short lived tactics, I was just trying to ranking quickly ranking Google as quickly as possible and wasn’t concerned with the long term longetivity of the site. And so that would be my advice is that people out there should try and build something that’s going to be around for years to come.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: And expect that to be the case because that’s going to get you the most bang free your buck over the long term. And it will take a little bit longer to rank a larger site or an authority site if you will in Google. But it’s something that once you do it, it should be there for a long time. And so that would be my advice is don’t try to focus on short lived tactics. Try to focus on quality, how can you actually help your users, and build out a really great resource that you are proud to show other people.

Steve: So does that imply that you kind of advocate targeting some of the more competitive keywords at this point if you are going to be in it for the long haul?

Spencer: Not necessarily, so…

Steve: I know that’s a vague question but…

Spencer: No-no that’s a great question. It’s a great question. You know there is lots of different– you know each website will end up targeting lots of different keywords you know. Again if we go back to my best survival knife site, so I may start off by targeting much lower competition keywords and that is what I advocate is still try to target very low competition keywords because that will help you rank quicker.

But in the long term if you build up a great resource you might be able to rank for the keyword like survival knife or these more competitive keywords. So I would still start with the lower competition keywords but long term if you build a great enough resource you can potentially start ranking for these bigger keywords.

Steve: Okay so if I can just summarize what you said, so you use Long Tail Pro and you have it spared a bunch of Long Tail keywords, which tend to be low competition, right because of the longer tail and then you start writing pieces of content that’s specifically tailor those long tail keywords and then gradually over time you should start ranking for some of the more competitive keywords as everything gets indexed. Is that kind of accurate?

Spencer: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: That’s correct and as your site gets more authoritative maybe you weren’t targeting some of those more competitive keywords, you can then do so once you have that authority. So whether it’s your old articles that may be start ranking for competitive keywords, or if you create new articles to start ranking for those you can do that as well.

Steve: Okay and I get this question all the time in my class so I thought I’d ask you as well. People often ask me how long things will take to actually even show up or get ranked in search. And if you’ve done your niche research properly and you’ve used the guidelines in Long Tail Pro, what is the shortest period of time that you’ve ever seen something rank like in the front page?

Spencer: Yeah and this varies greatly from market to market.

Steve: Of course.

Spencer: I’ve seen things rank as quickly as within a month.

Steve: Really?

Spencer: Yeah.

Steve: Wow! Okay.

Spencer: That is not the norm you know that sort of if somebody picks an extremely low competition keyword and anyway everything falls into place. Usually the norm is going to be four to five months.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: You know before things start to really show up very well in Google. There just tends to be a longer waiting period now. Google takes a little bit longer usually to start ranking things.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of your overall SEO back linking strategy, it sounds like– I know the answer to this question but I thought I’d ask anyways. Do you do anything gray hat at this point? Now I would consider PBNs almost gray black hat but do you do anything kind of in the fringe right now for your sites?

Spencer: You know I’ve become pretty boring now. You know I used to be pretty involved in sort of the fringe I guess link building strategies. But I have given all of that up. You know I’m just honestly outbuilding great content. We are emailing people directly. We are you know just producing content that can be shared, that’s about it. You know we are not doing anything sort of shady or questionable if you will.

Steve: Okay so at this point basically your strategies sound like it’s a lot of outreach, producing great stuff that people actually want to share and link to as opposed to any short term tactics like PBNs and that sort of thing.

Spencer: Yap absolutely.

Steve: That’s very boring Spencer, I was hoping…

Spencer: I know I’m sorry.

Steve: Because you know Glen Allsopp, right?

Spencer: Yes.

Steve: He is been putting a link of some of his articles but he’s been talking about PBNs and all these other stuff that he does. And he’s been like pointing out specific examples of larger companies doing some shady tactics and getting away with it. So it’s just interesting that you guys are like complete opposites.

Spencer: Yeah I mean we used to be similar in the fact that we both use PBNs and he did a huge basically in response– I did a huge blog post about you know I’m no longer using PBNs and sort of the next day he had a big response blog post and says, “I am still using PBNs.” So that was kind of fun so Glen and I did a little back and forth but that’s fine. You know everybody has their own tactics and their own opinions about what they should do. I’ve just you know I’ve been in this game long enough and I’ve seen the ups and downs of what can work in Google long enough.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: That I’ve just decided you know what I’m going to do what Google really wants me to do, I’m going to just produce great content and give links naturally.

Steve: Okay and then the final question I want to ask you is you’ve done a lot for ranking niche sites, for affiliate marketing and just AdSense and that sort of thing. But just curious how come you haven’t given physical products a try just yet?

Spencer: You know I think a big reason that I never got involved in physical products and this could be totally a wrong reason I guess is that I was drawn to affiliate sites and AdSense sites because of the hands off nature of them. You know it’s something that I don’t have any customers, they click the link and I get paid and that’s it. You know I don’t have to do customer service and everything else that’s involved. Whereas a physical product I felt like it was just more hands on work, more dealing with whether that’s returns or emails from customers and that sort of thing.

That’s I mean that’s the reason is really it seemed more hands on and you have to remember back in the day I was building out you know dozens and dozens of these niche sites. That was my focus was just building out the next big site, I don’t want to be back answering customer emails.

Steve: Sure.

Spencer: In regards to that.

Steve: Although you could argue that Long Tail Pro prior requires a lot of support, right?

Spencer: Sure absolutely no it does. It does, and so I don’t know if I have a good reason for not keeping physical products at this point.

Steve: Okay.

Spencer: No I’ve been very intrigued with ecommerce sites; I just have never done it up to this point.

Steve: Okay, sounds good man. So hey Spencer we’ve already been talking for quite a while. Where can people find you and learn more about your tools and the niche sites that you’ve been working on?

Spencer: Yeah so the best place really is for people to go to my blog over at nichepursuits.com and in addition I’m on Twitter @nichepursuits and if they want to go directly and find out about Long Tail Pro they could go to Longtailpro.com.

Steve: Okay, sounds good Spencer. Hey I really appreciate the time and it was great talking.

Spencer: Awesome thank you so much, and for everybody listening just yeah thanks I appreciate it and hopefully everybody learnt a thing or two.

Steve: All right, take care man.

Spencer: Hey thanks a lot will see you.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that interview. What I like about Spencer is that he is constantly trying new things to test the limits of SEO. And he’s created by far the best keyword research tool out there with Long Tail Pro. Now what’s also cool about Spencer is that he is not a programmer yet he has managed to create a fairly complex piece of software.

For more information about this episode go to Mywifequitherjob.com/episode54, and if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show very easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to Mywifequiteherjob.com/contest and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I manage to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job Podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

053: How Chris Guthrie Makes 6 Figures Selling WordPress Plugins Online

Chris Guthrie

I met Chris Guthrie at the Fincon Expo and I’m really glad that we had a chance to hang out. Chris is well known for making 6 figures with the Amazon Associates program and he also runs a 6 figure business selling WordPress plugins called BoostWP.com.

A lot of people believe that you have to know how to code in order to succeed in selling software. But not only is Chris not a technical guy, but he has found a way to get tens of thousands of websites to use his plugins. If you are interested in creating and selling WordPress plugins online, then this interview is a must listen. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Chris came up with the idea for his cash cow WordPress plugin EasyAZon
  • How to find a software person as a partner
  • How Chris comes up with ideas for winning WordPress plugins
  • How to make sure your plugin will make money before you start coding
  • Chris’ biggest mistake when developing software online
  • Why Chris moved over to the freemium model
  • How important is it to get your plugin on WordPress.org
  • Do plugin reviews matter at all?
  • How to handle software support for a WordPress plugin
  • Why Chris moved away from developing WordPress themes to plugins
  • How to launch a WordPress plugin

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I have Chris Guthrie on the show. Now Chris is actually somebody who I’ve known about for quite some time now, but we finally got to meet face to face at FinCon several weeks ago. Now Chris runs a bunch of sites including an awesome entrepreneurship blog at entrepreneurboost.com where he openly talks about all his business exploits. But I actually brought him on the show today to talk about his WordPress plugin company boostwp.com.

Now Chris is now the first entrepreneur that I’ve had on the show who creates WordPress plugins for his business. Now he is probably best known for his awesome plugin called EasyAzon, which allows people to easily insert Amazon affiliate links on their blogs. Now in the past I’ve actually thought about selling my own WordPress plugins as well. So I’m really interested in hearing about his story and with that welcome to the show Chris, really glad to have you on today.

Chris: Thank you so much Steve, I would like to first say that that was a fantastic introduction, I felt quite pleased here.

Steve: And incidentally I first heard about Chris– this is just for the listeners– he was one of the guys that generated a lot of buzz when he made six figures being an Amazon affiliate, and considering that you only get from 3-6% revenue off of that, that’s a pretty impressive fete.

Chris: Yeah have I known what I knew about– that you could do a lot more of selling products on Amazon I probably done that before that’s probably another conversation…

Steve: Yeah-yeah we’re here to talk about boostwp today. So give us a quick background story. Tell us about the business and how you got started with it, and then why specifically WordPress plugins.

Chris: Yes so I think that the best way to probably get into it is to just talk about the first plugin that I did and basically you know you mentioned that I was doing Amazon affiliate things. That’s actually how I was able to leave my day job full time was when the Amazon came to pass that– well I got fired– that’s probably another conversation.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Anyway that was five years ago and then I was making good money from Amazon’s affiliate program, and just kind of frustrated with the process of creating links, and you have to go to amazon.com click the link to this page button, the little grey bar at the top of your screen and you’ve got like text link and you’ve got grab the code put it back in your site and then you have a link right?

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so this can just be done within WordPress. So while I’m writing I can just make the links there. And so I set out on a quest and a long journey– no it wasn’t long I guess I looked into trying to find out who I could hire to do that because I’m not a programmer.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so yeah, so I started that way.

Steve: And then is EasyAzon that’s your most popular plugin?

Chris: Yeah that’s probably the most popular one. It’s been around the longest and so we’ve invested the most time, money, and promotion and everyone kind of knows about it most than the others I guess.

Steve: Okay and so you mentioned that you’re not a programmer or anything, so how did you find someone to develop this plugin with you?

Chris: Yeah, so that’s actually a really common question that people have when it comes to software development if the person is not a software person. And so in my case I actually just went to a local WordPress meet up, and I basically just looked around and I was like who here develops WordPress plugins?

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And I just kind of introduced myself to people and I think I ended up the organizer, and this is almost several years ago now, but the organizer had known someone else, Nick Warnes is his name. And so I worked with him and basically went out to lunch and we talked about the project and it was great because I was based in Seattle at the time and so was he.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then I said, “Hey you seem like a sharp guy, let’s do this.”

Steve: So was this like an equal partnership or…?

Chris: So this one actually I just paid him as a contract type thing.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Chris: I mean it was the first time that I had sold a plugin before, and generally I don’t like to do partnership unless I know that I can provide a lot of value.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so at that time I didn’t know how well I would do and I also figured that he didn’t want to work with someone with an unproven yet who knows if I’m going sell this the new one type of thing so…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I just paid him and then you know we can talk more about how that relationship eventually developed into a partnership but…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: That was the initial stage.

Steve: And then you know how much did it cost to create this first plugin of yours?

Chris: I believe it was $4000 or so.

Steve: Okay, so that’s actually not too bad and you talked about the idea– you got the idea for this plugin because you were trying to do Amazon affiliate links and you wanted an easy way to do that. And I know now that in your shop you have a whole bunch of plugins. So what is actually your process for deciding which plugin idea to actually pursue?

Chris: Primarily it’s just based on a lot of personal need and also just based on what I see in the market place. So I mean I’ve been making money with websites for nearly a decade, I’ve been in full time for about five years now. And so I kind of just– I can look at websites and see okay this site could be making more money if I do this, or I could be getting more email subscribers if I look at my blog and say the same thing about some of the things in my site, but that’s not my primary business site. I guess I just don’t worry too much about it anyway, so I look at just things that I know will work so…

Steve: Let’s talk about your second best plugin for example, how did you get the idea for that?

Chris: Yeah the second best one I’d say– let me think here probably I did a few different plugins that are related to Amazon, they were separate types of things.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But those ones were going to be shifting into EasyAzon, so I’d probably say better links probably would be the second most popular.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And that was one that we launched earlier this year.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And…

Steve: How did you how did you get the idea for that one?

Chris: Yeah so mainly we’re just– because we’re in your company and bootstrapped and just kind of generating revenue from EasyAzon and some of the other plugins and software things. I thought okay let’s try and build something that we know that people will want to use on a daily basis in their blog and so it’s basically a link shortening tool, but…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: One that does a lot of things better than what the other ones do. So for example knowing how many clicks you get on your blog is nice for your blog post. But knowing actually where those clicks came from is kind of more important because then you can determine this one post on my blog is getting a lot of traffic and also driving a lot of clicks, but potentially affiliate clicks or clicks to some sales page and then you can see okay there is some– so you have that business intelligence to see what you might want to do.

Steve: You’re talking about in terms of like the source whether they came from search or referring source or that sort of thing?

Chris: More so that when people are on the actual page they can then see– so if you’re at yourwebsite.com/home then you could see the clicks that are coming for that specific link on that specific page. So most of the other plugins wouldn’t really do that, and I suppose you can get fancy with Google analytics and do it but that’s just too…

Steve: That’s more tedious for sure.

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: Yeah. Cool so you know when you went out to create this plugin, so did you kind of validate your idea with a small audience before you invested the cash, or did you just go for it?

Chris: With this one by then we were pretty much partners together and so we just– we went pretty much went after it and so…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Lately the strategy has been to do an initial light version that we offer through wordpress.org and then the premium version that we sell through the site. And we’ve seen some chunks of sales through that, but typically it’s just better to just focus on signs of the growth than focusing on the free version I found.

Steve: Okay. So is the free version kind of your way of validating the idea like how do you– pretend you just created this plugin, or you have an idea for a plugin, do you kind of run the idea by your audience or your list first, or do you kind of put out this free version, see if it gets traction, what’s the ordering of things?

Chris: Typically I’ll talk with people to see if it’s something that they’d like, but a lot of times it’s just– sometimes I really think that I would like because it’s like annoying to me.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I just know, I kind of just know that I think other people are going to do it and I guess it’s because I’ve done a lot of these before. It’s so far they’ve been doing exemplarily well, just kind of coming with that strategy, but I suppose that isn’t the best answer to your question in terms of…

Steve: Oh no-no-no I mean I mean just curious if you did that because you know it’s a big project right?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: If you’re going to put out some software. If you’re going to spend all this time creating and debugging and all that sort of thing you kind of want to know it’s going to sell, right?

Chris: Yeah and so I guess I should say to you the reason why my answer is like that and since it’s just kind of like based on my decision and then also talking to Nick to see if he thinks it’s something that’s you know easy to get to minimum viable product. Then you know we can kind of go that way, but yeah if you’re first starting out I would not advice just doing that “oh it’s something I might like.” You’d want to really determine if there’s an audience you can sell to and then you know what type of channel you can use or what type of platform you can leverage do that. So for EasyAzon that was a first one…

Steve: Right.

Chris: I already leveraged the blog because I was talking about Amazon affiliate marketing so often.

Steve: Yeah-yeah-yeah you were known for being the Amazon affiliate guy, so EasyAzon was probably a pretty easy sell, right?

Chris: Yeah-yeah and it was pretty-pretty quickly I think probably the initial launch paid the development cost and then just you know continue to earn money each month. You know over– earning four figures pretty much and then continuing on since then so…

Steve: So what is your– so not talking about EasyAzon you know EasyAzon aside, what is in general your strategy for getting people to actually just try your plugins. Now you mentioned you have a freemium model, is that right?

Chris: So a few different ways with boostwp we’re young enough to where we’re still kind of playing with the model. Right now we have a subscription type service we offer all of the plugins that we develop and then we do new plugins each month.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But most likely we’ll shift to yearly just because we found that people use those plugins– you kind of have to match similar to what the rest of the market place is doing in terms of how they’re pricing things. So I noticed that you know some– they’re just aren’t that many plugin companies doing it that way.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And you kind of think about the way the audience is used to paying for something. So for example books you know they’re used to paying at a certain price point and at a certain way, and so the same is kind of safe for WordPress plugins, but yeah so…

Steve: Yeah I know adobe has a similar pricing search where you get access to all their tools by paying this monthly fee and that’s what you’re kind of doing, right?

Chris: Yeah-yeah and then to go back to your question I don’t think I really answered it was how we get people to try. A lot of it is just kind of leveraging the established platform that from being out and doing this for so long. But then also to just contacting where there are other influential bloggers and just getting more people using our stuff. And the long term strategy for boostwp is still early is we’ll have a podcast and we already have a bunch of podcast episodes recorded just getting ready to launch that, and then also doing more content marketing and driving traffic to that way. Sort of be kind of more traditional marketing in the sense for that.

Steve: Okay and so when you mention leveraging your existing network, this is like an audience that you build from– is this from entrepreneur boost or is this from a different blog?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: How did you get those yeah?

Chris: Yeah primarily from that blog and also just meeting so many people that that run blogs because it’s kind of like there aren’t a ton of people that do it full time for a living.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I’ve been on online businesses and so you kind of get to know what a lot of people want and so yeah so that’s primarily.

Steve: Let’s talk about that a little bit, so where have you met a lot of these entrepreneurs?

Chris: A lot of times I just reach out to people. I do try and go to events, for a while I hadn’t gone to any event like a couple of years and then we had kids and I thought “Hey I should try and go to some events.” And that’s where we met, but yeah I mean that’s where I would meet a lot of people because you know if you reach out to say a blogger that you respect or you think they’re doing something interesting, really in any niche I guess they’re always really busy, but if you can meet them at a conference that’s the time when you know they’re right in front of you and you can have a conversation typically.

Steve: Okay, but if you’re like a nobody, let’s say how do you outreach to someone?

Chris: I mean even when I was a nobody I would say hey. I would just talk to people, I mean I think that yeah I mean I guess it comes onto where your strategies is right? If you’re trying to get people to use your software I think you even look to see what paying plan it is they might already have that you can solve…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then come to them with the solution to the problem you know they have. I think that yeah something that doesn’t immediately self serving I suppose.

Steve: I see, so I was just curious so like let’s say you have this plugin and you were trying to get me to use it for example, would you kind of start the conversation off like do you have a problem doing this and this? Or would you try to just start a conversation first?

Chris: I would just start a conversation first and…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I mean I’m guess I typically don’t do a lot of just that outreach in terms of trying to generate sales because I just– I think it’s difficult, right? To do that it’s more for me to just connect with other people that are doing well and then I can say “Hey we have software that can probably help you out and…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And here you go.

Steve: So is your strategy also to– do you give away the plugins to the like the big names so then you can just say like this guy so and so– this big name uses the plugin?

Chris: Yeah I can, I’ve done that in the past where I give it up, but then if I’m giving friends then I’ll say pay this pay me, I’ll say just pay because then I’ll say you are a paying customer.

Steve: Okay got it.

Chris: Yeah I mean I think it’s– the thing to it is if what you’re building doesn’t provide more value than what you’re charging for then you’re already going to kind of have an uphill battle as it is. And so I mean for EasyAzon for example it’s– I can pretty much tell people if you’re making money from amazons affiliate program you’re not using this then you’re making less money than you could be, and it’s a pretty easy argument to make especially since the cost isn’t too that at all.

Steve: Okay and do you ever use any sort of paid advertising to advertise your plugins?

Chris: I haven’t, but I hired a new team member earlier this year, well I only guess it was only months ago. I hired a part time and then put them on full time but that’s one of the things that he’ll be probably working on and then– but yeah I haven’t really done a lot with that.

Steve: Okay just curious so mainly it’s just relying on kind of your own network and your own lists thus far and just word of mouth?

Chris: Yeah and I mean the other thing too is because I’ve been doing different types of products and software type thing for so long, it’s– I don’t know maybe it’s almost laziness in a sense it sounds maybe lazy, but you know I’ve been able to just kind of say, here is this product and I know it’s a problem that you have because others I see complained about elsewhere, or I see it you know else in the market and here’s our solution that’s in my opinion better. And then because I can send an email to tens of thousands of people then it’s usually successful.

Steve: Okay and then that list was just leveraged before you even started basically?

Chris: Yeah-yeah.

Steve: Okay based on your Amazon affiliates success, right?

Chris: That but then also just like multiple things such as like billing and selling a website for six figures and buying and selling websites making money from…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: All sorts of random stuff talking about it and…

Steve: It’s mainly just people you’ve gathered over time?

Chris: Yeah and then also from selling your products. So every time you can sell a new product you’ve got new customers and that’s the one thing too I’ll say is that people that are on your email list that are buyers are like 100 times more valuable to you and your business than people that sign up for a freebie through your site. At least that’s what I found, I know that if you have someone sign up for something free then you can kind of send them down your list of emails and all that and obviously eventually sell to them, but yeah so anyways…

Steve: Let’s talk about that freemium model a little bit here, was it always like that where you gave away something for free, and then charge for an extra feature?

Chris: No I mean typically that’s actually more recently that we’ve been doing that more and just a sense of trying to get our plugins into more people WordPress installs.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Like going back to that earlier point, so we have for better links probably we have an importing tool that can allow people to import from another popular plugin I will not mention the name but…

Steve: I know which plugin you’re talking about.

Chris: Yeah so that’s kind of like one thing. The other– really it’s just it started with just the premium version, right? I mean for EasyAzon I was like I just paid this guy, I should say Nick– I just paid Nick you know four grand or so to do a first version. I’ve got to make some money back to pay for this thing and then it was just sewn to that so yeah.

Steve: I’m just curious how has going to the freemium model– has that affected sales positively negatively or just kind of flat?

Chris: I think it’s somewhat positive, I think it’s still in the point where we potentially just need more plugins and there are more people using them to really see a huge amount. I noticed most I have Google analytics tracking for a Google gold or whatever it is to track freemium driven sales for EasyAzon from wordpress.org and other types of spots the plugin is delivered and given for free. And I’ve seen a pretty good chunk of sale, I get a pretty steady stream of sales coming through, I actually wish I had the exact numbers in front of me so I can tell you I’m on this.

Steve: No that’s okay we don’t need exact numbers. I’m Just curious though do you do anything let’s say someone signs up for the free version, what do you do? Do you do anything to kind of push them over to the premium version like do you have this email sequence or something that tries to convince?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: Okay and how does that work?

Chris: Yeah so right now if you want to go to EasyAzon.com you would see that there is pro versions and also we’re using like a pop up plugins, so when people try to leave– not that it will stop them from leaving but it will just you know the pop up will appear and people can enter their email to download the free version.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then we have a pretty good opt in rate with that because people are like “oh free” we’ll track…

Steve: Right.

Chris: And then so the first email is just the delivery of the plugin and then I set up the sequence very long ago, so I can’t recall all what it is but yeah basically just send them down and talk about what people can do if they were to upgrade to pro etcetera.

Steve: Okay and then at some point once that sequence expires you don’t bother them again right it’s…?

Chris: Yeah typically not, I mean I haven’t really I’m using Infusionsoft for…

Steve: Okay.

Chris: We’re using Infusionsoft for boostwp and then I use Aweber for my– the initial business I started with.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And so there’s a lot of nice things you can do with campaigns and everything in Infusionsoft, but there’s also like a matter of actually building them.

Steve: Okay yeah-yeah of course. I was just curious also what percentage of your freemium customers– so number one I was just curious for my own knowledge, what percentage actually install the plugin, and then what percentage actually upgrade to the premium model?

Chris: I don’t have those exact numbers here with me.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Yeah, I’m sorry.

Steve: That’s all right you know ball park or…?

Chris: I’d say so the people that actually– that download it’s I don’t even– I don’t think I even have– because the problem this was the challenge I guess and this is probably something good to point out, is that because WordPress plugins are it’s like a distributed software model where you’re getting customers some software and they can go and install it. At least the current version right now we’re not using like a license tracking system to you know to do that. We’re going to do that in the fourth version that we release in November, but some customers really you know it’s not easy to do that and then also to WordPress has a lot of strict guidelines to what you can and can’t do with your plugins. Like you can’t really call back to your server to see where your plugins install that.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s actually a big challenge when you’re doing things with WordPress versus like building your own sass app for example.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Then you kind of have to also play by the rules but then it’s also a matter of you know being able to leverage the fact that there is a market place of millions of bloggers that can potentially be downloading and trying out your free version and that’s also a value there too.

Steve: Okay. Is this a WordPress rule just on the platform or is it just a rule to get listened on wordpress.org?

Chris: WordPress.org they have specific rules about what you can and can’t do with plugins that are listed there. And there’s things like you can’t for example if you have a feature in a pro version you can’t list it and then grey out like a check box like they can’t click it type of thing.

Steve: Interesting. Okay.

Chris: Yeah there’s a lot of kind of nuances to that. I don’t recall the exact you know every single one…

Steve: Sure.

Chris: Other thing that I know that Nick knows and I know that we have to plan the playground–play by the rules in their playground I guess.

Steve: Okay and so how important is it to actually get listed on wordpress.org in terms of sales?

Chris: I don’t think it’s actually that important. I mean I think really honestly the only reason why we did that was to test to see you know if we could get start driving some sales through that and we have. And so it’s been valuable in that sense. But before that we hadn’t even done a free version. For version one and two it was only paid. And so I don’t think that you need– like if you listen to this and you think, I have an idea for WordPress plugin and I’m trying to decide you don’t have to go with the free version actually. You could just go with a premium version then just do a minimum version.

I mean that’s because we are doing so many and we have so many different projects that we have planned out, and we are going to be hiring another developer in January. You know we have to kind of go with just the initial, here is the value over the general value the software can provide. And let’s just get to that as quickly as possible with the least amount of fluff. And then if people adopt it well then we could try and really invest even more time into it type of thing.

Steve: Okay. So it’s kind of that MVP model so to speak?

Chris: Yeah I completely believe that. I think that a lot of like programmer type entrepreneurs they’ll end up– this is just from my personal experience speaking with them. So it might sound like I’m bashing it but they’ll end up you know kind of getting into this feature creep mentality where they are like this thing you know uses really like and then they’ll never really launch something whereas my attitude is to just launch it as quickly– as soon as possible after you’ve made sure they aren’t any bugs and everything, but that’s kind of yeah that’s what I’d say.

Steve: Okay. And then I was just curious do plugin reviews matter on WordPress.org? Like do you make an effort to gather reviews for your plugins?

Chris: No, I haven’t really made much of an effort. I mean I wish I could say I have a WordPress.org plugin that has you know a million downloads, and I have all these amazing data to share. But I mean it is still you know I don’t– getting elsewhere [inaudible] [00:23:59] has only been a more recent thing.

Steve: Okay. I mean you are doing well and that’s why I’m asking so I was just– it sounds like WordPress.org isn’t like a necessity per say. Like if you do you’re marking right on your own you should be fine.

Chris: Yeah I mean there is a lot of six and seven figure plugins that well maybe not certain figures, but I know there is a lot of six figure earning plugins a year that don’t even have a free version at wordpress.org.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But yeah.

Steve: Okay. And then I wanted to talk also and this is one of my fears of writing my own WordPress plugin. This is a technical product and most of the people you are dealing with are not technical. So how do you deal with support?

Chris: Yeah so that’s actually a good question because you get a lot of it even if you make everything really clear. And then it’s actually shocking how many support requests you can get if something isn’t unclear and then you realize you have to go back and do something. So let me actually kind of go back and unpack that.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So the way that I do the plugins is I create the help videos and I go through everything that’s covers the main kind of components of the plugin, and then try to make sure if there are any specific errors that people can get tripped up on for example. So EasyAzon has you have to get Amazon access key and an access secret key type thing from their system to access their API.

Steve: Right.

Chris: So basically there is some problem that could happen there. So I think it kind of go like step by step through every single thing and actually show them on their screen where you doing to set everything up. So I’ll do video guides and then I have– because we sell multiple different plugins, I always put the videos in the same section. So it’s always just the end of the domain name and then just how hyphen to.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s like the first line of the defense it would be all the WordPress, all the videos, and then step by step videos you know I use Camtasia studio to record those, and I zoom into the screen and use the mouse cursor effect where you can highlight it. I have seen some people and I’m not sure why they would do this, but they don’t actually zoom into their screen when they are doing support. But then you don’t realize that people might be on like smaller browser or small resolution monitors or just they might not be able to see.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s like the first line, and the next would be support desk. And so we have four people in the support desk so that we can answer email tickets to them. So we use fresh desk right now.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then I like that one quite a bit actually I need to be moving over the other company to that system too.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But yeah and so we just have some support reps that help there.

Steve: You guys have a phone line?

Chris: We don’t have a phone line at this time. No I think it would be difficult to do that because there are so many things that are so visual about you know doing it, it will become challenging. It might be cost prohibitive too. I guess thinking about the pricing.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: If someone is going to call and then take an hour to…

Steve: Yeah, yeah.

Chris: Do something…

Steve: Do you do live chat then or it is just email?

Chris: Just email.

Steve: Just email.

Chris: But then we have– another thing too is with the videos, that is one thing I should mention too is because I’ve sold plugins and I’ve also sold themes. So plugins are much different than themes in terms of support that you need to do, and that it’s a lot less.

Steve: Okay plugins are a lot less support, okay.

Chris: Yeah there is a lot of less support typically because it’s just you know this is what the plugin can do. And then you check these boxes and it will do or not do that feature, able or not able. And with themes people will say things like, “I want my theme– I want my website to look like this.” And they’ll point out some other website that’s using an entirely different theme and it’s like you have no idea how they are going to arrive to that point. And then it’s like you have to try and deal with that, so yeah that’s…

Steve: So it sounds like more of the story, do not develop themes.

Chris: If you going to do themes and you are going to do like some type of life time license scenario, then I don’t know what to tell you other than good luck I guess you know.

Steve: Let’s talk about that because you recently went over to this subscription based model. Before you were offering free support, right?

Chris: Yeah I mean before it was pretty much a huge mistake to say, “Hey when you buy this plugin you can get life time updates.” But then sure enough I’m going to be living for hopefully quite some time and I hope that this business stays around for quite some time, and new features and new versions cost money. And I guess this goes back to I didn’t really know that much about this. And I didn’t really– I should have sought out people that were doing this to ask their advice before I did that because I think that that– and that’s actually a mistake that a few other friends have wanted to do plugins have made.

I have tried to tell them to avoid making is to do like lifetime support updates. And I kind of compare to Bill Gates releasing their original windows version and saying lifetime updates. Can you imagine how ridiculous that would be? And had I thought of that really or had anyone said that to me then I would have avoided that costly mistake, because people– you are going to have people that really enjoy your software and they want to keep using it. And if you can have an annual type renewal where they can upgrade to get the new features then that’s really a way to kind of grow your business beyond just trying to find new customers. And I think that’s actually the biggest mistake I’ve made with this business model.

Steve: Okay and then this institution based model is nice too, right? Because you get recurrent payments and that sort of thing and support isn’t as much of a problem at that point?

Chris: Yeah I mean it’s pretty much yeah.

Steve: Okay so I was curious also, do you have like a specific role out strategy to avoid like a sudden influx of bugs and complaints that you can’t handle?

Chris: Yeah we do a lot a lot of internal testing and then we don’t have like a beta squad per say, like a group of customers that can test ahead of time. But that’s something that we are considering doing because– but again it comes back to partnering with someone that’s really good.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Nick’s one of the best developers I’ve ever worked with. And that’s why I said, “Hey we should work together on this business and this is kind of the vision I have and I know that you can do it because you’ve done these other plugins.” And I think that definitely comes back to making sure you hire or work with someone rather that’s really good because otherwise you will end up with a lot of bugs. So typically we don’t get too many because his code is really solid.

Steve: Okay and well tested probably.

Chris: Yeah exactly.

Steve: Okay and then you know and again this is a question mainly for my benefit sorry listeners. But you know WordPress gets updated like every several months, right?

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: How the heck do you maintain the code for all the different versions? Is it just a constant updating battle?

Chris: Well that’s a good question; I want to just go back to another example actually. So I used to do [inaudible] [00:30:54] forums.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Years before this and that’s how I first started making money. And now you know you’d have these updates and then just stuff would break. And it was just like huge nightmare but that’s not really the case with WordPress. I have yet to actually have an update that WordPress goes to really cause some huge massive failure with the plugin.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So that’s nice I guess you know because that’s a huge time circus to have to continuously change things just because WordPress is being updated.

Steve: Okay so that implies that WordPress is a very robust sort of upgrade policy so to speak.

Chris: Yeah it just doesn’t seem to [inaudible] [00:31:33]. They have been some things that have happened with you know like WordPress, but a lot of those things kind of come back to the themes actually. So…

Steve: Okay, right crushing with themes and that sort of thing.

Chris: Yeah.

Steve: And I had a couple of questions on just pricing. So how do you kind of determine pricing for your plugin and then how does support cost kind of factor into that pricing?

Chris: Yeah so I typically just– so when I first started I priced EasyAzon at $47.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: I think I might have done like an initial discount pricing for a time limited period, which I would suggest doing because scarcity in the marketing is really powerful and especially if it’s real scarcity. So obviously you want to increase the price if you say you are going to. But yeah so that was the initial price that I went at. And I just kind of looked at what competitors were doing to see what they were charging. And so yeah typically it’s just I’ve looked to see what other are charging and then where I started out before worked well.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And I’ve done some price increases and tests to see you know if there is any discounts not discounts to any drops off in sales, but– and then through gorgeous support. So typically right now you know we get a lot of support requests, but the revenue regenerates much-much higher than the support amount that we pay.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And then also I do some support, but it’s only stuff I guess past initial few people.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So it’s not using too much of my time either. So it’s really not a huge amount of it. And I think it goes about to the earlier point I was saying about with WordPress themes you’ve got a lot of different things that can– and I don’t know maybe there is someone out there listening and saying, hey you had a really bad theme developer or something that I don’t know.

Steve: I’ll try to get someone who develops themes on the show Nick.

Chris: Yeah that would be good. And I’ve only done a few themes and so I only know from that. If he explains then I don’t want to do them. At least for now until we have more team ever seem– make it viable but yeah.

Steve: Okay. And you know, what are some of the biggest challenges that you’ve kind of come across in developing plugins?

Chris: I think that the biggest is that anytime you have an idea for what it is you want to accomplish through a plugin or whatever product it might be, it’s just always going to take longer than you expect it will. I think that’s something that I hear people always say and then you think as a listener you might be thinking that you know that’s not the case. But that’s always case. There is always like features that’s slowly creep in that you just have to have, and that’s the challenge to kind of bail again.

So I think it’s just a matter of making sure you plan appropriately and then additionally because we try to be prolific with the amount of software that we release. I think the key thing too is to make sure you set deadlines up. So it’s kind of I guess a battle all right between those two.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: But when we set a specific deadline we also use we also have affiliates to help sell our plugins. And if we set a deadline there are a date that we are going to launch on, then we have to make sure we hit that date so that’s the right way they can kind of help make sure we get on track.

Steve: Okay and then about what were we just talking about Chris sorry.

Chris: Yeah we were just talking about some of the challenges with [inaudible] [00:35:00]

Steve: No there was a specific challenge that I was just going to ask you about but I can’t remember. Okay so if I wanted to create a WordPress plugin today, what would be like your key piece of advice?

Chris: Key piece of advice would be to just look at what the minimum version you can do.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: That you can then charge for. And if you have enough capital that actually support then maybe you could do it for free initially, but I mean if you are using like donations or something like that that try and make money then I’m laughing while I’m talking because this is not going to work.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: Because I’ve talked to some other developers that have those and they say, “I think I’ve got a donation once a few years ago.” You have to charge to prove your value. People really value things based on what they pay for them.

Steve: I remember my question now, when you are in the design portion, the design face of your plug in, do you use any sort of software or tools to help you kind of plan out how you want the plugging to look and function?

Chris: So initially I would you know I did like some mark ups just– I can’t remember if I used pen and paper enough, but I did use pen and paper for another project that I’m doing with a different– for assess thing that we are building. But yeah I just use for that one actually sheets of paper and [inaudible] [00:36:27] just sitted on a flight while I was going actually to FinCon.

Steve: Really?

Chris: Yeah so I just as I marked it up and then I handed it up to developers. Yeah so I typically would just use that. I don’t use anything like balsamic or any of those wire framing tools. But I think that comes back to you as well that I have worked with Nick for several years now versus when I hired him as a contractor and then now that we are business partners. And it’s kind of like he is really good at UI and kind of understanding how like what the best flow would be. And then after he gets initial version to me I can kind of okay I think we should change this around because of this reason, right?

And also too with WordPress at least the way that we design plugins we try not to actually make the UIB you know look a lot different than what you experience already in WordPress. So we will re-use a lot of the assets in there. So like if you’d go and you click the EasyAzon button in your WordPress post editor, it pops up the window that looks like the media window where you want to upload images.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: So it’s similar in that way.

Steve: Okay. All right and then just in terms of understanding the mechanics of how to create a WordPress plugin, did you guys learn from any books? Like can you recommend any books on it?

Chris: I don’t know any books because I have never– I don’t know I’ve never written the line of code in a WordPress plugin before.

Steve: Okay, but even just the process is there– like how did you guys learn? Or is it Nick or?

Chris: Yeah Nick who knows maybe he could be a good guest for you but yeah he started freelancing and all other stuff yeah but he– I think that he just kind of learns because you know it was something that he could do, and then he had clients asking for it and so started doing that. But I don’t know I’d have to follow up with Nick to see exactly what he did.

Steve: Okay and what about just marketing in general? Where did you get your jobs, is it all experience or did you read any books as well that influenced you?

Chris: Primarily experience.

Steve: Okay.

Chris: And just lots of trying to make sure that you just take action. I think that a lot of people would talk about the things that they want to do, like for example I have friends that say, “Oh it’s cool you make money online and you have these online businesses and you work from home and all that.” And then it seems like they are interested in actually learning more and I start to get such ruin in my mouse. My mouse starts to run on my own minute and then they ask all these questions and then they never do or say anything.

So I think it’s just a matter of you know say or listen to this podcasts right now. I said this on another one– another podcasts and I was like don’t become an expert at listening to podcasts. You’ve got to be able to take what you learn from whatever it is and then actually do something.

Steve: Are you trying to get my listeners to stop listening to my podcast Chris, is that what is going on here?

Chris: I’m just saying they can listen to your podcast within as long as they get home say they listen to it on their drive to work, and then you know they can get on and actually do something. That’s all I’m saying.

Steve: And just curious how long you know after you released your first plugin did it actually gain traction to make sales? Was it pretty immediate or?

Chris: It was pretty immediate and I guess– and it comes down to maybe you’d have a better guess if you had someone that had to start with no existing platform. It sounds like…

Steve: Let me ask you this, if you had no platform what would you have done?

Chris: I don’t know if I would have done one. I don’t even know if I would have done a plugin, maybe I don’t know. I think I probably would have just tried to look up other people that were doing plugins to see what they did and then try to talk to them and say, hey you know I tried to find someone that did a plugin that wasn’t at all similar in any market to what I was doing and said, “Hey this is the plugin I’m looking to build you know how did you get your first users or things like that.” And it’s obviously the same for a lot of businesses. You could see you know or how did this Sass Company get started. Do some research and try to find out about that or whatever. So…

Steve: Yeah I mean I ask you that for a reason because I think establishing some sort of platform before you do anything is very important. That way you always have an initial set of customers to sell to right when you launch, right?

Chris: Yeah I wish I knew the name of the company. It’s either like Unbounce or someone else. But I hope it’s not them because that might be their competitor but it was– one of their co-founders who have been writing blog posts for months and months about conversion rates type stuff. And when they release their tool they had always people that have been reading and they had you know they’ve been building their email list and all that to help. So I really think that you know pre-launch you know getting a pre-launch list and that actually launching something is really important. And making in an advance and trying to really push it.

Steve: Yes so Chris we’ve already been chatting for about 40 minutes. If anyone has any questions for you just about your plugins or just writing a plugin in general, where can they find you?

Chris: Yeah so the best place to find me would probably just through my blog entrepreneurboost.com and I’ll say slash Steve, so I can know where you came from, and I’ll set up a page that says you know includes my contact and so just some of the other random projects that I’ve been doing over the last few years. Not only saying random because it’s just I’ve done a lot of different things. Some of them have taken off and then others have you know not been as good enough, but I still learnt from them.

Steve: Okay yeah and Chris has got a great blog you guys should all go check it out on entrepreneurboost.com. It talks about some really cools stuff and he often mentions numbers to back it up as well. So it’s pretty cool.

Chris: Yeah, yeah that’s what I like to do.

Steve: All right Chris hey thanks a lot for coming on the show man. I really appreciate your time.

Chris: Thanks Steve.

Steve: All right take care.

Hope you enjoyed that interview. Chris is awesome, and what I find interesting about his story is that he discovered a problem while running his own WordPress site and decided to develop a solution to his own problem. Plus he is not a programmer which just goes to show that you don’t really need to have a technical background to do software development.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode53, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to ITunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps to keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show very easily and get awesome business advice from my guest. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral either to someone else or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequiteherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

052: How Carole Rains Leverages Pinterest To Drive Sales To Her Rustic Furniture Store

Carole Rains

I met Carole Rains at the Ecommerce Fuel Live conference and I’m happy that we met. Carole runs 2 online stores, RusticArtistry.com and EmuBliss.com, and she uses Pinterest heavily to promote her products.

In this interview, you will get an in depth tutorial on how to maximize your Pinterest account and how to leverage Pinterest to promote your products.

What You’ll Learn

  • How Carole decide on the niche for her online store
  • How Carole found dropshippers for her online furniture shop
  • How Carole gets vendors to dropship for her
  • What the logistics are like when selling handcrafted products
  • How Carole gets photos for her product when she doesn’t get to see them in person
  • Carole’s primary traffic source and how she leverages it due to the nature of her products
  • How Carole uses blogger outreach to sell product
  • How Carole leveraged a competitor’s name to generate traffic
  • Why Pinterest should be such an important part of your strategy
  • How to grow your Pinterest account.
  • How often you should be pinning
  • What tools you should be using to grow your Pinterest account
  • How to get more Pinterest followers

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. In this episode I`m going to be talking to Carole Rains, now Carole has actually been a long time reader of mywifequitherjob.com and we actually had the pleasure of finally meeting face to face at the ecommerce fuel conference in Austin Texas several months ago. Now Carole runs a site Rusticartistry.com where she sells rustic furniture and accessories online, and what’s cool about Carole is that she generates a lot of her sales and awareness through Pinterest. Now I actually had a couple of people on the podcast already to talk about Pinterest, but this is actually the first person that I have had online who is specifically using Pinterest to promote an ecommerce store. So welcome to the show Carole, really happy to have you today.

Carole: Thanks Steve, glad to be here.

Steve: Yes, so let’s talk about your business a little bit first. Can you give us a quick background story? Tell us about how Rustic Artistry got started and what it sells exactly.

Carole: Sure. So I started rustic artistry in 2013. Prior to that I was a chef and prior to that I was in pharmaceutical advertising. So I had some background and experience with marketing and design and copy writing and print production and all that, and what happened then with the restaurant job was it just started to bore me, and I wasn’t using my brain and I was thinking use it or lose it.

So I knew that I needed something that was going to be more stimulating to me and my daughter had been and entrepreneur since she graduated college in 2009 and we would have lots of conversations about entrepreneurs and that kind of a life, and I decided that maybe that was the direction that I would take rather than just looking for another job working for somebody else. And I wanted to have time to do things and you know have a really-really flexible schedule, be able to go on trips with my sister and what not.

So I got bit by the entrepreneurial bug and you know I had been as I said reading your website and understood a little bit about ecommerce. Certainly I was an exceptional online shopper. So I had the customer perspective down pat, and I decided I was going to create an online store. So I read a lot of your articles, I found Andrew Youderian’s eBook on starting an online store.

He had a start up guide that was a step by step process and I went through the niche selection process of you know trying to think of what I could sell and whether I should pick something that I really knew well. You know, maybe something in the cooking field or you know whether to just go with the theory that just take something that meets all the proper criteria for a good product to sell and then the interest will follow. I decided that I just couldn’t bring myself to go that route, so I went with something that I was interested in…

Steve: Okay…

Carole: Which was rustic furniture and decor with an emphasis on hand crafted items, because I had always really respected and liked the items that I would see at craft ship– craft fairs and craft shows. And I had an experience trying to purchase a cow hide chair a couple of years ago and really had trouble finding it, and I thought well if I can’t find it and I know how to search then other people you know are probably having trouble finding you know interesting hand crafted rustic décor. So I put the two together and I created Rustic Artistry where I represent artisans from around the country, who make unique and customizable furniture and décor, and I do marketing and promotion for them in exchange for a commission on any sales that I make.

Steve: Okay, so these people don’t have their own websites of their own, right?

Carole: Well they do, but they are really weak and that’s the thing, that’s why I had to do a lot of digging, a lot of goggling to find them because they are hard to find.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And you know for us who live locally where they may be doing a show, people don’t know about them, so they’re missing out on all this great stuff and the artisans are missing out on a lot of potential customers.

Steve: Okay, so you are essentially a drop shipper is that right?

Carole: Yeah.

Steve: Okay and then, so how do you find these people?

Carole: I had a really fun time for a few months when I first started just looking and looking for different artisans and you know goggling rustic furniture or at around that furniture, and then there`s like a lot of organizations that they might belong to especially like in the ad around axis [phonetic] there is a lot of groups for all these types of people, and then I would just start looking up their names and seeing what I could find and looking at the websites you know that they had or if they had a Facebook page to see their style. And if it was something that made my jaw drop then I would send them an email and propose to represent them and you know get some publicity and exposure for them.

Steve: Okay, and so what is your hit rate? Do you get turned down most of the time or people are generally receptive?

Carole: No, they are generally receptive because these are mostly people that you know, they don’t want to deal with a website and advertising. They want to be sawing and hammering and nailing you know and that kind of stuff creating.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So they are happy to give up a little of their profit in order to get some more sales and customers in.

Steve: So do you typically source piece by piece or do you just take the whole portfolio of products and list them on you site?

Carole: I pick some of their items. So I might try to have say a dozen from any one particular artisan, and a lot of what I show is pieces that they’ve made in the past. It’s not like these pieces are sitting around waiting to be shipped to someone. You know they are one of a kind pieces that have been made and shipped to another customer, but they are items that they feel that they could recreate closely.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: You know given the nature of sticks and you know natural materials that are used. So I just pick things that I think have a good general appeal out of what they created in the past.

Steve: So that implies that everything is hand and custom made upon order, is that correct?

Carole: Correct, yes.

Steve: Okay which leads– that means there is long lead times involved in everything, right?

Carole: Yes. In fact that’s why I can’t put any of these on Amazon because you are required to ship immediately on Amazon, so it’s not an option for me.

Steve: Okay and then so how does the arrangement work? So someone places an order on your site and then how do you convey that order to your artisan?

Carole: So I have a regular shopping cart on my site, it’s– I have a WooCommerce shopping cart, and when the order comes through to me, then I will forward them to the artisan and you know with email and also speak to them on the phone.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And then they will create the item and ship it directly to my customer, and the artisan will bill me either through pay pal or if they have my credit card on file or you know however they chose to be paid.

Steve: Okay and then– shit I lost my train of thought. So what happens with the photos? So do you get to see these pieces of furniture at all?

Carole: Well, I download photos that they supply to me or that I pick up off of their website or their Facebook page.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: Then if they are creating something new they will, they can send a photo to me, sometimes the customers will send me the photo of the item in their home, so that’s sort of how I handle the photography.

Steve: So you typically don’t see any of these items before they are shipped out or anything?

Carole: Unfortunately no, I wish I could.

Steve: Okay I was just wondering logistically how it works. So what about customer support if someone is unsatisfied with the item, how do you deal with that exactly? Does it go to you or does it go to the artisan?

Carole: It would come through me initially, because I am the contact to the customer.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So fortunately no one has had an issue to date, but if they did they certainly would approach me and I would do whatever is necessary to make the situation right, then I would need to negotiate with the artisan.

Steve: Okay, and then how many artisans are we talking about here [inaudible 00:10:26].

Carole: I’ve got close to– I’ve got between two and three dozen active right now, and then I have an ever note file of 100, probably more that I you know would like to contact and you know I`m interested in so…

Steve: Okay.

Carole: But right now it’s probably about two dozen or so on the site.

Steve: Okay and so that’s actually sounds like a lot of people to manage and presumably different artisans might have different response rates in terms of shipping and that sort of thing. So what are some of the challenges of running a business like this where you are dealing with so many different players?

Carole: There is sometimes little lag time on you know being able to respond to a customer because they are asking me a question and I have to in turn ask that question to the artisan and wait for their response. So you know I have to let the customer know I got your question and I`m checking on it, and I will get back to you as soon as I can. So I think you end up with a little bit more of emails back and forth. There is a lot more hand holding with the customers because you know with a custom item it has to go back and forth of how they want it and things like that, so there is a lot of customer interaction.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: But the thing is that I`m also you know, I`m making a decent dollar on an item. So it’s not like I`m making only six dollars and I wouldn’t want to put so much time into it. If I`m making several hundred dollars you know it’s worth it for me to have some chats with the customer and you know and they love it. I mean they absolutely love the handle.

Steve: I imagine this furniture is pricy so, does that imply that you have like a phone line as well as email and that sort of thing to handle customer support?

Carole: Yes, I’ve got a phone line, I have got an [inaudible 00:12:21] pop up chat box, and I have contact information all over the website.

Steve: Okay. Okay and then I have actually never sold really-really expensive items. I would imagine the lead times for sale are much longer than just some sort of impulse buy online, right?

Carole: They are, yeah.

Steve: Do you happen to actually know what this time period typically is from like initial customer contact to actually a sale on average?

Carole: I don’t know, I can’t quantify that.

Steve: Okay. So yeah you know Carole I brought you on to talk about Pinterest, but before we talk about Pinterest, I was just curious what are some of the different ways that you get customers to your online store and what is kind of working the best for you right now?

Carole: Well because of the visual nature of what I sell, I get a lot of people to the store who are doing Google image searches. So if they are looking for you know cow hide bar stool, my images all have descriptive tags, and they show up very-very well on Goggle image for my key words.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So I get organic traffic that way from Google image search, and I`ve also gotten a lot of traffic recently through– this was just pure luck. There was a big company called Crow’s Nest Trading that did a lot of western fashion and décor and they closed last November. And one of the bloggers who had written an article about rustic artistry had also written something about Crow`s Nest Trading, so everybody was coming to her saying where are they where are they, and she finally just wrote a blog post that said they are closed, but here try these other places. And so she mentioned Rustic Artistry and I started getting a ton of traffic from that. So then what I did is, I [Inaudible 00:14:27] even more traffic, I created a landing page called “Looking for Crow’s Nest trading?”

Steve: That’s ingenious.

Carole: And I can’t even tell you how much traffic I get from that, and you know every key word variation you can think of with Crow`s Nest, people have looked and have gotten to my site from that. And then on that landing page I’ve got you know an explanation that they are closed, but here are some similar items, and then I link to a bunch of different categories on my site.

Steve: So is blogger outreach one of you strategies for your store?

Carole: Absolutely yes.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: Mm-huh.

Steve: Okay, so can you talk about that a little bit, so how do you do that, what’s your technique?

Carole: Well it’s a little hard to find home décor blogs that are more rustic themed, it’s just not really the way they go. But I`ve had a lot of success with going towards the western and like the cow girl kind of audience. So there is a blog called Horses In Heals and she wrote a piece about me, and Maverick Style News she wrote a piece. And so those have been really-really helpful and moving forward I have you know a number of other bloggers that I`m going to be reaching out to, to let them know about the site as well and possibly do you know maybe a raffle or giveaway or something like that.

Steve: So what is you’re– so what do you say in your outreach emails, like how do you convince them to cover you?

Carole: I include some photos of pieces that I have right within the email so that they can see if it’s the kind of décor that their readers would probably like.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And I basically try to you know position it that way that this is– these are items that their readers might find unique and interesting. It would be something different for them to show.

Steve: And then they use your images that you send typically for this? And then so back to this landing page thing, sorry to skip around.

Carole: It’s okay.

Steve: So this landing page, did you just buy a new URL and then you just specifically tried to rank for Crow’s Nest or whatever the store was called?

Carole: I literally created it as a page on my word press dashboard for Rustic Artistry.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So it’s got my regular header and footer and then you know in the middle is that headline looking for Crow’s Nest Trading, and I created in pink monkey which we will probably talk about for Pinterest. I created a nice collage with a bunch of different pieces of furniture that I thought would really appeal to people who had been Crow’s Nest Trading shoppers. So as soon as they landed on the page they would you know see things that looked sort of familiar to them from Crow’s Nest.

Steve: Very smart very smart, and so did you try anything to actually specifically rank for this page? Did you drive links to it, or buy ads on it or anything like that?

Carole: Nope. It’s just because it’s got Crow’s Nest Trading on it, and it shows up as– when you goggle Crow’s Nest Trading it comes up as number two and number one is the article on Horses in Heals where she is referring people to me for that.

Steve: That’s awesome. That’s really awesome, so do you run any paper click ads or anything like that?

Carole: I just signed on with Adrol recently and have started doing some PPC, and I have seen my old ads show up now on other websites that I`m on. But that’s recent; I actually hadn’t been doing any Google PPC until then.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: I have run some Ads on Facebook for Rustic Artistry, usually for a specific piece of furniture, a western type of thing. Don’t think I ever did any to generate likes to the Facebook page, but I do occasionally run product specific ads, or promote a post that shows a product on it.

Steve: The reason why I am asking this question is typically people who drop ship don’t necessarily have the margins to be able to be profitable with their campaigns. So in your experience have your campaigns that you have run all been profitable, and if so what have you done to make them profitable?

Carole: I have gotten sales that I know have come out of Facebook posts and I think promoted posts. It’s really tough Steve for me to quantify a lot of these things because I just don’t have the volume of sales to really analyze it that well. You know there is not enough for me to particularly draw conclusion from at this point.

Steve: Okay. So let’s talk about Pinterest then which is and this is originally– you posted this article on your amazing success with Pinterest. So, I know for our store Pinterest is easily the best converting social media for us too. I think it converts at around 1% of all the Pinterest traffic that we actually get which is really good for our social media, and in some of our stats that I read about your Pinterest account were pretty amazing. So this is where I read that 90% of your pins get at least one re pin, 64% of all your social traffic comes from Pinterest and all of your visitors from Pinterest seem to have a very low bounce rate, is that right?

Carole: Correct, and I just checked last night and that’s– those stats are actually still holding.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So like I`m getting about two to three times as much traffic to my site from Pinterest as from Facebook and I work both those social media platforms you know pretty hard. I don’t do any other ones, I don’t do Instagram, I don’t do twitter. I just do Facebook and Pinterest and you know I try to be active on them every day, but definitely there is a lot more visitors from Pinterest than from Facebook.

Steve: Okay, and then so what I was hoping to get out of you today is you know from the perspective of a brand new shop owner, let’s say somebody who has just opened up and they want to start focusing on Pinterest. What are some of the very basic things that they should be doing just from a beginner perspective?

Carole: Well the first thing that you want to do is make sure that your Pinterest profile is really well filled out so that you know up on the top there is a good description of your store. So that when people land on your Pinterest page they can you know read in a sentence or two what it is that you are all about, and you can use key words in there because Pinterest is becoming quite the search engine. So it’s good to do that and in fact even each board can have a description and a key word rich description. So it’s important to go through and make sure that those are all properly filled out, and then the next thing that I would suggest is finding some other good pinners or blogs to follow, specifically ones that have a lot of followers themselves.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And then…

Steve: What does that do for you?

Carole: Well that gives you some really good material to re-pin.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And you can look when you start getting their pins in your feed you can see which ones are popular because it will show how many times they’ve been repined. So obviously those are things that resonate with people and those are good ones to re-pin on to your own boards because they will continue to get repined. So you want to get on some boards that already are popular.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And the other thing is you know try to follow some group boards and then get invitation to contribute to group boards. There is a website called pin groupie, which allows you to search for group boards by different categories, and sometimes it can be tricky to get in touch with the owner of the group board although Pinterest now has this message option, when you can message somebody directly. And so I think that’s going to make it a lot easier to contact the owner of the board and say you know, hey I’d like to receive an invitation to contribute to your board.

Steve: Okay and so why would someone want you to contribute, and presumably you have to build up your profile a little bit before you start asking, right?

Carole: I guess so, I would think so. One thing you could do is create your own group board and then start inviting anybody who is following any of your other boards you know let them know that you got a group board and you know need to welcome pinners on it.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: In fact you could promote something like that on Facebook and I’ve done that, I have run Facebook posts that– to send people to my Pinterest pages and to let them know that if you find that what I have posted on Facebook is of interest to you, then check out my Pinterest boards because there is even more good stuff there.

Steve: I see and then the advantage of having a group pin board is that you don’t have to be actively pinning, you can rely on the people who are contributing to do it.

Carole: That and also because now that board shows up on all of their boards. So your exposure is exponentially increased for you know just through that one board.

Steve: Okay but presumably with this group board you have to build it up a little bit yourself otherwise people won’t…

Carole: Yes, you’re correct, you would need to put a bunch of decent pins in yourself just to get it up and running, and then you know start getting other people to pin to it and sending out invitations, there is just a little edit button where you can invite people to your board.

Steve: Okay and then just I’m just curious. How often do you Pin and how many Pins do you do a day?

Carole: I try to Pin every day, that’s not always possible. I would like to Pin at least say 8 to 10 Pins a day.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: Because it’s good to have your Pins sort of spread out throughout the day. People get– people follow a lot of boards and therefore their feeds are so huge that’s there is no way that they’re seeing everything that comes through.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So if you spread out during the day you have better chance of possibly being you know seen in their feed. I am a beta tester for a scheduling tool by Tailwind and hopefully they will bring that live because that makes it so much easier to get my Pins spread out. Because some days I just have you know I’ll have a half hour I’ll just want to look for good Pins, and if I Pin them all at once, I would basically be spamming somebody’s pin with all my Pins.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And you do not want to do that because people will un-follow you basically.

Steve: So it works a whole lot like Twitter in that respect?

Carole: Yes.

Steve: So I was going to ask that was actually my next question. Is there a way to automate the process because I know there are services out there that do that, what is special about this Tailwind service?

Carole: Tailwind is working on putting something together so that you can just when you– instead of Pinning it you just click schedule. And you can actually set up a schedule for the best days and times and their analytics. It’s a whole analytics program as well.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: You look at the analytics to see when your Pins are most viral and then you can set up your schedule so that you know you got Pins going out every five minutes, say at 8:00 clock on Thursdays from 8:00 to 8:30. And that way you know it’s really the optimized time for your Pins to go live. So that’s the beauty of that option is that you know– or let’s say I’m sitting in bed late at night you know 1:00 clock in the morning and you know I’m adding Pins, but it’s not the best time for them to go live with the…

Steve: Okay.

Carole: Scheduling tool, you know they won’t hit until you know the next morning or whenever it is I set them for.

Steve: Have you ever used viral tag?

Carole: No.

Steve: Okay. It does this similar function, I was just curious. Is Tailwind going to charge or is it going to be a free service?

Carole: I don’t know, I do pay for the analytics. They have a couple of different plans for the analytics. But and it’s really-really a great program for seeing you know what your Pins are doing, who your most influential followers are, what kind of exposure. And you know Pinterest is recently really beefed up the analytics that they provide. And that’s really good, but there is still a lot more that is available in the Tailwind Analytics Program.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And so while so I found it really-really worthwhile.

Steve: So what are some of the things that you’ve done based on the analytics data you’ve gathered through Tailwind?

Carole: I look at which Pins are the most popular, and then I might re-pin that to a different board.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: Or I will use that for a Facebook post because I know it’s an image that is attracting a lot of people. So I also use those analytics to find the new people that are following me, and then I checkout their boards to see if there is somebody that I want to follow. So that helps me you know get new material for my boards.

Steve: Okay and then just a very fundamental question for you. How do you get more followers? I think in that article you mentioned that you grew it pretty dramatically in a matter of months. What did you do during those months to get so many followers?

Carole: Well when I watched Rustic Artistry a year ago this past summer. And I changed my Pinterest account from my personal account into a business account. So I had you know maybe 200 followers as a personal account, and now it’s getting close to 8000. So I’ve noticed over the past few months that like once it started to really get moving that it really became self motivated. You know I’m getting about 30 to 50 new followers a day everyday now.

And that’s with just doing the same amount of work of you know putting 10 to 15 Pins a day, hopefully everyday but not even. So it seems to just sort of self propagate itself after a while. But I do promote my Pinterest boards on Facebook. I’ve got a tab on Facebook that you know lets people know that connects to my Pinterest page like I said I put posts up every once in a while to promote it.

I’ve got a signature on all my emails both my personal and my business emails and I use WiseStamp for that. And it puts my logo and it puts the Pinterest and the Facebook logos on there, and those are clickable, so you know anytime anybody gets an email from me there is an opportunity for them to get over to my Pinterest page and start following it there.

And in addition I’m about to re-launch Rustic Artistry with an entirely new theme. And I’m using the Pinterest widget in the sidebar which picks up about 8 to 10 of your most recent Pins and shows them in the sidebars. So there will be a real active way to promote the Pinterest boards right on my website.

Steve: Okay, so is this a plug in?

Carole: Yeah.

Steve: What is it called?

Carole: This is a Pinterest widget. I think if you go to business.Pinterest.com they have widget builders which is where you can get the Pin It Button so that when and if ever anybody harbors over an image it automatically pops up with a little Pin It Button they can Pin right from there.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And that’s absolutely you know– that’s like step one almost just to make sure you have Pin It Button. But they offer these other options for blogs and for websites that sort of bring the Pinterest board to your website.

Steve: Okay, then what percentage of your Pins are from your own stuff versus other people stuff?

Carole: Very-very few. I’m adamant about not spamming people with my products. And you know I’ve seen businesses and I’ve looked at their Pinterest accounts and every board is nothing but their products. So it’s basically just like their catalog on Pinterest, and that’s a veil interest to Pinners. So you have to have to have a lot of Pins that are just more generic and lifestyle related. And then I’ll pop in every once in a while, I’ll pop in a pin for one of my products. But I do not want to alienate people by just showing picture after picture after picture of my items even if they are you know cool looking.

Steve: So what you are saying is if you just go ahead and Pin of all of your own stuff, you are not going to gather very may followers?

Carole: No you are not and you may actually lose followers. And the thing about that too is that if you go and populate a board with all of your products, then now there is no activity you know. Unless you keep adding Pins no one is going to see it. So there has to be constant fresh content. And that’s why I’m always looking for many-many other pictures, and then you know maybe not even one a day is for my products.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: I use it a lot for brand recognition and to get my name out there so people know the name Rustic Artistry.

Steve: Okay. And then in terms of the actual photo creation, can we talk about how you do it and some of the tools that you use?

Carole: Sure.

Steve: And what is kind of your strategy?

Carole: Yeah there is a couple of good tools out there. There is one called Pinthemall.net and so if you are on a website or like an article that’s got multiple pictures, for example I might be on a website for a local manufacturer, and there is a whole bunch of great photos on their site. With Pinthemall.net it actually catches all those photos and lets you select which ones you want to include in your Pin, and it automatically puts them in a big tall stack and then you can write your description and post it right to Pinterest.

In fact I think you can post it to other social media as well. But it’s a nice way to get a whole bunch of Pins in a big stack without having to save them all to your computer and then upload them to you know an imaging app.

Steve: So it’s like a photo collage tool so to speak?

Carole: Pretty much yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And it just does a vertical stack. So like I might do up to maybe up to 5 pictures, if you go too-too deep Pinterest does cut it off and even somebody has to click on to see the entire thing. So I don’t go too much more than five, but it’s helpful or like let’s say you wanted to do– you had a tutorial for example on you know on your website you could pick the five photos that are associated with that tutorial, and it would just put them all together in a nice little row.

Steve: I see. Nice.

Carole: That’s a really quick and easy way to get a good tall vertical Pin.

Steve: What is your feeling on text? Do you always put text in your photos?

Carole: I put text in my photos if I’m specifically creating a Pin to drive email sign ups, or to announce that I’ve got a new board. So in that case I will go and use PicMonkey and which I know a lot of people are using PicMonkey now, and that may has a collage builder and you can set it up to any form that you want. But usually its best to just do picture stack one on top of the other.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And then I might take one of those boxes and instead of putting a photo in I’ll put text in, and so I’ll say you know check out my new board on western décor.

Steve: Interesting.

Carole: And I’ll post that on a different board so you know people will see it. And I’ve also used really great success on driving email sign ups and I had for example a newsletter that was all about decorating with cow hide, or I heard another one it was about buffalo plaid, and I did Pins that had several photos from that and then a text box in it saying you know if you want to get ideas for how to decorate with cow hide sign up for this newsletter. And then in the Pin description was the link to my newsletter sign up. So if they clicked the Pin or they clicked the description, it brings them right to my sign up form.

Steve: Okay. And what do you use to collect the email addresses?

Carole: I’m on Mad Mimi now as a matter of fact I actually…

Steve: Interesting.

Carole: Had been on had been on Infusionsoft and I’m going to switch to Mad Mimi because it turns out that I just don’t need all that Infusionsoft offers.

Steve: Okay. That’s surprising most people because it costs like $1000 just to join, right?

Carole: Yeah. It was a lot, it was a big chunk of change.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And you know I waited a while before I did it and then I finally decided you know I just– I’m going to bite the bullet and do it. And it’s a great platform and you know you can make great drip campaigns on it. But I just– I can do pretty much everything that I need on Mad Mimi and I like the design of the emails so much better.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So I’m just going to cut my losses.

Steve: Okay. And then question I had about Pins, so it sounds like the majority of Pins do not have texts, but occasionally if you want to promote something you put some text in there, right?

Carole: That’s exactly right, yes.

Steve: So what about a price tag on the Pins? Do you recommend doing that?

Carole: I generally don’t. I have tried it on some Pins because I read consistently that that helps drive clicks to your website. So sometimes I do put a price in there, but I couldn’t really say whether it’s helpful or not.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And you know especially with expensive furniture like I’m kind of scared to put that right out there.

Steve: That’s true yes.

Carole: You know I’m afraid if I say this $5000 it’s like well you know why would I even bother clicking over. But if I could get somebody to click over to look at that sofa then they might start moving around the rest of the website and see something else they like.

Steve: Right, okay that makes sense.

Carole: So I think it’s a factor of you know what your price points are.

Steve: Okay. And then I remember reading that you are trying Pinterest ads. Have you actually spent any money on that yet?

Carole: So I did try Pinterest ad and I ran an ad for one of these sofas and the way you do it on these ads is you have to– you put in whatever keywords you want, and then they let you do a little bit of targeting. You can target some metropolitan areas, you can target gender and language, so I don’t think the targeting is that good. And when I looked at the results that I got from that I really was less than thrilled because I get better re-Pins and clicks organically from that Pin than I did from promoting it.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So I’m doing it– I’m running another experiment now with a much less expensive item it’s a $100 item, and I’m going to see how that compares. So I Pinned it to my board at the same time that I started running the ad and I’ll really be able to I think compare you know what kind of interest people have organically versus whoever Pinterest is showing this to.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of getting charged is it just per click or…?

Carole: Yes it’s just per click. So you know it cost me like $35 or something to run that sofa ad for a few weeks. It really wasn’t that much. And you know if I had gotten one sale out of it, it would certainly be worthwhile because of you know…

Steve: Sure.

Carole: The profit margin on that item.

Steve: And in terms of just cost per click I mean it’s a pretty new service right? Is it even out for the general public yet?

Carole: I think it’s out for the general public in the US. I know it’s not available in Canada yet.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And I’m not sure whether I was you know selected to receive an invitation to it or whether that went out to everybody, but I did get an email from Pinterest saying you know you can now do this.

Steve: Okay. And here is just a question from my own personal experience. There is this one competitor of ours that actually Pins our photos but uses her URL. Is that something that’s legal or is that…

Carole: Wow, that’s just really bad for him.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: I mean that’s– that is such a slimy thing to do. I don’t know if there is anything you can do about that because I know for a fact that Pinterest can’t go in and change the URL for a Pin, because I was trying to do that with my email sign up because it was linked to Infusionsoft and now I needed a link to Mad Mimi.

Steve: Sure-sure.

Carole: So I just created a new Pin, but I did check with them to see if they could change it and they can’t.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So that just stinks basically.

Steve: Okay, yeah I was just curious if you know people do that, I mean it’s a little annoying right? Because she is essentially using our intellectual property to drive traffic to her site.

Carole: Yeah I mean you might just want to try and sue if she persists right after that.

Steve: Okay. And you know on a holistic level you know all the marketing strategies that you typically employ for your store, where does Pinterest fall on that hierarchy? So when it comes to like SEO, Facebook, Pinterest, all the different things that you do?

Carole: I would say that Pinterest falls really quite high for me and for anybody that has products that are visually interesting or are related to– you know you can really tie any product into things that are visually interesting for example Shivani Yoga. They are doing really well with Pinterest and it’s not that they are showing pictures of yoga, like they created a blog that’s all about yoga because they know that people that do yoga eat yoghurt.

So they created a lifestyle board like that and like the Four Seasons Hotels they’ve got a board that highlights restaurants, good restaurants in all of the cities where they have a hotel. So it’s not promoting their hotels per say, but it’s getting people on their account. And then once you know so if somebody is following the restaurant board they’ll be– you know they might just sign up to follow all the boards.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So it’s really important to you know make sure that you are Pinning a lot– a wide variety of things that relate to the lifestyle and the interest of your customers even if that doesn’t have something specific to do with your product.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And I’d imagine you guys are doing that and probably have you know bride– some things like that…

Steve: Ours is easy yeah, we’ve got wedding stuff so yeah.

Carole: It totally lends itself to that. One other thing I’d like to you know mention is there is a lot of great sources out there for getting good photos. And for example I will go to the websites of manufacturers of log homes or architects or interior designers or magazines that might follow us with like and either I will bookmark those sites so that I can remember them and come back to them, or I will subscribe to their emails and then I will open up the emails with specific purpose of just seeing if there is any good photos in there that I would want to Pin.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: So I would suggest that you know people do that as a source for fresh material because certainly you can just re-Pin other things that you are following. But it’s really-really good to you know put new content into Pinterest as well.

Steve: So in terms of your daily Pins do you try to look for the majority of Pins to be brand new things, or like what’s the breakdown of re-Pins versus new Pins?

Carole: I’ve been doing a lot more new Pins lately because I just haven’t had the time to get onto my feed.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: But it’s probably pretty equal. You know there is certainly nothing the matter with re-Pinning.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: I mean that’s really the beauty of Pinterest is that things do get re-Pinned.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: But you know a lot of times it’s I like to see new stuff because I find that even when I go through my feed most of what I’m seeing I know I’ve already Pinned previously.

Steve: Okay and then you recommend everyone who runs a business to actually sign up for a business account. Is that correct?

Carole: Absolutely yes.

Steve: Okay. Outside the analytics what’s the other benefit? Is it pra…

Carole: It gives the– allows you to have a link to your Facebook page on that as well. And I guess it’s really the analytics.

Steve: Okay.

Carole: And the board that come up customer service that you can get from Pinterest.

Steve: Okay. And then where did you learn all of your Pinterest tactics? Did you read any books? Take any courses? Anything you recommend?

Carole: Melanie Duncan I think does some pretty good trainings on Pinterest. And then I had gotten some books and you know I just looked for blog articles. I read all kinds of blog articles on it. I was approached by a woman who writes for NewspaperGirl and there is a Facebook page I could think of it on Pinterest.

Steve: Okay. You can tell me later.

Carole: Yeah I will tell you later. And you know so there is lots of good material on that as well.

Steve: Okay. Hey well Carole we’ve been talking for 45 minutes I want to be respectful of your time. You supplied of lot of great stuff.

Carole: Good thank you.

Steve: If anyone out there has any questions for you where can they find you?

Carole: They can reach me through Rusticartistry.com, there is certainly lots of ways to contact me on that, it’s Carole with an ‘E’ @Rusticartistry.com.

Steve: Okay. Sounds good Carole and thanks a lot for coming on the show, I learnt a lot.

Carole: It was my pleasure Steve.

Steve: Alright thanks Carole.

Carole: Okay.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that interview. Even though we’ve only met face to face once, Carole is just one of those people who is constantly learning new things and she always offers excellent tips whether it be about Pinterest, or other ways of marketing an online store. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode52, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to ITunes and leave me a review.

When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps to keep this podcast up in the ranks so that other people can use this information, find the show very easily and get awesome business advice from my guest. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequiteherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free 6 day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

051: How Mike Crowley Created The 94Fifty Sensor Basketball – A Top 25 Invention Of The Year

94fifty

Mike Crowley is the founder of 94Fifty.com, a company that produces sensor basketballs and is perhaps the coolest technology that I’ve seen come out in a long time. Here’s a video below of how his product works.

In this podcast, you’ll learn how Mike developed this product and how he leveraged Kickstarter to generate massive buzz. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Mike came up with the idea to create a basketball training tool
  • How Mike raised over 130,000 in a kickstarter campaign for his product
  • How to use Kickstarter to improve the visibility of your business
  • How to create a complex product like a sensor basketball
  • The difference between getting angel investors versus doing a kickstarter
  • How to set up a successful kickstarter campaign
  • The most important aspect of a good kickstarter campaign
  • How Mike got the word out about his company and kickstarter

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m thrilled to have a very special guest on the show Mike Crowley. Now Mike is the founder and CEO of 94fifty.com which is a company that creates freakishly smart sensor basketballs. Now here’s how they work, embedded in each 94fifty ball are a bunch of sensors that are programmed to measure things that you can’t really see with the human eye. So things like how the ball spins, how it leaves your hand, how you dribble, and then along with a phone app it helps you train to become a better basketball player.

Now since this is an audio podcast and I can’t really adequately express in words how cool these basketballs are, I’m going to link up to the demo video in the show notes so you can check it out yourself. Now mike is actually the first person that I’ve had on the show that has had a successful kick starter campaign, and he managed to raise over $130,000 in 30 days. Now before we start I just want to let the listeners know that I’m currently in negotiations with Mike to make this technology exclusive to Asians, so that we can have more Jeremy Lin in the NBA, and with that welcome to show Mike. How are you doing today?

Mike: Good Steve thanks for having me.

Steve: So can you give us the quick background story, tell us how you came up with the idea for 94fifty?

Mike: Well sure the– I’m from Indiana, so that’s the very first and probably most important thing. We’ve known to play the game a little bit in that state, and like many others it’s the one sport that I had a passion for since probably I was one or two. So that I was predispositioned to basketball and I knew the game very well. I’ve been taught the game by many great coaches, but over the last maybe 10 or 15 years you can see that there was this shift in the way that players were learning not just this game but just sports in general.

The younger athletes because they had been so exposed to not only the internet, but mobile devices and the instantaneous nature of information and expectation for results, you could see that there is a difference in the way that they were learning, or their the need for learning particularly very complex motions that are boring to practice. So we took that basic concept. How can we address that need? We talked to a lot of coaches, players, parents and there’s clearly a need for it and develop something that worked in the exact same way that people were used to.

So it had to be invisible from a tech standpoint but gave this experience to the player where they could get that instant feedback about whether or not they are doing something right. So that we could turn any parent whether they knew anything about the game and they were pretty elite coach, and then gave that 24 hour access to hey if I want to get better and I want to see an improvement in my confidence on the court or in other case in other sports that they can have access to it in an affordable way. So that’s really the evidence for where the business started and then from there to try to build that product into that initial vision was really the challenge, but that I came– started in Indiana and then carried right through to the modern day tech world.

Steve: And you played in college as well, right?

Mike: I did yeah, I played at St. Joseph’s college division two school in Indiana so…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: I’ve got my feel all the way through college ranks.

Steve: Yeah and did you– have you coached at all before or is this just a passion of yours in general?

Mike: You know I haven’t coached at the team level. I went into the business world after school and stayed there, but I’ve trained many-many kids over the years hundreds and hundreds, how to play, how to shoot. So I have a pretty good feel for what it takes to be a trainer, but no I did not have any formal coaching.

Steve: Okay and I thought I just ask you know are you a technical guy at all?

Mike: I only pretend to be one on podcasts like this, no I’ve got a business background, I just surround myself with a lot of very smart technical people.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: And it makes a great combination for the business.

Steve: Yes I was going to ask you something. So I’m a hardware engineer with a background into software and I’m fairly confident that I could take a reasonable stab at creating the guts of a sensor ball with some algorithm help, but to create a product like this requires a combination of everything including mechanical design hardware design, as well as you I design. So how does one kind of execute on such a complicated product from the beginning, so how did you get started with def process and assemble the team?

Mike: Yeah so we you know the company when I founded it we started with the really difficult part at the time with how do you build algorithms that can recognize that something is happening with the sensor. A motion sensor can’t see it just senses motion. So how do you build those programs and say the sensors know or can recognize that something has happened and it’s reliable and accurate. So that was my co founder Kevin King, he had his PhD in that area for sports sensor development and algorithms…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: But from that then you had to go out and find somebody who is very good at assimilating all of that technology into a full system. You know a product and it just so happens that one of the guys I grew up with my little town in Indiana who was my college roommate was one of the world’s best people doing it. He started you know working on internet stuff back in the early 90s and has done some amazing simulations of technology over the years. And he was working for Accenture bringing Bluetooth products out to market.

We brought him into the company a few years ago and said help us do this with Bluetooth and you know hardware and algorithms and everything else that goes with it, because there are a bunch, it’s very complex. And from that project management experience with the right technical people behind it, you can start to pull together what the guts of it look like. But then at the end of it the real key is to have a really good understanding of your customer and the experiences that you want them to have. Because the tech is just the enabling piece but you’ve got to be able to deliver it in a way that people can understand information they are getting.

It’s more than just getting a number to somebody. You have to say here is your number and here’s what you have to do about it to get better, and that’s the real piece that I think we’ve innovated with this that drove the tech requirements, because we wanted to have this experience that as soon as the ball is taken out of the box people can understand right away that it’s different and responsive and it’s there, you know it’s there for them and it’s very accurate. And that was really the whole key to it to bring it together and bring it to life.

Steve: So in terms of your initial team who were your core people and what were their competencies when you were putting together the team?

Mike: Yeah so we have obviously project management from the tech side. So you have to understand all of the technologies and how to manage that, and then we have the PhD level algorithm hardware assimilator which is the co founder Kevin King. Then we have a lot of embedded system engineers, mechanical engineers, those types of people that can also be multidimensional, but then focus on specific areas of turning this you know all these things to very reliable systems– embedded systems that go into a product. So that when somebody uses it they aren’t going to break and it’s going to turn on every time, and you know all the little things that count to that customer experience.

Steve: So in terms of so you live in you said Massachusetts Indiana, was it you grew up in Indiana. Outside of your core team, how did you actually find the engineers and the staff? Like we live out in Silicon Valley and there’s a lot of those embedded system guys out here, but out there I’d imagine there’s a lot less.

Mike: There are although we find them all over the place. So you know people move our engineering is in Ohio. So a ton of people will move there because we’re passionate about what we do you know they love the fact that we’re in the sports world, that we’re really innovating and pushing the envelope of what sports product or fitness product can do, and what they mean in the future. So when you have an exciting story like that with really innovative award winning technology– we have won the larger awards, it’s truly not that hard to find the people, they’ll find you…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: You’re not going to get too many to move from Silicon Valley to Ohio, but there’s not a monopoly out there. They’re very plenty of very good talented people across the country.

Steve: Okay yeah so you know I wanted to talk kind of about the early stages and your kick starter campaign. So I think I originally found out about you guys– I think it was from tech crunch but I can’t remember but there’s a lot of buzz about your kick starter campaign. So one of my questions was why did you decide to do a kick starter as opposed to other ways of raising money?

Mike: Well you know we’ve been successful raising capital, so it wasn’t necessarily a need for raising money that drove our desire to do a kick starter. But we did think because this was on a very early part of our launch plan for the product, for the basketball product, that it was a great way to build awareness and early I guess prototype validation that we’re on the right path. And you know it does get a ton of– you know the media launch is what happens on kick starter. So you know the plan was if we could at least pay for the cost of what it takes to do a kick starter campaign and be committed to it, it’s a great launch plan for the rest of the product and I think that held true.

So you know we had $100,000 goal and I think we raised $130,000 which was good, it was good it was solid. What it drove for us was just a ton of early press before we even had a product on the market. It attracted the attention of Apple, and we launched a product in Apple stores that was successful, a bunch of retailers saw it. So it gave that validation in the market, I think that was really our main goal and I think we were very successful in hitting that goal.

Steve: So you used your kick starter as a marketing vehicle as opposed to just for purely money raising reasons?

Mike: Yeah I think for money raising standpoint if you’re doing a very sophisticated tech product you know to launch it you know you need to be able to raise a couple of million bucks out of a program like that to really have a meaningful impact on the launch of the business.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: And we didn’t expect that we would do on the best. I think for us it was part of our launch plan which we could pay for you know through the kick starter funds, and then really help to spring board to the next level where we needed to go from you know early prototypes up to market. I think that was successful because all those early little things that come from kick starter, the awareness, the media coverage, the contacts with the retailers, it helps give confidence to the investor that you do have that you’re on the right path, and get you from point A to actually taking a product to market which is– that’s 20% is the most difficult piece of the equation. And that’s really kick starter has helped you go from the 80% to the 100% mark, and it accelerated that for us.

Steve: Okay and then so did you have a working prototype before launching the kick starter?

Mike: We did, you know we had reached that prototype stage and I think if you found our kick starter video, you’ll see it working. Those are actually working prototypes that we used in creating that video, but it was far from product ready you know being ready to launch. So we still had quite a bit of work to do to get to where we could put it into the Apple store and be confident it was going to be reliable, and deliver the experience we wanted.

Steve: Okay. So at that point you hadn’t had any volume manufacturing, and then this kick starter campaign kind of funded that first run, is that…?

Mike: Well it did, it helped fund that first run although when you are going out and producing in tens of thousands of units and you have to do it over seas, it funds it to a certain degree, but I think it helps bring the validation in the market that gave our current investors even some new investor’s confidence that we could go all the way with it, and so…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: In that sense yes it helped us go from prototype out to market because it does all those other intangible things for you, which is important; it’s an important piece of a thing. I think it’s a rare case where kick starter funds the whole thing. There’s a few stories like that, like the pebbles of the world and a few others, those are the exceptions, they are on the long end of the tail, not [Inaudible] [00:13:04].

Steve: I see that’s interesting, so you would say a lot a lot of these companies going kick starter just to kind of generate the buzz in the marketing?

Mike: You know it’s hard for me to say what their intentions are when they go on. I knew what ours were you know so we did not believe because our product was a little narrow. It wasn’t you know a wearable for example where you’d have that many potential customers. So I think we went in realistic. There may be a lot of companies that go in there thinking this is going to– I’m going to you know be the next pebble and they put all of their planning into having that kind of volume.

But I think it’s a very risky strategy because kick starter has gotten to a point where it’s not the novelty that it was, it’s much harder to raise that kind of money, and I think you really need to have an alternate plan or at least understand where this fits into your ultimate plan rather than being the sole plan, and I don’t know if other companies go in with that. I suspect that they do and they’re disappointed a lot because there’s a lot of competition in the you know the crowd funding space, and it’s gotten a little stale you know it’s much tougher to hit those numbers anymore.

Steve: So I was just thinking if I could get your take on kick starter for raising money versus angel funding versus VCN, kind of what was your thought process in terms of just raising money?

Mike: Well raising capital is a full time job whether it’s kick starter, angel or VC you got to know what’s your plan is and it takes a lot of time to get that right. So for example even with kick starter it is a very intensive, it is a time intensive month. The only thing you’re doing for those 30 days is trying to figure out how to get the word out about your kick starter campaign and it just consumes you. But to make it successful you have to spend the two months to three months before that really planning it out to get it done right, and that’s no different then, whether or not you’re doing it with kick starter or Angel or trying to raise VC money. It’s about your plan and how well thought out the time you put in to the though process to be successful with it. So I think kick starter is part of the early funding plan.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Whether you choose to go Angel or VC, that’s really the type of company you have in the market you have and it’s really difficult to make a general statement about it.

Steve: Sure.

Mike: But it all requires the same thing as you’ve got to be very well thought out and you have to have tons of validation that you’re on the right path and that’s where success comes from.

Steve: Okay. So let’s talk about some of the things that you said about kick starter. You said that first 30 days was very intense. So what were some of the things– so first of all what’s the process involved in creating a kick starter campaign?

Mike: Yeah that’s a good question. So the real process is you know you’re going to create a very good video you know a visual for people to understand what you’re doing and tells a good story, and that’s takes a lot of planning. You’ve got to have the right you know team that’s– and not always internal, sometimes you’re going to bring outside help and we did that can help direct the shots and scripts and get everything put together and that takes about a month to do it right, just to get it filmed and edited. And so once the video is ready and towards the end of that the last week you’re applying for the kick starter, you’ve got to get in that information, so it’s just about a week of just prep to get approved by kick starter.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: But once it goes live is really where the time intensive work comes to play, and part of the process heading up to that it really helps if you have a really strong social media connection or network because you’re going to rely on the network out of the gate to give it it’s jump it’s pop in the first you know 5-10 hours.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: You really want to see a whole bunch of people coming in and supporting right out of the gate, because again it validates to the rest of the kick starter market that there’s something hot here. Now the worst thing you want to do is stall out, or kind of come out of there with no momentum because then it [Inaudible] [00:16:52] it must not be very good. So if you can leverage the fact that you got the network right out of the gate where everybody knows it’s coming as soon as it’s live, you get it out to that network and they’re all chipping in you know they’re all supporting you, that’s the first like three to five days, but then…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Then the next part of it though and the real grind is day five to days 30 or you know day 28 because you’ve used up your initial network and now you’ve got to go and find new, and it’s just a constant network of social media and social media and more social media and everything you can imagine to bring out the awareness and could build out that viral component to what you are doing where it takes out a life of its own you know other people are talking about it, that’s the whole key to the difference between the very big kick starter campaigns and the ones that push through moderately well.

Steve: So let’s dig a little bit deeper so how did you establish that initial social media network for that initial pop?

Mike: You know you do it let’s say you’re going to do that six months before you know if you go in with no social media network at all you’re not going to be successful, it’s just too hard. You’ve got to have– this is something that if you’ve got a business that you’ve been working on you should be developing that network all the time. You should be getting lots of followers on Twitter, lots of likes on your Facebook page, if you don’t have them you need them, you should be using Pinterest. You should be in all of the different social media assets that are free and readily available; you need to be developing them.

Steve: So what are some of the things that you did to– so what did you focus on; Facebook, Pinterest, was there any one social media platform that you focused on or?

Mike: It was mostly Twitter and Facebook for us.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Pinterest at the time we did was vague, but it was a medium we weren’t very confident in using yet. We didn’t know how to leverage that, and so our presence was a lot smaller you know we had a lot because we had a lot of beta stock you know beta products trusting with previous year and half. We had a pretty good email list that we could tap into, you know a lot of contacts in there of different coaches and players and things that could spread the word.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: So we leveraged you know we just went it’s kind of old school now, we went email that’s what we focused on.

Steve: It’s not old school at all actually yeah everyone relies on it. So you were gathering email addresses from the teams and the players that you were kind of… ?

Mike: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: We had over 25,000 different players that had used our beta product in some way shape or form that we had access to heading into that. So we leveraged that obviously pretty intensively heading into this, but we had we had a pretty good you know starting point of all the assets that we could get out with it well.

Steve: So 25,000 is actually a lot of people, so you’re saying that 25,000 people actually tried out your balls prior to the kick starter?

Mike: Not these balls. So we had a beta form of the ball, the systems that we would sell, the team so they could use with their groups of players and camps and practices and it was just a very primitive form of this, it wasn’t the Bluetooth version.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: But it allowed for a lot of data collection from lots of players because you can run through 100 players in a couple of hours. So we had a bunch of those all over the world, we had 100 of those systems all over the world, that were just constantly collecting information and data for us that help drive the requirements for the new product, but with that we would be collecting information about who these people were and we could go back and talk to them, that was the whole point.

Steve: I see, okay so the ball that was going around was not the final polished version, it was more like a data collection device.

Mike: Yeah it was a Wi-Fi ball that we’d talked to a dedicated laptop that we would supply with the two balls that we would send out, and it was only for team use, it wasn’t for the consumer, it was for a team.

Steve: Got it.

Mike: And when a team would use it, they would technically use it with anywhere from 20-200 players in over the course of a month.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: If you get hundreds of those around the world, you’re collecting data and you’re collecting tons of data.

Steve: Yes.

Mike: That’s what the whole point of that was.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of your Facebook strategy were you buy likes, were you driving ads to your site, how were you generating buzz on Facebook?

Mike: You know that really comes down to the quality of your video and your ability to make things go viral, so we didn’t spend any money on buying likes and doing that kind of thing.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: We kept our budget to what went into the front end of it, so we spent a lot of time you know it’s the little stuff, it’s the grind. So if somebody likes you on Twitter for example or likes you on Facebook or follows you on Twitter you need to follow them back and then you need to encourage them to retweet and build that network. And so it seems like it’s very Minusha driven you know every like and every follow counts, that’s what it comes down to, you’ve got to be prepared, that’s the grind of that day five through 25.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Mentally you have to be ready for because unless you have a million people you’re coming in with. If you don’t, you feel like everybody else, you’re going to run through that initial network in about five days.

Steve: Right.

Mike: And the whole trick is how do you turn any newcomers into that into somebody who also goes out and shares with somebody else, and that is just I mean it is I call it a grind because that is what it was, you just have to work it and you have to be prepared for that mentally.

Steve: Okay. So let’s talk about the grind for a bit. So how did you get some publicity and you know can you kind of describe the grind? What are the things that you were doing just to kind of reach out to people?

Mike: Well that’s the other part of it that I haven’t touched on. So one of the other parts of the plan is we did retain some independent PR experts, not a firm but they had a lot of years in PR and we had a little one month contract with them to help us build a buzz about the kick starter campaign and the product. So the other big part of our strategy that was beyond just the social media was we put out there that this product was coming, and in our case the media loved it, I mean they locked on to it very early and they wrote about it extensively. I think we had about 400 articles that were written about it in a one month time period.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Mike: So every time one of those articles was written, it expanded our universe immensely. So I’m a big believer in PR if you do it right and if you have the right story and right product. It could be immensely valuable, and it is probably one of the key parts of our strategy even today, where the media really likes this product, it’s a tactile very physical object that people can see or amazed by. So we use that to our advantage. Now I don’t know if every other product is going to have that same potential, but it was hugely important to us as we did it.

Steve: Yeah I can completely see that I mean as soon as I watched that first video, I knew your product is very compelling and you had an awesome story. So I can imagine something like that would just naturally generate buzz. I’m sure your PR person had a much easier job with your product than maybe some of their other clients.

Mike: Well you know it’s easy when it clicks, if it doesn’t click then you know it’s not so easy but in this case it took on a life of its own. So I talked about the viral nature and what can happen in social media. Our viral uptake was on the media side you know we just got a ton of press and that we did it in March, it was the month of March, and then that press was what generated the awareness to retailers and others and allowed us to carry it forward. And in fact generated a whole another round of PR for us and holiday when we launched, because it had been on kick starter, people were watching it, we were visible now to the world you now they took us seriously.

Steve: Okay and then I had to ask this question so in terms of approaching the NBA, did you do that earlier on or was it just after this press wave happened?

Mike: Well, approaching the NBA in what way, so what…?

Steve: Teams I guess.

Mike: So we have never really approached the NBA in that manner and there’s a pretty simple reason, there’s only 32 teams and they’re only going to buy so much product, so there’s…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: To get validation from the NBA is a whole different animal that I don’t think we want to talk about it really quick in the podcast. I don’t know if this is a good area for it, but to come back to your question is this working with validators in the market, that we think would have an influence in our market and our market is 818.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: What we found in our surveys in our studies that we did in building the product is that the college level coaches were far more influential on the normal family, because I think that in our market that it’s for any player that has an aspiration not necessarily to play in college, but they just want to get better and they want to have more confidence. They want to perform a little better and they’re willing to practice and we give them a better way to do that. It’s more responsive et cetera et cetera, but the college voice is more influential to that market, we found that in the NBA voice.

So we went out and sought out partnerships with like the national association of basketball coaches, but all the college level coaches and the organization that they’re a part of, and that’s what we use today as more of an influencing factor to validate that what we measure is real and it helps and it’s used by that level and it’s useful. So that’s where we put our focus, it was initially the NBA.

Steve: I guess that makes complete sense, your target market is younger kids who are aspiring to become really good players.

Mike: Yeah.

Steve: So if you can just kind of break down your sales. I’m not going to ask you about numbers but where do you make the majority of your sales today. Is it through the internet? Is it through the Apple Stores? How does the sales strategy play out?

Mike: Yeah, so you know for this holiday we started with Apple and they were a dominant provider or distributor for us last year when we launched. We were exclusive in apple and online 94fifty net sales and then partially because that’s all we could produce for last year.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: The product wasn’t ready until mid November, so we were even a little late to the party. But this year our strategy has been how do we expand that? So we have run Amazon now which is a big distributor for us in East Bay and Dicks Online, and we try to focus right now. We even have a big retailer up in Canada called Sport Check which is both in store and online. But we– the product is still so different and new.

And because it looks like a regular basketball, but it costs a lot more you still have the story have to tell. And we found that telling it through video and giving people more time to understand what they are purchasing and the benefits is best done online. So most of our distribution today is done through online channels through either our own 94fifty.com or partners that can use the assets that we create, and so it’s about 50/50 right now.

We do about 50% of our own and 50% of our distributions through partners. And we have a pretty strong international distribution at this point. And we have markets like Asia and China really start to pop for us because they love to play the sport over there. So it’s a pretty good mix and you know we really take our time in evaluating who is going to commit to really helping customers understand the value prop.

And it’s not just about stocking it in the store because it is an expensive product to build and you know it’s a whole different animal when you are running a retail, you got to do that right. So we’ve taken a pretty measured approach to how we get distribution out there and how we achieve the you know the production capacity really is our biggest constraint. We can produce so much and we sell so much and that’s it. You know it’s not like we can prop up a million of these tomorrow. It takes time.

Steve: Right. I actually I had a couple of questions on your retail strategy. I interviewed someone in the past where they had a very high end product and they put in retail stores, but they weren’t doing an adequate job of pointing out the benefits.

Mike: That’s right.

Steve: They were sitting here with the product that was very expensive compared to the rest. And so I would imagine you know your basketball looks like all the other basketballs and it feels the same, so in these retail outlets is there like a huge station set up where there is a video and then it can really educate the customer about why they should buy your product?

Mike: What we found with retailers in general with the internet of things type products they are starting to think this way, but they really have been caught a little flat footed in that there this wave of products. Not just basketballs but just about everything you can imagine that has the same problem that you have with the smart product. It is designed to look and feel exactly like the product.

It isn’t smart because that’s what people– that’s how they know how to use it. But the value prop is totally different because the information you get out of it and it is going to be more expensive. But retailers in general were not prepared for the pace at which these products enter the market including ours. And so they are just now starting to build those strategies is to how we set up these areas within the stores to deliver that value prop in a way that somebody will buy it in a retail setting in volume.

And a few companies have figured out that you know like a nest for example and how they get to retail, but the vast majority of them they struggle with how you educate both the employees that need to sell them and the customers that want to buy them. And it’s very time intensive and costly. So our approach has been when we see a retailer who sort of gets it we work with them, but if we feel like it’s pushing a string that the retailers aren’t ready, we just disengage and move on.

And because there are other avenues in which ways you can sell these products they are just as effective. But the market is still just I think a tad bit behind and I think you’ll start to see retailers and customers will see retailers really dedicating more space and time to developing the winning smart products strategy probably within the next 12-18 months.

Steve: The reason why I asked that question is I think earlier you alluded to the fact that your earlier sales were from the Apple Store, right?

Mike: Mm-huh.

Steve: As opposed to focusing more you had limited inventory it sounded like, right?

Mike: Yeah.

Steve: So the allocation of that it sounds like you allocated a big chunk of the Apple store as opposed to your own online efforts and I was just curious why that was the case?

Mike: Well they had 250 stores.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: So you know in order to supply that many stores where we started in you know they need to have not only what they put on the shop but they need to have an inventory and they need to have a couple of weeks backlog. So just by the nature of trying to go into that many stores out of the gate, they’re going to get a good chunk of it, but it was you know we reserved the knock that we could adequately supply internally as well. I think we did a pretty good job of broadcasting. If you want to immediately jump into that many stores that sell that much, you’ve got to have product you know be prepared to commit it.

Steve: How do you forecast the allocation, or make these estimates?

Mike: You know you’ve got to work with the retailer they do the best they can but our new products nobody really knows so…

Steve: Right.

Mike: You know you work with them for a couple of months and you know you try to do the best you can and say this is what we think but nobody has ever sold the product, seen the product, used the product, in the market, so how do you make that work? You know…

Steve: Yeah okay, yeah I was just…

Mike: It’s really a best guess in everybody’s part and…

Steve: Okay.

Mike: That’s the best kind of advice I can give there is no magic bullet to it I think.

Steve: Okay. So let’s talk a little bit about manufacturing. So you mentioned that earlier that these balls are manufactured overseas. So what is the process of such a complicated product you know you have the ball, the mechanical aspects of it, then you’ve got the you know the circuitry and that sort of thing, so how does that all come together?

Mike: Oh wow the– you know when you’re dealing with smart products you’ve got PCBs or circuit boards and all the components. The hardest part about it is you’re carrying the components, you know there’s roughly 70 to 80 different little pieces that go into this and they come from many different vendors, and the thing that’s happening is because there are so many products that are using these same components, it could be the least costly little thing on your PCB, but its n the highest demand and you’re going to get stocked out if you’re going to wait for it. So one of the hardest things to manage is the lead times which you have to allocate to just secure the parts to get it into manufacturing. That can take three months if you start from scratch sometimes four.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: So accounting for lead times is very difficult and then you know we’re not doing we’re not– you’re competing with you know the smart phone maker, so you’re not buying in the millions of units a month to start.

Steve: Right.

Mike: So you’re always at the bottom of the totem pole. We did a very good job of managing and really building strong relationships with the big vendors with the key parts so that they liked us and we really helped them with some really cool things with our basketballs that they wanted to do. You know it’s really just a matter of trying to make as many friends as you can so that you can ask for the favor and say I need this part, can you reserve you know 25,000 pieces for us for a run next month, and they will always find a way to help you.

But once you get all the parts, then you’ve got to have a very good contract manufacturing relationship, you want to do it as low cost as you can. You’ve got to have all the receipts and contacts now that we looked at both, but the key thing for us is that the inflatables industry which is basketball, soccer ball et cetera, is completely overseas now. That moved over there 30 years ago, so there’s no way we could finish our product unless we did it in China or overseas.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: There is just no way, it’s just not in the US anymore. So once that was the case, we just made the decision as you may as well have both of those components done as close together as possible because you eliminate risk of trying to ship things overseas, and trying to get parts here and there and we tried to put it all into a geographic area that was very-very close together, and that was our strategy, and I think it worked, but it’s not the same for everybody. We had a unique situation trying to bring the inflatables and the electronics industry together, that was new.

Steve: So in terms– so you did all the PCB design in-house and then you shipped the [inaudible 00:34:22] over to Asia and then you had all the PCBs and everything assembled over there?

Mike: Yeah, we do all of the design and engineering here and then the [inaudible 00:34:31] as you said, the files about what they are supposed to produce in their you know from a board perspective, they manage the whole securing the parts and getting it done on the QC and then they work with us on how you get the parts or the work in process or the finished goods or the sensors over to the ball manufacturer and how that’s all going to come together is really a fairly complex process of which we had to build our own apps to do a QC at every point so we could see that the sensors and the balls were being produced right, they weren’t being destroyed and we had to innovate the whole thing, so it was very complex.

Steve: That was actually my next question, but first of all how did you find the vendor to make the ball and do the assembly. I imagine it’s more than just finding a regular ball manufacturer right?

Mike: Yeah while we used the best factory in the world, they make the NBA ball and you know a lot of other top name top quality balls that you’d see in the market. That came from one of our key hires that we made who came out of one of those companies and build many-many products and sourced them for years. So we had to have that asset internal and those relationships to make it work. So that was just a key hire that we made and it’s been very effective for us.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of introducing this new electronic component to the ball that was just something where you had to fly over and just work out with the manufacturers directly.

Mike: Yeah, they flew here, so there was a mix and flights back and forth and you know make sure we were always on the same page and again came from our relationship of one of our other employees who had worked with them in the past. So I think we had some pre-knowledge and confidence in their capabilities in what they could do and what we could do so.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: It’s very much a team effort across the board you know.

Steve: Yeah.

Mike: With a small company you have to leverage every asset you got and those little intangibles can go a long way to making it happen or not happen.

Steve: And in terms of quality control, is it just a set of electronic diagnostics or are there quality control aspects of the actual physical ball itself as well?

Mike: All of it you know, so our app can scan every chip. You know it’s got a MAC address on it as it comes off the line and we can scan and do a little test that we designed you know just a little tablet consister [phonetic] literally scans everything that comes off the line.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: And gives us a real time report on it, and then when it gets over to the ball factory they have a process where they once they have sealed everything into the ball, they throw it into this bin to dry for 24 hours. We’ve got another app there that’s just scanning every MAC address to make sure it still works. And then when it gets back into the states, we ship everything here, we do a final physical check and we inflate everything with a special machinery that we invented to inflate it perfectly.

Steve: Wow.

Mike: And to make sure that the battery still has a charge in it because a very big thing for us that we learned that when we wanted to work out of the box, we always have to charge it to work. So one of the big things about our product is you pull it out of the box and you put it on the charging pad its wireless charging, and it turns on and you’re ready to use it within 30 seconds of pulling it out of the box. There is no pre charging required, so to innovate that process we had to think of all these little steps to make sure that not only did it work when we ship it out, but it’s charged and it’s going to come out in just two seconds you pull it out, plug it in, plug in the charging pad and put on the pad and off you go, you’re ready to play.

Steve: Nice and why was that such an important factor for you to have the battery charged upon opening?

Mike: Well it’s such a new product and we– and people had never experienced it before and we didn’t work with other smart products for example Nike basketball shoes or whatever. And almost all of them require this setup, this 15-20 minute of trying to figure it out, and in our market its not necessarily the most tech savvy you know these are these are people that just want to play.

Steve: Right.

Mike: They want to start and the anxiety level that builds up with the new tech product that you’ve never used is very-very rapid. Every minute that you make them you make your customer try to fiddle with something. So we say let’s design a product where it’s so easy to pull out of the box, take one step you know you’ve already got your app downloaded, dribble it four times, it’s going to connect and off you go. And that was it was very important to us to make the success of the product from the customer’s prospective, the momentum after sale, that’s why we did it.

Steve: Yeah that actually makes complete sense now that I think about it a little bit more. I would image people who are tech adverse if the ball is not ready to go right off the bat they might think it’s busted or something as well, right?

Mike: That’s right, that’s exactly right and then you know with social media if they think that they can tear you part very quickly and you know that’s death for a new product that hits the market, particularly when they’ve got some high profile press and we had so much press and you don’t want that. So we work very hard to make sure we could sustain the expectation after the customer has bought the product and used it for the first time. Now we’re not perfect, I’m not going to– I mean there are some product that got out to the field that didn’t– somehow got through our screening and that’s got to be normal for any logical…

Steve: Sure, right.

Mike: But we kept it at a very minimal range manageable range and your customer service and how you replace and get people up and running is very critical. So we had all that planned out and it’s all very practical.

Steve: Okay, and then you know just this question mainly for the listeners, you know for an aspiring entrepreneur that wants to create an incredible physical product that involves tech, what advice would you give just you know from a starting standpoint. What would you focus on initially?

Mike: Oh, so, ask me that again Steve, and you could edit out the first one, let me make sure I understand that question.

Steve: Okay so you know, this is actually a question for me for the most part because I’m very interested in tech and you know physical hardware products. So for an aspiring entrepreneur that wants to create you know this kind of marrying of physical product with tech, there’s just so many directions you can go when you first start out. So what would you focus on when first starting out you know in terms of establishing the team and in terms of defining the product? How’s that?

Mike: You definitely need a team, you need– it’s not a one man job for tech. You need some very smart founders in the business that are multi-facetted and that can think in a couple of different ways, business, strategy and tech. So that I think that’s first. Don’t be afraid about the things like whether somebody is going to steal your idea you know if you get bogged down with those things– the whole key is get through the green lights you know imagine yourself driving down the road and you’ve got to get to the airport, you’re about to have a child, you’ve got to get to that hospital you know.

So you have to get there, and it’s all about speed, so if you get caught at a red light or get slowed down by yellow it’s bad. So sometimes you’ve got to shift out of a lane that you think you need the green, leave and just to get to that green light, you’ve got to get through the green and that’s got to be the philosophy you have.

But then the second thing is if you have your team and you are comfortable and the chemistry is there and you know you’ve got the right vision, getting to the customer and really understanding that you are on the right path and making those adjustments is so critical, and I mentioned before we started talking that we have large companies coming to us now saying can you help us build a product like this for a different form factor or a different space. You know what you’ve done is that innovative, and we give the same advice to them as yes not only can we do it, but we can do it fast but fast means we’re going to take you to the customer from day one because you have to get the experience right.

This new wave of products where I think many are failing in it is that they think data in it of itself is the answer and it is not. I think what the customer is going to want and we’re seeing it today and we’re going to see it more and more is give me data that is usable that, okay I get the number but what do I do with it, what’s the next action I take so that I can see some improvement in the thing I’m passionate about. And understanding those connections between data and actionable contextual kind of feedback, something you can use is critical and the only way you can get it is to get to a customer with a real prototype. So build your prototypes fast, get to your customers fast, fail fast, and go back and try it again.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: Over and over again is the real key to it, and if you can do that and do it efficiently then you have a chance of winning. If you can’t or you avoid it, I pretty much guarantee you are going to lose because you’re going to end up with a product that looks just like everything else or worse.

Steve: And then along the way gather emails and contacts and establish your social stuff so that when you’re ready to launch, you already have a following.

Mike: Well absolutely. Every person you talk to is going to know about 1000 others. So you know you’ve got to win them even if it’s an early prototype that they buy in your vision and they’re willing to talk about it to their next 1000 people, and you try to collect and build that every step of the way so that if you get to a point where you’re trying to do a kick starter or something like that, you’ve got that asset ready to leverage, and it is an asset that’s a very valuable asset.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of doing the kick starter, will that be something that you would definitely do again?

Mike: It depends on what we were– what the goal was, so you know if I was starting a new company with a new product yes.

Steve: Okay.

Mike: For our company today I don’t think we need it because it satisfied what our goal was and we’ve got all the things that give it its own momentum now, so we’re sort of beyond that, we wouldn’t use it again for this company. But if you are starting if I was starting a new company yeah it would definitely be in my launch plans.

Steve: Okay cool, hey Mike we’ve already been talking for 45 minutes and I want to be respectful for your time. Where can people find out more about your ball and perhaps even contact you if they had any questions about your product?

Mike: Yeah, the best place where we have by far the most information is 94fifty.com and that’s the number 9 and number 4 and the word fifty spelled out 94 and F-I-F-T-Y and just a ton of great information there, that’s about the product. Our company website is informotionsports.com and that’s more of a broader strategic kind of website, you can learn more about us you know we’re distributed as I mentioned kind of all over the internet whether you go to Amazon or Dicks online or wherever, East Bay, but they’re all going to point back to the information we have there, and you can find out how to contact us directly from any of those sites. That would make it pretty easy for people to access us and we’re trying to be as responsive as we can about responding to everybody either as a question or a concern or whatnot, a piece of feedback.

Steve: Okay well hey thanks Mike for coming on the show; I know you’re busy man and I really appreciate you coming on.

Mike: I appreciate you having me, thanks Steve.

Steve: All right, take care.

Mike: All right, bye.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. Mike’s company 94fifty.com is one of the coolest companies that I have seen in a while, and I’m definitely going to get one of those basketballs for my son after all he’s going to be the next Jeremy Lin, count on it. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode51, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud but it also keeps this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best ways to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to mywifequitherjob/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure o sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we’re giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

050: How Brandon Eley Makes Millions Catering To A Small Niche In A Huge Market

Brandon Eley

I met Brandon Eley at the Ecommerce Fuel conference and I can honestly say that he was one of the most well-spoken and intelligent entrepreneurs that I’ve ever met. Brandon runs 2BigFeet.com, which is an online store that sells shoes specifically catering to people with big feet.

Not only does his store make 7 figures but Brandon also runs a successful blog at BrandonEley.com and is a prolific speaker specializing in online marketing and ecommerce. Don’t miss this interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • Brandon’s biggest early mistake with his shop
  • How to properly outsource different tasks for your business
  • Brandon’s views on outsourcing SEO
  • A sound strategy for introducing new products in your store
  • What the margins are like for selling shoes
  • How Brandon gets customers into his shop
  • How Brandon ranks his shop in search
  • Which marketing methods yields the most sales for his shop
  • How Brandon increased his conversion rate 50%
  • How Brandon leverages email marketing to boost his sales.

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

Now if you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consults every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I’m really excited to have Brandon Eley on the show. Now Brandon is someone who I met at the ecommerce fuel conference in Austin Texas last month and he runs the incredibly awesome site 2bigfeet.com, which you guessed it sells shoes for people with really big feet. Now here is what’s cool about 2bigfeet.com. On the surface you would think that selling shoes online would be over saturated, but Brandon found a niche where he could truly make his store unique and stand out among the competition.

Now this just goes to show that running a successful shop online doesn’t necessarily mean that you have to invent the next big thing, you just have to find that special something to make your store stand out even if you sell well known products like shoes, and plus you have to be smart and a hustler like Brandon, and you know what they say about guys with big feet, right? So welcome to the show Brandon, how are you doing today?

Brandon: I’m great, how are you?

Steve: Pretty good man. So you’ve actually got a really interesting back story about 2 big feet and you’ve got a lot of kind of failure stories and mistakes to share, and so I thought you know to begin this interview, what’s the background story behind 2bigfeet.com and I kind of want to hear about some of the mistakes that you made early on with your partner.

Brandon: Sure. Well when I was 19, I was an intern at the company pretty big company had about 500 employees. The guy in the office next to me had really large feet, he had size 16 shoes, and he came over to my office one day and told me a story about how he always had a really hard time finding shoes in his size. And in a rural area, or suburban area not one of the major metropolitan hubs in the country, if you walk in a shoe store and ask you know can I see this in a size 16, can I see this in size 17, they will literally laugh at you.

This is true in the 90s, it’s true today, and so he ended up having to just walk into a shoe store and ask “what do you have in a size 16?” And they would usually bring back one pair of ugly sneakers that had been in the back room for a couple of years, and that was all he had to chose from for years and years, and even as an adult he had a really hard time finding shoes that were appropriate for work, finding shoes that were appropriate for church.

So he came up with the idea and asked me if I could build him a website and at the time I had never done anything with the internet or built a website, I didn’t know HTML or anything. So we both quit our jobs and raised a little bit of money. It was trial by error for the first few years. I think it took us three years before we ever even hit $100,000 in revenue. Our third year we passed $100,000 in revenue. So it was a real struggle in those early days as we were just teaching ourselves how to do everything.

I had to teach myself how to build a website, HTML, PHP, JavaScript. I had to teach myself online marketing, what worked and what didn’t and we got burned quite a bit along the way trying to use vendors and contractors like search engine optimization companies, paper click management, PR firms. So it was a rough [inaudible 00:04:23] years, but then we turned it around and started doing pretty well and I took over the business in 2007, me and my wife and we’ve really taken it from that point to a seven figure business since that time.

Steve: So you know what were some of the early mistakes that you were talking about? When you were first starting out? When you didn’t know what you were doing?

Brandon: Well I think one of the best mistakes we made was hiring search engine optimization company that back in the days of doorway pages and keyword stuffing and not knowing anything about what was white had a black had– we just took them at their word, they said they would get you to the top of the first page in Google and we trusted them. And so we spent many thousands of dollars a month with them for a few months and ended up in a worst situation than we were when we started because instead of just being low in the search engines– of course we were kicked off the search engines, we were gone and we had to just start slowly building our way back. Of course we started using paper click because it was the only way we could actually get traffic to our website.

Steve: So just curious what is your opinion on outsourcing SEO today?

Brandon: My opinion on outsourcing SEO is the same as my opinion on outsourcing any service like marketing SEO paper click, and as that you really have to understand the fundamentals of anything that you are going to outsource. If you are a business owner and you want to outsource the book keeping you need to understand everything you can about book keeping not on the micro level but on the macro level. You need to understand for instance with SEO what’s white hat and what’s black hat.

Read the Google overview, the guides that they have which aren’t that long, it won’t take you that long to really get up to speed on what Google thinks is appropriate and what would get you in trouble. That way when you are speaking with a contractor or a vendor you understand enough to know if they’re telling you the truth or if they have experience doing what they’re doing, and you can usually spot the ones that are not going to work out for you.

Steve: Okay and then you also mentioned PR agencies as well, so you have experience contracting that out as well?

Brandon: We did in the early days we hired a PR firm that did us no good whatsoever, they– I think we paid them either three or six months and it was several thousand dollars a month; never got an interview, never got an article written about us, never got really anything. In fact the only PR we ever really got was when we did get pretty much kicked off of Google during the Florida update. We reached out personally to a lot of people that we knew. My partner knew a reporter for the AP at the Albany Herald and he wrote about it and it got picked up on the AP south wire I think it’s called, which hit every newspaper in the southeast and that landed us a national NPR interview on the NPR radio show.

Steve: Cool, okay.

Brandon: And we actually filmed a Discovery Channel documentary at one point and our segment didn’t end up airing, but it was really– that was the best PR we ever got was getting kicked off of Google.

Steve: So it sounds like some of that early PR was just a result of your own hustling as opposed to anything that any agency did for you, right? So would you recommend going with the PR agency today, like do you have one today or do you still do your own PR stuff?

Brandon: We don’t, we don’t really do a lot of PR right now.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We focus more on the marketing we really can control. I would, I would definitely be interested in going with another firm in the future. I think PR is tricky though, you really have to have a really well crafted story that’s going to resonate with reporters, or talk show hosts or you know the producers of shows to get you know if you just have some product that is not truly unique or really innovative or you know you just have a really good story, it’s going to be really tough to get any coverage.

Steve: Okay. That makes sense yeah you know I want to talk about the nuts and bolts of your business, because there’s actually several students in the online store course that I run that want to sell shoes. Now obviously they don’t want to sell shoes for people with big feet, but you know some of the other more specialized shoes. So I thought I ask you a couple of questions about sourcing. So first of all let’s say I want to sell shoes, where do I go to source the shoes and do you actually have to carry inventory or can you dropship?

Brandon: Well when we got started in 1999, it is about the same now as it was back then which is sad. The shoe industry is obviously one of the older industries out there and it’s very slow to change. To find inventory you go to the manufacturers directly and you open accounts with them, and the vast majority of them will require you to have a physical presence. That doesn’t always have to be warehouse and retail store, but many times it does. For instance even though we do the vast majority of our business through internet and phone orders, we still have a small retail store just to satisfy the handful of our vendors manufacturers they require.

So you go directly to the manufacturers like New Balance or Keen or Timberland or whoever, and you open an account directly with them and they usually have minimums for the first opening order. We have hidden a password; they only have a couple of shoes that go up to big sizes and then trying to order those just couple of shoes, we didn’t quite hit the minimums. So then usually a few thousands of dollars to get, and many of them don’t drop ship, so you’re required to stock your own inventory.

Steve: Okay and so given that how you kind of decide what sizes you need to carry earlier on and what are the some of the logistics involved?

Brandon: Well we learned by trial and error what sizes worked for us, our biggest sellers were size 16, 17, and 18.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Which is going to be a lot different for a traditional retailer. We start at size 14, so we don’t have anything lower size 14 in our warehouse. The people who find us, who search for size 16 size 18 still put boots or whatever they search for long tail on Google, they find us because they can’t find anything else.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: In traditional even online shoe stores.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: So our makeup of the size ranges is a lot different than the traditional shoe store. I think the sales rep in the shoes– in the manufacturers you know they can give you a really good idea what’s the best selling sizes, what are the best selling styles, that doesn’t always work out. Some of the best selling styles that we bring in don’t do so well with our audience; you have to learn by trial and error.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: But it’s you know with the style of shoes you’re not going to bring in 1000 pair of one particular style, you’re going to bring in a few dozen and if it doesn’t sell you mark it down, you get rid of it, you bring in another style and try out.

Steve: Okay and have you ever thought of running your own styles in your own brand, or has it been just all third party stuff so far?

Brandon: We have early on– not too early on probably about five years in, we created our own brand of dress shoes and we made them up to size 24.

Steve: Wow.

Brandon: And we had the manufacturer and lay on Mexico. We actually went there and met with the factory and went through a broker here. It’s a really complicated process to do it all on your own, to actually build a brand and go to the factories and try to source it yourself. So we didn’t do that again, it was expensive, we didn’t get the margins we were hoping for back then. But I would definitely be interested in doing it again at some point, but one thing that has worked really well for us is we go to the manufacturers we already have relationships with, they already own the factories or they have really large or strong relationships with factories in China, in Mexico, in Argentina and we say can you make this particular style, that particular style for us the way we want it in the sizes we want. Sometimes that means buying 1000 pair, but that’s better than trying to you know fly to China, find a factory to make just 1000 pair for us.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: They’re making tens of thousands or hundreds of thousands of pair for the manufacturer. Making 1000 in big sizes is much more feasible through them than trying to do it on our own.

Steve: Okay and then these are just kind of existing styles that you want them to make larger sizes of for you, right?

Brandon: Sometimes and sometimes we’ll have them you know, they’re more than happy to customize, a lot of the smaller manufacturers you know not your multibillion dollar conglomerates like New Balance or Brown Sheet brands, but the smaller companies that are in the 50-100 million dollar range, they’ll be more than happy to do custom runs and make things and tweak them. If you are willing to buy enough merchandise they will put their factories to work for you.

Steve: Okay and then in general D margins on those shoes are higher or…?

Brandon: Not so much, they are a little higher. We do get more of the keystone in the shoe industry is you double your price so if we buy a pair of shoes for 50 dollars we retail or sell for 100.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And you get a little bit better than that if you are buying 1000 pairs or something like that, but you have to really get into buying a whole lot of pairs, and that’s a lot of pairs to sell.

Steve: And that’s a lot of money upfront too right that you need to foot.

Brandon: They will want it in 30 or 60 days.

Steve: Okay and so okay, so you mentioned a couple of things, so the margins typically for the shoe industry is around 50%, is that what you said?

Brandon: That’s right.

Steve: Okay. So given that there is a lot of people that sell shoes and chances are there’s probably a lot of stores that sell large shoes, how did you actually get customers into your shop early on?

Brandon: Well, we’ve always focused on search engine optimization even when we didn’t really know what we were doing.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And the vast majority of our traffic does come through organic search.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We are currently getting about 64% of our traffic and 55% of our revenue from organic search, which is good because it’s cheap but it’s also a little bit scary because if Google changes their algorithm you could be in a lot of trouble.

Steve: Okay. So what are some of the special things that you are doing to optimize your cipher search?

Brandon: We definitely focus on the long tail key words, so we have pages for each sizes we carry, we specify each size that we carry on each product.

Steve: On a separate page– sorry.

Brandon: Yeah. We have pages for each particular size and then we have on our product pages themselves, we list every size that is available, and you know we have brand pages, vendor pages, we have detailed product pages, and we try to just go into as much information as we can. You know a lot of the shoe manufacturers will give you a little blur but this just like steel toe, slip resistance sole, meets antsy whatever ratings, that’s kind of all they give you on a description. They don’t go in and write these complex products descriptions. So we have to write the product description from scratch, and that helps us a lot and a lot of our competition just simply puts up the specs.

Steve: Right.

Brandon: Of the shoe and then really write anything unique, and then we target some of our better selling categories, like for instance restaurant shoes, these are really big categories. We found a supplier to provide us with a restaurant shoe in big sizes that’s really affordable, and it’s slip resistant and it’s made specifically for that. So we’ve got an entire page for restaurant shoes.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And so if you type in, in size 17 restaurant shoes we’re very likely to come up at the very top of the first page.

Steve: So just curious those products where you are putting in different page for every size, is the content on those pages different, like do you write specific descriptions for each?

Brandon: No, we don’t because I guess because our niche is so small. We’re going to have to go into a whole lot of– I mean there’s only so much you can write about size 17 versus size 16.

Steve: Right exactly which is why I was asking yeah.

Brandon: We try not to keyword stuff too much. We try not to artificially inflate the pages by simply having a good URL structure and passing the page link logically through the home page, and we do know follow a lot of pages all pragmatically know follow any page. For instance if we have a product listing and the image linked to and the product name links, we are very careful not to pass any page link we know follow the picture and anything that says click here, we only pass it on the product name and then we only pass it on certain ones not only just to add.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: That we might have, so we try to pass page link a little bit logically, so more of the page link goes to the pages we want to.

Steve: So do you kind of consolidate those products with different sizes using like the canonical tag or anything like that, or is it– are those just separate pages that you’re trying to rank?

Brandon: We do sometimes use a canonical tag. Our site is pretty small, so we don’t have to go into a whole lot of– we have a page for every brand which is probably I would say most of our pages are brand pages because…

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We carry a lot of manufacturers, but then you know we have a few categories. We got athletic boots, casual, close outs, dress shoes, off shoes which run down the list. So it’s really kind of a flat architecture. I guess we’re fortunate in that our niche is small enough that we don’t have to spend a whole lot of time really worrying about you know…

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Which ones are going to get the most page rank and which ones are going to be the least, we pass it through the links we want to and just followed by half the links on our site and it seemed to have worked really well for us.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of where the search traffic lands, would you tend to say that they are more landing on like the category pages on your brand pages that you have created as opposed as to the actual products themselves?

Brandon: They do and we do have a lot of people land on product pages, and a lot of those are actually because we rank so low for a lot of products without any keyword, like size 17 or big or large, those are bounces. So we have a higher bounce rate when people land on our product pages because they are often times coming just looking for you know a new balance 621 running shoe.

Steve: Right.

Brandon: And we rank well for it even though there’s no identifier for large size big or whatever. So those are often bounces, but we do get a ton of traffic on our category pages on our individual sites pages people who type in size 17 shoes and our brand pages.

Steve: Okay. So in terms of search engine traffic, so that’s a large portion of your traffic but early on it takes a while right for the search engine traffic to kick in. So what were you doing prior to the search engine traffic kicking in to get customers to your site?

Brandon: A lot of things that didn’t work.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We did…

Steve: You need to…

Brandon: We did banner ads.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We did radio ads like traditional radio ads; this is before podcasting was even a thing. I think it was before the iPod even came out– when did that happen, two thousand and something? So we did radio ads on South Eastern radio stations, we did a bill board one time.

Steve: You mean like on the freeway?

Brandon: On the freeway yeah, when I say we made every mistake you can possibly make in that business– you know we had never built an internet business and there were no books or courses at college campuses about how to build an internet business, it was all trial by error. So we learned pretty quickly what didn’t work, but once we found paper click that’s when we really started being able to buy traffic and early days paper click was so affordable, it’s still really affordable for us. But back then we were able to just put as much money as we could in to paper click, and that was our saving grace in early days because we could pay for the traffic coming to our site and we could target it on someone searching for size 17 shoes or size 18 shoes or you can use negative keywords to remove the categories that we didn’t sell or brands that we didn’t sell.

Steve: Okay. So let’s go into that a little bit more, so you are talking about ad words in particular or which paper click services do you use?

Brandon: We have used them all; I remember using overture back in the day.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: But right now we are primarily using Google.

Steve: Okay and then this is just search ads or everything like the product ads like Google shopping?

Brandon: We do– currently we are not on pro listing ads, we’re trying but we have a hard time because you can’t specify product listing and you can’t specify what [inaudible 00:21:15] you want to show up under, you can only specify things you don’t want them show up.

Steve: Right.

Brandon: And because what we sell, the products that we sell are only available in certain sizes. We don’t sell that product in a size 11 or 10 or 9 you know you look up our new balance 623 running shoe, and my product listing ad shows it for you then I’m losing money because our conversion rates on those are much lower. Some– our company that manages our paper click is looking in how they can tweak our ads with enough negative keywords or tweak our ads with the right product names with the particular size and the product name. So they only trigger when we want them to so far it hasn’t really worked out for us. So most of what we are doing is just in the text ads and they’ve done a really good job. We use a company called White Shark Media.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And started using them a couple of years ago and I’m a Google ad words surf a consultant. So I mean I went through the whole test and got certified several years ago. So I’ve always done it myself thinking I’m certified I can do a really good job, and they just blew me away with our cost per customer acquisition, it cut in half when a few months after we started using them.

Steve: What are some of the things that they’re doing differently that you couldn’t have done?

Brandon: Well they have the time you know being a business owner I have tons of things to work on and I will very solemnly go in and tweak my campaign and they go in and tweak it several times a month and any keywords that are not converting they pause. Anything that’s coming through you know for a brand we don’t carry or a size we don’t carry they add negative keywords to get out of that.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: So they’re really prudent about going in meaning they send me a report every single month we can only find every month and talk about how they are tweaking the campaigns to work really well, and they are also working with some product listing ads and remarketing, that’s another thing they do for us.

Steve: Okay and this is display remarketing or do you do search and text remarketing as well?

Brandon: We do, we do both.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: We have traditionally only done it in holiday shopping season.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: The first company that we used for remarketing I wasn’t really happy with the return that we were getting. We used– I’m trying to remember the name of the company. It was one of the huge ones and we just weren’t really happy. I mean it was costing us a fortune and when I looked in my analytics even with the tracking codes present, I wasn’t seeing many people came back and converted. Now they said that we had many conversions, but I wasn’t seeing any ROI analytics and I think it wasn’t coming through analytics I really didn’t trust them.

Steve: So let’s talk about remarketing a little bit. What customers generally do you bring back to your site, just anyone who’s visited your site, anyone who has inserted something in a shopping cart, like how do you kind of segment your retargeting list?

Brandon: The way we did it is we cookied them when they came to our site and we looked at individual brand pages or category pages, and we specifically excluded anyone who had already converted.

Steve: I see.

Brandon: And a lot of times in the holiday season when we ramp up and start spending more money we’ll only retarget people who added something to their shopping cart. So they got something in their shopping cart but did not convert. So we know that they were invested enough to actually check out the shipping prices, or they were really deep in the process, they were in the cart. And then we do have a really good conversion rate on retargeting those people by saying come back you forgot something in your cart or come back for a 5% discount, and getting– because our shopping cart currently doesn’t have cart recovery.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: That was one way we kind of did the cart recovery through remarketing.

Steve: So you offer a coupon, do you ever run these retargeting ads without a coupon or a price base incentive?

Brandon: Absolutely yeah, we don’t do a lot of coupons.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: So any buyer that chooses to be on our site, we will remarket on the general campaign, we don’t offer any kind of discount, we never really do. I have tried some coupons before on email signups and offer a $5 off first time customers to sign up for email newsletter, but we rarely do real deep promotions or coupons just because we have to warehouse everything and our margins aren’t really that deep.

Steve: And so when you remarket, do you remarket very specific ads based on exactly what they look like looked at, so for example if someone was looking at Timberland shoes do you retarget them with an ad– with a picture of a Timberland shoe?

Brandon: No we usually do brand ads because of just the time in creating multiple ads. We have even as few products as we have compared to a large site like Amazon, we have hundreds and hundreds of different products and we find that a lot of our customers being that they’ve never been able to shop for big shoes, a lot of our new customers will look at dozens of products.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: You know [inaudible] [00:26:25] average time on site is pretty long, it’s looking at– let’s see four minutes average time on site this year.

Steve: Wow, okay.

Brandon: The average person looks at more than five pages.

Steve: I’m just curious what is your conversion like for your retargeting efforts?

Brandon: Last year we ran around a holiday season. It was not as good as we wanted it to be. In fact it was lower than our overall conversion rate which is why we are going with White Shark, I looked it up– the company we used last year was admiral.

Steve: Okay, yeah.

Brandon: And you know they offer what they say is come like hands off, you just go within they wouldn’t help you with your creative and everything.

Steve: Yeah.

Brandon: But the information that we were getting, I mean we– at least in Google analytics it was saying we were getting virtually no conversions, but what they were saying is there were view through conversions.

Steve: Yes yeah exactly, that was my experience also.

Brandon: So they would say that somebody viewed an ad and then came back later and bought which we have no way of tracking. They said it was– they would say you know see an ad so I don’t trust that really. I want somebody to see it, be compelled to click on it and actually you know I want to be able to track it in my view of analytics that we actually got that conversion. So we are going through Google directly now and White Shark is getting our campaign ready for this holiday season. So I’m excited to see what difference we get this year since last year.

Steve: Yes you know one thing the reason I kind of asked you that question about you know you would target your people is because I found that with our store retargeting people that just landed on the site period as opposed to targeting those people who inserted something in their cart and abandoned ended up being higher for some strange reason and it’s all due to experimentation. I was just wondering if you had experimented with that as well.

Brandon: We seem to do better with people who’d put something in their cart and somehow got distracted. A lot of people and this is something that live chat has helped us a lot with is a lot of people would put something in their cart and have a question. And if it’s after our business hours we are not answering the phone, they would just kind of go away. They wouldn’t really– we found that people don’t really read. They don’t read the frequent asked questions. They don’t search how to answer. If they are confused then they pick up the phone.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: But they are much more likely to hit that live chat button or just kind of they’ll eventually get busy doing something else and totally forget about it.

Steve: So do you have someone live manning that? Like the whole business day?

Brandon: We are not as good as we should be.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Like I should really be manning it right now because our employees are out in the warehouse packing and shipping right now so they are not able to look at it, but we try to man it most of the day every day. And often times even when I’m at home I’ll go ahead and pull it up because it dings pretty you know I’ll turn my volume up on my Mac, you know ding really loud when a customer clicks the button, so we’ll run over and check it out even if it’s at ten in the night.

Steve: And when it’s not open, when you are not able to do live chat you hide the box, right?

Brandon: We do, yes.

Steve: Okay. I had a couple of questions that just kind of popped into my mind. Do you take your own product photos or do you use the stock images from the manufacturer?

Brandon: We do because we’ve always taken our own product photos. We do have a few brands that will give us product photos that look descent, but initially I’m kind of OCD about some things. And one of the things is that I want you know a little bit of consistency in the product photos.

Steve: Right.

Brandon: And I found that some companies send us straight on product photos, some people send us product photos in an angle, some with the left shoe, some with the right shoe, some with both shoes, some are high quality, some look you had some kind of background in them. And so we decided early on we are going to take our own photos. And we used to use one of those fold up translucent white box things that you put lights on the outside and move them around until they are just right. And it took a lot of time.

Every season we get a new style, so two to four times a year we are getting pretty large shipments of shoes that we never sold before. So we were spending days you know setting up lights and moving them around just so there wasn’t too much light on this part or that part was blown out, and we finally just invested in a really good professional white box. We have– it’s called an Ortery Photosimile. And they are not cheap, but being that we take all our own photos, it does what most I’d say we take 95% of our photos. It does a really good job.

Steve: Okay and so basically it’s just put the shoes in there, it’s already set up, lighting is perfect and you just take the shot and you are done, right?

Brandon: You just take the shot and I do I like a totally white background. They would look fine if you didn’t edit them at all, but you can see you know obviously even with the perfect lighting you can still see the background. You can still see what’s behind it. So we have a company that outsources I think it’s in the Philippines maybe. And I just upload all the photos that I shot and they cut up the background and even touch up the photo a little bit if there is hair on one of the shoes or you know just a little dot or something they will remove those little blemishes and I think they charge per 2 or 2.50 in image.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of pricing your products since these are just products from manufactures is there any lee way on pricing for you or is basically any time you discount goes straight you know off of what you are going to make in terms of– so what I’m trying to ask is there a map pricing on these shoes?

Brandon: There is and a lot of the manufactures kind of bully you into pricing things at map. We do close things out after the season or if a company is no longer making something in big sizes which happens a lot with if a brand has a product that’s not selling really well, they’ll cut the big sizes. And they may still sell for another season or so, but they won’t make our sizes. So when we can’t get them anymore, if they are not selling we’ll close them out, but it’s just come to straight off our margin.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And they really don’t like for you to do that. If you do it too often a brand, a manufacturer will drop you from selling their products.

Steve: Okay. Let’s go back to pay per click for a minute. Do you do anything on Facebook right now?

Brandon: We have done Facebook in the past and I’ve learnt a lot more about Facebook with the last few conferences I’ve been to and really want to put some of that knowledge to test, but the only thing that I found with Facebook that has done anything for us was using the fairly new custom audience.

When we did Facebook ads for just sending people directly to our site to buy products because we have such a wide variety of products we can only target big sizes. And even then how do you target someone who has big feet on Facebook? You know it’s– there is no real easy way to find those people. So when customers…

Steve: You target the NBA.

Brandon: Yeah people who like the NBA, but what we did is when they released the custom audiences we uploaded not our email list but our entire customer data base.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Which after 15 years being in business it’s tens and tens of thousands may be a hundred thousand, I mean it’s a huge list and that was very successful in giving us likes. We didn’t try the campaign to try and get people to buy because these are people we know have bought before, we just wanted another channel to be able to communicate with them. And at the time we had a few hundred likes on our Facebook page and we shot up to about 2000.

So that was in my opinion the most successful campaign we’ve done is by using our custom audience and putting all of our customers in there. Now we have a lot more engagement on Facebook when we go to shoe shows. There are shoe shows around the country where all the manufacturers get together and show in the spring and fall what the next season is going to coming out.

So we place our orders– you place your orders like in the fall for the next spring and then the spring for the next fall. And when we are there we’ll actually take pictures– sometimes you are not supposed to, but we do it anyway. We’ll take pictures with our cell phones and post them to our Facebook page and say what do you guys think about this? And they love having a kind of an inside track on what may be coming next season.

Steve: So you are getting people who are already on your email list to like your fan page or are you using look alike audiences?

Brandon: No we are actually using our customer database, so it could be people on our email list but it’s everyone who has ever purchased anything from us in the past.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And some of them are on our email list, but it’s many times bigger than our email list was. Our email list is only about I want to say 15,000 right now.

Steve: Okay. And so these are just people who have purchased from you and then entered in their email and then you are basically trying to get them like your fan page as another marketing channel. Is that it?

Brandon: Correct.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: And we communicate through our page pretty regularly. Any time we are having any kind of promotions or sales, when we are going to the shoe shows or when things are coming back in stock that are really popular items or are out of stock for a particular time, we always post that stuff to our Facebook page. And we’ve been getting some pretty good engagements as we showed up, I mean we still don’t have our 2000 fans but we do get pretty good engagement when we target them.

Steve: So do you track the actual sales from that page then?

Brandon: We do, it’s not much.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: But even traffic from social is only 1% of our traffic.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: So it’s negligible, but we use it more as a way to keep communicating with our customers.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Than you know to try to sell them just because it’s such a small part of our traffic right now only having 2000 fans.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: If we get to 10, 15 then I think we’ll probably see a little better conversion on it.

Steve: I was just curious because you know Facebook is really down-down the exposure for posts on our fan pages. I was wondering if you’ve ever tried any sponsored stories or retargeting on Facebook as well.

Brandon: We haven’t but Facebook retargeting is definitely one of the things I want to do for people again who have been on our site to be able to retarget them to come back and finish their order. I think that might be pretty effective.

Steve: Okay and so basically in terms of pay per click, are you just primarily using Ad Words at this point?

Brandon: We are because we’re maxing out our spend on Ad Words and we are still not spending a whole lot of money. I think we are spending between 1500 and 2000 a month.

Steve: Wow okay.

Brandon: And we are getting really good return on investment on that money, but you know we are just constantly looking for new keywords and new Ad Groups and we had to expand it and really I just want to spend as much money as I can because it’s a profitable. So I haven’t really spent the time to get Bing Ads up and going because they are going to charge me another having hundred dollars a month. The company we used to manage it to do the Bing Ads and I’m wondering you know I’m I willing to spend 3 or 400 dollars a month if I can only spend 1500 to 2000 on Google.

Steve: Okay, right.

Brandon: So I may hire like an intern on Pinterest or something to just copy everything you know hire somebody on oDesk to copy everything on our Google…

Steve: Right.

Brandon: Over to Bing…

Steve: Actually you could just import it over.

Brandon: Yeah.

Steve: Traditionally in my experience the Bing traffic is on the order of like 10% where Google is, so I wouldn’t expect to see too much but you know an actual boost like that might make a difference for you. One of the things I did want to get into was conversion rate optimization because you’ve mentioned in your talk at the E-commerce conference some of the things that you tried. And I was just wondering if you could elaborate on some of your biggest conversion hits for your site.

Brandon: Sure, back in 2007 when my wife and I took over the business our conversion rate was pretty bad. It was 1% or just under 1% of you know all the visitors. And I mean that’s a low even by retail E-Commerce standards. I think at the time 2% was the average, so you know we were getting a descent amount of traffic, we were getting lots and lots of traffic to our site.

And I knew we had to do something and this is back when Google Website Optimizer was around, but I had no clue it even existed. I was– I think it was around 2008 maybe early or late 2007, I started doing a free shipping, of course everybody is doing free shipping. We were doing free shipping with the coupon code and we had a banner on every page of our site that said you know free shipping you know coupon code is I think it was free ship with no space in between, and it had instructions on how to check it out.

And then on check out we actually had that banner that said free shipping inner coupon code free ship. Still a lot of people were ordering without entering the coupon code and we were just thinking okay well that’s better for us because we’re paying for shipping. But then we strictly got a few people through the email forum that complained that you know you say free shipping on your website, but when I go to my shopping cart it doesn’t have free shipping.

Steve: Yeah, it’s in the link.

Brandon: Yeah even though you have it on the banner on every page of the website. So I did a test and of course this is not something you really AB test because it is a feature in the shopper cart.

Steve: Sure.

Brandon: But I just flipped the switch and make– configured our shopping cart to make it automatically apply free shipping to the continuation you ask when an order total was over a $1000. And we still offered other options but free shipping was defaulted, and instantly our conversion rate went up 50%.

Steve: Wow okay.

Brandon: I mean that’s the by far the biggest single job our conversion rate is taking. So of course we left that went free shipping now just if you live in the States you get free shipping. And that was the biggest part, but that’s what kind of showed me the importance of making changes and testing things to see what works and what doesn’t. So since then we’ve tested a lot of things. We’ve tested seals on different things you know like the buySAFE which did an amazing job for us. BuySAFE was a– I actually read a blog post about it, it was 18.6% boost.

Steve: Really?

Brandon: So it’s probably one of the better ones as well. We did the A B split test on that so I knew exactly what buySAFE did verses the others, now of course over time your customers get used to it. May be it’s not quite as much anymore, but I still think it’s very much worth it. But we did other things like hacker safe, we didn’t do anything to force it, it actually reduced our conversion rates slightly.

Steve: Okay, interesting.

Brandon: And we’ve done custom manors, we did a custom manor on our shopping cart that just says you know our safe shopping guarantee where we say you know we use some encryptions this and that and that really helped, that gave us about a 10% boost.

Steve: Wow.

Brandon: So all of the different things that we’ve done have made a huge impact. We’ve tested our Buy box a lot and now it’s pretty ugly. If you look at our site it’s pretty simple, but our buy box is got this bright red border around and the background is this pale yellow, it’s got bright red text, big bold text at the top of the buy box, and I mean we tested that, and we were getting a lot of people that didn’t know how to put things in their shopping cart.

And so we made it as ugly and as bold and as out there in front of their faces as we possibly could and every little thing has increased our conversion rate slightly to the point where our conversion rate right now seeing it over all 3%. It’s actually a bit more than 3% because our mobile conversion rate is awful. We don’t have the mobile website yet. So our conversion rate if you look at PC traffic is like close to 4%, but mobile drags it down a good bit.

Steve: Wow, okay that’s really interesting. I never thought– I’ve always been skeptical about those seals but now that you are bringing up that it actually– the buySAFE one opted by 18%, that’s very significant.

Brandon: It was a shock to me considering how inexpensive the buySAFE is so much that I read a blog post about it. This was back in 2012 when we implemented it. And I couldn’t be more surprised because we had tried numerous seals in the past and buySAFE had been after me, I’d been an IRCE conference internet retailer a couple of times and those guys had taken me out to dinner and you know they were after me for a new account. And I had always just kind of been like yeah whatever.

And so for about a year and a half I think I kept saying yeah one day I’ll sign up, one day I’ll sign up, whatever. And they finally were like dude, do it for free. We are not going to charge you anything. We’ll do the AB test. That at the end of the AB test if you don’t like it just– you don’t have to do it and it really only took about maybe 15 minutes to install 20. So it wasn’t a huge investment of time.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: It was definitely one of the better and that and the free shipping was definitely the two best things that we’ve done.

Steve: Okay and then the things you’ve done with your buy box and that sort– so first of all how much traffic do you need to do your AB testing and how long does a typical test take for you to run?

Brandon: We don’t have a huge amount of traffic, like our average when we pull up last month– our average is in the tens of thousands of visitors a month. And we were running between 20 and 30,000 and then we’ll head up just 50 and 60,000 visitors during the holidays. So it still takes us weeks to run a test if we are running it on something like the shopping cart or something where you know only a percentage of your visitors are going to go.

Steve: Right, okay.

Brandon: If I run it on like every single product page of the site so through our template system you know every product not just a particular product, it’s usually like maybe a week or two.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: On the shorter sides 7 to 10 days, but I don’t let it get to the point where it tells you it has statistical relevance all the time.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: If it’s trending one way or the other I’ll go ahead and go with it. I’d rather move on to another test or you know find something else to do than let something sit for a month.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of social media what percentage of your traffic is social media?

Brandon: Social was only 1%.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Email is 5% of our traffic, but 10% of our sales.

Steve: Wow. Okay you want to talk about a little bit of about what you are doing with your email campaigns that are making it so successful?

Brandon: Sure we have sent only a few campaigns a month for many-many years, one to two– we rarely do promotions. But when we do send an email we try to do something. So we are showing new shoes that we’ve got in stock for the season, or we are asking for feedback, like we send an email every time we go to a shoe show asking you know is there anything in particular you want us to look for? Anything you’d like us to ask, brands to make.

We do that kind of thing but I’ve gotten to where I’m much less shy about sending reminder emails and when our revenue started jumping was when I started sending many several reminders. Many several years ago I would just send one email over a particular sale because I didn’t want to get a lot of unsubscribes. I didn’t want to take people off to where they would just leave and not get any future emails.

So I didn’t want– you know I was really cautious about that. And now even though we still only do one to two campaigns what I call campaign a month. During the campaign you know if we have a sale that’s like a really long weekend, say Columbus day is on a Monday and we start the sale on Wednesday I’ll send a Wednesday email, a Friday email and then a Monday email saying that the [inaudible] [00:46:36] and hours left to save.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: So I’m not newly as shy as I used to be in– I just schedule along right when we schedule the original email doesn’t take any more time. We also do the same on Facebook where [inaudible] [00:46:51] online, of course Facebook is such a small percentage of traffic, but we still try to communicate everything through there. And that’s when our sales really started ticking up. And so our conversion rates on email is much-much higher than it is on any other channel.

Steve: So this is a key take away from what you said, it’s don’t be afraid to email your customers right, that’s what the list is for.

Brandon: Absolutely I mean you going to get some unsubscribes, but we don’t get any more unsubscribes than we did before.

Steve: Okay you know one last question and I want to ask you this from the perspective of a beginner. You know if you had to focus on one single tactic when starting out with your online store knowing what you know today, what would that one tactic be?

Brandon: One thing.

Steve: To get customers on the door.

Brandon: I would say if you are trying to get customers in the door and you are brand new, you know Conversion Rate Optimization is not a good thing because you really need some traffic to be able to do it well. So I’d focus on Search Engine Traffic. And I’d say traffic engine not SEO because I’d I would work on working in like a paid at the same time.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: I think it depends on your industry though. I’ve seen a lot of people who just can’t do Pay Per Click because there is no margin in it, if you are drop shipping there is probably not a margin in it.

Steve: Right.

Brandon: But if you have the margin I would definitely go paid and I would find a professional to do it so that they can get your costs down to the point where it’s profitable on one sale. I mean ours is a profitable on a single sale, so if a customer never comes back we still make money, which is almost unheard of in Pay Per Click right now, a lot of people focus on lifetime value of the customer. And while we do have a very high lifetime value I want to make sure that we are profitable enough this month, month to month and we have you know positive cash flow to keep putting that back in the business.

Steve: Okay and so you– when you are bidding on keywords you are not considering lifetime value, you are focusing more on how much profit you can make directly from a sale. Is that inaccurate?

Brandon: Absolutely.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: Our customer acquisition cost right now $89.

Steve: Okay that’s very good and your– I’m sure your average profit pursue is at least like $50 right? Somewhere on that…

Brandon: Well it depends on gross or net but our average order value is 120.

Steve: Okay.

Brandon: That’s with shipping and tax and whatever else might get charged. So we’ve got you know, we’ve got a good 20 to $25 in net profit before you know that we can spend and I’m still going to have money at the end of the month after paying all the bills. So yeah as long as I don’t spend $20 on a new customer I’m really happy.

Steve: Okay. And then I assume that once you find something that works you just max it out, right?

Brandon: Yeah we are totally max now. We are not even spending– I think on one of my Ad groups I’ve got $75 a day. I think I might be spending 40 on that particular Ad group. So I want it to run day in day out as much as it can if it’s working.

Steve: Okay. Awesome Brandon and hey we’ve already been talking for 50 minutes. I don’t want to take up too much more of your time. A lot of good stuff in this interview today, if anyone has any questions for you where is the best place to find you?

Brandon: You can find me at brandoneley.com. It’s an E-L-E-Y. I blog there about E-Commerce sometimes and it’s pretty easy to contact me just brandon@brandoneley.com.

Steve: Awesome Brandon. Well hey thanks a lot for coming on the show. I learnt a lot and I’m sure the listeners have learnt a lot out of this interview as well.

Brandon: Yeah thanks for having me.

Steve: All right thanks Brandon.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. Brandon’s store 2bigfeet.com is the perfect example of how someone can be successful selling regular everyday staples like shoes. By niching down and becoming the best online store for selling shoes for people with big feet, Brandon has carved out a very profitable business for himself.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequiteherjob.com/episode50, and if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to ITunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this info, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests.

So I’ll say the best way is to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to mywifequiteherjob.com/contest, and if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequiherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

049: Adam Kreitman On How To Run Profitable Adwords Ads For Your Business

Adam Kreitman

Adam Kreitman reached out to me randomly 3 years ago via the contact page on my blog and we’ve kept in touch ever since. Adam runs WordsThatClick.com which helps small business owners increase the visibility of their business on the web.

What’s cool about Adam is that unlike most larger agencies, Adam focuses a lot of his efforts on small businesses which is directly applicable to the listeners of this podcast. In this episode, Adam will teach us how to run high converting Adwords campaigns for those on a budget. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • How Adam got introduced to Google Adwords and why he decided to run Adwords campaigns for a living
  • How Adam got his Adwords consulting boutique off the ground
  • What’s a good Adwords budget to start out with
  • What you need to think about when you first start using Adwords
  • How to structure your ads and landing page for maximum sales
  • Which match types are applicable to which situations

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information, go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I have my friend Adam Kreitman on the show. Now Adam actually reached out to me like three or four years ago just kind of randomly, and I’m really happy that we’ve kept in touch over the years. He runs wordsthatclick.com which helps small business owners increase their visibility of their businesses on the web, and what’s cool about Adam is that unlike most larger agencies, Adam kind of focuses a lot of his efforts on small businesses which is directly applicable to the listeners of this podcast.

Now he’s an expert on Ad Words. He used to be a key contributor for the Rise at the top and he is also a regular author on the Crazy Egg Blog. And what’s also cool is that Adam started wordsthatclick.com because of drug testing, and with that interesting fact welcome to the show Adam. How are you doing today?

Adam: I’m doing great Steve, thanks for having me here.

Steve: Yes give us the quick background story and tell us about this drug thing that you had going on and Words That Click.

Adam: Sure. Now before people get the wrong idea I have not nor have ever used drugs. What you are referring to is I was president of a drug testing company here in St. Louis. And we were the distributors for this really– well it’s really cool technology kind of CSI like. It was called drug light and the drug light you can think of it as like a home pregnancy test but for drugs.

It was a stick– plastic stick and you would wipe the surface with kind of like a quack kind of swab on the end of this stick. And within five minutes drug light would tell you whether someone who touched that surface had used illegal drugs, and if so what kind.

Steve: Wow.

Adam: Yeah. It was an interesting business to be at more or less let’s put it that way.

Steve: Cool, so I can imagine a lot of people before that big interview like a lot of bigger companies do drug test these days I guess.

Adam: Yes.

Steve: And it was that your main customer base, was it the consumer?

Adam: Well we had a couple of markets we are going after. One was the market of parents of teenagers you know who were concerned that their child was involved with drugs. And the other were businesses especially warehouses, companies that had fork lift drivers, truck drivers in place and they were concerned we are using drugs, and this kind of gave them an overall picture of if there was drug use going on, if so where was concentrated within the workforce.

Steve: So how does paper click kind of fall into this drug testing company here.

Adam: Good question. When you start a business you try to market however you can, and I was doing everything. I still shudder saying this, but I do in cold calling, we are doing direct mail, I was going to networking events, all sorts of things. And I was looking for a way where instead of me having to go out and find people who are interested in this product, I could have them come to me.

And I was having networking event and I was talking to a friend of mine and he was telling me about how well his business is going and how the success is– was solely based on this new advertising platform from Google called Ad Words. And I thought well that sounds pretty interesting and we started using Ad Words for the drug testing business, and it was– this business was not a huge success for a whole bunch of reasons. But out of all the marketing that we did Ad Words was the one that we had the most success with.

Steve: And were you running all the campaigns?

Adam: I was.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Yeah.

Steve: And then when did you kind of decide to do this for a living?

Adam: Well, so I was having success with it and one day we were doing a drug test for this company that hire security guards to you know for buildings. We were doing drug test of the employees like you could swipe somebody’s forehead with this. And we were in this room with this guy and we were explaining how the technology works, and he starts asking questions like well so if I smoked marijuana last week will that show up?

And then he started talking about rehab and started getting a little agitated. I was thinking you know what; it’s a lot more fun helping business owners like get more business instead of chasing drug users around.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: I made a move.

Steve: So how did you get your business off the ground?

Adam: Speaking.

Steve: Speaking?

Adam: Speaking.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: I had a friend who run a kind of different sort of networking event here in St. Louis. And he invited me to speak at one of his events. I spoke one night, the next morning somebody who was there called me up and said let’s have lunch and the next week I was running their Ad Words campaign.

Steve: Cool. Was this David [inaudible] [00:06:35] by any chance or no?

Adam: It was not.

Steve: Okay. So you got your first client and then from there was it just word of mouth from there? Or did you actually use PPC for your own PPC business?

Adam: I run a limited PPC campaign and I still do.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: And I know it’s paid for so many times over, but most of it– most of my business especially in the early days came from word of mouth. And it came from getting speaking gigs at you know local chamber events and networking events, places like that and also writing, doing a lot of writing for various publications.

Steve: Okay. So want you know one of the reasons I wanted to have you on the show is because you are a paper click expert and you’ve used Ad Words for almost a decade now, right?

Adam: Yeah.

Steve: And so I was hoping that you’ll be able to share some insights with the audience actually from the perspective of a much smaller shop.
Adam: Sure.

Steve: So first of all I’m sure you’ve worked with smaller companies and larger companies. What are kind of the characteristics of a smaller business that they are kind of set apart from a larger one and how do you treat them differently when you run their campaigns?

Adam: Well when we are talking about a smaller business we are generally talking about a much smaller budget.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: And that I would say more than anything else influences our approach to Ad Words.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Infact I would say smaller companies can be very successful with Ad Words and can have big advantages over big companies when it comes to Ad Words, but I will also say that having a small budget impose great challenges to an Ad Words campaign.

Steve: Okay. So what are some of the advantages that a smaller business might have, and what would be a typically good budget that you would be comfortable starting out with as a small business?

Adam: Well I would say the advantage of a small company is they are just a lot more nimble, a lot more flexible.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: When I’m working with big companies there are committees usually. There are committees and well you know you make a suggestion to change the landing page, and well you know we have run that by legal and there is just a lot of red tape and bureaucracy that can affect the efficiency of managing a campaign.

Small business owner you can talk to the owner and hey you know this is what is going on, let’s make this change on your website or add this page or things like that and there are some more generally. They are more willing to try different variations of Ad Copies and keywords and things like that.

Steve: Okay, it makes sense.

Adam: So I enjoy working with small business owners more for that reason.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: As far as the budget I you know I say this a bit tongue in cheek, but I tell this to all my clients you know spend as much as will let you sleep at night.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: There are certainly advantages to starting with a bigger budget of you know $3, 5000 a month, but for a smaller business that may be a ton of money and I just don’t have it. And if that’s the case let’s say if all you could spend is 500 or 1000 you know is better than nothing. And start with a very small targeted campaign and see if you can get some traction on that, and then just build from there.

Steve: Okay. So hypothetically speaking let’s say you just started a brand new E-Commerce store, you have a brick and motor store as well selling a certain type of widget, what would be kind of your first plan of attack with Paper Click?

Adam: Well I want to start with the goal of the campaign right, you need to know what you’re trying to achieve.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Are you trying to make the phone ring, if it’s an E-commerce store then you want to get the sale. Some people just want Ad Words for branding purposes. So the goal of the campaign is going to influence the Ad Copy, is going to influence the keywords that you choose to some extent, it could impact the budget.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: So understanding that is step one. Once you know what you are trying to achieve if you have a small budget you want to start a very small focused campaign. Don’t go crazy with your keywords and add like 50 or 100 keywords to your campaign to start.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: If it’s in E-Commerce store pick a couple of your top selling products, or pick a couple of products that you get the highest margin on.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: And start there and you know Ad Words as much as I’d like to say we hit it at the park every time and right off the bag it’s not usually the case. It’s very much a process of optimization, and you are probably not going to make money on day one.

Steve: Okay. So let’s talk about– okay so right then what you just said you recommended creating an ad and I assume we are talking about search and not the display network, right?

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Okay. And you want to design your Ad that points directly to the product or directly to a landing page that kind of sells the product, or a listing of products in a category? Could you be a little more specific on what you would do?

Adam: Sure. Well…

Steve: Assuming the goal is sales of course.

Adam: yeah, assuming the goal is sales this is not to avoid giving an answer but I would say test.

Steve: Okay. Sure.

Adam: Yeah because I could tell you well send it to you know best practices say that you should send it to the product page, but you may find on your site if you take a step back and have a more of a sales landing page to kind of set the stage for the product may be that works better. And it also depends on the keywords you are focusing on. If you have a key word that’s– I don’t know golf balls, there are a lot of options in there.

So you are going to take people to a page that shows the Nike and the title list and your other different types of golf balls that you sell, and let people dig down from there. Whereas if the key word is a specific type of Nike golf ball probably you’re going to want to take them directly to that product page because that’s what they are looking for.

Steve: So in terms of choosing the keywords, what do you kind of recommend in the beginning when you are first turning out? Do you start with broad phrase, modified broad? What’s your strategy?

Adam: When you have a small budget I would actually start out with exact match.

Steve: Exact match, okay.

Adam: Right. And just I’m assuming– well I know a lot of your listeners are familiar with Ad Words, but for those who may not be as familiar exact match so if your exact match keyword is Nike golf balls, then in order for your Ad to appear someone would have to type Nike golf balls into Google exactly.

Steve: What are some things that– so I just want you to answer a couple of these questions so your initial bid, exact match, one thing you know I teach a class and one thing that happens often to students is they start out with exact match which is actually what I recommend as well. They don’t see a whole lot of traffic for that exact match key word and then they bump it up to phrase and before you know it they go up to broad without telling me, and then they are spending all these money on just random stuff so…

Adam: Right.

Steve: Just wanted your thoughts on that.

Adam: Yeah, if you try exact match and it’s not getting a lot of traffic before you go to phrase you might try some other close variations of that initial keyword and see if you could get some traction with those. Primarily in the campaigns we run we are using exact match and modified broad match.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: There are a lot advantages to using modified broad match over exact match because you know especially for a local business there are all sorts of variations of the keywords people may type in with city names and zip codes and things like that. So if all you have is exact match you may miss out on a lot of those very big keywords. When you start migrating to modified broad match or even praise match, then you need to start paying very close attention to the negative keywords in your campaign.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: And negative keywords are keywords that basically tell Google if this word shows up in a search term, do not show my Ads.

Steve: Okay. And then how do you kind of manage the initial bids. Are you in the beginning do you try to bid to get in the top echelon so you can get the data faster, or do you just go with Google’s recommended minimum bid when you are first starting out.

Adam: I hardly ever go with Google’s recommended bids.

Steve: Okay. I just wanted your opinion because it’s usually really high and much higher than you actually need to bid in my experience at least.

Adam: Yeah. You know well they are in business to make money, so you just understand that going in. That said I do tend– I do try to bid on the higher end of things because the fact is when you first start an Ad Words campaign you are put in a bit of a sand box until you prove yourself to Google, until your campaigns have a little bit of history behind them you are just not going to get as many impressions. Google is not going to– you are going to pay more for clicks over all.

So I tend to go in with higher bids to show Google that I’m serious, and so that I can also as you said you know get some more data by being in those top spots to see how those keywords are performing.

Steve: And how long does it take to get out of the sand box and how does it work exactly?

Adam: Well, I would say it takes us I’d say two to three months to get a campaign to the place where it’s kind of let’s call it stable.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: You know where we feel that we have a pretty good idea of which keywords are working, whether bid prices are going to be what the quality scores are, all those things.

Steve: And then can we talk about quality scores and how that works?

Adam: Sure, so the Google Ad Words auction is not a straight auction. Just because you bid the most and you obviously don’t know what your competitors are bidding, but whoever bids the most doesn’t necessarily get the top spot in the Ad auction. So Google has this algorithm called Quality Score that really rewards relevancy.

So if you can show to Google that your Ads get high click through rates, and they have dozens and dozens of factors that go into Quality Score and they look at the landing page relevancy and all these factors. So at the end of the day if you have a higher quality score for your keywords than your competitor even if they bid higher than you, you can still end up wrecking higher than they do in the auction, and basically the higher the Quality Score the less you pay per click.

Steve: Okay. And this is of course doesn’t take into effect until after you’ve kind of come out of the sand box, right?

Adam: Well they– Google will assign you Quality Scores immediately. Like as soon as you launch your campaign, but they do that based on kind of the industry but until you get some history behind your Ads and your keywords and things like that your Quality Score in the beginning may be a bit misleading, it may not be where you end up.

Steve: Okay because I know that I’ve noticed with some of my search campaigns I always start out spending like almost three expert click and then over time you know it’s the cost per click is almost gone down by you know like 60% over time.

Adam: Yeah.

Steve: For some of my Ads.

Adam: Yeah.

Steve: And that’s actually not uncommon. So what’s your take on showing Ads on mobile?

Adam: Mobile is got it’s become a bit trickier in that you used to be able to run mobile only campaigns with Ad Words. And they took that functionality away. I wish they would bring it back and infact…

Steve: I mean it’s kind of still there, right? It’s kind of still there, right? You can reduce your bids for just mobile devices.

Adam: Yeah you can– there are some things you can do through bid adjustments to bid much higher if you have a campaign that you want to target mobile you can bid a lot higher for mobile clicks than for desktops and tablets. And infact what I was going to say is before you can even break desktop and tablet traffic apart you keep those separate, you can’t do that anymore.

Infact you don’t even have the ability to do bid adjustments on tablets which I know a lot of people are not happy with because that traffic can behave much differently. But you know as with everything else in Ad Words you kind of have to test the how the mobile traffic performs for you. I have some campaigns for local businesses where mobile performs as good if not better than desktop traffic.

Steve: Interesting.

Adam: So…

Steve: What is the goal of those campaigns?

Adam: This is [inaudible] [00:20:37] you get phone calls.

Steve: Interesting, okay.

Adam: Phone calls or phone fill out.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: And then we have others where we just– mobile doesn’t work, just doesn’t produce in our line but does what traffic does.

Steve: Okay. And so at that point do you just turn off mobile altogether or?

Adam: Generally, we either turn it off altogether or bid way down on it.

Steve: Okay, what are some– I know these are going to be kind of broad questions but just from the perspective of a new shop owner, what are some good guidelines to follow when you’re first starting out with your ad words campaign, and I also want you to kind of touch on whether you enable Google search partners when you’re first starting out as well?

Adam: Sure. So search partners are search engines like AOL and Ask.com that don’t have their own paper clip program, they’ve just partnered with Google and show Google ads depending on the budget, depending on the scope of the campaign. If it’s a smaller campaign we usually we use search partners ad to start. If it’s a bigger campaign we will usually separate, we will actually create two campaigns basically identical, but one will be focused only on Google search and the other will be– you can’t just focus on search partners you have to do Google search then search partners, but that other campaign will have lower bids by– it depends but maybe say 30% or so lower, and we do that so that we are not over paying for the search partner traffic.

Steve: Interesting. Okay.

Adam: And that actually leads into your other question about kind of just recommendations for getting started. Segmentation is key with an ad words campaign. Different traffic via key words via Google search versus search partners via mobile versus desktop often can behave very differently, and to really optimize a campaign you need to be aware of how that traffic, those different sources of traffic behave.

It’s very likely that in an ad words account you have multiple campaigns, and one may just target Google search with some top performing keywords that you have. You may have another one that targets global traffic. You may have another one that targets modified branch key words search partner and even within a campaign and this is really important to understand. Within campaigns you can create ad groups and an ad group is a group of related key words and they share ads.

So going back to the example I said before of golf balls; if you have a sporting goods store you just put all your key words into one campaign and you have an ad about come to our sporting goods store, we’re fantastic, that’s not going to be very effective because the person looking for tennis rackets is going to be very different than the person looking for golf balls, is going to be very different that the person looking for baseball gloves.

So you want to segment your campaign and have an ad group focusing on golf balls that have ads that speak specifically about golf balls and link to the page on your site about golf balls, and you may even go more niche than that. So you have an ad group for titleless golf balls, and then an ad group for Nike golf balls, really-really segmenting your ad groups and your campaigns overall I can’t emphasize the importance of that enough.

Steve: Okay and then do you actually also segment by geographical location?

Adam: Yes and again it depends on the campaign, but I will find for campaigns where we have clients that have locations spread out across the country, really if we segment those out by geo-location we tend to get better performance than trying to lump everybody together.

Steve: Okay. What are some of your– okay so let’s switch gears a little bit. So just to summarize everything that you said you want to segment out your ad campaigns as finely grained as possible, so that you it’s like an exploratory mission in the beginning until you find out what works and once you find something that works you kind of– once you know that it’s profitable you increase your ad spend for that particular segment.

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Is that accurate? Okay.

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Perfect and constantly you are adding negative keywords as you mentioned like 15 minutes ago to these campaigns to restrict the amount of traffic that you know is not going to buy anything.

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Right, and so you know so we’ve talked a lot about search, search campaigns now can we talk a little bit now about the Google display network?

Adam: Yes.

Steve: First of all what is it and what are some of the major differences between contextual versus query based advertising?

Adam: So the display network– Google, if you searched around the web you’ve seen the Google ads on websites and it can be like from the New York Times down to somebody’s personal blog, and as a website owner you get a cut of the action. When somebody comes to your website and clicks on that ad Google pays you a percentage, so it’s a way to monetize a website. As an ad words advertiser you have the ability to place ads websites and there are a number of different ways you can do that, we can get into that. Biggest difference between search and display I would say is the mindset of the person you are reaching.

When you’re targeting people on search they find your ad because they had they had a need, a desire, they’re going on a quest for information and they sat down at their computer with the intent, they typed in that keyword with the intent of finding a solution. They had an itch that needed to be scratched, so they are actively searching for what you offer. When you’re on the display network people are there consuming information, they are not actively looking for you. I say it’s more like TV, radio ads, although I think it could be much more targeted overall than you can on TV and radio, but…

Steve: Okay.

Adam: It’s just, it’s a different mindset.

Steve: So how do the guidelines change in terms of your ad copy?

Adam: There are a few things, number one with the displays you can run image ads, so it’s not just about the copy, it’s about the image that you use. And as far as the ad copy itself you can test out many-many more variations on the display network because there tend to be a lot more impressions out there than there are on search. They’re just a lot more, there’s no shortage of places your ads can be shown on the display network which is good and bad. You can test out a lot more variations of ad copy and you may find and again you have to test, but you may find being a bit more creative, a bit more in your face may work better on display than it does on search. Work clever I would say in your ads.

Steve: One thing I’m actually particularly interested in what you have to say here because I personally have not been able to make a profit off of the display network just yet, and primarily because you know going through you know I’ve tried very specific targets and at the same time you know every now and then a website will come up– pretty spammy website, send me a bunch of clicks and then I restrict it, but then you know the next day another spammy website comes up. So what’s your kind of strategy with the display network?

Adam: Persistence.

Steve: Okay. So first of all you don’t recommend display network if you are just starting out for a small business, right?

Adam: No, no definitely not. Stay clear of it, and in fact when you start a new ad words campaign Google is pretty sneaky about these things. The new default I believe is search with display select which they make sound really good like hey you know not only can you reach people on search, but we’re going to go on the display network and find really targeted places where we show your ads and you know we’re on your side, we’re here for you– well not really. If you do display, start with search, learn how ad words works, kind of cut your teeth on search. If you do display, then I would say create a separate campaign you know we talked about segmenting before– excuse me you definitely want to keep your search and display campaigns separate.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Because they are totally different beasts.

Steve: Okay. So let’s say you are starting a display campaign for your golf ball store or your golf store, what is kind of your first plan of attack?

Adam: Well the first thing I would say when it comes to the display network is I would start with remarketing.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Which is– have you been able to get remarketing working?

Steve: Yes remarketing works wonderfully, yes.

Adam: So and again for those who may not be familiar with what remarketing is, somebody comes to your website you cookie them and when they leave your site that gives you the ability to show ads to them on other websites that they visit that show Google ads. So it’s the display network, but you’re only showing your ads to people who have visited your website, and if you’re going to do display start there.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: With remarketing after that there are– there’s no shortage of ways you can target people with display. You can do it by topics; Google has a list of a few hundred different topics you can target people by. You can do it by interest, so I should say topics is about the content of the web page. So if you pick small business as a topic, the theory anyway is that the pages you are– your ads display on are related to small business. Now I can tell you a story about doing that and having our client’s ad show in a website that was a webcam for a chicken coup in Boston. So again you really have to be careful on this one.

Steve: So do you recommend those broad targeting, or do you recommend like targeted placement in the meeting, just physically going out looking for websites and articles that are relevant, what do you recommend?

Adam: If the budget is there I like trying the broad targeting like topic targeting or interest targeting to try and find placement because at the end of the day yeah you can search around and see some websites that may work for you, but Google’s algorithm is pretty impressive and for all the junk traffic that it sends your way, you’re also going to find some placements that you probably would not have found otherwise. So we like to– again if the budget’s there and if the client understands that you know this may not work but we’re going to give this a try and see if we can find some placements that are converting, and if we in a broader campaign if we find placements that are converting, then we will put those in a separate campaign where we’re specifically targeting those sites.

Steve: Okay. Can you comment on just the contextual nature of the display network versus search? Meaning is it in your best interest to create an ad on the display network that points to products, or is it in your best interest to point it to a page where you kind of grab an email address and then kind of market to them on the back end with an email list, what has worked better in your experience?

Adam: Again I would say test you know not to be evasive but it’s going to work differently for different businesses. I have found that you can drive a fair amount of sign ups you know free sign ups from display networks but the traffic quality may not be there. So you know again it really comes down to testing for your specific business.

Steve: So let me ask you this, you mentioned search budget of you know 500-1000 minimum, what would be your budget for like a display network since the net needs to be cast out a lot larger?

Adam: I would say again it’s as much as you are comfortable with. I would say the same budget range 500-1000 you can– you’re going to get a lot more action for that money. The clicks tend to be cheaper on the display network and they’re a lot more impressions to be had. So you may find as far as actual traffic goes your budget goes further on display. Now again the quality may not be as great but you’re probably going to get a lot more clicks.

Steve: Yeah. I mean I had an ad being displayed on some mobile app before I realized I needed to turn that off and I got like 20 clicks in like 30 minutes.

Adam: Yeah.

Steve: Or something like that but it was all junk traffic, probably some kid playing some game.

Adam: Yes yeah you– if you’re running display and especially these broader campaigns you have to be really-really vigilant because as I said you know things may be humming along and the next thing you know you get you know 50 clicks from a chicken coup webcam site in Boston so.

Steve: The thing is they don’t even show you where your ads are showing until 48 hours later, right?

Adam: Yeah. There is a bit of a lag again. It’s a challenge and you really-really have to stay on top of it if you’re going on display.

Steve: Okay. But do you and this is again a really broad question, but do you believe that paper click can be made to work with you know almost all sorts of businesses, e-commerce businesses and still make a profit or would you say there are some businesses where just PPC is it just doesn’t make sense?

Adam: I believe there are businesses PPC doesn’t make sense for example when people contact me and they have a very niche B to B business where they are trying to reach a very specific type of person you know maybe it’s HR manager at fortune 500 companies, that’s tough to do with paper click.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Those people I say try LinkedIn ads, try direct mail because hey you know I focus on online advertising but you know good old fashioned direct mail still works.

Steve: Okay, it sounds like Facebook might be better for that sort of campaign.

Adam: I have seen Facebook campaigns absolutely wipe the floor with ad words as far as lead generation in some cases, so yeah I mean I love ad words I use it every day, but I’m not going to sit here and sell everybody and tell them they all need to be on ad words, and it’s the best and most fantastic advertising platform out there because for different businesses there are other fantastic options out there that may work much better.

Steve: Can you just kind of comment on some of the differences you know why you would chose ad words versus Facebook versus some other ad platform like LinkedIn that you mentioned?

Adam: Yeah, it depends on who you are trying to reach. You know for if you are a DUI attorney, nobody is on Facebook liking DUI attorneys or saying woohoo you know I’m a drunk driver, target me. So there you are pretty much stuck with ad words.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: But if you know– if there is a very specific demographic that you’re going after especially with the power editor that they introduced a year or two ago Facebook can be really-really powerful.

Steve: Okay. What is your comment on just kind of the demographic services that Google ad words offers for the display network?

Adam: I have no comment on that Steve. I wouldn’t– I don’t use a demographic targeting.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Adam: I just I don’t think it is all that accurate.

Steve: Okay. So when it comes to demographic stuff go with Facebook is basically what you are saying.

Adam: Yeah. In fact if I may add within the last year Google has kind of hidden this on a geo-targeting tab, but there is a way where you can target households based on income with ad words. So you can target like the top 10% of households the budding bottom 50% and I have tried those before on some campaigns, and I just I don’t trust the data.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: I don’t see it working very well.

Steve: So you didn’t see any difference in conversions when you tried that.

Adam: No-no, I mean we so we did this test for a client and I’m going to be careful about how I describe this, but we were selling a service that primarily would be consumed by the top, let’s call them 30% of households by income, and so we started a campaign where we were just targeting that demographic. And then after maybe a month or so of not really getting great results we opened it up and the results were better.

Steve: Interesting. Okay. Yeah. I know Google probably knows a lot about all of us, but I would imagine it’s mostly from our searches, right? And any data that they may have from android phones I would guess.

Adam: Yeah. Well they have a lot of data, I mean it’s impressive I mean it really is impressive what they know and I’m kind of trashing them a little bit, but it is impressive what they put together and how you can target people and I don’t know whether they’re just not sharing it with us as much as they could, I mean us as advertisers or something else is going on, but the data that they have is phenomenal and you can use it to create success if you know how to use it.

Steve: Okay. Hey. Well thanks Adam we’ve already been talking for quite a while and I want to be respectful of your time. If any of my listeners have any questions for you where can they find you?

Adam: They can find me at wordsthatclick.com, that’s my main website. If people who are using ad words campaigns are interested I’ve started another site with a couple of my buddies, who are top PPC guys, I think they’re top PPC guys in the world and we started this site PPC Audit Xmen, and the idea behind that site is we’re all pretty well booked, we can maybe handle a couple more actively managed campaigns, but there are a lot of people out there running ad words that just need a second pair of eyes, an expert pair of eyes to look at their campaign.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Give them feedback on how to improve it. So we started the PPC Audit Xmen site to kind of provide that service and get people expert feedback on their campaigns.

Steve: Cool, I’ll definitely link that up and then I imagine there’s a contact form on that site as well, right?

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Okay.

Adam: Yes.

Steve: Well excellent Adam, thanks a lot for coming on the show, really appreciate it.

Adam: You’re welcome thanks for having me Steve, I appreciate it.

Steve: All right, take care.

Adam: You too.

Steve: I really love Adam, he’s actually someone who I met four years ago and I’m glad that we kept in touch over the years. Now if you look at our online store ad words represents a significant portion of our online store profits today. Don’t listen to random people out there telling you that ad words ads are too expensive for you to make money. If your margins are decent you can likely make ad words ads profitable, you just have to understand how to use the tool.

For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode49, and if you enjoyed this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can get this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest complement that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

Now as an added incentive I`m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course. Where I show you how my wife and I manage to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

048: How To Buy An Existing Online Store And Double Revenues In Just 1 Year With Bill D’Alessandro

Bill D'Allesandro

Why start an ecommerce store from scratch when you can buy an existing site and double its revenues?

Today, Bill D’Alessandro shows us the exact process he goes through to buy an online business and how he finds stagnant businesses to buy that he can improve upon within a short time frame.

Bill D’Alessandro owns a portfolio of ecommerce stores which you can check out at ElementsBrands.com.

In this interview, Bill and I will be referring to his recent acquisition NurtureMyBody.com. Enjoy!

What You’ll Learn

  • Why you should consider buying a business as opposed to starting one from scratch
  • How to evaluate the right business to acquire
  • What multiples do ecommerce stores sell at
  • How to perform due diligence for a seller
  • How long does the entire process take?
  • What sort of help do you need to buy a business?
  • Where you can find potential businesses to buy

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Steve: Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I`m really excited to have Bill D’Allesandro on the show, did I do that right Bill?

Bill: You did.

Steve: Bill is someone who I met at the at the ecommerce fuel conference in Austin Texas last month. And he runs a company called Elements Brands and a blog over at RebelCEO.com. Now here is what is cool about Bill. He used to be an investment banker, so he has got a lot of experience with evaluating companies, and as a result his company Elements Brands has been able to create a portfolio of high quality consumer brands, and in other words Bill is just very good at buying existing ecommerce brands, especially mom and pop type of business and then making them even better and more profitable. So in this interview today, Bill is going to teach us the ins and outs of buying existing businesses with potential, and with that welcome to the show Bill, how are you doing today?

Bill: Doing good Steve, thanks for having me.

Steve: Yeah, so give us a quick background story behind Elements Brands and why you started this company.

Bill: Sure so I started Elements Brands in 2010. At the time I was working in investment Banking, and I was you know working 100 hours a week, and not really enjoying it all that much. And I read a book that I`m sure many people listening are familiar with called The 4 Hour Work Week. I read The 4 Hour Work Week and I had an idea for a product, my first product called KP Elements. It’s a skin cream for a specific skin condition called keratosis pilaris, said you know there really was nothing on the market for the condition. So I said I don’t know anything about skin cream at all, but it sounds like there is a big market here and I need to learn.

So from that one product I launched it with a contract manufacturer and a contract warehouse because I was still working for someone else so– actually we launched the contract warehouse first. First I was shipping everything, I was chopping everything off of the post office on the way to work which was terrible.

Steve: I can’t imagine doing that and working a 100 hour weeks and having time to head over to the post office.

Bill: It was tough because I’m home and like have to box up like a couple of orders you know like on my way in the next morning, it was terrible. So I very quickly outsourced the fulfillment which was great and also because I was working so much, I really was forced to automate everything from the very beginning. You know I didn’t have time you know to forward PDFs or emails over to a supplier to ship them. You know I didn’t have time to email the customers their tracking numbers; I didn’t have time to do any of that stuff, so I automated all of that from the very beginning, and this is you know four years ago when there wasn’t a lot of software existing to do that.

So I wrote a lot of custom software to kind of stitch the business together. To stitch the ecommerce cart to the fulfillment center, to monitor the inventory in the fulfillment centre and reorder from my suppliers when I got low. So I built a lot of custom software and KP Elementsstarted to take off. I did the website for 600 bucks on Elance originally, and I started getting a bunch of orders. And I realized that while the KP Element business was doing well, I really had a lot more infrastructure. The code that I had built, the infrastructure that I had built could handle more revenue than I had.

So being an investment banker and you know working on selling other people’s companies throughout the day I said, why don’t I go out and look to buy more revenue and bolt it out of my platform?

Steve: Mm-huh.

Bill: And that when KP Elements became Element Brands.

Steve: Okay, and so your KP Elements, that first site was just designed completely from scratch, right?

Bill: Totally from scratch, yeah. I did it really in the classic 4 Hour Work Week style. I had it built on E lance for about 600 bucks, and the check out page you know when you got to the buy now page, you are adding your address and going to the next step and then it would say, well were out of stock. We`ll email you when we get back in stock. Well really we didn’t have any stock to begin with, I was just testing demand to see how many people intended to buy. So yeah I started that company with about 600 to 700 bucks to the website and then about seven to nine grand, I can’t remember exactly somewhere in that eight grand range for the initial inventory that we had.

Steve: Okay, and then you sold those just primarily on your own site not using any third party sites.

Bill: Initially on our first party sites and then on a whim threw it up on Amazon and that really exploded and we can get into that later.

Steve: I guess first question for you is what were some of your motivations for buying existing companies as opposed to just starting more from scratch?

Bill: Well, it really helps you skip a lot of the pain in the ass in the beginning because you can buy a business that you already know there is a market and you already know there are customers for. So if you have an idea and you are starting a business there is a lot of work that goes into validating the market, creating the product, creating the brand, and establishing a loyal base of customers? And a lot of times you are doing all that work while not making any revenue or making a very small amount of revenue just to get started with. And that can take a couple of years and all that time you are basically figuring out is the business going to work?

Whereas if you buy a business you can come in on year three after someone has done a lot of the slog, and go all right are you tired? Like do you really want– do you want to continue the slog and that person a lot of times will say, you know I`ve got competing interest. I`m kind of tired I’m exhausted, and I want to sell you the business. But really what they have done for you is they acquire is de-risk it. So they`ve spent the last three years proving this out and you know there are lots of businesses that fail after year one and year two, and that might have been you had you started it, but this business has been around for three years.

So obviously if there is revenue and repeat customers there, there is something there. So then you can come in and make improvements and try to take the business from X to 4X and you can totally do that. It’s a lot faster to go from 0X or slower from 0X to 1X, often times it needs to go from 1X to 4X if you have the right know how.

Steve: Okay. And then of course the disadvantage is that you have to pay for some that growth upfront, you know with the confidence that you can actually grow it in the end, right?

Bill: Yeah, you definitely have to pay. So the multiples that people typically pay and we can talk more about valuations if you want, but typically you will pay between two and three times cash flow for a business.

Steve: Cash flow, okay.

Bill: So that’s two or three times annual cash flow. So if you double the business, you get your money back in a year. So it’s– often times it’s not that much upfront if you can grow it.

Steve: Okay, and you know I know a lot of listeners in the audience have been considering purchasing an existing store as opposed to starting from scratch, and I know you`ve acquired three or four companies I think or…

Bill: Two.

Steve: Okay and that ball pack in it. So I was hoping to maybe pick you know one of the two and maybe go into a little more depth about the whole process. So, just looking on your site I saw you have Nurture My Body which is one of your acquisitions, and that sells organic skin health care. KP Elements which is something you started from scratch and the Ski Balm I guess is that your other acquire.

Bill: Ski Balm actually started from scratch as well. The second acquisition is not on the website yet, and I would rather not talk about it in detail quite yet, but Nurture My Body is a better case study anyway.

Steve: Okay yeah. So let’s talk about Nurture My Body and then just first off, is there a specific reason why you chose to just focus on skin care companies particular, did you feel comfortable buying these companies because you kind of became an expert over the years?

Bill: Yeah. I could say in hind sight, I could weave a very good story about why I focus on skin care you know good margins, like low start up costs, like you don’t need tooling, electronics, but at the time it was really just because I had started KP Elements and I learned a lot about skin care and then I was looking for another acquisition and I wasn’t necessarily looking for something in personal care or beauty. But then Nurture My Body came along and I said I`m not sure– I wasn’t planning on going down this industry, but it really right over home plate for me and that’s why I ended up buying it.

Steve: So I was just curious the nature of skin care products is that people are constantly coming back for more. I was just wondering if that was just one of your criteria in acquiring a company?

Bill: That’s always great for sure. I mean that’s– especially in beauty you know repeat customers and consumable products is always really good. But at the same time I wouldn’t say that’s a necessity.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I have a friend, he sells camping helmets, and you know you are probably not going to buy very many camping helmets, maybe you buy a second one as a gift or something, but then he gets people that come back by selling them other things like camping chairs and other camping gear, things like that.

Steve: I see.

Bill: So if you don’t have a consumable product you can still create a repeat customer base.

Steve: Okay, and then so kind of like the first question that was just on my mind is, when you are looking to make a purchase– actually let’s take a step back, so where can you find these potential deals first of all, how do you find them?

Bill: That is the hardest part. There is a lot of grey spots. There are a couple of brokers out there, you can go on BizBuySell is the largest website in the internet, a clearing house for businesses for sale. You will wave through a lot of you know mechanic shops and liquor stores and local restaurants, things like that to find a couple of ecommerce businesses. There is a lot of junk on BizBuySell if you are looking for an ecommerce business, but that`s actually where I found Nurture My Body on BizBuySell.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So you`ve got to comb through BizBuySell, you can also find there are a couple of brokers out there if you just search for ecommerce business brokers on Google you will find several. They have listings on their websites; they list them every so often. There is also a due diligence firm I think called Centrica and they try to do a centralized listing. They try to scrap all the brokers’ websites and post them on their own. You can check them as well.

Steve: What are some of the pros and cons of using a broker, do you have to pay them of does the seller pay the broker?

Bill: The seller pays the broker, so if you are going to sell your business you can think of the broker a lot like a real estate agent. So if you are going to sell your house you hire a real estate agent. If you are going to sell your business you hire a business broker, and a business broker is going to charge you a percentage of sale when your business gets sold. Typically it’s about 10% of the sale value. So you as the seller are betting that by hiring this broker, I can get 10% more than I would have without him.

Steve: Wow 10% is a lot. I mean it a lot more that real estate.

Bill: It is and the reason it is that high is I`ve talked to several business brokers and the fact of the matter is that a lot of small businesses just never sell. So they do a lot of work and then never get paid at all. So that’s why the percentage has to be higher to account for all the business that never do sell.

Steve: Okay, and so you just mentioned that there is a lot of stuff to go through, a lot of junk that you might not be interested. So when you are looking to make a purchase you know what are kind of some easy ways for you to filter through all the stuff, and what do you look for in a business that you might want to buy?

Bill: I look for something that’s wrong with it, but easily fixable. So in the instance of Nurture My Body, they have really great products. What was in the bottles was really fantastic, they have really great repeat customers which is another thing to look for, are people coming back, do people love the brand, are people telling their friends about the brand, sharing on Facebook. What do the testimonials look like, and all that tracked down really well for Nurture My Body, but the original entrepreneurs while they were really good, and they created fantastic products, their design needed a little bit of help, so…

Steve: The website design or the product design?

Bill: All the above. So the whole brand, the logo was not great, the labels were really bad, they didn’t have UPC barcodes on them. So they couldn’t be sold in stores. The website was still running on Xcard, an old version of Xcard, it was really not optimized for conversion at all. So I saw what they had was a really good product and really bad branding, so that was the first thing I worked on when I bought the business, it’s rebranding it. So it took about seven months, and then we launched it all together a new logo, a new website, new packaging, new labels, new everything, but we didn’t change the formulas.

Steve: So just curious as you are going through I guess the perspective– what are the documents called that they give you to give all the numbers necessary.

Bill: Often times it called the confidential information memorandum or simply a memo.

Steve: Okay, and is all that information that you mentioned contained in these documents like repeat customers. Is there like a set of numbers that are required for someone to reveal in order to sell their business that you can look at, or is everything just different across the board?

Bill: So basically there is some standardization because people hire a business broker and the business broker basically will grill the seller, and source out all the information that he thinks the buyer is going to want to know and they will put it in the memo. So the memo will have a lot of good information, it will have all the financials of the business. Typically what it will exclude is things like the specific names of their suppliers; you know anything that you can use to rip them off to copy their business. But as far as the financials, obviously you need the financials to value the business.

They will also typically have a discussion to how the business started with the seller, how it’s grown, a link to the website, you can check out the products, but obviously you are going to have questions and what data beyond what’s in the memo. So typically the way the process works is you will ask your final listing, you will contact the broker, you will say hey I`m interested in this listing and the listing will be pretty generic. It will say you know the listing will say something like ecommerce brand of personal care products.

Steve: okay.

Bill: You know. And then you will say hey broker that sounds like something I might be interested in, and they’ll say okay you sign an NDA and if you sign an NDA then we’ll go ahead and send you the memo.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And then we get the memo, you’ll read the memo and the broker says if you’re still interested I’d be glad to set you up with a call with the seller.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And that’s just asking the questions that aren’t in the memo.

Steve: Okay. So you mentioned related to the products and the branding and you look for something wrong. Is there anything in the financials that you kind of focus on as well, I mean there are so many different aspects of buying a business, right?

Bill: Sure. So for me I like to look for good gross margins, and this is why I will never get into drop shipping because the gross margins are just brutally tight.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I mean if you have a proprietary product, your gross margin should be closer to 70%, drop shipping gross margins are 15 to 20, and that’s before you pay for any of your expenses; your fulfillment, your branding, your website, your time, any of that. So I look for good gross margins and then that test also pull through to get that margin.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I also look for a business that has been flat. If a business is up and growing 50% every year obviously that’s awesome, but you’re going to have to pay up for that, you’ll pay a much higher multiple.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: But if the– and if the business is down that’s obviously pretty scary unless you can really pin point exactly why it’s down and have confidence that you can reverse it. So I love to look for businesses that are flat and businesses that had the same revenue for the past three years as on track to the same revenue again. And what that tells me is the owners just don’t know how to grow it anymore, but there is a royal base of customers who like the product keep coming back, and that there’s something there like this is a decent product, it probably just needs to be exposed to more people.

Steve: Okay, and then so you mentioned the margins you’d like to see 70. That pretty much precludes drop shipping as well as carrying inventory of other people’s products, is that kind of accurate?

Bill: Yep. I agree with that and the reason I don’t like carrying inventory of other people’s products is because eventually you will end up competing with Amazon, which obviously sucks and they will– it’s a very [Inaudible] [00:17:10] on pricing and I don’t want to step in the ring with Jeff Bezos.

Steve: So to sum it up you look for companies that are flat. They sell their own kind of proprietary products– have you– have any of your two acquisitions been like kind of on the down trend or has everything been kind of flat?

Bill: Both have been pretty flat.

Steve: Okay, and then the sales have been really consistent and the repeat customer rate has been high as well since these are consumables.

Bill: Yes, and you know high is relative when you talk about repeat customer rate.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: If you’re selling software something and you have people locked in on contracts, then you have you know obviously ridiculously high recurring revenue, but if you’re selling a consumer product and you’re converting you know 50% of people are coming back and buying again, that is astronomical.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I mean you could have you could be happy at 20-30% which would be pretty good.

Steve: Okay that actually sounds pretty high to me as well 20-30%.

Bill: Yeah, that would be very good.

Steve: Okay and then okay, so let’s go specifically with Nurture My Body. So when you acquired them they had a repeat customer in that range I guess.

Bill: Yeah, I think it was about 40%.

Steve: 40%, wow okay, and so that gave you the confidence that when you acquired it sales wouldn’t just fall off a cliff, right?

Bill: Right because I knew I had these people and I had their email addresses, and I knew that they were loyal to the brand.

Steve: And how much was the owner itself tied into the brand, was there any correlation at all?

Bill: Yes, there were some because the owner of the brand, she had been an esthetician for 20 years. She developed the formulas herself, and so you know I worked with her to transition it. I got her to agree that I could still use her likeness on the website. So it was a very sort of quiet transition.

Steve: Okay, and since we’re just talking about the transition, what is involved in actually getting a company handed off to you? Kind of how do you handle the whole on boarding process?

Bill: Most sellers will typically agree to train you for some period of time post acquisition. Simply about a month, two weeks to six weeks somewhere in there, and that’s obviously negotiable as well and then beyond that they’ll usually offer to be paid, if you want a consultant to stay longer. So you typically have a couple of weeks with the seller, but also during due diligence you know I want to make sure that I wasn’t buying a business that I couldn’t step into that was going to collapse once the sellers left.

Steve: Right.

Bill: So as part of my diligence I flew out to meet them and sat with them for two days while they run their business. I just said you know pretend I’m not here, just run your business, I just want to watch you and take notes, so I know that when it’s my time to do the things that you are doing, I’ll know what to do.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Because a lot of sellers will say “oh it’s really easy to run the business, I only do A and B everyday and it’s only a couple of hours and it’s done,” but then you sit and watch and see that they are doing ABCDE&F every day, and they’re like “oh I didn’t think of that just a little thing, or I didn’t think of that because it was a little thing,” and often it amounts to a lot more than they say they were doing every day.

Steve: Okay sure okay, and so this is even before money has changed hands you do this.

Bill: Yeah so…

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Just kind of finished the process from earlier, you get the memo and you have a chance for a call with the seller, they sort of answer any questions that you have and the broker will help you gather any further data request that you have, at which point they expect you to come in with a bid for the business. So you’ll submit what’s called an LOI, a letter of intent.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And that LOI basically says “hey seller, I’ve taken a look at your business, I understand what it is. Here’s the number I’m prepared to pay you. Here is the date that I intend to close. Here is how I expect you to stay on and consult.” Basically outlines the terms of your offer, and it’s about a page long and well it’s not really a legal document, it’s more about– this is just our understanding, does this sound good to you?

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And if the seller says “yes this sounds good to me” they will sign the LOI and agree to give you what’s called exclusivity, and that says basically the seller is promising that for 30 days or 60 days or two weeks or however long you negotiate, that they won’t talk to any other buyers, that they’ll only talk to you, and they’re going to reveal to you, you know basically anything you want to know. This is your chance to dig deep into their accounting to make sure it matches what you see in their shopping cart, to make sure it matches what you see on their margin statements. This is your chance to make sure they’re not lying to you about everything or anything.

Steve: What is their incentive to sign such a document?

Bill: Because you are the buyer requiring.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Because you won’t pay them, I mean this is the type of thing if you buy a house you insist on being able to inspect it for mold and have your engineer inspect it to make sure the foundation is okay, it’s not going to fall down. I mean nobody would buy a house without doing those things.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Similar to buying a business and any buyer wants a diligence period.

Steve: Okay and so that period is typically how long then?

Bill: It’s typically about a month and the reason that…

Steve: A month, okay.

Bill: A buyer will ask for exclusivity is because typically diligence is when you the buyer going to start spending money. That could be hiring an accountant to go through their books. That could be flying out there to see them. That could be hiring a lawyer to begin to draft up the ask purchase agreement. So you as the buyer are going to spend money, and basically your seller is telling you that they’re serious, and you’re telling them that you’re serious, and it would be a bummer for you the buyer, if you were spending money and then the seller calls you one day and goes, I am on a contract with someone else.

Steve: So it is a lot like buying a house because there’s this contingency period and at that point you’re locked, right?

Bill: Well after you sign the LOI, the buyer typically is able to back out for any reason. It’s a very weak document, so you can back out for any reason you know if you find anything you figure out that they are kind of doesn’t match or if you decide that you just don’t like the way their building smells or whatever.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: You can back out, and that’s the time you should go out and actually meet the seller in person and you just see how they run their business.

Steve: I guess did you look at a bunch of other companies and go through this entire process before you found Nurture My Body?

Bill: So I looked at my NDAs folder the other day and I signed about 200 NDAs.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So it means I got about 200 books before I bought one company.

Steve: And how many of those did you actually submit a letter of intent to?

Bill: Three.

Steve: Three, okay and can you just tell us what some of the things happened when you actually went to visit some of the other two that you did not buy?

Bill: Well, so one of them I did buy, so the other two; one of them the seller got cold feet and flaked out, and one of them I discovered some risks to their business model that had not been talked about before.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Basically some large competitors and they say had said they had some opportunities that turned out to be not be as real as close to closing as they said they were.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So this is the time to find all that out during diligence.

Steve: Okay and so what are some of the things that you typically spend money on during this process?

Bill: Hands down the most important is a plane ticket to go see them.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Hands down I mean like yes you are going to spend a little bit of money on accountants and lawyers, but the very first thing you should do before hiring any of those folks is get on a plane and meet the seller. Spend a couple of nights in a hotel, sit with them and watch them do their business because you might decide hey right now before I even get in the functions and everything, this is not a business, I want out.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: The other things you will spend money on are lawyers and accountants. If you are a pretty savvy accounting you might not need to hire one. Basically what the accountant is going to do is what’s called a quality of earnings report, and they’re going to look and see– they’ll basically compare all the business accounting records, and they’re going to cross reference it to the margin statements and the carts and everything, just basically double check to make sure everything ties out.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: That they actually made the money that they say they made. Compare their bank balances right, because bank balance month to month– the difference in bank balance should be revenue minus expenses for that month.

Steve: So is it a huge red flag in general then if the business that you are trying to buy is kind of mixed a little bit of personal with their business?

Bill: No, every business has that.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And that’s part of also what you’re going to do when you are accounting diligence, you’re going to go line by line to that income statement with the seller and try to understand which things are personal and which ones are business. Because the things that are personal the seller will try to say– the seller is going to try and exclude as many things as possible. “Oh this is personal, this is an expense you won’t incur,” because that will increase the perceived profitability of the business. So you will pay a higher multiple.

Steve: Okay, and then so you know also during your office visit, how much does the personality of the actual seller really matter to you? Are you just primarily looking at the nuts and bolts of how to run the business?

Bill: Yeah-yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Because for me when I buy a business I have a rule, I buy 100% of the business. I don’t let a seller stick around with 10% or 20% which might be tempting. If you’re buying a business say “hey if I let a seller keep 20% of the business, I can still have control over everything and it will be 20% cheaper and I will be able to have him stick around in case I need him.” I would advise against doing that because what you’re going to have is a person who used to own 100% of the business as their baby that they started, and then you’re going to come in and gut it or change it you know yank the ship in a different direction, and they’re probably not going to be happy about it.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: But they’re not going to do anything about it, but you’re not going to be able to make them go away because they own 20% of the business, so there is going to be a thorn in your side forever.

Steve: Okay, and then how does kind of inventory come into play, is that just all included in the sale?

Bill: This is a negotiated point typically, and I have fairly firm views on this that sometimes don’t jive with the views of the sellers or brokers. A lot of times you will see a business for sale and they’ll say this business is for sale for $200,000 plus you know $50,000 of inventory. You know the asking price for the business is $250,000. And they’ll say typically that– they’ll say all right three times my cash flow gets me to 200,000, and then I also want to sell my inventory. So really your effective multiple then creeps up from two and a half to three or more you know, so your effective multiple to cheque you’re paying divided by the cash flow you’re getting is much higher.

So I think that’s BS you know because my basically– my question to them is okay then I just want to buy the business, I don’t want the inventory. And they are like, “oh well you can’t do that,” and I’m like “well then can I just buy the inventory and not the business,” and they are like “oh no you can’t do that.” And I’m– so their total– they’re completely one and the same, but they are not, the inventory is wired to run the business. The inventory is part of the business; you wouldn’t sell me the business without the inventory, there wouldn’t be no business anymore.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So to me I think it’s fairly ridiculous for sellers and brokers to insist on valuing the inventory separately. Typically the way that it was handled and this is how– and the reason I say this is because coming from investment banking, we were representing– we were the brokers actually, and we were representing businesses for sale with $5000,000 of cash flow every year, I mean much larger businesses and much more professional deals. And the way the inventory was always valued every single time is what you do is you look for what is called a normalized level of inventory.

So you can say all right the business has had you know say it had $100,000 in sales and we have had twenty thousand dollars in inventory relatively consistently. So you say all right inventory should be about 20% of sales, so when the business– when you are going to close on the business you say all right what kind of sales do you have you know trailing three months. And if it’s not the same you take 20% of that, and that’s the amount of inventory that they should have. And if they have less than that what that really means is that the seller has been shirking, has been not buying new inventory because they know they are about to sell the business, which he is about to stick you with writing a big check for inventory from their supplier right after you buy the business.

Steve: Right.

Bill: So the business is under inventory. So if that happens what you’re going to do is if there is a delta, if they are under inventory by 10 grand, you’re going to reduce the purchase price by 10 grand. And this is pre-agreed upon ahead of time. So you agree upon a normalized little inventory, and then you agree upon on the date of closing we are going to value the inventory and adjust the purchase price by any under-inventory if there is any. And what this will do is it will prevent the seller form doing what I just described from running down their inventory.

Steve: Okay, that makes a whole lot of sense, okay.

Bill: And it goes the other way too, so you say, okay seller if you have more inventory than you typically have we’ll increase the purchase price by however much. So if you normally have $20,000 in inventory and you have 30, we’ll increase the purchase price by 10 grand. Because that’s your over inventory and that’s the inventory I’m getting beyond what is necessary to run the business on a day to day basis.

Steve: Okay. And a couple of questions that just popped into my head. When you are buying a business, does the platform that they are on matter at all? Or do you typically just use the platform of your own choice?

Bill: The technology platform?

Steve: Yes.

Bill: For me I wouldn’t care.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: If it’s good that’s one last thing I have to do. If it’s not a platform I like, like in the case of Nurture My Body is all outdated self hosted [inaudible] [00:30:25] that I can kind of use something that’s broken that I need to fix.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And that could be an opportunity if they are on an old platform with cranky check out flow out flow and just a bad conversion outsmart website, that could be one of those things you look at you know this is broken, this is something I can fix and get a win.

Steve: Okay. And I kind of wanted to spend some time on some of the things that you did to kind of take some of the business you’ve acquired to the next level. So first of, you know what are some of the common plateaus that you see some of these small business owners get to and they just can’t seem to get past?

Bill: The biggest one is marketing. They create a product, they get some initial buzz, they get existing customer base, but they really don’t know how to get the product out of in front of a bunch of other people. And you know they are not doing AdWords or they are doing AdWords very poorly and very unprofitably which is very easy to do. AdWords is quite difficult to do over time profitably. So they might have tried it and got AdWords doesn’t work for me and stopped it. They are also probably not doing any email marketing at all. So many sellers…

Steve: Interesting.

Bill: Are doing no email marketing.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And this was something that I even did not appreciate the value of for a long time, and I had a good friend who was beating me over the head to say you have to email. And I was emailing once a month. And Nurture My Body was emailing once a month too before I bought it, and I was like any more than that people are going to get pissed and they are going to unsubscribe. And I had a buddy and he basically all he does is email marketing consultant, and he was like if the people are going to unsubscribe they were never going to buy from you anyway. And so he convinced me to go to once a week form once a month.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Which is a dramatic increase, but still not that absurdly often and I went kicking and screaming to once a week. And it was a huge difference, huge difference. I mean email revenue is I think half of the revenue for Nurture My Body.

Steve: Really? Wow, okay.

Bill: It’s incredible, I mean like this is a huge level and everybody– nobody realizes it. And you don’t have to discount. I’m not saying you have to send a coupon every week. So we just sent emails and said, hey here is a profile of aloe vera, one of the ingredients in our personal care products. Or hey like here is new legislation about organic products that just came out. And every email just had our logo on the top and a signature at the bottom.

And it’s just a reminder, it’s like hey here we are, remember us? Remember this brand? Remember you like it? Remember you wanted to buy some? And people click through and they buy, it’s just a reminder, it’s just putting your logo in their face.

Steve: So is your call to action at the end of these emails to a specific product or just to your site?

Bill: It depends, sometimes it’s to a product like if we profile a product in the email, sometimes it’s to a blog post on the site like learn a little bit about more about the legislation that just happened.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Or sometimes is to a category, so we’ll say you know, winter is coming like look at these moisturizers for dry skin in the winter. You know and that would take them over the category page for moisturizers.

Steve: Yeah actually is what’s funny is we recently started emailing once a week as well, and we have everything just on this auto responder’s sequence. So as soon as you are on and you can email every week for you know 10 or 12 weeks and it’s just like on auto pilot, and the customers just keep coming, it’s really nice. Do you guys use auto responder’s sequences as well?

Bill: A couple, so we do some like replenishment auto responders; because we know it took last about a month.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So we start hitting you with replenishment. We are also starting to do some like cross promotional auto responders, so like if you buy shampoo but not conditioner you going to get a coupon for conditioner.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: To try to get you to broaden what products you are buying from us.

Steve: Okay. And then so what platform do you use for that just curious?

Bill: So the store is on Bigcommerce and then we using email platform called klaviyo.

Steve: Klaviyo.

Bill: K-L-A-V-I-Y-O

Steve: Okay.

Bill: It’s kind of pricy, it runs depending on how many people you have, it’s about 300 bucks a month.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Which is definitely more than MailChimp, or some of the other ones.

Steve: Cheaper than Infusionsoft still.

Bill: Yeah it’s cheaper than big boys; it’s kind of in this middle ground, a couple of a hundred bucks a month. But it has a really cool Bigcommerce integration and not just Bigcommerce, it integrates with a lot of carts, but it will pull in you know not only just people’s email addresses when they buy, but actually what they bought. And they also have a tracking pixel that you can put on your website. So not only will you know who they are and what they bought, you’ll also know what they are looking at?

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So if they come back like I can look at my activity feeding Klaviyo and see that Steve you know who bought for me a couple of weeks ago is now on the website in real time clicking on shampoo. And if I wanted to I can fire an email off to you with a coupon for 10% off shampoo.

Steve: As I’m in the store?

Bill: Yeah.

Steve: That is really cool, okay I have to take a look at that platform. So email marketing is one thing, AdWords, what are some of the other things that some of these small business, mom and pop business owners are not doing?

Bill: Let’s see. Another thing that really helps marketing wise is to reach out to bloggers.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: You know just getting by in this niche mummy bloggers are really big. So I just reach out to them and I go, hey I would love to send you some free shampoos, or some free body lotions or take a pick whatever you want if you would just review it on your blog. I’ll send you free whatever you want. I’ll send one for you and I’ll send you one to give away to a reader.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: And then they’ll do review on it, and then the best part of the giveaway is clutch because what you do that is you go– have them say enter your email address below. And we’ll enter you in a draw for a free thing of Nurture My Body shampoo that I’ve just told you it was awesome. And then you are going to get email addresses for all their readers, and then they are going to fall in your email flow.

Steve: I see. Okay so giveaways– do you actually have provide incentives for liking your Facebook page and Twitting as well?

Bill: Sometimes.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I don’t care so much about any of those kind of social actions because I’ve had a hard time proving it they actually drive revenue where as I know email is a gold mine.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So if they do one thing, I would like to have them give me their email address.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: The software that will help you with this is called Blueboox with two O’s.

Steve: Blueboox, okay.

Bill: And that will– it kind of automates the actual email here before you know it works with Facebook like or whatever before it puts them in, and then it will give you a list of everybody that completed the action. So you can pick a winner.

Steve: Okay. That’s cool, so you just mentioned socially you haven’t been able to get working so much. Does that imply then that you don’t use Facebook advertising?

Bill: You know I’ve doubled in it.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: I had a great talk by Ezra Firestone about Facebook marketing, and so there is a couple of things I want to try. But I think the hard thing about Facebook is that people are tiply not in a buying mood when they are on Facebook, they are on a looking pictures of their friends and cat videos mode.

Steve: Great.

Bill: And they are not ready to buy anything. So I’ve had a lot of trouble trying to convert people to purchase from a Facebook ad.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: However, I just I learnt from Ezra what he is doing and seeing some success with is basically putting a squeeze page. So instead of the ad taking you directly to the product page, the ad takes you to like blog post or like a newsy type article that describes something about the product. And with a couple saddle links to the product in the text, and that’s kind of transition that from cat video mode into learning and buying mode. And then maybe they click over the store and buy one. And Ezra was telling me he has had a lot of success with that. So that’s something I’m going to look at try and see.

Steve: It’s funny you talked about that as soon as I heard that talk I went and created the exact same thing. And so I had this article with a whole bunch of really nice pictures where you click and it’ll take you to the product, but it’s like an article. So we are on the wedding industry, so the article is called like 9 Unique Wedding Ideas to Make Your Wedding Extra Special. And on there is a pop up screen to get their email addresses and everything. So it’s just worked out really well.

Bill: Nice. That’s good.

Steve: So you get to convert on the friend and earn a chance to get on the back and watch you get your email address.

Bill: That’s really good. Put a like to that on the comments I’d love to see it.

Steve: Oh yeah, yeah I’ll show it to you. So okay, so it just seems like when you are buying these companies you are looking for people who might not necessarily be that tech savvy then, right. They are not aware of all these different ways to market your store. And that’s where the opportunity lies. Is that kind of accurate?

Bill: Frequently yes.

Steve: Okay. And then one thing I did also want to touch on is on boarding. You mentioned it’s just like two weeks or a month together with the seller. And I assume that’s all negotiable, but it just doesn’t seem like enough time in order to transition over a full business that might have all these little small things to be aware of. And so I guess what I’m trying to ask is it smooth, is this process smooth and is there a lot of negotiating going on after the fact once money is changed hands?

Bill: I wouldn’t say there is a lot of negotiating going on because the money has already changed hands. I would actually I thought the same thing before I did it, and I actually ended up not even needing the whole time.

Steve: Really? Okay.

Bill: You know because it’s– you definitely need them for the first week or so. I mean you are talking about 8 hours a day you know all the time with this person training you. And you’ll pick it up, I mean assuming you are not a moron. You’ll pick it up pretty quick and then you know yeah I think I had a month with Nurture My Body sellers, and I don’t think I really hardly spoke to them after two weeks.

Steve: Really? Okay.

Bill: But then after the you know for the next three to four months once a month I would have a question, I’d just pick up the phone and call them, and they were very gracious about just taking my call.

Steve: Okay. And then I’m just curious so how much did you grow in Nurture My Body once you acquired it?

Bill: So I acquired it in February of 2013, it’s now September of 2014; business is about three times the size.

Steve: Wow. Okay and so some of the things that you did were you re-branded it, and then were they using paper click?

Bill: They were not doing any paper click. We started doing a little bit of paper click, another thing we did is we took the products to Amazon. They were selling on Amazon, but it was– the listings were poorly optimized and they weren’t doing any prime.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: So they weren’t doing any FBI. So we are taking select products to FBI, we’ve re-optimized all the listings, bigger pictures, better key words and the descriptions more like likely descriptions, things like that.

Steve: So let’s talk about Amazon real quick, I know we are running out of time, but what were some of your motivations for going on Amazon, and how do you kind of decide what you want to list there?

Bill: There is only one motivation, it’s a huge market. It’s just a huge market. I mean if for me I was– so back in 2011 I have been selling KP Elements online for about a year at kpelements.com, and I have said you know I found out I like literally read an article I was like Oh you can sell on Amazon? You know I thought everything on Amazon was sold by Amazon. And I still think a large majority of the online shopping public believes that.

And I was like oh you can sign up as a seller, kind of like eBay, like there was a market place where you can sell things in the Amazon. And I sold $39 a month. And my product retail was 35 and so I said, if I sell one a month it would be worth it, and I tried on a whim. And that was just merchant fulfilled, I didn’t do prime or anything. Merchant fulfilled for people who are listening and don’t know what that is, is basically if Amazon sells your product, it’s basically you drop shipping for Amazon.

They’ll send you an email and go, hey mail to this person and they process the payment and just take their cut and send you the money. So I was just doing merchant fulfilled and really quickly Amazon became about half as big as the website.

Steve: Wow! This is from merchant fulfilled?

Bill: Merchant fulfilled.

Steve: Okay.

Bill: Yeah. And then you know I was like I don’t want to do prime; it’s kind of a pain. I got to manage inventory in two different warehouses, and then I had a friend who had a brand of supplements and he was all over me to do prime for like a year. And like an idiot I was ignoring him, and I was like I just don’t want to deal with it etcetera. And I finally caved because he was insistent and sent two cases to Amazon. Literally within a week my sales on Amazon had tripled.

Steve: Crazy, okay.

Bill: I changed nothing else, just going to prime. So it’s a huge channel.

Steve: Do you know if it affected your existing channel at all?

Bill: I would say it cannibalized it by about 5%.

Steve: 5% okay.

Bill: Not a lot. But at the same time now Amazon is bigger than my primary channel.

Steve: I guess it’s that whole of energy involved in managing your Amazon listings, right?

Bill: I mean there is like you got a– you have to keep supplying their warehouse. You also have to manage the negative reviews, you also have– Amazon is becoming very competitive in the same way that you know before Google, before people realize how much money there was to be made on Google, the people that had realized it were just wreaking it in, and then you know the world of SEO became a thing and Google just became very-very-very competitive. Amazon is going through that same transition right now, where the broader public is starting to realize there’s a lot of money slashing out of Amazon and it’s getting very-very competitive.

Steve: Okay. And so do you foresee your Amazon sales grow faster than the sales of your regular site?

Bill: It’s hard to say. I don’t know, that’s really hard to say because it depends so much on you know the competition on Amazon. And their algorithm is such a black box, so you know what you rank for and everything. It’s hard to predict.

Steve: Okay. Yeah I mean one of the key take aways from attending their conference as well is I need to get on Amazon. So we are actually in the process of using FBI ourselves. So…

Bill: Awesome!

Steve: I’ll keep you posted.

Bill: I’m sure you’ll have good news to report.

Steve: Awesome. But hey I don’t want to take up too much more of your time; we’ve already been talking for 45 minutes. If anyone has any questions on just the whole process of buying and selling websites, how can they reach you?

Bill: Yeah you can find me at RebelCEO.com, there is a contact form on there, it drops right into my inbox. I see them all, that’s the easiest way to get hold of me. Or you can find me on Twitter @BillDA.

Steve: Okay. Awesome Bill, hey thanks a lot for coming on the show, I learnt a lot and a lot of good stuff that you brought today.

Bill: Yeah sure, thanks Steve, glad to do it.

Steve: All right man. Take care.

Bill: All right, you too.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode. I have often wondered what it will be like to purchase an online business and grow an existing customer base as opposed to starting one from scratch. And Bill has got a lot of experience in this area and I’m thankful that he is willing to share his strategies with us. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode48.

And if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show very easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show, and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

047: What It’s Like To Be On Shark Tank With Eric Bandholz

Eric Banzholz Shark Tank

I’m really happy to have Eric Bandholz back on the show. In the last episode when we talked about BeardBrand.com, Eric’s Shark Tank episode had not yet aired so we couldn’t talk about it.

But now that everything is out there, Eric can now finally share his experiences to the public. Since Eric went on Shark Tank, his business has grown dramatically. Here are some of his stats

  • His store went from about $4500/day to about $12k/day in revenues
  • His store got 20k visitors on Friday and Saturday of the show (40k total)
  • The most concurrent visitors he had was during the East coast airing with about 6300 visitors

Below is a photo of his stats during the show.

SharkTank Stats

What You’ll Learn

  • How to get on Shark Tank
  • What it’s like to be on the show
  • How to prepare yourself to be on Shark Tank
  • What numbers and data you should already have in your head before the pitch
  • How to prepare your website for the onslaught of traffic
  • What Eric would have done differently if he went on again

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I`m really excited to have Eric Bandholz on the show again. Now Eric runs the incredibly profitable online store beardbrand.com and he is actually my very first return guest believe it or not. Now, why did I bring him back on the show again so soon? In between our last conversation, Eric went on my favorite TV show on television Shark Tank. And since I have not yet had anyone on the show who has been on Shark Tank yet, I knew I had to have him back. Now I`ve got a lot of question for Eric today and I must say that I`m a little bit jealous that he got to meet Daymond John and Mark Cuban, Barbra and Mr Wonderful, and with that welcome back to the Show Eric how are you doing today man?

Eric: Hey Steve I`m doing absolutely fantastic. How are you doing?

Steve: Pretty good man. I would imagine you would be doing pretty fantastic after going on the show.

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: It was an amazing show, I don’t want to spoil the show incase people haven’t seen it yet. So we can talk about the outcome a little bit too at the end.

Eric: Yeah we had to keep my lip shut because it happened, so long ago but it also aired a while ago as well. So– but it was you know I was following up on it and the ratings came out, and I was– the show was on Halloween and I was thinking because it was on the Halloween it would get lower ratings than normal. I looked back on old Halloween shows and they seem to be down, but it was actually the highest rated show of the season, so…

Steve: Really?

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: Awesome.

Eric: So I was pretty excited about that as well.

Steve: Do you get ratings for your own specific segment. Do they break that down for you?

Eric: I just looked on a public website, so I don’t know how they broke down…

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Per segment or anything like that.

Steve: Awesome and just curious before we get into the guts of the interview, did you have like your analytics open and then as soon as the show came on, did you see it like shoot up?

Eric: Yeah we had a TV set up for a viewing party. We had a bunch of people over here at the Beard Brand office, and then we had another monitor set up right next to it with the analytics from our website urbanbeardsmen.com, and from beardbrand.com with real time pages open on both of those so…

Steve: And I’m just curious like what’s your normal and what did it shoot up too as soon your segment aired?

Eric: Our normal kind of coming into this show was about 20 or 30 people.

Steve: Okay, on at a time.

Eric: On at a time and then during the show it just like– it would take time to refresh like it was– like real time wasn’t like real-real time, but it would be like you know 50, 100, 500…

Steve: Wow.

Eric: 1200 and then it went all the way up to 6300 simultaneous visitors.

Steve: Oh my goodness, okay. So what– I did want to get into this later, but since we are talking about it, what did you do to prepare for that onslaught of traffic?

Eric: So our shopping cart is on Shopify and they can handle up to half a million visits per minute.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So, I was pretty sure we weren’t going to get that many visitors. So Shopify was totally fine and then with urbanbeardmen.com, I had that hosted on like a shared host, but it had been acting walky kind of leading up to the show. So we switched to Amazon web services and bought a bunch of server time, and we paid a lot of money– I mean it wasn’t a lot it was like 100 bucks and had a friend set it up, but you know it handled the traffic and we cashed out everything before the show, so that everything was loading quickly, and just kind of optimized to handle the onslaught, and a lot of people really didn’t go on to urban beards men from beard brand. But I mean– maybe a few hundred, but it wasn’t anything that we were just blown away with the traffic.

Steve: So in terms of shopify, I`m sure they can’t handle that much traffic for every store. So did you have to give them a heads up a head of time or…

Eric: I mean they seemed pretty confident.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Of those abilities, so I gave– I did contact them and reached out to them and let them know, but I think they have seen that a few times. I think there is other companies who have been on Shark Tank who have just kind of opted out ahead of time.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Shopify is for the most part you know, keeping the website up hasn’t been a big trouble for them.

Steve: Awesome, well that’s good to know. So let’s start from the very beginning. No first of give us 60 second refresher to what you sell in your store again just so the listeners remember, and then tell us what your motivations were for even applying to Shark Tank.

Eric: So Beard Brand we foster style for the urban beards men and that means we are trying to change the way society views beards men by helping them understand that beards men aren’t simply you know lumberjacks or bikers or hippies or outdoors men, but there is also you know what we call the urban beadsmen, which is maybe more professional, family oriented, community driven type of guys, you know your typical office guy.

Steve: Mm-huh.

Eric: And to help them out we provide beard care products. So we sell beard oil, mustache wax, combs, brushes, kits and the likes for that niche out there. And we wanted to be on Shark Tank because just the opportunity to expose our brand to millions of people, and then in addition to that to be able to partner with some high priority people. We are really heavy and focused on branding.

Steve: Mm-huh.

Eric: And I think part of branding is aligning with people who fit your image and can help you– who have the resources to help you grow quicker than you can grow, and specifically I`m talking about like celebrity endorsements.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And I wasn’t thinking necessarily like one of the sharks would be a celebrity endorsement, but I was thinking that they probably have more connections to other beards men, who have more clout than I do, and they might be able to make that introduction or help us with writing the contracts or formulating those deals that we don’t have a lot of experience doing. And then from like the advisor stand point you know to build a multimillion dollar company is our goal. I have never done that before. So everyday I`m learning something new, and it would always be nice to have like an advisory community or platform, someone to help us out and help us grow.

Steve: So just curious, did you go into the show full on wanting an investment from the sharks?

Eric: We– for us it was a win-win situation.

Steve: Right.

Eric: Our business is healthy and growing in a sense that we don’t need any outside money. So we are not desperate for a deal, but if we could have worked out a deal we would have worked out a deal, so yeah.

Steve: And I`m just curious I mean just– I’ve seen the show I don’t know if all the listeners have watched the Halloween episode yet, but what were you– going in did you know how much you were willing to give up for the company and how much were you actually willing to the sharks and kind of how did you kind of evaluate how much you were willing to give up verses what they would have to offer you in your business?

Eric: We did a lot of research before going on to the show trying to figure out what the valuation of our business was, and you know at the time our business was only– had only existed for 18 months. So there is not a lot of backing data you know any of that, but from talking with a law firm that does a lot of MNAs to talking with other VCs and other successful business owners who have sold, we– they advised that our business was valued anywhere between four and ten million dollars.

Steve: Okay, is that about– what multiple is that? A three to four X or?

Eric: You know I don’t really know when you consider multiples if its– is it on revenue or is it on profit or anything like that, but at that point we had a run rate 1.2 million dollars.

Steve: Okay, and that’s revenue right.

Eric: That’s revenue. And we were focusing more on the run rate than we were on total sales because of the rapid growth, but and you know personally I don’t really get into valuation too much. it`s not like we are really looking forward to selling. It`s just some kind of– I just wanted amo [phonetic] and…

Steve: Absolutely.

Eric: Opinions from other people other than me, and what the valuation of the business was so that I could feel confident, you know pitching to them and standing ground for what we thought the business was worth. But if you watch the show you will see that we came in there asking for $400,000 for 15% which puts us at 2.6 million dollar valuation. So we gave– we factored in the unique opportunity that a Shark could have by being associated with the TV show, and discounted our business in results to that, and then I think we would have gone down as low as two million dollars to do the deal.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So like, all that was kind of going in beforehand.

Steve: In terms of giving up equity though, were you willing to give up like 50%?

Eric: Well so, for those who aren’t familiar with how the show works, they– you set a number that you need and if you can’t get to that number the deal won’t get done. So, if you want to have a deal done, it’s going to be better to do like a lower amount like $100,000 or something like that. And we came in at $400,000. So it’s a little bit higher amount and a little bit bigger investment for them. So it’s a little bit harder to get a deal done with that higher price tag. I forgot what you asked.

Steve: I asked like let say Cuban came up to you and said hey I have a million bucks for…

Eric: [crosstalk 11:43] so we were willing to do…

Steve: Because you own 100%, is that right?

Eric: Yeah, I mean I would much rather just sell the whole thing than sell half of it.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So I think, we would have stuck ground at that 400,000 and let’s see here what is that…

Steve: I`m busy asking you what percentage of the company were you willing to give up at let’s say about a $ 2,000,000 valuation?

Eric: Well, we would have done 400,000 because we would have had to, so that takes you to what percentage is that?

Steve: One fifth, twenty percent right?

Eric: Okay right. So we would have given up the 20%.

Steve: Interesting. Okay, so you went in with the dollar amount instead of– like I was just curious if one of the Sharks– sometimes they go up, right. They give you more money than you ask for and they ask for a higher percentage.

Eric: Yeah I mean, I probably wouldn’t have, I probably wouldn’t have gone higher than 20%.

Steve: Okay, all right.

Eric: So let’s talk about the application process, what is that like? Walk me through what you had to do to get on the show.

Eric: So there is a lot of different ways to get on the show. The best opportunity is when the producers just randomly stumble across you business and they reach out to you and they ask you to be on the show. So you are pretty much green lighted through several steps of processes. There are two other ways, the other ways, the other way– one other way is by filling out the application and submitting it and just sending it through their yahoo email address that you get online, and then the final way is to go to like a casting call out around the nation. That will happen, and I think we did the one where you emailed through their email system.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And that worked for us. We were considering doing one of the casting call events in Austin Texas, but we didn`t want to stand in line for two hours for something that we really didn’t have control over. We were kind of at that time we had already submitted our application.

Steve: Right.

Eric: And so for us too is you know if they dig it they dig it if not we’ve got to move on with our business and focus on growing it.

Steve: So describe the application and how do you make yourself stand out? Like what are some tips and tricks on getting on that you did?

Eric: I think Lindsay just filled that out over the course just 15 minutes and just put in our information and kind of went with it. So…

Steve: Are you serious?

Eric: Yeah it wasn’t like– at that time I don’t even think she was familiar with the show Shark Tank, she is like oh this sounds cool, I`m going to fill it out and put it in. And so she filled it out in like 15 minutes and, I mean I think what we are doing is kind of cool by default. I think you know not a lot of people are doing what we are doing and I don’t think they`ve had anyone on the show who is doing what we`ve done. So I think the big thing is being unique. You know if you are not a beard oil company out there listening, then they are probably not going to air that, or if they do air it, it’s not going to be for a number of years. So they want to have like unique consumer based products.

Steve: You know what’s funny though Eric, I’ve watched every single episode of Shark Tank and a lot of times they have people that are just like baking cookies or cup cakes and what nots. That stuff isn’t that unique, so I would imagine that you have to make your application stand out a little bit. There must be something that Lindsay did in that 15 minutes. Perhaps she is amazing.

Eric: Yeah, I mean we were proud of our story and we tell our story and you know our story involves like Urban Beards and then and change in the way society views beards men, which are pretty big tasks, which I think stands out you know, it’s not like we just make cookies and we sell them. But you know our numbers we have pretty good numbers for growth as well and I think that tells the story as well. I don’t know if I’ll ever ask them like why did they pick us over the 35,000 other companies.

Steve: Okay. So you send in your email, how long did it take for you to response?

Eric: It took about like six months.

Steve: Six months? Okay, no you didn’t hear from them yet for six months?

Eric: Yeah, so we estimate like October-November something like that and we had from them I think in May.

Steve: I’m sorry this is a text based submission process, right. You didn’t include a video or anything, right?

Eric: I’m pretty sure at this point we didn’t do a video.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: But they followed up and we did a video.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: With my…

Steve: So they followed up and were you on the show at that point when they’d followed up, or did they want more information out of you?

Eric: Yeah, so I think they kind of said they were interested in you know having you continue through the Shark Tank process and you know shoot a video, let’s see what you are like and submit it. You know like sell the producers on why you should be on the show.

Steve: Okay. And then what– do you have that video?

Eric: I’m not allowed to show that video.

Steve: Oh you are not allowed to show that video, okay.

Eric: But I do have it.

Steve: So may be privately you can give me a link to it.

Eric: No, you don’t get it privately.

Steve: I don’t get it privately either.

Eric: No, no.

Steve: Yeah, all right. Well even with that personality video, you still going on the show huh Eric. Okay cool, so you send in that video and then what happens?

Eric: It’s just like a…

Steve: What’s it like to talk about that video? Is that just a personality thing– the video was just a personality thing? Or did you just pitch your company at that point?

Eric: Yeah I mean it’s both, right you know it’s essentially showing how you would appear on TV. Yeah, and then it’s just a lot more forms and a lot more back and forth, a lot more tweaking and you know communicating, and then just getting ready for the show essentially like just there is all these baby steps that needed to happen.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: To make sure that you are ready for the show, you know make sure that all their Ts are crossed and their eyes are dotted legally, and make sure that they want to cover their ass.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So they don’t get sued for promoting something that’s panted or you know.

Steve: Sure.

Eric: So they don’t want to you know they are doing it not only like vetting you for talent, but also vetting you for your business, to make sure that the Sharks would you know that you are actually a rigid business, that it’s something that they would invest in as well. So there is a lot of like you would go for any kind of investment, you got to give up your numbers or reason and all that other stuff.

Steve: Do they come to you at your office?

Eric: No, it’s all on line, emails and stuff, yeah.

Steve: Oh it’s all on line, okay.

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: Interesting you know because you know I’m always under the impression that when people go on the show they haven’t been completely vetted yet. But it sounds like they vet you completely before you even get on the show.

Eric: So the Sharks are not that– the sharks have no idea what’s walking through that door. But the whole producing team, then Shark Tank show they’ll vet of course.

Steve: Okay. And then after that what happens? So you did your video, you submitted it, and then how much time has elapsed?

Eric: It’s a pretty quick process to get in on the show or getting to film the show, but it’s just a you know I’ll be a little vague here it’s pretty much you know sign a bunch of papers, walk through a lot of back and forth with the producing team you know just kind of they really like set your expectations. They just tell you what’s going to happen, and how it’s going to happen. They are very upfront, they are very clear, and they really just walking you through the process. I think it’s more in line our strategy was listening to these guys because they know what they are doing, like they’ve done how many episodes in the past and how many entrepreneurs.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: They really take advice from them on what they recommend that we should do as entrepreneurs. So we had a really open book on what we wanted to do, and how we wanted to do it, and just kind of fall in line with them. So you just walk through them and you talk with them and you work out all the details, and then you don’t talk about it which is…

Steve: Yeah we’ll see what you are willing to talk about here. So we can talk about the preparations right. So how did you prepare to be on the show?

Eric: Well of course we did the valuation for our business that we talked about. So you get a fill for what we thought our business was worth then. And kind of we watched a lot of episodes in the past to see who is going to react, and how we thought they were going to react and how we would handle various scenarios. I’m one of those guys who if I prepare too much, I underperform, I get nervous, I over think things, and so I actually prefer winning it a little bit.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And just be myself.

Steve: I’m the same way actually yeah.

Eric: Which you know sometimes it’s good and sometimes it’s not so good, but it’s how I feel so comfortable. So I did one dry run with the– my co-founders.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And I set the pitch like in my head and throughout the day like probably a thousand times. Like I was just constantly saying the pitch and saying it over and over and over again. Because that’s one thing that’s really scripted that you got to know is that first two minute intro.

Steve: Okay. Now how long is the pitch by the way?

Eric: It’s they want you to keep it under two minutes.

Steve: Under two minutes, okay.

Eric: And then I kept in there and they still– they cut out a few pieces of it which was a little annoying, like I had some good jokes in there, and they cut them, but I guess they weren’t that good if they cut them out.

Steve: Okay, so what are some of the facts that you just had to down part; you mentioned valuation, anything else?

Eric: You know it’s just knowing how you’ve grown and knowing your numbers.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And I was very– at that point I was very hands on with the business. So I knew like all the day to day numbers, I knew everything.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: We had a lot of growth and you’ve got to know your numbers, but that’s with any business you’ve got to know your numbers. You’ve got to know your market and stuff like that, but…

Steve: Was there a particular Shark that you were hoping to get?

Eric: I think Daymond with his experience in branding and building [inaudible] [00:22:08] up.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Would have been a good connection for us as well as Mark Cuban with his philosophical alignments to us. I think those two probably would have been our preferred Sharks to work with.

Steve: And given that none of the Sharks were kind of they didn’t have beards– if they did that would have been a huge advantage for you I’d imagine. But what was your overall strategy to convincing them to invest in something that traditionally at least what I feel they don’t traditionally invest in. What was your overall strategy besides letting them pay your beard and that sort of thing?

Eric: Well I guess we’ll start getting in a little bit of spoilers uh?

Steve: Yeah. Let’s do it.

Eric: So we– I don’t know we have a pretty good story, and the market is out there, the numbers are out there.

Steve: Yeah.

Eric: To back our stuff and our business shows in those numbers as well. So I was hoping that they could really look at our business from the financial stand point, and really just you know emphasize like what we’ve been able to do on a big struck budget, how we’ve been able to grow. But I think– apparently it was a harder task than I thought because it’s kind of odd when you know I do podcast like this, you guys have seen what we’ve done.

Steve: Yeah.

Eric: You’ve seen the website, you’ve seen the brand, you’ve seen the videos, you’ve seen all that, and you like totally get it, right? When you go up pitching you don’t have all that background information. So they’ve never seen my website, they’ve never seen the reviews from our customers, they’ve never you know seen the You Tube videos on our 2,000,000 views on You Tube, like they haven’t seen like any of the brand that we’ve build. And they are just taking…

Steve: Face value.

Eric: Yeah, face value that oh yeah we’ve built a brand and they are like no you haven’t, you haven’t a brand. Once you get into that kind of argument, it’s like I can’t prove it’s wrong because you know I don’t have the computer there and the likes. But I think it’s you know I didn’t have full control of them. They are like kids in a candy store you know they are all running around on these ideas on their heads and questions they want to ask and they are all ask them at the same time. So as the pitcher you’ve got to be in control of that room. And I think I had a fair amount of control of directing them with what I wanted to talk about, but…

Steve: I know a lot of stuff gets cut out by the time it gets to television. So I mean in terms of the actual appearance, how long were you up there in front of them?

Eric: I think I was up there for about 45 minutes.

Steve: Oh okay wow! Okay. So they cut all that down to about 5 minutes I think on TV, right?

Eric: Yeah it was like 6 minutes, I think I timed it.

Steve: Yeah, so can we talk about what happened in the other 39 minutes a little bit?

Eric: I don’t know if I’m able to discuss that information or not. But how they portrayed me on TV was for the most part pretty accurate…

Steve: It was pretty positive I think.

Eric: Yeah and then I think it was pretty accurate of the whole 45 minutes. Like I think you know they cut out probably some positive things that I would have liked to see, but they also cut out some negative things that were said. So I think it was pretty fair representation. I felt like the room was light and friendly and fun. And I think they showed it as that way, and I think that you know I think they showed them as being impressed with our numbers.

Steve: Yeah that came across in the episode actually.

Eric: They weren’t hammering me at all on my numbers, or you know I think Kevin had one mention evaluation, but the other guys they weren’t really joining him on this valuation. And I think that’s just kind of Kevin’s thing, right?

Steve: Yeah, Kevin always does that.

Eric: So I was like okay you know Kevin will say that, but other people they didn’t connect with the niche or the market in the show. And I think that’s how it’s portrayed on TV as well. So I think it was a pretty accurate portrayal of the events that happen.

Steve: Okay. I know you signed a whole bunch papers, but so in that 39 minutes your pitch was only you said a couple of minutes long, right?

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: And then after that is it just basically general Q&A, or they ask you questions? Or did you have you know an additional pitch after that?

Eric: No. So you going on with that pitch and you want to leave a little bit of tease on there. So they start asking questions.

Steve: Okay. And so for the remainder of the time they are just asking questions. Did any of them– I’m trying to remember if any of them have facial hair? Did any of them try your product on their face at all or?

Eric: They smelled the products, they opened them up.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: But I don’t know if I saw them putting on their face or not. Daymond– he kept some bottles after.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: He’s got a little bit of a goatee.

Steve: Right.

Eric: I think I probably like if it wasn’t late in the day, I probably could have twisted Daymond’s arm into partnering up with us. I do think he is kind of on the verge.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: But you know the circumstances didn’t work that way.

Steve: Okay. Are you allowed to talk about anything related to their personalities, or like the bencher [phonetic] that went on during your pitch?

Eric: I mean like when you are in this moment I don’t know if I could really take in their personalities. So it was just what you see is pretty much what I saw as well. But they were all very like, oh so Barbara was on the show as Lori.

Steve: Lori, right.

Eric: And Lori, Robert, Kevin, Daymond and Mark, all five of them were phenomenal people. They are very nice. They ask questions in a way that I would expect them to ask questions. They weren’t confrontational to me, they may have disagreed with things, but I didn’t feel that they presented in a way that was rude or…

Steve: I guess what I’m trying to ask is what questions did they ask that weren’t aired? You know stuff that they cut out, but that was stuff that they’d ask about your business.

Eric: Yeah, I mean it was just kind of…

Steve: I’m I putting you in hard place here?

Eric: It was more about learning about the product and learning about the business. And just kind of more details.

Steve: Okay, in kind of like a casual setting?

Eric: Yeah, I mean well it wasn’t super casual like taking a beer, it was pretty intense, but you know like they would just ask questions and they all ask like just imagine like five people who are interested in your business, and they all ask a different question on the exact same time.

Steve: With a bright red light, with a bright light, a hot light shining on you the whole time.

Eric: Yeah so, but it was– they just want to learn about the business and get a better understanding about where you are at, what you are doing, what’s your market’s like. Just a standard business set of questions.

Steve: Okay. Let’s talk about some of the fun stuff now. What impact has being on the show had on your sales and on your website?

Eric: So it’s been a huge impact. There’s first two days, so Friday night and Saturday were our two biggest sales for us ever. We did about $20,000 on each of those days.

Steve: Wow!

Eric: So that was before the show we were doing about anywhere between probably 5 and on a good day like a really good day it would have been like 7,500, but probably around 4 or 5 was our average daily volume.

Steve: And you mentioned they went from 30 visits to 6,000 visits at one point. That’s crazy, so the people that you are getting on the show– what I’m I trying to ask here? So were they people that had already purchased from you? Or these are like all new customers that were just watching the show and coming on. Like I guess a lot of people– I don’t know what I’m trying to ask, let’s just move on.

Eric: Well I get it, so we did a lot of promotion with our customers before the event, kind of letting them know that we are going to be on the show, to watch the show, to support us, to share the word the we are going to be on the show.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: If they wanted to purchase any of our products we encouraged them to purchase before the show because we knew that we were going to get backed up a little bit. So we were able to see a slight boost in sales before the show, because of I’d say like our business we had a lot of wholesale orders. We told our wholesalers that you know we are going to be on the show to stock up, and so there was a boost just from the pre-sales as for the show.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: And then once the show aired I think there was a lot of new people who had never had of the brand before and was able to connect with us, which I think was really great, a lot of gifts. I haven’t broken down the analytics yet to see like what the male to female ratio was, like before the show it was about jeez I think it was like 80 or 90% were guys ordering. So I’m sure after the show that ratio was probably changed a bit as they’ve got more gifts.

And it’s been nice because I think what happens is people watch the show and then they’ll come back into work and they’ll say, hey man you got a beard did you hear about that beard company that was on Shark Tank. You know so people just talk about it, and they tell their friends and it gets out there and it dropped down 20,000 in sales. And kind of dropped down to around like $10,000 a day.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So that’s what we are doing now. Hopefully it stays at 10,000; hopefully that’s our new floor. And then we can start building from that.

Steve: And we are going into the Holiday seasons now, and traditionally I would imagine your sales spike during that period as well.

Eric: Yeah I mean we call this growing season.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: From September through February is really like when we make our most money. It’s really good for us not just Christmas time, but the whole season. So we are excited about what the Holidays will bring for us. We expected it to be higher, I don’t know. It’s an exciting time where we are building this company to level, well every day we are building the company to levels I’ve never done before because I’ve never built a successful business before.

So it’s just fun to see where I’ll go and where we need to invest our money to make sure that we have the resources to grow the company. That’s the most nerve wrecking thing, like when do I bring on talent, and who do I bring, and what is that process like, because we want to be a $100,000,000 company.

Steve: Wow!

Eric: We want to grow to be like a dominant player in the market place. And we do want to change the way society views beards men. So you are not going to be able to do that as a little [inaudible] [00:33:12] you know half a million dollar a year company.

Steve: Right, okay.

Eric: So we are not in this for the lifestyle or we are kind of in it to…

Steve: To make a big company right, got it. Okay in terms of your preparation you mentioned that you alerted your wholesalers that you are coming on the show. Did you send that email to your list, your consumer list as well that you are going to be on the show?

Eric: Yeah.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So anyone and everyone we surmounted out to everyone. You can go to our Facebook page and see the posts that we are making.

Steve: Okay. And did you make any changes to your website itself before as well as after?

Eric: We did. We did a little bit of AB testing to kind of make sure we had an optimal homepage. We added a Shark Tank banner up, which linked to our story.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: We added this little join our subscription club you know notification newsletter. And then we kind of tweaked the main images to show a little bit about our– yeah I mean that was– we had the opportunity; we talked to other people who were on the show and then listened to the kind of things that they did. And they put up like pop ups on their stores and live chat on their store, and you know threw up discounts and sales, and they are really trying to maximize like the exposure that they got.

And we had the– you know that’s really not our strategy and we don’t want you know a thousands of new people to their first interaction with us is a giant pop up banner on a cell. Like we don’t want them to think that’s how we run our business.

So we decided against that and maybe and man we left some dollars on the table, but you know our business model has always been about confidence and knowing we’ve got the best product. And they’ll be able to purchase when they are ready to purchase, and not to pressure our customers into buying.

Steve: Okay. That was actually part of my question was gathering email addresses part of your strategy as opposed– did you have any of your email sign up forms that you had added because of the influx of traffic. Because I would imagine a lot of them coming in and just want to take a look at the site might not be ready to buy it right away.

Eric: Yeah, I mean I’d also imagine a lot of people are going to decide never plan on buying either.

Steve: Sure.

Eric: I don’t want to get their email address to spend money on them, marketing to them when it’s not something they are interested in. So we are not big on you know the old school, or I wouldn’t even call the old school, just like modern day marketing techniques, like that’s not us.

Steve: Okay, got it.

Eric: We try to market by providing valuable content and just growing organically like just finding people who are passionate about what we are doing.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Rather than tricking them into joining our list and then you know blasting out all these emails telling them to buy shit.

Steve: Okay. And so that’s why you had a link to your story, right? So you draw them into your content and your overall mission statement so to speak.

Eric: Yeah. I wanted them to continue to get to know us. And the link wasn’t really obvious so people kind of had a quick around for it, but some people clicked there in. And we wrote the story kind of based on you know my interactions with the Sharks and what we talked about.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: So it was a little bit different than what they heard because I kind of write that you know on the fly.

Steve: Sure.

Eric: it’s a good like a 1500 word article.

Steve: And going forward are you still in communication with the Sharks at all? Do you plan on communicating with them in the future?

Eric: No, no. We are not looking for money.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: We’ll always entertain it if one of them decided to call us up; I’d probably pick up the phone.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: [Inaudible] [00:36:57] what they have to say, but you know we are always willing to sell the business for the right price, but it’s not something that we are actively looking to do at all. So we are not investing our resources into that.

Steve: Okay. Sounds good men, hey I’m really happy that you came on the show and I’m really happy for the results that you got on the show even though you didn’t end up with an investment. It sounds like the whole experience was extremely positive for your business.

Eric: Yeah, I mean again for us it was a win-win situation and the only fear– our biggest risk and our biggest fear is of going on the show were that we would be perceived as like a stupid goofy type of business that everyone laughs at, like one of those that they mock.

Steve: Well you’ve got the numbers; you can’t laugh at the numbers.

Eric: Right. So I think you know may be if we only had like $1000 in sales when we got on there, we probably would be laughed out the door. But since we had the numbers I think it was pretty clear that we had our act together, and I think it was portrayed that way. So I think we were portrayed pretty accurately with the– and I think that the other risk is you know not a lot of the companies on the show like really have an established brand. They are kind of a product. And we didn’t want to get lumped in together with these companies out there that just have one product and no business sense. So we wanted to be portrayed in a way where we know what we are doing.

Steve: Yeah no that totally came across in the show to me, but I’m a little biased too because I know you. And I know your business, I’ve watched your videos and everything, so I was a little biased, but I thought it came across as that. I mean you were definitely not some newbie guy up there, you knew what you were doing, and so I was pulling for you to make a deal but…

Eric: Yeah I think viewers like it when deals get done; they feel more connected to the brand. They feel like the sharks are connected with the brand so you are connected with it. And I think there’s a lot of positive energy that you get from getting a deal or getting an offer, but I still think there’s a lot of value and energy you get by appearing on the show, and not getting a deal. So again it’s a win-win and maybe the win is not as big when you don’t get a deal, but it’s still a win.

Steve: Awesome Eric. Hey man thanks a lot for coming on to the show and talking about your experience, and I’ll be sure to link up all the stuff that you sent me before we started talking. You wrote a couple of articles about your experience as well, and I’ll be sure to link that up as well.

Eric: Great. Always a pleasure to hang with you Steve and pleasure to be on the show and hopefully the viewers out there, the listeners out there I got some good feedback and they can build their business.

Steve: Yeah and hopefully some of them have got beards as well. Send you some customers. All right man Eric, take care man.

Eric: All right cheers.

Steve: Hope you enjoyed that interview. I’ve always wondered what being on Shark Tank was like and believe me; I’ve tried to extract as much info out of Eric as I could without him violating the NDA that he signed. And what I really admire about Eric is that he took a chance and it looks like his business increased by about 30% as a result of being on Shark Tank. For more information about this episode go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode47 and make sure you check out the show notes because I posted actual revenue numbers for Eric’s store beardbrand.com before and after the Shark Tank appearance.

And if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

046: How Eric Bandholz Started A 7 Figure Beard Care Business In Just 1 Year

Eric Bandholz

I’m thrilled to have Eric Bandholz on the show today. Eric runs the successful beard care company BeardBrand.com, which has grown into a 7 figure business in just 12 months.

In today’s interview, you will learn how Eric grew his business quickly by focusing on branding and exposure via word of mouth. He’s got a great backstory and knows a ton about how to establish a brand and how to run a successful skin care business.

Oh and did I tell you that I tried his beard care products too? Check out what happened to me in Movember

Steve's Beard

What You’ll Learn

  • How Eric got the idea to go into the beard care business
  • How going to a beard competition changed Eric’s life forever
  • How to start a cosmetics company
  • Where to go to get skin care products made
  • Why branding is so important when it comes to running a successful skin care line
  • How Eric established such a strong brand for his products
    Which channels Eric focused on to proliferate his brand

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today I`m really excited to have Eric Bandholz on the show. Now Eric is someone who I met at the Ecommerce Fuel conference in Austin Texas last month, and he runs the incredibly awesome site beardbrand.com. Now Beard Brand is a really successful store that sells beard care products. And what’s really cool about his shop is the strength of his brand. In fact Eric devotes a lot of his efforts towards promoting the Beard Brand name, and it has paid a lot of dividends in establishing a fanatical following for his shop.

I also had the pleasure in witnessing Eric’s beard live in all of its glory last month in Austin, and it is indeed impressive and very well kept if I do say so myself, and with that welcome to the show Eric, how are you doing today?

Eric: Oh man Steve what a warm and awesome intro. It’s a pleasure being here this morning and excited for the chat.

Steve: I must say that the beard is impressive. I mean you see photos of it online, but in person it’s even more impressive.

Eric: Well what do you know, it just grows on me.

Steve: So you know give us a quick back ground story behind beardbrand.com, and how you decided to start your shop.

Eric: So I used to work for Merrill Lynch as a financial advisor and that is pretty much the antithesis of a big bearded image. It’s all about the all American boy that– the suits and the beardless faces and that job was really not a good fit for me. I don’t like working for the man and you know I’m a very philosophically driven guy and really in economics as well. And Merrill Lynch is core economics are different than my core economics. So it was just a matter of time before I left there, and when I left there I decided to start my own business as a freelance graphic artist and grew my beard out, so through this journey of growing my beard out I got really into it.

It tried to learn all the techniques there were to grow the quickest and the fullest and groom it the best way and use the right products, and at this time there really wasn’t a lot of stuff on it, and there was this beard competition in Portland Oregon that I had to go to, everyone was talking them. So I went to my first beard competition and absolutely just like fell in love. Like this is I don’t know for all the listeners out there who have– if you have never been to a beard competition you`ve got to add it to the list of things to do. It’s like a beauty pageant for men, but there is usually a little bit of alcohol and booze involved and a little bit of debauchery.

So it’s just you know a good time. What I noticed you know especially with my background in Merrill Lynch was that you know traditionally beards men were thought of as like lumber jacks or outdoors men or bikers, and I never really fit into this group, and what I noticed there was other people like me who were stylish and career driven and you know independent, and we coined the term urban beards men to kind of identify those people, and we`ve been able to unite the community and jus kind of grow from there.

Steve: That`s awesome man, so just curious, did you win this beard competition or…?

Eric: No there was probably about 30 people in my category, and I didn’t even get top 10. So there are– while you may think my beard is quite awesome, it dwarfs in comparison to a lot of these people at these beard competitions.

Steve: So just to also be clear while you were working at Merrill Lynch you were beardless, is that correct?

Eric: Yeah I mean, I would generally be completely shaven, but every once in a while I would grow out probably like one of two week long beard, so if I had any kind of facial hair it’s very-very short and very trimmed.

Steve: And I do kind of understand what you are saying there. You know a lot of times there is this connotation with people having these gigantic beards with people who are kind of like back woods type of folk, and just to be clear your products kind of cater to those working professionals with beards, is that right?

Eric: Right, and I want to emphasize that you know, we’re not anti biker or back woods like those are beautiful and awesome communities and as fellow beards men we really identify with those guys as well, but we decided to almost go with like a hyper niche and real specific niche and you know we`ve got a lot of customers who identify themselves more with outdoors men and kind of the bearded biker look and things like that, and that’s totally cool. So we definitely support that look as well.

Steve: And just to be clear, so the products that you sell are primarily focused towards skin care, is that correct.

Eric: Yeah, skin and hair care are going to be the big focus and of course the hair as in as in beard care.

Steve: Sure

Eric: Like our beard oils is a leave in conditioner, it’s going to be healthful or healthy both for your skin and your beard. So it kind of has a dual purpose.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: You can’t really have one without the other I suppose.

Steve: Okay and then you create all these product formulations yourself, is that correct?

Eric: Some of them we work– we`ve done internally. We`ve developed our own platform after lots of research online and you know looking at ingredient lists of our competitors and similar products and using that as a foundation for starting, and kind of going from there. But we are also developing some new products in the future that are probably outside our expertise of developing and in house. So we are working with a cosmetics company to develop a product for that as well.

Steve: Okay, and so for all my listeners who are thinking about creating or selling skin care products, like how do you begin? Like for example I would have no idea like how to create like beard oil or that sort of thing, how did you guys get started with that?

Eric: So for me I was really immersed in the bearded community and listened to what a lot of people said and was doing, and I’ll be the first to admit that I didn’t invent beard oil or beard care. Like there has been other people who have been doing it, and they talk about what works for them and what doesn’t work for them and I`ve used a good number of products out there. So I kind of knew like the attributes and features that I wanted, and it was just a matter of getting high quality ingredients and since it’s a natural product, it’s something that you can develop pretty easily though product testing and trial and error and just tweaking. We’re able to come up with a formula.

Steve: So how do you– is there a company that you go to do this, like how does it work exactly?

Eric: So yeah within the beauty industry if you are looking to get into this, there are a lot of cosmetic companies out there who produce shampoos and washes and soaps and oils, and you know beard oils and hair oils and just anything that you can think of from a cosmetics stand point they are going to be able to do. It’s pretty you know they are the companies that are manufacturing everything; they like to be in the background, so it’s going to be very difficult to find them.

One of the ways you might find them is by going to like a trade show for their cause and you can be able to connect with them there, or find other people in the industry and ask for referrals was the way that we went as well?

Steve: Okay and then when it comes to actually formulating your own stuff, is it just– do you tell them that you want this ingredient or this ingredient– you kind of have to have an idea of what you want in there, right?

Eric: Yeah it’s not like you can say make a shampoo and then they make a shampoo. So we tell them that it’s going to be used for beard care, we want to have you know higher end– we want it to be a higher end and nicer shampoo, sold in SOS free paradigm, free like without you know the type of chemicals that our community doesn’t want to have in their beard care. So there are like certain directions that you can point them.

Steve: And so you kind of have to have an idea already or know what ingredients do what, and that sort of thing before you even get started right?

Eric: Yeah, again like we didn’t just– I didn’t just roll out of bed and I was like I`m going to come up with a beard– you know a lot of research and a lot of time spent on you know– it’s funny like I was thinking about this one day when we were kind of testing things here in our kitchen, and it’s like you know I`m part sales man, part business owner, part designer, part you know finance guy and I’m also part chemist, which I thought I would never venture into.

Steve: Interesting.

Eric: So it’s kind of interesting when you think about that when I really started like digging down into like how ingredients worked and like the attributes of various ingredients and the things to look for and consider you know I`ve got much more to learn and understand as well, and I don’t think I`m ever going to be a super wealthy guy becoming a chemist. So that will be one thing that we`ll outsource. But it is like really interesting for me because I love learning new things and getting into it. So I definitely plan on expecting to spend a lot of time learning and researching.

Steve: How does the testing process work, so you have a new formulation, do you have like a bunch of people with beards that you have as like test subjects or…?

Eric: Yeah there is us testing it internally, trying the product out and using it and seeing how it’s working and going, and then there is like lab testing as well where you see like how long the product will last, do you need like additional preservatives, things like that.

Steve: That’s in terms of shelf life, right.

Eric: Right.

Steve: I was just talking in terms of just you know the actual beard, and how it makes your beard feel and that sort of thing. Is it like kind of like a more qualitative test, or do you have like quantitative numbers that you assign to certain things?

Eric: For us it’s more qualitative just kind of more of how it feels and the experiences that we have and…

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Just what I personally want with my beard care. So it’s a little bit of selfishness, but you know it’s kind of leaning on my expertise within the community as well.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of just like getting your first batch made, how much would you expect to spend? Like if you can take us back to the very beginning for your first batch.

Eric: Yeah, with us I mean the beauty with our products and how we launched it, is it’s a really low cost eventually, I mean it was a couple of hundred bucks I think.

Steve: Really? Okay.

Eric: For the ingredients and the sizes that we’re doing. So we’re able to just– I mean it was almost like a lot of our research and development was through the market. Kind of like a lean start up where you test it with your customer base and go from there.

Steve: Does that mean that you didn’t have like a third party, I guess beauty supply manufacture make your first batch? Because I would imagine would they dabble with something so small in the beginning?

Eric: Yeah we started like super small and our business– like our first month of sales were like 900 bucks, and we’ve definitely gone the organic road. So a lot of it is just kind of boot strapping and getting something done. And when you’re a young company getting off the ground, you have a brand to build, but you don’t have a brand to tarnish. So you are able to take some risks that larger companies aren’t going to be able to do.

So we took some calculated risks to get our products out to the market and test it with the market and go from there. So you know if there is a listener on here who works for L’Oriel or Procter and Gamble, they would be turning in their grave for lack of a better term, probably some of our techniques and processes to get out there. But there is so much more to cosmetic business and grooming line business than the actual product.

There is this actually through the process in my research I downloaded this PDF that kind of gives an intro into beauty cosmetics and what to look for and how to do it and how to formulate your own things. And so much of it is actually like the brand and the image that you are trying to create to unite the audience that you are going after. So if you think that you can simply just create this great product and put it in like a brown bottle and people buy it, then you probably need to re-analyze your strategy.

Steve: Okay, that’s actually really good segway into what I really want to focus kind of like talk on, which is how you’ve been able to establish such a strong brand for your products. I mean from what I understand the audience of people who buy your products are actually very fanatical and very supportive of your brands. So I want to talk a little bit about how you did that? What are some of the things that you did early on to establish your brand?

Eric: Well I think what was one of our key aspects was giving away a lot of valuable content without the expectation of anything in return. So I’ve got a YouTube channel where I’ve done a lot of how to grooming type of videos, and how to you know take care of your beard and grow it faster. Just essentially giving out free content without any kind of expectation in return, and I think that builds trust with people you know you’ve become the expert within an industry, and people trust what your are saying, trust what you are doing. And then when you do come in, make a recommendation then they’re going to connect with you. They know there’s other products out there, they may just go with you simply because they like you which is a really fun thing to do as well.

Steve: So what I was going to ask you, how do you even get people to find your YouTube videos right? Because you just can’t put a bunch of videos– chances are people won’t be able to find them that easily.

Eric: Yeah you know I just kind of did that. I just created videos on things that I was passionate about. And I think the beauty with YouTube is it’s still a little bit of a wild west. There is like still a lot of videos out there that don’t exist within very specific niches, a lot of guides and how tos. And the beauty of YouTube is like viewed in a channel; I guess is it takes a lot of work to create a video and a good video that has good content. So if you are able to do that, then it’s going to be pretty easy to find new stuff.

Steve: So all of your YouTube growth was more or less organic?

Eric: Oh yeah totally, totally. Like I didn’t do– and I guess this isn’t like you know for the listeners out there, it’s kind of annoying and frustrating and say, “Oh you just put videos out there and people found it.” But it was essentially like that; I didn’t do any kind of optimization where like, what is the title that I need to put in? Or what is you know what type keywords are people searching for and things like that.

It was more of like you know this is kind of what I want to talk about and what I’m passionate about, what I’m interested in and I don’t know if there is people out there or not. So it wasn’t something that we built. You know we launch this YouTube channel and then like two months we had 10,000 subscribers. It wasn’t anything like this. This was something that took a very long time, very long process.

And you know not a lot of views, not a lot of new subscribers. So I’m sure I could have shortened up that time period by optimizing my topics and really optimizing my channel. But I think there is a little bit of authenticity that comes from not being very polished.

One of the YouTube guys that I follow on his channel, one of his first videos was him at a golf course like taking strokes and you know swinging at the ball. And his YouTube channel is about like electronics and technology. And it just shows that you know he was someone who is just kind of passionate about what he is talking about, and he is sharing videos on YouTube. So I think if you are trying to stand out in the crowd then stand out from the Amazons of the world, like you do need to do a little bit of that. You do need to be authentic.

Steve: Did you have your YouTube channel before your store, or did come after the store?

Eric: I had the– right when I came back from the beard competition is when I got the idea for Beard Brand, and that’s when we started writing and talking and sharing a lot of new content. So that was in 2012, February 2012 that we launched like all those platforms. And then it was January 2013 that we launched our store, so I had been…

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Talking in the community for about a year.

Steve: So that kind of implies that your YouTube videos at least the earlier ones don’t even have a link to your site at all, right? Because you didn’t have the site.

Eric: Yeah I mean I had Beard Brand, right? So I always had the name Beard Brand. And the beauty of YouTube is that you can always edit the description after the facts. So I added some links in there. And I had like my old logo on there. The older version of Beard Brand and you know I’ve played with different things, over the course of different videos like you know how I’m placing my icon on there, my water mark and things like that. But it’s always been called Beard Brand which I guess makes it easy.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of just do you measure the click throughs from those links, or I guess what I’m trying to ask is how do you know that the YouTube videos are actually what is bringing customers to your site and your brand?

Eric: I just recently did a survey with our customers and how they first found out about us, and 46% found out about us through social media. And within social media, half of those people were from YouTube. So it was directly asking our customer base for direct results, and then I do do a little bit of analytics to see where people are coming from and where the traffic is coming from. And so I keep an eye out on that as well.

Steve: Okay, and so you mentioned that half was from YouTube, where was the other half coming from?

Eric: The other half was from Facebook was our second largest source and then Reddit was our third largest source. And which is kind of surprising I think a lot of people don’t see Reddit as a very high source of customer base, or may be for traffic they get. But we’ve been able to convert out customers, which has been a really rewarding experience.

Steve: So let’s talk a little bit about Reddit because in my experience the folks over at Reddit are kind of a neglected bunch, and they’re very quick to jump on anything that is self-emotional. And a lot of cases you can get banned if you do that, right?

Eric: Yeah, I mean it’s a tough community to crack and I would say that I still have many of them. The beauty was with Reddit are– is that there are sub-Reddits which is like very specific niche communities, which have their own personality. So you can’t just go to Reddit and say I understand the whole Reddit community, you have to really understand each individual sub-Reddit. And we’ve been able to build good community with the Beards sub-Reddit as well as the entrepreneur sub-Reddit has been really good to us.

Steve: So what is your strategy with Reddit?

Eric: With Reddit it’s pretty much just be authentic and give away content for free, and not ask for anything. And in addition to that whenever I make a post, I’m very involved. So if anyone asks any questions, I always respond to every question, spend a lot of time into it. You can’t just you know generate this giant long post and then a bunch of people ask you questions and then ignore those questions. I think probably one of the successes too is being involved in the community in addition to giving to the community.

Steve: So by that did you participate for a long time before you even decided to post anything?

Eric: On Reddit?

Steve: Yeah.

Eric: Oh yeah, I mean I got pulled into the whole Reddit thing, like I’m definitely like a fan of the website; it’s been probably too many hours on there. Looks like I have two tabs open right now on Reddit, so.

Steve: Okay. When you talk about posting an article, do you post a link to something or do you just post the entire article on there?

Eric: So to get in with Reddit, it’s going to be more advantageous to do what’s called a self post, where you post the full articles straight into Reddit. They will be a lot more suspicious if you post the link, because a lot of people are just trying to drive traffic to their website. And by posting a self post to a specific Reddit, then they’ll see that you are actually trying to help the community out and help the sub-Reddit out, and I think that’s a preferred way to go.

Steve: Okay, and then this article that you are posting on Reddit, is that unique to Reddit or do you use it anywhere else, or is it just for Reddit?

Eric: Yeah when I post to Reddit all I’m doing is just posting to Reddit. I don’t drive it to other blogs. I have recently written a fairly in-depth extensive article, I think it’s something like 2200 words. I’m hoping to get connected with you know as a guest writer on a larger website, but if I don’t do that, then I will come in and I’ll share with the Reddit community exclusively to them.

Steve: Okay, and so that’s pretty interesting. So you went out and you found a very specific sub-Reddit that I guess caters to beards, and then you started posting informational articles and just participating in that community. And that community was– a large percent of them was going to be potential customers for your products, is that kind of accurate?

Eric: Well, actually it’s been the entrepreneur sub-Reddit which I really post a lot of my articles to. On the Reddit beards I’ll just post photographs of my beard here and there, and then we’ll sponsor the community and donate some products to winners. But it’s the Entrepreneur community which has been really good to us. And those aren’t actually our customer base, so it’s kind of for us like getting value from the community. And with them helping us grow our business and give us feedback and insight that I may have not considered so…

Steve: Okay.

Eric: It’s completely different than what you would assume. But it’s good though because there is like other entrepreneurs on there, other bloggers, other people looking for content who have shared our articles that we’ve posted on the community on the entrepreneur sub-Reddit.

Steve: Okay, so indirectly your efforts on Reddit have kind of just boosted your brand and your business, even though that they might not be necessarily your target customers.

Eric: Yeah absolutely. So we’ll post something on Reddit and get like one or two thousand visits that day from the post. And those people you know the conversation rates are awful, like you know no one is buying, nor am I expecting them to buy. But they learn about us, they learn about the brand and then they tell their friends who have a beard, and then it kind of gets its own little growth structure.

So it’s a fun process. It’s a great community out there you know it’s tough and it’s fickle and they’re very skeptical. But one if you authentic and you are true and you do want to give to the community and you know get feedback from the community, there is just a great rewarding experience.

Steve: Okay, and then you mentioned the other part of your social media strategy was Facebook. So is that just driving traffic through your fan page? Like how do you run your Facebook page?

Eric: Yeah, we do somewhere on our Facebook page as our Tumblr page, but at a less frequent token. What we found on Facebook that works really effective are memes, they seem to get shared a lot. Unfortunately I’m not– we are not big on memes, so it’s kind of like a patch plan to, do I post this memes with the hope that you know people like it, or what do we do. It’s been a little bit of hit miss strategy, and Facebook isn’t my favorite platform for marketing.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: I think it’s just a lot of people are on there and we were buying advertisements as well. So I think we’re introducing our brand through buying eyeballs as well which isn’t the best way to grow in my opinion.

Steve: So buying eyeballs for the purposes of establishing a brand, or to actually drive target traffic to people that will actually buy?

Eric: Yeah, when I say buying eyeballs I just mean we’re paying for advertisements. And then people would see those advertisements and come to our brand. So I’d imagine most of the traffic from Facebook that were considered social media were actually paid type of customers.

Steve: Okay and then how do you kind of structure your Facebook ads. Is it just content that you are linking them to or…?

Eric: Again like we haven’t really had a lot of success with Facebook. It’s not something that we really are proud of, or want to brag about or probably have a lot of expertise in it.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: We’ve tested like just simply buying ads in the newsfeed and on the sidebar, and then of course trying to grow our page. Currently what we’re doing now is simply remarketing. So if someone visits our website, then they will see some Facebook ads in their newsfeed as well.

Steve: Okay, so how do you get customers to your shop? Like what is your main driver of converting customers?

Eric: We are active on many social media platforms. So of course YouTube’s been a great driver whereas also out in Tumblr, and we are on Instagram has been one that we put lot of resources into recently. And then of course YouTube has been huge for us. So those social media aspects are great ways for us to generate traffic. We also purchase advertisement on Google AdWords.

Steve: Okay and how’s that been doing?

Eric: It’s been good. I think we’re getting about a five time return on investments. So if we spend five bucks, it will generate about 25 bucks in revenue.

Steve: Is this just search, search AdWords, or do you do you do display network as well?

Eric: We do the– what’s that called, the product, the PLA is I think is what the…

Steve: Oh PLAs, okay.

Eric: So we do that, and then we do the adwords, but we don’t use their display at all. On the display we found it was just like erasing all the money we had, I wouldn’t recommend it at all.

Steve: Yeah I’ve been playing around with it recently too, which is why I thought I’d ask, but yeah it’s been really challenging.

Eric: Yeah it’s a good way to lose money pretty quickly. So for us personally and what’s worked with our customer base is been the PLAs and the Tech Search.

Steve: Okay, then you mentioned Tumblr and Tumblr is actually something that I don’t quite understand fully myself. How does it work? And what is different about Tumblr versus just any other blog platform?

Eric: So Tumblr is almost like a cross between social media and blogging. We use it as a way to curate content that fits our image, and share that seamlessly. So the beauty with Tumblr is they have a re-blogging platform where essentially you find something that looks cool, and you click on the re-blog button and it shows up on your blog. So we’re able to generate about 15 posts a day of photographs that are lifestyle photographs. And so there are more than just things that we’re creating and pushing.

Steve: And so it’s kind of similar to Instagram then in what you are saying?

Eric: Yeah, it’s really similar to Instagram in the sense that or how we use it is really similar to Instagram in the sense that we are posting up photographs that are really rapid paste. It’s different than Instagram in the sense that I don’t know of a sharing feature within Instagram. I know there is like an app called Regram or something like that. But there is no real like I run across a cool photograph and I’m able to just share it on my blog.

So Tumblr is great for that. One word of warning is the copyright trolls will get on there. So you have to do a little bit of due diligence with the photographs to make sure that people who are uploading them have the rights to upload them, or else you could be getting random mails from them to get the images of the world.

Steve: Okay, and then you know it sounds like a lot of– the majority of your efforts early on were specifically focused on building a brand and for your business. So how long did it actually take before you actually noticed some traction from your efforts?

Eric: We had, well I’ll just kind of give you the number of our sales.

Steve: Okay.

Eric: Our first full month was about 1000 bucks. Our second full moth was about 700 bucks, we went down. And then our third month was about probably another 1000, I think it was our first three full months we had about 4500 bucks in sales. In July of 2013 we– I know this only because I just wrote this article. We had– I think it was about $15,000 in sales in July. By November we had grown to about $75,000 in sales. And then in December of that year during the holiday rush we were up to $120,000 in sales.

Steve: Total or a month?

Eric: That was per month, each month. So I would guess it was like the July August September time frame where the momentum really started picking up.

Steve: And so basically you are saying within a year you were doing six figures per month in revenue. Is that right?

Eric: Yeah totally, we are…

Steve: Crazy, okay.

Eric: We had a million dollar run rate within the first year.

Steve: That is crazy. And then can you pinpoint a specific traffic source for that? Or is it just based on word of mouth and buzz that you’ve established through your brand.

Eric: Yeah, it’s a pretty broad source of traffic. I don’t think there is– we’ve never really like targeted one single platform to drive business. We’ve always been pretty broad with our strategy. So it’s just gain out there, it’s talking to our customers, providing a great product, really like sending products quickly and fast and just you know a little bit of luck, but also there’s lots of other companies doing what we are doing.

Steve: Yeah.

Eric: And they’re not– I don’t think they’ve been able to grow the way that we’ve been able to grow. So being able to really you know– the mission of what we’re trying to do and we’re not trying to self product, we’re trying to change the way society views beards men. You know we’re trying to show that just because you have a beard doesn’t mean that there should be a native stereotype with you. That there are beards men out there who are career driven and working professionals and they have families and they do good in the community as well. So that’s what we are trying to do at Beard Brand.

Steve: Okay and then can you talk a little– I mean it sounds like it was very smooth sailing for that first year. Can you kind of talk about some of the mistakes that you might have made, or some things that you might have done differently if you started all over.

Erick: Yeah it’s– the funny thing is you learn to do what is successful and then you become successful at it, and then you get cocky and you are there again, and you think that whatever you touch– you know you think that you have the Midas touch and everything you do turns to gold. So one of the things that allowed us to grow was by selling other people’s products, at least just being a simple reseller, and figuring out what items move the quickest and then developing those products internally.

So we made like a pretty large investment into a product that was a little bit outside of our core values, and ended up with us you know not moving it as quickly as I’d like. So we have a higher inventory in a sort of moving product. Now the shelf life on the product is long shelf life, so it’s just the pain of putting all this cash in something that’s not going to pay out for a longer period of time. So really like testing the market first at least from a boot strap perspective is going to be a more effective way of growth than kind of making decisions based on your gut.

Steve: Also I didn’t realize, so you started out selling other people’s products?

Erick: Oh yeah, so it was probably about five months that we sold another line of beard oil and mustache wax and sold that line all the way through November as well, so.

Steve: So you were carrying inventory, or was it drop shipped.

Erick: Yeah, we have never drop shipped, it was always buying inventory and reselling it, and know I would recommend against drop shipping.

Steve: And in terms of selling other people’s products, I imagine they were branded, right with– not with the beard brand name, is that correct? You weren’t white labeling anything.

Erick: Correct, so it was under a different name and you can still buy those products online. We didn’t have exclusivity or anything like that.

Steve: Okay, and then so it’s mainly the strength of your brand that allowed you to sell other people’s products and then graduate– within that first year, did you have your own products that you created from scratch as well?

Erick: Yeah, it took us about five or six months to develop our own product in-house.

Steve: And then gradually I guess you started replacing the branded stuff with your own stuff because the margins I imagine were a lot higher.

Erick: Well actually it was– we would probably still be selling that product online if that vendor wanted us to sell it. So I think he thought the success with Beard Brand was from his products and didn’t appreciate what we were doing as a company.

Steve: Interesting. That’s counter intuitive to me.

Erick: Yeah, he pretty much just stopped selling us his products and so.

Steve: Okay.

Erick: You know, but what can you do you know, if he doesn’t want to sell to us then.

Steve: For all the people who are listening out there, it’s obviously you know with the Amazons out there, it’s very important to establish your own brand. Actually I want to get your opinion on Amazon. Do you sell your stuff on Amazon as well right now?

Erick: We do sell on Amazon, and it’s not my favorite platform and it drives only a small portion of our business, probably about three to four percent of our sales come through Amazon. So much of us is being a brand and company and building an image, and we don’t– Amazon doesn’t provide those kinds of tools. They’re just all about the product and product-product-product, and getting the product as cheap as possible and that doesn’t fit our business model at all.

Steve: And is that something that you would– I just want your opinion here. Is that something that you think that all e-commerce stores should do? Like what is your view on selling on Amazon from the perspective of a small business ecommerce owner?

Erick: I think it’s– there’s a company in Spokane called Green Cupboards who built their business by drop shipping on Amazon. So I don’t want to say if you are a small business you should avoid Amazon. It’s just– I think you really got to commit to it and understand the ins and outs of it. And one of my fears as a control freak is by not having your own platform; you are dependent on the whims of Amazon.

They could change the commission structure which would totally affect your business. They could change so many things with the platform. They could kick you off, they could ban you. I mean there are certain things that go on with them that make it an un-enjoyable experience for someone who likes to be in control. But you know they have an audience as well and they could generate sales for you, you know, but yeah I don’t like them.

Steve: What is your– do you use FBA?

Erick: We do not use FBA yet, I think especially we’ll roll to them.

Steve: So what is your motivation for using Amazon, is it just like to just kind of dip your toe in that water just to see what’s going on or…?

Erick: Yeah, we had a sales person from Amazon call us and bug us and you know tell us to get our stuff on Amazon, and I was like no-no-no-no, and I’m like okay well it’s not going to be that much time investment for us, so we just put our products up there and we don’t promote it at all. We don’t push traffic there, we don’t optimize it; we don’t invest a lot of time on it. So it’s just– it’s purely capturing opportunities there that we wouldn’t be able to catch by not being on there. It’s you know all of our strategy is going to BeardBrand.com.

Steve: Okay, and then in terms of the products that you do list on there, they are all your own stuff that you make yourself, is that right?

Erick: Correct, there’s no other items on there, other than our beard oils and our mustache waxes.

Steve: Okay, do you do anything with Pinterest at all?

Erick: Yeah, we just started putting in a little more effort into our Pinterest account, and have actually gotten pretty good traction. I keep track, our growth– let me pull up our social media numbers. So with Pinterest we’re growing on a clip of probably like one or two followers a week for 69 weeks. And then actually just in July we started posting regularly and we have been adding about 30 to 50 followers per week.

Steve: Okay.

Erick: So simply consistent content has been a way for us to grow organically, and we’re up to about 1000 followers on air. But it’s not at a level that will really drive a significant amount of business to us currently.

Steve: Okay and then in terms of your experiences with buying ads and blogs, we’ve kind of talked about this before we started talking, but is that something– is that a part of your strategy as well?

Erick: Yeah, we advertise within community related websites. So something that’s going to be tied in around beard care or the bearded lifestyle, so it’s not a huge opportunity for us when we talk about you know growing to you know like what every entrepreneur wants to do grow to a hundred million dollar company. Like these websites are great for getting us off the ground and in connecting and being in tandem with the community, but they can only generate so much traffic. Like even if we got all their traffic, it probably wouldn’t be enough for us so– but it’s– they’re a great community. So you just kind of want to help support them.

Steve: You know again from the perspective of someone just starting out, if you had the opportunity to just focus on a single traffic source, what would it be, what would you recommend?

Erick: I would recommend YouTube.

Steve: Okay.

Erick: I think if you only had– well I mean for what we are selling and what we are doing?

Steve: Yeah, from your perspective.

Erick: Yeah, from my perspective it would be YouTube. I would put all my eggs in that basket.

Steve: Interesting.

Erick: And probably like my second one would be your own proprietary content source. So we are generating urbanbeardsman.com which is our own content and just curate it all on one page. Again you have less long-term risk with that, but more upfront cost and burdens to get that launch and get the traffic there.

Steve: I’m just curious, have you tried any YouTube advertising since you’re so heavily invested?

Erick: We tried a couple of things here and there, but it wasn’t anything. It’s a very time consuming thought process because what you have to do is create a video advertisement and then you know what is that advertisement? How is it going to work? Who are you following and what are you doing? There’s a lot of things that go into it.

Steve: I can imagine, I can imagine.

Erick: Yeah, you almost need an ad agency I’m sure. I’m sure there are some smart people out there who don’t need an ad agency, but I don’t know if I’m one of those smart people.

Steve: Whatever Erick. Hey so I want to be respectful of your time, we have already been talking for 45 minutes. You know that I was going to ask you this, but for me it takes me about seven days to grow a little bit of stubble on my face. So which one of your products would you recommend to help me grow a beard, and how long would it take?

Erick: Yeah, you’re asking me a tough question here.

Steve: I know.

Erick: You’ve got the Asian genetics. You’re up our wall a little bit. You know none of our products are snake oil. So we don’t do any miracle grows. What we do is just kind of products that will help take care of your beard once it grows.

Steve: So I just set Erick up with that one because at the conference I repeatedly threatened Erick to start the Asian beard brand line. So, just thought I would throw that out there. But…

Erick: You can do that, it might be a little bit tougher market, but we do have some Asian customers as well. So they are out there, maybe a little more rare, but for all Asian listeners out there, give it a shot. You don’t know what you have until you try.

Steve: So Erick for those people who might have questions for you, where can they find you online?

Erick: Reach out to me on my Twitter account. It’s @bandholz. I’m usually pretty good about tweeting back. And if you can’t find me on Twitter, just Google my name Erick Bandholz, I’m the only one out there. So that’s also preventing me from doing bad things because I can’t shift my blame to some other person.

Steve: All right Erick, cool, well thanks for coming on the show I learnt a lot, and I think it’s amazing what you have done with your brand. It’s really inspiring.

Erick: Pleasure is all mine. I’m happy to be part of it and hopefully some of the listeners will be able to find value from our chat.

Steve: Awesome, take care man.

Erick: Thanks Steve.

Steve: Here’s what I find amazing about Erick. He’s established a very powerful brand with beardbrand.com by primarily leveraging word of mouth and social media, and he did all this in little over a year. And in terms of ad spent, Erick invests his money primarily for branding purposes as opposed to grading his campaigns directly on direct response. And his results have simply been amazing. Now I don’t know if any of you guys watch Shark Tank, but Erick was also recently on the show and I plan on having him back to discuss his Shark Tank experiences.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode46 and if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information to find the show very easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

045: Corbett Barr On How To Create A Profitable Subscription Based Membership Site

Corbett Barr

I’ve known Corbett Barr for quite a while now and I’m continually impressed by the quality of content that he puts out. What’s interesting about Corbett is that he started out living the silicon valley startup scene by launching a VC funded company only to later realize that he wanted to leverage entrepreneurship to improve his lifestyle.

Today he runs Fizzle.co which is an incredibly awesome online business school program that you should all check out. And the nature of his business allows him to spend half of the year relaxing and working remotely in Mexico.

In this interview, Corbett reveals the process of how he created a successful membership site and how he maintains an engaged customer base.

What You’ll Learn

  • How to get initial traffic for your site through partnerships
  • What happened to Corbett in Mexico that caused him to quit his job
  • Corbett’s twitter strategy
  • How Corbett monetized his various blogs
  • How to have a successful launch of your info product
  • How to reduce churn for your subscription based product
  • How to create a engaging community.
  • How to constantly attract new customers for your course

Other Resources And Books

Transcript

Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information. Now onto the show.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, today I`m really happy to have Corbett Barr on the show. Now I`ve actually known Corbett for quite some time now, but we actually didn’t meet face to face until recently in San Francisco. Now with two kids and a full time job, it’s actually hard for me to make it up to SF, but I`m really glad that I did so that we could actually finally meet up. Now if you don’t know who Corbett Barr is, he is the incredibly sexy mastermind behind Fizzle.co, which is a subscription based online business school that covers a wide garment of online business models. Now prior to Fizzle, Corbett ran various blogs that were all extremely popular.

I think he started blogging at corbettbarr.com and then he started an incredibly popular site called thinktraffic.net, and then finally merged all those domains together and amassed all the material under Fizzle.co which is now his flagship. Now Corbett is an incredible entrepreneur and what I like about him, is that he decided to quit the whole Silicon Valley startup scene, to start a nice lifestyle business and today he travels back and forth to Mexico, and lives his life as a lifestyle entrepreneur, so without further ado welcome to the show Corbett.

Corbett: Thanks that was a great intro.

Steve: So give us a quick back ground story, I`m actually really curious myself, because I haven’t heard it. You used to work in Silicon Valley, you had your own start up at some point, and you decided to just quit that whole thing, so let’s talk about that.

Corbett: Yeah, it wasn’t so much a decision as I was kind of left with not a whole lot of options in 2008, you remember the financial world collapsed.

Steve: Yes.

Corbett: And I had raised I guess around close to three million dollars for my startup over a period of two and a half, three years, something like that. We started working on it in late 2005 and in 2008 you know we had been basically betting on trying to grow really big, and not really worrying about revenue until some later date, which is sort of a typical model here in Silicon Valley, and I think that might have turned out okay, except that in 2008 when the financial world collapsed. The venture capitalists and everybody that you would try to raise money from basically they were scrambling to figure out how to cut their losses. They weren’t sure about what was going to happen, and so they had to make a lot of really hard decisions about who to fund and who not to fund.

And basically we were just caught with our pants down in a bad position and you know, a number of other things were happening at the same time. I had a cofounder, and we were sort of arguing continuously for about a year or so about which direction to take the company. It was a little bit stressful, and you know despite having my own company, I guess I never really considered what I wanted entrepreneurship to be.

I guess I just jumped in thinking that hey! Being an entrepreneur is a great way to go, right. It’s a short path to riches and you are going to be your own boss and everything is going to turn out great, but in reality you know I ended up feeling– I guess like I had less control over my life than I did when I was a fortune 500 consultant. Because I had a cofounder, a board of directors, board of advisers, 10 employees of you know– physical office that I had to maintain and just a lot of weight on my shoulders, and so it’s kind of made the decision easier for me I guess. Aside from having to swallow my pride, it just seemed like we were kind of at the end of the road for that kind of startup, and so my wife and I took a sabbatical to Mexico.

Steve: And so just curios what was your decision making process for accepting funding for your start up?

Corbett: Well it was really the only decision, the only route that we decided to go at the time. This was in you know late 2005 as I said and I partnered up with someone I had worked with before as a consultant. He basically had built a company, sold it to the consulting firm that I worked for and he became a partner in that firm, and that’s how we met. And then five years later we hooked up to work on this start up and his idea was basically that we would shop around our idea, which was based around prioritization of email essentially.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And we would shop that idea around and raise venture capital for it and that proved to be a little more difficult than I think he initially thought, and I had no clue going into it because I had never pitched VCs before.

Steve: Right.

Corbett: But we ended up spending the next 11 months or so, first pitching VCs without any software, and then building a prototype, and then going out to pitch VCs again. And I would say we probably talked to 30 or so before we finally got funding from Draper Fisher Jurvetson based out of Palo Alto.

Steve: Okay, and so you ran out of money with your company, and then you head off to Mexico. So what happened in Mexico that kind of spurred this change?

Corbett: Yeah so, Mexico is this massive transformational experience for me. Basically up until that trip I guess I thought that either you climb the corporate ladder as fast as you could and try to retire you know somewhat early one day maybe in your 50s when you still had some good years ahead of you. Or you became an entrepreneur and swung for the fences and hoped that you hit a home run so that you would make a bunch of money and then be able to go on and do whatever you wanted to do with your life

Steve: Right.

Corbett: But when we went to Mexico, we kept meeting people who weren’t rich of retired, but somehow had figured out ways to live in a foreign country for many months every year. Some people lived there permanently, some people took their jobs with them, some people put their careers on hold. There is just this whole category of people that we were meeting in almost every town in Mexico who were just kind of putting their lives first, and figuring out ways to make their careers work around their lives instead of the other way around. And this totally blew my mental model of the way that you had to go about your career, and started to make me wonder if I could do that sort of thing.

And so I started a blog in 2009 on this trip about two and a half months into the trip, basically to chronicle the trip, to tell stories of these interesting people that we are meeting. To see if other people might be as flawed as I was to hear about these stories and then also to start asking myself questions in public about the nature of career and life and the balance between the two and what was possible. Basically because I was initially thinking that I would go down there and come up with another startup idea, raise venture capital, but this time pay more attention to how I built the company, so that I didn’t feel so trapped under all the different burdens. And instead I decided after I started that blog that this new lifestyle approach was probably worth giving a shot.

Steve: So which blog was this? Was this corbettbarr.com?

Corbett: It turned into corbettbarr.com, but it actually started out called Free Pursuits, and the idea was basically…

Steve: I remember that…

Corbett: Yeah, the idea was basically how do you live a really great life now before you are rich or retired, and how do you make your career work with your life.

Steve: Okay and then just– the chronology. So Free Pursuits– I remember that blog from long time ago and then it tuned into Corbettbarr and then you started think traffic, right?

Corbett: Exactly, yeah so basically about 11 months in or so, maybe about 9 months in actually, I realized that blogging was an incredible platform. I had about half a million visitors stop by my site in the first year. So…

Steve: Wow, okay.

Corbett: So I realized the power of reaching out and publishing content and building an audience around it, but I had been talking about how to build a lifestyle business, or just asking myself these questions. And then I started wondering like how am I going to turn this into a business because there was sort of a chicken and the egg problem. I was talking about life style business but I myself hadn’t built one yet, and so I started to just ask myself questions about well what skills do I have? What do I have experience with?

And you know I`d spent three years on a startup. We had built it to nearly a million registered users, and then I had built this blog to half a million people in the first year and I realized as I looked around that other people who were starting blogs and just trying to succeed in online business in general, that a lot of them had trouble building an audience. And this seemed to be my sweet spot of expertise. So I started think traffic basically to help people understand what it takes to build a highly trafficked website.

Steve: Yes you know, one thing I admire about you Corbett is that you are really awesome at building a large and loyal audience of followers, and we are going to talk about Fizzle a little bit later but by the time you had started Fizzle, you already had a large audience, right. And so what I was hoping that you could do is just kind of take us back to the old days. Maybe we can talk about Free Pursuits and how you generated half a million visitors in a year. But how did you get that traffic early on, and how did you kind of build up your name in the very beginning?

Corbett: So you know it`s– it was all a process of trial and error basically because I didn’t have any experience writing or blogging. And I remember those first like you know 10 or 12 posts or so. If you look back, some of them are still published in the archives at Fizzle or you know you can you the way back machine and look back any domain and see what people are up to way back. And I really didn’t have a clue and so it was a matter of starting out from scratch, publishing posts, asking big questions and then seeing if anyone will resonated with those questions.

And to jump start the audience you know, I just published on LinkedIn because I had a profile there with maybe you know 500 people or so. I would just post on my status like that I wrote a new blog post. I emailed everyone that I thought might be interested, which was probably 50 or so like former colleagues basically, that I thought might be interested, and really just tried to focus initially on sparking conversations to figure out what people are interested in. I was principally interested in seeing if people would comment on my stuff, because I figured that was a good sign that meant there was you know some interest there.

Steve: Mm-huh.

Corbett: And then a couple of months into it, you know I was asking these deep questions about career and life and I started to do a lot of research about what else was out there. And I stumbled into this whole genre basically in 2009 that involved lifestyle design, which was what Tim Ferriss, was talking about in the 4-Hour Workweek. And I wasn’t aware of that book until I started blogging, but somebody wrote me in a comment and said hey you should check out this book.

And so I checked it out I learnt about that. Then I learned about other concepts like location independence, meaning that you can live anywhere in the world and build a work from anywhere in the world. Digital nomading, you know meaning travelling around and working at the same time.

And there was just sort of this confluence of interest in these things because, a lot of people were– their foundations were shaken as well because they were laid off or friends that they knew well were laid off, where they thought maybe they had a stable career and all of a sudden because of the financial collapse things were really called into question. So a lot of people were interested in these things, and also just because of what was possible now because of the internet.

So I found myself, you know interested in those conversations and I just kept trying to push my little blog into that conversation going on. And the thing that really tipped the scales for me they were two things. One was I decided to run a survey, because we were asking these big questions about what do location independent people do for a living? How are some people able to live anywhere in the world and work from anywhere in the world?

And I decided to run a survey to find out answers to these questions, but my audience wasn’t big enough really to make a dent in that survey. So I reached out to the biggest blogger I knew at the time around these concepts. Not Tim Ferriss, but the biggest one was that accessible and that was a blog called Location Independent at the time run by Leo Woodward.

And I reached out to her and I said Leo, and I would be happy to handle all of the details, and I would like to get a lot of different blogs involved. I would like to reach out to the community of bloggers in general that are talking about location independence and digital nomading and all this stuff. But I would love you to cosponsor this survey, because your site has more credibility than mine and I will put your logo right up there, and you’ll be cosponsored and I will send you everything for review basically.

So I partnered with her, she said sure it sounds great because I was planning to do all the work. And basically the idea was, we run the survey and that gives us a bunch of really rich information that we can then blog about to our own audiences, and she and I got first pick of all the info and then we would give it to all the other bloggers that participated later.

So basically I was able to get about 30 some blogs to participate in the survey, and what they did was they sent all of their readers over to my sight to take the survey, and so then they became aware of Free Pursuits and Location Independence and others. So basically it was a just a great way to sort of jump start awareness of my site.

So that was really, you know how I got my start and started to figure out that blogging really is– the goal of blogging is two things. One is to figure out what people are interested in, but then the second goal is to figure out where people are already hanging out online, and how you can get in front of them there. And relationships are often the key to making that work.

Steve: So did you just cold email Leo or?

Corbett: I think I commented on her blog a number of times, and I may have at that point written a guest post for her as well just unsolicited to send her a post to write.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: To run on her site because that was pretty common at the time.

Steve: So if we fast forward to 2014, how would your strategy have changed in building such a blog?

Corbett: Well you know that strategy in particular was based on running a survey to find out answers in a space that there wasn’t a whole lot known at the time you know this was learning new things.

Steve: Right.

Corbett: So I don’t know if that would work exactly, but the idea of reaching out to other bloggers first of all, I think a lot of people who are starting blogs or podcasts or whatever try to do it in isolation and they are scared to reach out to other people. But the fact is you know, whoever you think is fairly big on your radar, probably isn’t really that big and most people are really kind and will actually respond to you pretty easily. In fact you will find if you write even some of the bigger names like Seth Godin or Gary Vaynerchuk, Chris Guillebeau or anybody like that, they will probably respond to you today. I don’t think they’ll have time to partner with you on something, but it just goes to show you that people are listening and they will respond.

But if you reach out to people who are like B list players in your space, chances are they will be receptive to different ideas not only guest blogging, but perhaps partnering on something bigger like the survey that I talked about or whatever it is that you can come up with. The third element– so we talked about finding out what people are interested in and then you know finding out where people are hanging out and how to get in front of them and where relationships are important for that. But the third element that I was about to talk about…

Steve: Was the most important one.

Corbett: Oh men! There it goes. I was on a roll and there it goes. It must be this glass of wine that I’m sipping on over here.

Steve: Excellent, have a couple of more swigs and I will ask you the real questions.

Corbett: It will come back to me exactly. So, creativity and coming up with your own ideas. The issue with a podcast like this, or an interview like this is– I mentioned something like a survey or I had a course called start a blog that matters, and I gave some specific instructions about doing a round up post, where you would go out and interview a bunch of people and publish that on your blog. The trouble with giving specific advice like that is that then people use that advice and it becomes ineffective over time. Because enough use it and just the bloggers fear in general, especially the space that were sort of in you know in general becomes numb to these different tactics and techniques, and so one of the important things to realize is that you have to use your own creativity to come up with new ideas.

So I mentioned something about doing a survey, well think about in your own case in your own space, how you could do something similar that has the same goals of uniting your little corner of the blogger sphere towards one specific goal, where you take ownership of the project and therefore reap more the benefits in everybody else involved, but they also get benefits and they don’t have to do any work because you are doing all the work.

So take a blueprint like that and remove the specificity of having to do a survey or whatever it is, and just try to come up with something on your own that you know that satisfies some of those requirements. Same thing with doing a round up post, the goal there is like to publish something that your audience will be interested in because there are a lot of different experts opinions, and then you reach out to experts and gather those opinions without having to do the actual writing yourself. That format is– has been very useful, but again it’s been sort of beaten to death, enough people have done that.

Steve: Sure. Yes.

Corbett: So creativity and just coming up with your own ideas, and that’s important in general in business.

Steve: So you mentioned some of the traffic you got was through the survey and direct traffic. Were there any particular traffic sources that you kind of focused early on with that blog?

Corbett: Yeah, so at the time Twitter was sort of gaining steam and I was definitely spending a lot of time there. I didn’t focus on Facebook for some reason; I’ve always not been interested in Facebook. But the big one at the time was StumbleUpon. That site…

Steve: Yes, that’s how we met I think, right?

Corbett: Yeah, I think you are right. I think you are right. StumbleUpon just at the time if you knew a couple of people who were popular on there, and you could sort of seed a blog post with them to say, hey I just published this would you mind stumbling it or whatever it was you click the little thumbs up thing on there. If your content was interesting and had a lot of photos and some sort of you know buzz feed like headline, then you might be able to get a jump start on it. And I had a couple of posts really take off and drive tens of thousands of visitors to my site sometimes overnight which was interesting.

But then you found out quickly that StumbleUpon visitors were pretty flaky. So it was interesting from raw numbers stand point, but as far as like conversions into regular readers and email subscribers and things like that, you really weren’t able to net a whole lot of those people. So you know 95% of them might just click a little stumble button and move on from your site to the next site.

Steve: So let’s talk a little bit about Twitter for example. So what do you kind of do in Twitter in order to kind of gain a following that way. What’s your Twitter strategy?

Corbett: Well, for Twitter I use it for really more for engagement than driving direct you know clicks through to my website.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: So the greatest value I’ve gotten from Twitter has been the relationships that I formed with other people who are in the blogger sphere or the podcast world or whatever it is you known just meeting people online. A lot of those relationships started via Twitter, and the other thing is that a lot of times you are able to engage directly one on one with readers or with potential customers who ask you know, maybe you ask the question on Twitter and they respond and then you are able to respond back.

And that goes a long way towards becoming or towards building people who become fans for life. You know because there’s this massive universe of people trying to be active online through blogs and podcasts and what not. And sometimes you know when you are just starting out, it really feels like you are anonymous and like nobody cares, and when you respond to someone on Twitter who seems to be like an A lister for some reason, and they respond back that really makes an impression on people. And so I try to spend much more time just relating to people on Twitter and responding to them, than I do trying to share my own stuff and generate clicks.

Steve: Okay and then is that the same– do you hold the same principle for the emails that you receive as well?

Corbett: I do although things have changed for me a little bit because I don’t run a personal blog anymore, and so people don’t reach out directly as much as they used to.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And that’s something to consider. You know when I ran a personal blog, when I ran Free Pursuits and then when I ran corbettbarr.com, I got a lot of email. Sometimes you know close to 100 unsolicited you know stranger emails a day, and some of those would basically spill their entire life story.

Steve: Yes.

Corbett: And you would get paragraph after paragraph, right. It would end up taking you minutes to read this unsolicited email from a stranger because they feel like they know you and that’s a great thing. But with podcasting, you don’t get that as much because people are listening, but there is no clear channel for them to reach out to you. And with just the way that I built Fizzle I get less of that. And I’m not saying it’s necessarily a bad thing, in the beginning it’s a great thing to get those emails, because you learn so much about people and you learn so much about how your work is affecting them.

But eventually you know it’s nice to have a trickle of those, but not a flood of them because the flood is hard to keep up with, and then you have to kind of make a decision. I’m I going to go ahead and seem like a dick to these people because I don’t respond to their emails, or I’m I going to spend hours after hours every day responding to every single email. And I still respond to everything I get, I’ve just made it so that I try to receive less overall because I am not as public.

Steve: I guess that’s what’s nice about Twitter right, it’s limited to 140 characters you are not to get life stories on Twitter.

Corbett: Totally, exactly.

Steve: Okay and so you got the traffic and how did you kind of monetize some of your earlier sites?

Corbett: So it took me a while to figure out and I kind of kicked myself for waiting so long because I didn’t release my first online course, until about 15 months into blogging. And prior to that basically all I did was consulting. And the consulting was good and I figured out ways to raise my rates and after reading the book– have you ever heard of Book Your Self Solid? It’s…

Steve: I have heard of that book, I haven’t read it yet.

Corbett: It’s by Michael Port. And about I don’t know, you know six to nine into blogging I opened some different services that I offered coaching and what not. And then when I launched Think Traffic I made a really big push to do some strategic consulting to help people figure out how to build a bigger audience for their site. And at first I got a little trickle of interest and it was pretty good, but then I read Book Your Self Solid and applied that stuff, and within like a week of applying his techniques, I mean honestly I was booked solid for months in the future and that went really well.

But I figured that I didn’t really want to be a service provider forever, and I didn’t want to just trade my time for money as they say. And so I started looking into other ways and I found that a lot of people sold eBooks or online courses as a way to produce something once and sell it many times over and scale your business up. And so I had some experience with affiliate marketing. I had sold a number of things from my site and had earned revenue from that. And just in talking to a lot of bloggers, they were really curious about how you do that, and so I decided to start a course or to build a course called Affiliate Marketing for Beginners.

And I hand and hot about it and started it and then delayed and delayed and delayed, and I think it took me about six months to finally get that course out. And once I finally did, I used you know whatever launch strategies I had heard about in order to launch a course successfully, and I ended up doing $11,000 in sales in the first 72 hours or so.

Steve: Nice.

Corbett: And it was– it felt great. It showed me that this online course thing might be possible, and it also made me realize that I probably shouldn’t have delayed for six months in creating that course.

Steve: So what were some of the tactics that you did for that launch, so I was just curious?

Corbett: Well the first one was that I spent a lot of time telling people on my site about the course that it was going to be coming out, instead of just one day saying hey I created this thing and here it is. I had followed a number of other people specifically Chris Guillebeau at the Art of Non-Conformity, and I’d watched his launch techniques and sort of head picked them apart. I noticed that people who seem to be successful spend a lot of time talking about the product sort of behind the scenes, about this is what I am working on, here’s what you can expect, here’s when it’s going to come out, to sort of try to build anticipation, but also to answer any objections that people might have before the product comes out so that on launch day they are ready to buy.

The other thing was I– to my email list spent even more time telling people about it, and then I offered a special discount ahead of time to say you know during the first 72 hours I’m going to launch this thing. I’m going to open the doors and the price will be half or whatever I think. Eventually I sold it for $79 and $99 depending on the package. But initially I said I’m going to offer it for $39 and $49 depending on the package. It’s going to be available for 72 hours, and I’m doing this because it’s my first course and I really want to get people’s feedback on it before opening it to a broader audience. So I offered that discount, opened the doors, sold 11k worth, closed the doors, got feedback from people, tweaked the product, and then reopened it about six weeks later.

Steve: Wow, so 11k this was just from your email subscribers?

Corbett: Yeah, exactly.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And you know I had been blogging for 15 months, so it’s been a lot of time focusing on that email list, but I am guessing at the time it probably wasn’t much more than maybe 1500 people or 2000 people.

Steve: Okay, and so that was kind of your beta launch so to speak. That’s a pretty big beta launch.

Corbett: Yeah, exactly yeah.

Steve: Okay and then you just got feedback. Did you tweak it before releasing it to the public or?

Corbett: A little bit but not much really. You know I think I learned that people liked what I had done. I think that there were a couple of modules that I hadn’t finished, so that was another reason for offering the discount you know, is that there were some things that post launch I still needed to finish. And so I finished that up before doing the full on you know whatever, public launch.

Steve: Okay and then you know I noticed later on you kind of merged Think Traffic and Corbett Barr, and all of your courses into Fizzle and I was just curious what the motivation for doing that was. So first of all give us an intro of what Fizzle is and then why you chose to do what you did.

Corbett: Yeah so you know after the course that I mentioned, I ended up starting up a bunch of other courses. I think I had four other things available for sale online at one point. And I also ended up starting a whole lot of different blogs, partly because I really loved writing and partly because I was exploring different ideas through blogging. So at one point I had three different blogs and four different online products, and you know I mentioned that a lot of people were writing me for personal advice and things.

And so my day was just really consumed by just maintaining all that I had, and just sort of thinking into the future. I’m not a young guy, I want to make sure that I focus on scaling my business to a point that you know will provide for my retirement and everything. And so I just started to think more strategically about where I was spending my time. And I decided that instead of having four different courses out there, that it would make more sense to bring everything under one roof because I could combine the value that I was providing throughout all this different courses, as well as the community aspects that I was duplicating for every course.

Every time I launched a course there would be a community aspect to it meaning forums or comments or whatever, some way for people to interact with me and with other students throughout the course. And that was difficult to duplicate in each case, and I also found that every time we launched a course the community would be something we’d focus on and build up. But then as that first group or that first wave sort of diminished, the conversations and the community would start to diminish as well.

So I wanted to house everything under one place, and I wanted to focus on the community aspects of it. And so we decided basically to merge all of those different ideas under one roof. And so Fizzle is a community and training library for entrepreneurs. And it’s not unlike the product that you have Steve, I think you know we’ve just decided to maintain this on a monthly basis. We put out new courses, new interviews, new perks for people and really just to spend as much time as we can in there working with the community, helping people make progress every day.

Steve: So a quick question about your other courses that you released, were they like kind of a launch and then you closed it off after that and you just kind of did a bunch of launches periodically through the year, or was it always open.

Corbett: I did both.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And I had experience with both and there were pros and cons. The launch model tends to I think maximize revenue. It seems that way anyway from my experience and from you know other entrepreneurs that I know, because you open this thing up, and there’s just a lot of little tricks that you can build into it, and a lot of pressure that you can place on people who stop by your site in order to make a decision because you are going to close the door in three days.

So it seems like that might be a good way to maximize revenue. But for me personally what I found was that gearing up for that launch took a lot of time and effort, and it just felt really stressful and a little bit in-genuine to open this thing up. This resource that really– you know it’s not like you are creating the resource new every time, it’s the kind of thing you know it’s videos and workbooks and things like that if it’s an online course.

And so it just kind of felt like I did the launch model because I heard a lot of people say that that was the right way to go, and in the end I decided to make Fizzle available on an ongoing basis. In fact you can get it and try it for a dollar and see if it’s right for you for 30 days basically. I decided to do a lower priced product and to make it available all the time because it just felt right to me, and it was the lowest stress option, it was the easiest way for us to go. And now you know Fizzle does far more in revenue than any of those other products that I had created in the past partly because my audience is bigger, and because we focused on it but also because you know it’s interesting the launch model despite all those different tricks you can build into it.

I think if you have something that is available on an ongoing basis for a very long time, you really get to optimize the entire flow from people learning about you on your blog, or your podcast to finding out about your product, to checking out your product to signing up for it, to becoming a member. Just that entire flow you can optimize so that people get a really great experience out of it. And with a launch model when something is available for 72 hours, you are so busy with the launch that you really don’t have time to sit back and do a bunch of split testing, and a bunch of user research to find out what’s working and what’s not with each launch.

Steve: Okay, interesting. And you took on two partners in this venture as well and what was the motivation for that.

Corbett: So for the longest time after I started blogging, I thought that I would be a lone wolf. You see people out there who are fairly well known. You know I mentioned before like Seth Golding and Chris Guillebeau or Danielle Laporte or whoever Marie Forleo. You see these people who are the brand themselves and they seem like, they do everything on their own, or Leo of about to behinds and habits who is a friend of mine. You see these people and it seems like they do everything on their own and I think that was the model I was going for. You know why not build a business where I don’t have to worry about any employees, and I don’t have to answer to anybody and I just do all the work myself. And I think that is possible, in fact you pretty much do that sort of thing right Steve, do you have…

Steve: Sure yes, that’s correct.

Corbett: Yeah exactly, and so I thought that would be a good way to go and I did it for at least the first couple of years. But then I realized you know I had this whole lifestyle business thing going on, and I had a lot of freedom in terms of where I could be, but I didn’t end up with a lot of freedom in terms when I could take time off. I wanted to just take a vacation for a couple of weeks, and I realized what a massive backlog I would end up with, and I also just realized that if I was in vacation and I really wanted to disconnect I would be so worried that you know the site would be down or the product would be down or whatever.

So I hired Caleb Wojcik to join me, first as an intern and then he ended up becoming a co-founder of Fizzle, basically to let me take time off. And then I kind of reconnected with how fun it is to work with a team especially a team that really shares your vision and you know your motivations. And so I you know I started out with Caleb. That went really well and then I brought on Chase Reeves because he was great with just creative endeavors and designing things like that that I didn’t necessarily have, and that worked out really well and now we’ve brought on another guy Barry Brooks.

And we are just having a blast as a team, and I have really built it in a way where we all feel like partners sort of working towards a common goal as opposed to me having to keep track of what everybody is working on, and you know being more of a managerial kind of role. I’m trying to build it as a company of equals.

Steve: So all these people are in different parts of the world, is that correct.

Corbett: Yeah that’s right, so Caleb is in San Diego, I’m in San-Francisco, Chase is in Portland Oregon, and Barrett is in Georgia. And then a lot of us travel fairly frequently and me in particular you know I tend to spend summers for a month or two in Europe, and then in Mexico in the winter for about three months.

Steve: Okay and then how does it all work out in terms of the coordination for working on the course and that sort of thing?

Corbett: So we’ve evolved over time, and we like to call it our company operating system. Basically the idea is you know just like when you turn your computer on; it has a bunch of rules for how it boots up and how it gets work done. We have an operating system for our company that spells out how we work together, how we interact, and I think it’s really important when you’re you know distributed like we are. So we have a bunch of different practices you know at the macro level, we operate on three month long themes, where we decide as a company that there is one particular goal that we want to work towards.

Our most recent theme was member success, meaning how do we measure and impact how successful our members actually are? And so we define a bunch of goals based on that, and then we break those up into three week long chunks of work, followed by one week of wrap up, three weeks, one week, three weeks, one week. So basically we just look at our overall year and sort of break it down.

We get together every three month as a team, all at the same time in the same place so that we get that physical you know contact and intimacy and whatever, so that we can do our strategy work then to define what the theme is. And then on a smaller basis, we define our weeks so that every Monday each of us checks in, which means that we review our task list and we send a note to everyone else to explain what we’re going to be working on over the following week. You know any time that we have off anything that we need from other people, and then on Friday we check out to say “this is what I was able to accomplish” “here’s what I’m waiting on” and “here’s what I am going to be pushing off till next week.”

And then the tools that we use are really important as well. So we use Asana for task management and we use Slack for internal company communications, which is– Slack is relatively new, but it’s sort of like hip chat or some others where essentially they are group chart rooms where you can reach people in real time, and you can also send notifications from different apps and other things that we use.

So really that has replaced email for us and email was starting to become a burden because it’s sort of a instead of like a hobbin spoke model, it’s really a kind of point to point thing, where each additional person that you add to your team grows your you know the amount of emails that you’re getting. Literally it seems like and it just wasn’t scalable beyond two or three people. So Slack has replaced email for us, I’d say 99% I’m not exaggerating here, I would say I probably send maybe one email to a team member every couple of weeks, and that’s just because I’m forwarding something that someone sent me, but otherwise all company communication happens through slack now.

Steve: Interesting. So you kind of pitch Fizzle as an online business school, but the term online business kind of encompasses so many different facades. So what does Fizzle kind of focus on and how do you tailor your content for your customer since there’s such a wide slot of stuff to cover?

Corbett: Yeah, and we don’t claim to try to cover things like ecommerce, which you do so well Steve, we don’t try to claim to cover that well. I don’t think you see any mention of that really on our site, because we know that there are other places that people can go to be better served in that way, but what we do know is that being an entrepreneur is a lonely emotionally charged road especially for people that are trying to start one person businesses. I’m not talking about venture capital backed businesses; these are people that are trying to become freelancers, online course producers, maybe writers, things like that, creative types.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And so that’s really what we focus on, and we find that the people who have the most success through our platform probably are building an audience first around a blog or a podcast or maybe videos that sort of thing, and then they’re connecting with that audience to learn what they need and then solving problems by creating eBooks and online courses and things like that.

Steve: Okay, okay that makes sense. So let’s talk a little bit about the nuts and bolts of Fizzle. So how does one go about starting a membership site with recurring billing? Are you guys using any standard platforms to do this?

Corbett: Yeah, we are we are, Fizzle is based on WordPress first of all.

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: And then to process payments we use Stripe, and at the time that we chose Stripe, we knew we wanted Stripe because it’s just– it was at the time– two years ago just you know leaps ahead of any other product that was out there. I had wrestled with Authorized.net and some other ancient garbage before, and we wanted to use Stripe, but in terms of WordPress plug-ins that handled memberships as well as allowed Stripe, there weren’t a whole lot of options. And we ended up with something called paid memberships pro, which is pretty good, but since then there have been just an explosion of different plug-ins on the market place like Member Mouse and…

Steve: Yes.

Corbett: And the classic ones like Wish List and Aweber, they all supports Stripe now as well.

Steve: Okay, and then I imagine the upfront investment was practically nothing, just the cost of the plug-in essentially and then WordPress.

Corbett: Yeah, I think so in our time of course.

Steve: Of course your time yeah. So let’s talk about like some of the intricacies involved in running a subscription based site. So what are some of the things that you do to kind of reduce churn, and ensure that people kind of stay on month after month?

Corbett: That’s a great question and you know first of all we measure churn on a weekly basis. We look at how many people left, and when someone does leave we send a survey asking them about their experience with Fizzle, and we try to you know take that feedback very seriously, and respond to it and categorize it and see what we can learn from it. That’s part of the feedback engine that’s important.

The other thing is a lot of churn happens very early on simply because someone signs up for your service with the intention of using it, but for some reason they get distracted, they move on, life gets in the way whatever. And they kind of forget why they signed up, or why it felt important enough to sign up for it in the first place. And so the member on boarding process becomes very critical.

Basically the idea is you know within the first couple of weeks that’s when you know the problem is intense for people, for us in particular people are trying to build an online business and they feel like they don’t have the knowledge or they don’t have the connections, or just the support and accountability that they are looking for as an entrepreneur. And so they sign up for Fizzle under those premises, and then if life gets in the way, our job is to sort of coax them back into the fold and remind them of all the different things that we offer, and to show them how easy it can be to plug in to the community, to take a course, to make progress in their businesses. So that member on boarding process becomes really critical.

Steve: So you give away you said the first month is only a dollar? Is that right?

Corbett: Exactly, we’re actually testing we’re doing a free trial right now as well, but the idea is to put the burden on us to prove that it’s worth people staying.

Steve: Yeah, so that actually puts even more pressure on this whole on boarding process, right? So can we go into a little more detail on what’s kind of involved when someone signs up for that first month?

Corbett: Absolutely. So we stumbled on a really interesting new category of tool about 18 months ago. We use something called intercom to communicate with our members, and there are a couple of others as well, but the idea here is that intercom basically helps us keep track of all our members. It allows us to feed any data that we can capture from the app to intercom, so we can know for example how long someone has been a member, which courses they’ve taken, how many courses they’ve taken, how often they’ve logged in, how many posts they’ve published within the forums, whether or not they’ve communicated one on one with other members.

All these different things that we’ve identified as being important characteristics of members who end up sticking around for the long term and getting a lot of value out of what we do. We’re able to measure those and monitor those, and then intercom allows us to send communications to our members based on time, based on events, based on actions, based on anything that we want to keep track of basically.

So for example you can say if someone has been a member for three days and they have watched a course, but they have not yet published anything in the forums, then send them a reminder or send them an email that says “hey we noticed you haven’t published anything in the forums. Did you know that 80% of the people who publish in the forums make X progress on their business,” or whatever stats that we can give them, and you can send that via email or with intercom you can also send that via an in app notification. So that next time somebody logs in they see a little pop up that basically communicates the same thing or whatever it is that you want to send within that message.

Steve: Interesting.

Corbett: So intercom also allows you to A-B these messages and to see what you can say that will be most effective in that situation, and then to measure what actions people take after receiving that message. So it’s fairly sophisticated and then it becomes our job to constantly measure and try to improve that overall process for member on boarding. And then later on as well, we have messages that go out if we notice that somebody hasn’t logged in, in seven days or 14 days or whatever it is at the time that we’re testing or running with, and that helps us to get people back into the fold and to again try to demonstrate and to deliver the value that we can.

Steve: So is this intercom, is that a WordPress plug in, or does it just integrate nicely with wordpress?

Corbett: No, it’s not a WordPress plug in it’s a just a JavaScript code that you will add to…

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: All the pages on your website and you can use it for any kind of app.

Steve: Okay, okay and then the JavaScript would only keep track of visitor behavior, but it wouldn’t actually necessarily keep track of posts, right? So I imagine you have to pass it some additional information?

Corbett: Yeah, so you can pass it…

Steve: Okay.

Corbett: Any information that you want to, it knows a few things automatically like how often people log in, what part of the world they’re in, which is just great to see where all of your members are around the world. And then if you want specific data like for example if you have different pricing tiers and you want to know which tier someone is in, then within that JavaScript you just pass that data, you know when someone logs in you pass it to them.

Steve: I see. Interesting I have to go check that out myself.

Corbett: Great.

Steve: So just curious and I think we talked about this before in a private conversation, but you probably have a good idea of how much a member pays you know through the lifetime of a typical customer. So why did you chose to go the subscription based route as opposed to like a lump sum payment upfront?

Corbett: Yeah, we had a good convo about that when you were in San Francisco. Basically the idea is any sort of subscription product, you have a lifetime value of the customer, and so in some ways let’s say your lifetime value is $200 meaning on average people stay for X months and they pay X dollars per month, so you know that equals to $200. Then effectively it’s kind of like you’re paying or you’re selling a $200 product. The thing that we like about a membership based model is that it again puts the owners on us to prove every month that we’re worth sticking around for, and prevents us from playing games you know.

I’ve seen people launch products where let’s say it costs X dollars and maybe they are on a three month payment plan and they have some bonuses they don’t kick in until month four or whatever until you’ve made all the payments. This you know just kind of requires us to earn the customer’s trust and business every month. The other thing that allows us to do is, if you are selling you $200 product you are only going to earn $200 maximum for many customer and customers who don’t necessarily get $200 worth of value are still forced to pay $200.

But with a monthly membership, customers who come in and they try us for a dollar and figure out that we are not right for them, they are only out a dollar. Customers who come in and they decide that this is the greatest place they’ve ever found as far as community goes, and they stick around with us for two years as many customers have since we first opened the doors to our alpha version back in September of 2012. Those people have now paid us $35 a month for the past 24 months, so you can do the math on that, but it’s far more than $200.

Steve: Right.

Corbett: So in a way it’s almost like having different tears of your product that people get to self select into based on the value that they are getting.

Steve: Interesting and when they sign up they get access to everything, right?

Corbett: They get access to everything right away.

Steve: Okay, and one thing that we kind of did not touch on yet was how you kind of get new customers for Fizzle. Are you running any sort of PPC ads or is it just straight podcast, blog sort of engagement.

Corbett: Yeah, it’s all based on you know publishing content, owner blog and owner podcast and people you know listen to our podcast and we have people who sign up and say I’ve been listening to your podcast for the past year and finally something clicked and I decided to sign up. So you never know how long that sale cycle is, but people read our content and listen to our podcast and sign up through that.

And then we do a little bit of affiliate marketing meeting. We have some people who send us customers, and we pay them on a commission based on that. And we also have a pretty strong referral program where members can refer other members. And about 10% of our new members come from that referral program.

Steve: Wow, that’s pretty amazing.

Corbett: Yeah.

Steve: Cool, hey Corbett we’ve already been talking for like 50 minutes. I don’t want to take up too much of your time, but if anyone has any questions for you regarding Fizzle, where can they get a hold of you?

Corbett: They can write me directly Corbett@fizzle.co, they can check fizzle.co and find our podcast or a blog. We have tones and tones of episodes and articles and all kinds of really great stuff for free. They can also try Fizzle as I said for either a dollar, or maybe free, kind of depends on what we are testing at the time, but we always have an offer up at fizzle.co.

Steve: That’s an amazing offer to be able to get access to such a wealth of business information for just a dollar or free, it’s pretty amazing. So I’ll be sure to link all that stuff up in the show notes, and hey Corbett thanks a lot for coming on the show, really appreciate you coming on.

Corbett: Thanks Steve, thanks so much for having me.

Steve: All right man, take care.

Hope you enjoyed that episode. I have known Corbett for quite some time now, and what I like about him is that we both have similar philosophies about entrepreneurship. Now entrepreneurship doesn’t mean that you have to hit the ball out of the park. You can use entrepreneurship as a way to improve your lifestyle. Whether that means hanging out more with your family, travelling or pursuing your true passions.

For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode45 and if you enjoyed listening to this episode please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review, it not only makes me feel proud but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information to find the show more easily, and get awesome business advice from my guests.

It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web. Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month.

For more information about this contest go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I show you how my and I managed to make over a 100K in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!

044: Drew Sanocki On What It Takes To Start A Successful Ecommerce Store Today

Drew Sanocki

Drew Sanocki randomly reached out to me one day and I’m glad that he did. Drew is a seasoned veteran when it comes to ecommerce. He started and sold a successful dropship furniture company DesignPublic.com. And today, he blogs at DrewSanocki.com and offers ecommerce consulting at Mineral.io.

What’s also cool about Drew is that we have a bunch of common friends that went to Stanford together. Enjoy the interview!

What You’ll Learn

  • How to find a profitable niche for your online store
  • How to validate your niche before investing a large amount of money
  • How Drew feels about dropshipping today
  • How to get your first customers in the door
  • What is working and what isn’t working in ecommerce today
  • What are the major pain points for ecommerce companies
  • How to market your online store
  • How to run effective email campaigns

Other Resources And Books

  • Powerhouse Campaigns – Drew’s ecommerce marketing course
  • The Lean Startup – Eric Ries
  • Market Samurai
  • Transcript

    Steve: You are listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where I bring in successful bootstrapped business owners to teach us what strategies are working and what strategies are not. Now this isn’t one of those podcasts where we bring on famous entrepreneurs simply to celebrate their success. Instead I have them take us back to the beginning and delve deeply into the exact strategies they used early on to gain traction for their businesses.

    If you enjoy this podcast please leave me a review on iTunes, and enter my podcast contest where I’m giving away free one on one business consultations every single month. For more information go to www.mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to sign up for my free six day mini course where I’ll show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information, now on to the show.

    Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. We will teach you how to create a business that suits your lifestyle so you can spend more time with your family and focus on doing the things that you love. Here is your host Steve Chou.

    Welcome to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast. Today we are excited to have Drew Sanocki on the show. Now Drew is actually a hard man to track down and we`ve actually rescheduled this interview like four times. So I`m actually really thrilled to actually have him physically here. Now here is a little bit about his background. Drew founded his first company Design Public right after getting his MBA from Stanford, and he grew it into a premier online design retailer and back when no one was doing it, he negotiated drop shipping deals with his vendors so he didn’t have to carry any inventory.

    Now eventually he sold his company in 2011 and then he founded Mineral.io which is an agency focused on delivering outsourced marketing services to ecommerce store owners. Bottom line Drew knows a lot about ecommerce and he helps companies both large and small with their marketing as well. And with that welcome to the show Drew, how are doing today man?

    Drew: I`m doing great. I`m excited to be here.

    Steve: Yeah you know originally I had all these plans of asking about Design Public…

    Drew: It was like in 2012.

    Steve: Yeah that was– it was a while ago so…

    Drew: The interview was originally scheduled.

    Steve: Yeah, right exactly. Well I was going to ask you about Design Public, you know since you spend a lot of your time consulting companies now, kind of all across the board I thought it would be kind of more interesting to get your take on how to kind of get started as a brand new ecommerce entrepreneur today. You know a lot of the stuff that you did back in the day of design public, has probably changed over time, right? So I want to kind of focus on getting started today. So before you start any sort of online store you have got to pick your niche, so let`s talk a little bit about niche selection. Let’s say you were to start all over again, what would be your process for finding a niche to pursue.

    Drew: You know Steve, I think I do everything that everybody else has talked about online, if you search for niche selection and I do all the same things. I use the Google keyword tool, I look at the Google trends, I look at my own passion and I do all those things, but I think the one thing that I would add in there, the one wrinkle would be just testing the niche earlier in the process like before you go about building a store around it. You know, say you have identified what you think is a great niche and all lights are green, and this one looks good like you should get a lot of traffic and very little completion. I still think we are missing a step between that and okay build yourself a fine store with that product.

    Steve: Okay, but in regards to the actual niche selection process, do you have any sort of guidelines that you go by when selecting something– you mentioned you know if something is good, then you go into the validation process, but what are the guidelines for what is good?

    Drew: Okay so that would me more– I look back at Design Public and I really think I timed that really well, and I was lucky it was a nice drop ship retailer where our traffic could be acquired very cheaply through SEO, and just think that those niches are a few and far between today. So today I would look for a couple of other things. Number one would be kind of a relatively high price point. I like 50 preferably higher than 100 dollar price point. And that’s because it gives you some extra margin on the purchase to put some money back into marketing, in particular paid search. You know from working with our paid search clients we very rarely see paid working for a price point below 50 dollars. So higher price points– and what I`m getting at there is number two it`s like a higher life time value. How can you get the life time value of the customer up?

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: And in that case it would be nice to have some recurring revenue too. So is this a product that could be a subscription product, or is there a natural life cycle I think I could sell to customers on where they are buying several products from me? Because again higher life time value that just enables me to enter a market and have a really high– afford a higher cost of customer acquisition. So those are two things, I mean and obviously one would be passionate about the product…

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: I do want to be able to you know to market it via email because email is sort of near and dear to my heart. So that’s kind of what to look for.

    Steve: Okay and then in terms of you mentioned recurring revenue, what kind of products kind of fall in that space when it comes to ecommerce that you can think of?

    Drew: That exists now?

    Steve: Yeah like what are some likely candidates?

    Drew: Without giving away trade secrets.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: I`m working on one right now, but…

    Steve: Oh are you, okay you don’t have to reveal then?

    Drew: I think anything that– automatic replenishment, things like supplements and protein powders and those– I really like those spaces where you can send somebody a product every month. I get my coffee from Craft Coffee over Brooklyn where they send me a different selection of coffees every month, I get my razors from Harry`s which was started by one of the warbe [phonetic] guys and they you know send me razors every couple of months, so..

    Steve: Because they are kind of consumables.

    Drew: Yeah looking around for these consumables. If you can get a consumable, but also one that has a be to be angle I think you are golden, and there you are in the realm of sort of business supply companies.

    Steve: Okay and then when you are looking at competition, what are some things that you are looking for?

    Drew: I typically– when I`m looking at a niche I will do the same thing that you probably would. I`ll crack open a Google key word tool, I look at organic traffic searches for that product. I like to look at affiliate programs to see if there are any robust affiliate programs in the niche, that’s usually an indication that that’s a pretty mature niche. I look at– I use a tool called Market Samurai which gives me a read into what competitors might be paying on the ads.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: For that niche and the higher they are paying I can assume that it’s a– you know be a harder niche to enter, and harder to drive traffic too.

    Steve: So let`s say hypothetically that you are doing your research and on the front page of search you see a bunch of big buck stores, Amazon.com, Target and that sort of thing, is that a deal breaker?

    Drew: No, because I think you know if it were a deal breaker then any number of those retailers that I named earlier probably wouldn’t exist. I think there also has to be something where you can add some value personally, and I really believe in small retailers creating great lifestyle businesses in trying to differentiate that value, so one example is whippingpost.com. Ryan Berg I have worked with before, he is sort of the signature Shopify store and he creates these great leather bags in his apartment in Brooklyn, sorry in New York.

    And he is just you know if you Google leather bags there are a million leather bag companies on the first page of Google, but he has been able to carve out a niche and tell his story through great branding, great use of video. I encourage you go to check– to go and check out his site and watch some of the videos. He’s just a really good job and it`s just him. So I think he kind of shows how you can compete with the big guys just by niching down your audience enough, and in really telling a good story.

    Steve: Okay, so leather bags so that is really common place. I mean that’s like a pretty common good. So let`s go something’s along those lines, let`s say you have a potential niche, we talked about validation a little bit. So what would be your next steps to kind of validate a niche before you actually start investing serious cash in it?

    Drew: Yeah, this is actually– I mean I go right to validation so quickly, I don’t– I think everything up until validation is sort of hypothetical, right? Like we could pump a million niches into Google keyword tool and come up with our top picks, but at the end of the day, I do want to test them. And Eric Ries wrote this book called The Lean Startup, it just– it really resonated with me, and I thought you know well he is usually talking about software businesses, but I think that should be applied to ecommerce and we`ll call it the lean ecommerce start up or lean commerce whatever you want to call it, but the idea is can we get a sense of what the cost of acquisition is? Can we get a sense of how hard it is to drive customers before we go through the work of building out our ecommerce platform and lining up our products and being able to fulfill. So…

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: I think that’s where any new entrepreneur should spend the most time.

    Steve: Okay, so let`s go into a little more detail. So let’s say you want to sell leather bags since you brought that up, how would you go about validating your bag?

    Drew: You know you could read The Lean Startup, but the essence of it is you come up with this– what`s called a minimum viable product, an MVP.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: So, what’s the minimum amount of work you can do to achieve some learning? And in our case the learning is going to be about whether it’s a good niche or not, right?

    Steve: Mm-huh.

    Drew: What we are driving towards is, what is the cost effective way to drive traffic to my site, to drive customers to my site you know, preferably at a price that allows me to make a profit?

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: So, that’s what we are looking for, that’s the learning we are looking for. So the best way I`ve seen is a really incremental way where you just start initially with something as simple as the Adwords campaigns and just maybe you know where you are driving some– you are just creating the Ads, you may be may not even– you might not even have a landing page for the traffic, but you start taking out some Ads for leather bags, men’s leather bags and just see what the cost per click is, maybe you are driving the traffic to a competitor for a while.

    Steve: Interesting, okay.

    Drew: Yeah, so that’s just a very quick way to get a sense of the cost per click, and then you move quickly to okay if I know how much a click is worth, what is a conversion going to be worth to me, and that’s where in the realm of building up landing pages.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: This is getting easier and easier to do. I did it a couple of years ago when I looked at selling a certain kind of desk, and I set up a simple word press installation bottle– a landing page theme of which there are like 1000 now. Had a one page landing page which featured a couple of desks and a little op-tin button which said hey! Sign up here when we launch, like here is a little more information on what we are going to launch.

    Steve: Okay, so sorry go on.

    Drew: No I got a good sense of how hard it was to drive conversions there, now there are services like leadpages and ClickFunnels and Instapage and lander to name a few, that allow you to do that without even quicker without using WordPress.

    Steve: Okay, so let me just summarize what you just said. So if you have a bag that you want to see, before you even create the prototype that you could put down the prominent features of that bag on a landing page and then collect email addresses by driving ads to that landing page. Is that right?

    Drew: Think in terms of kick starter, right. I mean these aren’t really ecommerce companies but those guys are all doing MVPs. So any time you come up with a new product concept, like they make a video, they put some information on it, they throw it up on kick starter and they get a read on demand you know, and it`s not quite the same for an ecommerce retailer, but I would follow their lead and I think that is what you want to do. And that initial test would be followed very quickly by an actual sort of page that you know, looks like store that has like a buy button and even then I wouldn’t recommend allowing that person to check out and give you money.

    But you can do things like put a price on that page, so here is my new desk; it’s going to retail for 100 dollars, click here to buy. They click that button and they will go to another page where it`s like hey we are launching, and thanks for your interest we are launching in the fall, you know sign up and we will let you know something like that. But the important thing is you could count that as a conversion, you know you set your goal in Google analytics that that click was a conversion, which you then if you look back at your adwords and how you’re driving traffic will allow you to get a cost per acquisition. And once you`ve found that and if you can determine that you can drive traffic cost effectively, then it’s like you`ve got the green light.

    Steve: Okay and then– So that’s assuming that you are creating your own product, let`s say you wanted to white label some products, or sell your own products or drop ship– so first of all actually since you did drop shipping a long time ago, do you recommend drop shipping today as your primary revenue source?

    Drew: It`s sort of hard to answer because I think drop shipping is just a techniques you know and it may work in some markets and it may not work in other markets. Where people might get tripped up is when they make that technique or that tactic into a strategy. Like I`m going to be a drop shipper no matter what you know, but I think that is sort of putting the cart before the horse, like it applies to some categories and it doesn’t apply to others.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: But I would say it`s hard to– it`s much harder to do now than it was ten years ago, and although it allows you to get up and running quickly, I don’t see as many retailers sort of you know blowing the doors off with drop shipping.

    Steve: I guess what I’m trying to say is, would you go the landing page route, if you already have products ready to go, would you skip that step and maybe go straight to the shopping cart at that point?

    Drew: I would say you know there’s still the danger like of getting orders that you cannot fulfill.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: If you realize that it’s not an issue you want to be in.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: So I would just be worried of that.

    Steve: Okay, and then so were gathering emails on this landing page, what do we do with these email addresses that we’ve gathered?

    Drew: You know I think if you decide that you’re going to go ahead with that launch, you want to– that’s your initial presale list you know. I think what you’re probably getting towards is building up– the ideal case scenario is something like Fab or Gilt. Fab went from zero to two million subscribers in eight months, right? Before they launched and you look at Gilt and they are above three million subscribers you know and they’ve get 70% of their new members come from email, email to email referrals, right? So those emails have value and I think building up a prelaunch list is a great idea for anybody who’s considering launching a new business whether it’s ecommerce or not.

    Steve: Okay, so let’s jump ahead a little– so you would do all this stuff before you would even look at product sourcing or any of that sort of thing, right. One you’ve felt comfortable about your niche, then you would actually start proceeding further, right?

    Drew: I would yeah.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: It kills me because I think like any entrepreneur you want to get this site up you know you want to start taking orders and work on tweaking the designs, but you know that stuff takes a lot of time and you feel like you’ve got to think in terms of the time value of money. And extra week or two spent validating the idea really-really will save you months down the line.

    Steve: Okay, and assuming the validation all goes well and you launch, how do you get your first customers in the door, what’s your initial launch strategy?

    Drew: You know what, I can talk about what I’ve seen working really well.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: And that is it’s really like a bottom up approach where you become part of the conversation for a while, right? Like you decide you want to sell to get back to our example desks…

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: All that stuff modern design desks. So you don’t just throw up your store, initially you start with the landing pages, and you maybe come up with your brand, and you can just get involved in Twitter and get involved online in the conversation about modern design, right? And maybe you start rolling out some blog posts and just interacting with users and I think out of that you want to build up a little bit of an opt-in asset like a permission marketing asset. People who might be interested in your product that you’ll ultimately launch too, so that you know I think you want to have a little bit of pizzas behind your launch, right? Like you want to hype it up, you want to have a bit of an audience there and make it into an event. So if you’ve gone the route of– the companies that have done well, like Fab is probably one of the better companies that has done this. If you’ve got a million people on your list before you launch, you sort of can’t loose at that point.

    Steve: Sure absolutely. So what do you find– okay let’s talk about desks as an example, where so you find people that would be interested in desks, where would you go to?

    Drew: You know I think it’s easy to market, whenever you choose a market; you want to think in terms of where do people congregate, right? And I think the markets are better when they congregate in the same place. So the questions you should be asking yourself are you know do all these people read the same blogs? Like if I’m going– if I’m going to sell gold do they read survivalism blogs, or if I’m going to sell modern designs are they all hanging out on apartment therapy and designs bunch. And if you can narrow it down to a handful of blogs that are sort of read by the industry, then I think that’s a great sign because it really simplifies your initial outreach in marketing.

    Steve: Okay, and then once you’ve identified these places, what is the next step, do you kind of ingratiate yourself into the community?

    Drew: Yeah, you do and you know I think that, I think it’s like starting a blog actually I think ecommerce people could take a lot of lessons from starting a blog and just the amount of legwork that it takes to do that kind of outreach. I know people want to just set up the store and kind of watch orders come in, but in my experience it works much better if you’re Ryan Barr or running Whipping Post, I mean that guy developed a relationship with all the bloggers in his niche you know, all the fashion bloggers.

    He was just on their radar and he didn’t outsource it, you know he did it on a very unscalable way, like personal emails, figuring out what every blog was about and personalizing the email to that writer. And I think that’s the way you do it in the early days, you do things that don’t scale and you kind of poke around and really push until you find one or two things that potentially could scale, and ultimately you build your business around that.

    Steve: It almost sounds like you’re recommending that you go like the blogging community route before you actually even launch your online store, is that…?

    Drew: You know it’s– I’ve seen both things happen, I think it’s sort of– it’s figuring out what your acquisition channel is going to be.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Right? So you know the landing page route is more of if paid it’s going to be a primary acquisition channel earlier on than you know the landing page route works, like lets drive traffic to a landing page.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: But that might not work. If you’re in a different niche that might call– may be the design niche for example, maybe it is more, I’m going to start with blogging and then ultimately roll out a product. So it’s you know it just– I think it depends on the product and what success you find trying these different acquisition channels.

    Steve: Okay, and so let’s go into a little bit more in-depth in regards to acquisition channels. So you’ve consulted for a lot of companies, what have been some acquisition channels that have worked for some companies and not others, and which one do you actually recommend trying when you first start out?

    Drew: Okay.

    Steve: Is that too loaded of a question?

    Drew: I’ve seen hundred million dollar companies built entirely off of adwords, and I’ve seen other niches where they can’t get a single sale off adwords. So you know the adwords product is much more like a promotional product, promotional product retailing, drive people to a product page, they’re buying products that are more sensory or kind of maybe more bid to see. I see them a little bit more effective with a more complicated and a more complex funnel where you’re driving traffic to a site, a landing page, you get that person to opt-in to your list, and then you build up trust and you build up your brand over time and ultimately sell.

    So you know one thing that is kind of working now for several of the fashion retailers I work with is Facebook ads. Driving people to you know your blog or content page where you opt-in to get educated about the product you know to find for example what are 10 ways that I can use this product to decorate my house? Or what are some inspirational ways that I can wear this scarf? And ultimately that email sequence would end with a call to action. So it’s not direct response you know it’s not taking out an adwords ad and driving someone to the product page.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: If you can get that to work do it, but for more and more niches I think that’s harder to do.

    Steve: That has– yeah your exact strategy is how I eventually got my Facebook ads to convert. I drove them to an info essentially a blog post that taught people you know unique ways to make their wedding special, and in that article I had links to my products and then opt-in forms all over the place, and I’ve kind of market them on the back end. It’s a lot– you really got to track that customer; you don’t get conversions right away which is kind of a problem.

    Drew: It’s a lot of work you know I think, but its work that your competitors may not be doing, right? And if you’ve got the time, do it. I have an article on adwords I think on my blog.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: That talks about this you know this– a technique I call it the beast mode, adwords beast mode, right?

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Which is a technique that I see working for retailer after retailer, and it’s essentially what you describe. It’s spending the time to be more relevant with your funnel, and it’s not just– don’t just mail it in, don’t just throw up the adword ads, or the Facebook ads. You’ve got to think about the personas that are buying from you, what kind of ads they would click on, what kind of content they would find interesting, and how to build a relationship with them over time usually through email. The downside is, all those things take a lot of time, but the upside is the big retailers aren’t doing them.

    Steve: Okay, good point and that’s actually a great segway to my next set of questions for you involving the email marketing sequence specifically for ecommerce. So we got their email address through some opt-in, through some ad that we’ve driven to it, and it’s going to be so sort of info sequence. How do you kind of structure that to prepare yourself for the final sell at the end?

    Drew: You know I take a lead, I’ve always taken a lead from the affiliate marketing community, going back to 03 that’s how I learned marketing online. Not from Stanford, not from business school you know and it’s because that’s like the street you know these guys are out there testing new techniques and anything that is sort of innovative in marketing comes from online marketers, or like information marketers.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: So, what is hot now in information marketing is this concept of a sales funnel, right? So the sales funnel being you know not just the typical ecommerce sales funnel where you– everybody’s heard that you drive 100 people to your site one buy, one of them buys, right.

    Steve: Right.

    Drew: But the sales funnel by which I mean you’re driving people to your site, they are– they see a lead magnet. Something that gets them to give you a little bit of value you give them in exchange for them giving you their email, right?

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: That’s step one, now you have your email, then there’s step two would be this gradual engagement sequence, which is a welcome campaign, three to five days where you’re highlighting various products on your site, building up trust with them at the end of which is a call to action to purchase. Then there’s the offer which in the case of ecommerce is you know product page offer. Something you know typical product page, they purchase and then there’s a whole sequence that happens after the purchase, like there a post purchase sequence. There’s a– an MVP sequence, something where you can identify certain buyers and say like “what’s the next product that they probably will buy?” Like how do I market it to them? Which products– sorry which customers are more valuable than others, and how do I treat them a little bit differently.

    And at the very tail end there is the win back sequence or the win back campaign, where you figure out that some of your best customers are no longer buying from you. How do I pull them back to the site? So a long answer to your question, but I would say you take that funnel approach of how a typical visitor first becomes a subscriber, and then becomes a customer, you automate the whole thing just like you would Steve in your case for selling your…

    Steve: I was about to say everything you said…

    Drew: Information product.

    Steve: Everything you said so far like sounds like my funnel for my info product. I wouldn’t, I haven’t implemented anything close to that for my ecommerce store just yet because I didn’t think it really applied as much, but it sounds like from talking to you that it’s very applicable to ecommerce.

    Drew: It is, yeah I mean you look at– when I started at Design Public in 03, no retailers were collecting email. It was rare to go to an email– to go to an ecommerce retailer and see a pop up or something, but the information marketers were like on their sites, like they knew it and I started collecting email. I had the pop up on our site even though everybody in 03 said pop ups were annoying, and still annoying, but now when you visit nine– probably nine out of ten retail sites when you visit them you are going to see a pop up. So like they get it now, they get that email is valuable. Email an email subscriber is worth something like three times the regular subscriber that you drive to your site verses the regular visitor in just total sales.

    So, I think they understand that getting the email, but most retailers still aren’t really doing anything with that you know they may just dump you into their regular promo sequence, and you’re going to get you know the bed bath beyond 20% off coupon every week. I think how a small retailer can excel is by putting their information marketing hat on, and building that funnel you know treating customers differently based on where they are in the funnel.

    Steve: So, I think I already know the answer to this question, but what’s your take on giving coupons out in this sequence?

    Drew: I think there’s a use for coupons, I wouldn’t say never give them out. I think too many retailers give them out too readily. I go to my inbox and I search for J. Crew or something because I’m on their list, and it’s like bum-bum-bum, I can see in my Google history like a million coupons, so it’s…

    Steve: Yeah, same here.

    Drew: Yeah and the issue there is subsidy cost, right? So subsidy cost is a hidden cost, but it’s a cost you bare nonetheless, and it’s basically you are giving coupons to customers who would’ve bought at full price anyway. So it’s that lost margin that’s called the subsidy cost, and that’s the danger with couponing. So the way you want to use coupons is in a way that reduces the subsidy cost, you give the coupon to the customer who requires that coupon to comeback and buy not to the customer who would’ve bought anyway.

    Steve: How do you figure that out?

    Drew: A great way to do that is if you look at a standard win back email marketing campaign, this is the campaign designed to pull customers back, they’re usually structured to look at the average, what’s it called intra purchase latency, so the average time between a purchase for customers. And when a customer crosses that threshold, say you know my typical pillow buyer buys a pillow every 60 days or a pillow and then 60 days later they’re buying sheets. If it gets to 70 days or 80 days or 90 days, they’ve crossed over that threshold, they’re probably not going to buy again, like that’s when I give them the coupon, so that’s one thing.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Is looking at that latency between purchases.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: The second thing would be increasing the coupon amount with the time it’s been since that customer has purchased. So initially you give them the 10% off coupon, maybe 30 days later they get a 15% off coupon and 180 days later that customer probably ain’t coming back you can give them a 20% coupon, right? So that’s called a promotion ladder, and it and it gives away promotion dollars in proportion to the likelihood that a customer is going to defect. It’s just a supper efficient way to pull people back to your cart.

    Steve: Okay, and then what services do you recommend to implement this sequence.

    Drew: Unfortunately with ecommerce you are in the realm of like pretty sophisticated email marketing systems usually if you want to implement something like this.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: However you can compute these things with a spread sheet with just your transactional table and you can set them up in MailChimp. You know you can set then up in MailChimp or AWeber or any of the other more common email marketing softwares. It’s usually easier to do it in something like a Dot Mailer or Exact Target, because they are built for it, but yeah if you are on a budget, you could do the same thing with Mail Chimp.

    Steve: But you would have to have some sort of trigger based on when they bought and feed that information to your sequence somehow, right?

    Drew: Right, and so there are a couple ways to do that. This might be a good time to mention my class.

    Steve: Yeah you can. Feel free. Peg away.

    Drew: So I’m teaching this in a class called power house campaigns, and I talk about the seven email marketing campaigns that pretty much work for every retailer I’ve ever come across. And one campaign in particular is this win back campaign. So yes there’s the deluxe way of setting it up where you have this automated campaign using something like Exact Target. But if you were to do it with something like Mail Chimp it could be as simple as you know– you might not be able to automate the whole thing, but if you have got their ecommerce 360 tracking set up, login once a month and send the email to a certain segment. So it doesn’t have to be completely automated, but I think you could still get a lot of results.

    Steve: Okay, and so Drew what are this seven email marketing things that all the top retailers are using. You want to give an overview?

    Drew: Yeah, I like lay it all out right now.

    Steve: And then I’ll charge for this interview.

    Drew: Well, I think you know right now we are recording this and it will probably go live at a different time, but it’s what October, right? So first campaign is going to be holiday, and I am talking a lot about how to automate, best email marketing campaigns over the holidays. Like one of the best practices to get your customers to buy, to get your highest value customers to buy more. The second would be you know an early engagement sequence, or a welcome campaign. So you get somebody to sign up for your newsletter, what’s the exact sequence that you send them in order to increase their likelihood of purchase?

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Third, ascension campaigns. These are your ongoing email campaigns that go every month or every other month. But they can be sent in a way that’s pretty highly automated and there are certain best practices around how to do that.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Third, one you have talked about a lot abandon cart campaigns, and ways to optimize the purchase. Fifth would be post purchase campaigns. So how do you treat somebody who has just bought from your store in a way that increases their likelihood that they will buy again? So there’s a certain sequence there, a certain data you look for in your transactional record to set up that campaign. The IP campaigns, that’s another favorite one. I’m a big fan of treating your VIPs better than the rest of your customers. And then the last one would be the win back campaigns.

    Steve: So win back is different from abandonment, right?

    Drew: Yeah the– good question though. The abandonment is somebody leaves an item in the cart and you know they go to let the dog out and forgets to come back and purchase, so you would want to use an abandon-cart campaign to pull that person back. The win back campaign is, somebody has been purchasing from your store for a long time, or for an extended period of time and they are at the end of their customer life cycle, it looks like they are not going to purchase from you again, how do you pull them back?

    So win backs are pretty much the highest return use of your marketing dollars. And it’s because you have already acquired this customer, you’ve figured out that he or she is a high value customer, in other words they have order from you quite a bit. And yet for some reason they are not ordering from you again. So one of the highest underlined things you can do is spend the time and money to bring that customer back.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: And I’m talking like 500% all the way on your dollar.

    Steve: Wow, okay and so you really need to– so you start one of these campaigns I would imagine by funneling out your best customers, and then you put them through this panel that you present in your class.

    Drew: Yeah, first step is identifying who they are if you don’t know based on order history. Second step is profiling that activity, and third step is designing an automated email campaign to bring them back. And it’s just– you know I think with retailers there’s a hole, like you get in this– you have this ego about your site, and you just think that you are always top of mind for your customers, and you know fact of the matter is you are not. They buy from you, they buy from your competitors, like customers have very little long term loyalty to one brand, right.

    And the typical life cycle, you and I probably experienced this side, and I’m sure a lot of your listeners have. You get into a brand like right now I’m really into Bonobos, I like how their pants fit, I love them. You know I’m ordering from them every couple of weeks, I’m ordering something. I’m building up my wardrobe, but you know that activity will stop probably, and it stopped in a shorter period of time than most retailers realize. I mean it stops in like a couple of months, right so that’s typically how a customer engages with a brand. And the trick is like what if you could make that couple months into six months, or what if you could make it into a year. And that’s where win back campaigns come in.

    Steve: So I was just curious, what is your take on frequency of email sending?

    Drew: You know this is something that really is something I would want to test on a case by case basis. I was reading today that the average retailer sends out seven emails a week.

    Steve: Yeah.

    Drew: In October through December. So you know that seems high to me, but…

    Steve: It seems high to me too yeah.

    Drew: In the early days like I have the opposite problems with a lot of my clients, like they come to me. Especially the startup saying, we don’t want to spare more customers, you know we only want to send every month or every other month. And I think those are usually living money on the table because they– there is a disconnect between what they feel like the customer wants and what the customer actually wants. You know when the customer wants to hear from your brand, when they are into Bonobos and they like your pants, like you have got to show them more pants.

    Steve: I agree and so what is your– similar question I have is what is your take on pop ups as they are actually shopping on your store?

    Drew: Oh, I’m a big fan.

    Steve: Big fan, okay.

    Drew: Yeah again you want to do them in a way that– I think the key to a lot of this is latency. And you can look at data that says the average person in my you know leather bags category buys within– you know buys this specific product within say two minutes of being on the page. And so if I’m going to show them a pop up with an offer to buy, like don’t make the coupon on leather bags show up initially when they first go to that page, because there’s still a high likelihood they are going to buy. Make it show up at minute three or minute four you know and then you are sort of engaging based on past behavior of similar customers, and it’s just a supper effective way to do it.

    Steve: Okay, and you know along those same lines of implementation, are there any services that you recommend to do this pop up just as how you mentioned it.

    Drew: Yeah you know Justuno and Padiact are two that I have used. Are you familiar with either of them?

    Steve: I have heard of Padiact before.

    Drew: Justuno is I think like Padiact on steroids. It’s got– it also does offers. Padiact is a little bit more about leads. In the early days I was using Colorue [phonetic] to do this, like nobody built a tool that allowed me to do it, so I kind of bastardized my own. But I think there are services out there now. Padiact, Justuno are two of them.

    Steve: Okay, and in terms of implementing the more complicated sequence, what were the tools that you recommended before?

    Drew: For email marketing sequences?

    Steve: That’s correct, yes.

    Drew: You know I think you can implement them on pretty much anything. MailChimp, AWeber, Drip are three good ones, at sort of the lower end. At the higher end you have got Exact Target, and Clivo one out of Boston, DotMailer is another. So I think more and more the email marketing companies are getting savvy about automation and rolling out functionality that you can use.

    Steve: Okay, and then what is your take on social media and how much time you know typical retailers should focus on that versus email in your experience?

    Drew: I haven’t seen that many retailers build on the back of social media.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: And I’m thinking of let’s see, PetFlow here in New York has done a great job at building up a massive following. The other one that comes to mind is, Diamond Candles. Right that…

    Steve: Yeah I remember that.

    Drew: Yeah, still I think they didn’t– it’s not their primary customer acquisition channel, but they use it to sort of hack growth a little bit by getting their users to do the opening ceremonies through their Facebook. But I don’t– I certainly wouldn’t start there, I never was able to get it to work for us and I’m excluding Facebook advertising from this. I mean more…

    Steve: You are just talking more of a straight fan page and engagement.

    Drew: Yeah.

    Steve: Got it, okay.

    Drew: You know Shopify just rolled out their Shopify stores on for Facebook, I’m not sure how that will change things. What about you, I’m curious what are you using.

    Steve: Well, we have just started running Facebook ads and primarily using just Facebook retargeting to gain the conversions, but like you mentioned before, we drive people coming from Facebook ads to a landing page which is essentially an info site, a blog post. And then from there they can either choose to purchase, or we get them to signup for our newsletter where we have like a sequence of 12 emails that we send them to actually eventually get the purchase. And during this whole period we are retargeting them on Facebook as well, so…

    Drew: That’s a power house campaign right there Steve.

    Steve: It’s a pain in the butt, so let me tell you.

    Drew: You didn’t take the course. Make it easy for you.

    Steve: On the flip side though, the adwords ads just the search versions work much easier, right. I don’t have to update the creative, they just point straight to category pages or product pages and they just convert at a very high level on their own. So…

    Drew: But they’re getting expensive.

    Steve: You know they are not that bad for my niche for some reason, and then Google shopping is actually– converts extremely well for everything, so…

    Drew: Yeah in the realm of paid, you are talking about your wife’s site, now not your information product, right?

    Steve: That’s correct yes. Yeah.

    Drew: Yeah. The realm of paid I think I always tell people like get on Google shopping you know it’s worth a try. It’s usually pretty easy to set up, I mean take– it might take you an afternoon, but the clicks are cheap. Facebook and Google retargeting are probably second as far as lowest hanging fruit go, you know and those aren’t really acquisition strategies per say, they are more retention and conversion, but still worth it. And then now Facebook is rolling up like custom audiences and look alike audiences, do you know what those are?

    Steve: Yeah absolutely, so we only use look alike audiences now because whenever I try to target myself, it ends up not going well.

    Drew: Yeah it’s not yeah, like they know better than you, you know and that is something almost across the board even for the really big guys is working super well. Upload their email file, run ads against that, and then create similar audiences to that.

    Steve: Yeah, and then what’s your take on Google display ads. Have you ever been able to get that to work, because I have not?

    Drew: No so far.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: That’s in the hierarchy of where I would spend my ad dollars, or where I would at least try, I would put that sort of towards the bottom.

    Steve: Okay, what’s attractive about it though is once you find something that works, it seems like you could just up the spans to like infinity and make a lot of money, right?

    Drew: Yeah, you could make an infinite amount of dollars.

    Steve: That’s why it sounds attractive to me right, because there is so much traffic going through there, but…

    Drew: You know you really got to dial it by– this gets back to what we talked about at the very early part of the podcast. When you can find an audience that is congregating on one or two sites, it’s a great way to like get your ads in front of that audience.

    Steve: What’s your take on like banner ads and blogs and that sort of thing, have you tried that?

    Drew: In the early days, I don’t think I have ever gotten it to work. Usually it wasn’t that price effective.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Blogs, there was this disconnect where at least blogs and my niche were selling to big you know big retailers like apartment therapy selling to Target for example. Target thinks the banner ads are supper cheap, so they buy out all the inventory and apartment therapy could charge a rate where target doesn’t really care you know, but for a smaller company like me their rate didn’t make sense.

    Steve: And hey Drew looks like we have already been talking for like 45 minutes, are there any sort of– you have been doing this clearly for a long time, are there any good books on just marketing and SEM that you would recommend? And then you could feel free to plug your course again if you have the URL up.

    Drew: Yeah, it’s powerhousecampaigns.com is the course. As far books, I don’t know about books on SEM, but I’m just, I’m a big fan of blogs you know.

    Steve: Okay.

    Drew: Yours, Youderian’s, that’s like the place I would learn marketing.

    Steve: Okay, and then in terms of if people want to ever get hold of you, or ask you questions or see one of your email sequences in action, where can they find you?

    Drew: I blog at drewsanocki.com that’s S-A-N-O-C-K-I. And I talk a lot about ecommerce marketing there. And I’m at tweeter @drewsanocki.

    Steve: Awesome Drew. Hey I really appreciate your insights on the show, and thanks for coming on.

    Drew: Thanks Steve, thanks for having me; I’m glad we finally got this.

    Steve: Yeah, after years and years of trying to get you on the show.

    Drew: Yeah.

    Steve: All right man, take care.

    Drew: Take care.

    Steve: Hope you enjoyed that episode, one of the biggest requests I get from my podcast listeners is that they want to know what strategies are working today. After all many of my guests got started many years ago and some of the strategies that used to work back then may not be as effective in the present. Now I like Drew because he works with a lot of different companies and he has a unique perspective on what is working and what is not. And hopefully Drew’s perspectives today will help you rethink how you choose to run your business. For more information about this episode, go to mywifequitherjob.com/episode43.

    And if you enjoyed listening to this podcast, please go to iTunes and leave me a review. When you write me a review it not only makes me feel proud, but it helps keep this podcast up in the ranks so other people can use this information, find the show more easily and get awesome business advice from my guests. It’s also the best way to support the show and please tell your friends because the greatest compliment that you can give me is to provide a referral to someone else either in person or to share it on the web.

    Now as an added incentive I’m always giving away free business consults to one lucky winner every single month. For more information go to mywifequitherjob.com/contest. And if you are interested in starting your own online business, be sure to signup for my free six day mini course where I show you how my wife and I managed to make over 100 k in profit in our first year of business. Go to www.mywifequitherjob.com for more information and thanks for listening.

    Thanks for listening to the My Wife Quit Her Job podcast, where we are giving the courage people need to start their own online business. For more information visit Steve’s blog at www.mywifequitherjob.com.

  • Whipping Post
  • Aweber
  • MailChimp
  • Exact Target

I Need Your Help

If you enjoyed listening to this podcast, then please support me with a review on Apple Podcasts. It's easy and takes 1 minute! Just click here to head to Apple Podcasts and leave an honest rating and review of the podcast. Every review helps!

Ready To Get Serious About Starting An Online Business?


If you are really considering starting your own online business, then you have to check out my free mini course on How To Create A Niche Online Store In 5 Easy Steps.

In this 6 day mini course, I reveal the steps that my wife and I took to earn 100 thousand dollars in the span of just a year. Best of all, it's absolutely free!